OfficeServ 7200S User Instructions

OfficeServ 7200S User Instructions
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
T A B L E
O F
C O N T E N T S
USER INSTRUCTIONS SECTION
PART
1
DESCRIPTION
PAGE
ENHANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING
1.1
OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................. 1.1
1.2
LOCKING YOUR KEYSET .................................................................................................... 1.4
1.3
CHANGING YOUR PASSCODE ........................................................................................ 1.5
1.4
CALL FORWARDING ........................................................................................................... 1.6
1.5
SETTING YOUR ANSWER MODE..................................................................................... 1.8
1.6
PROGRAMMING YOUR STATION’S NAME .................................................................. 1.9
1.7
PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED DIAL LOCATIONS ........................................ 1.11
1.8
NAMING YOUR PERSONAL SPEED DIAL LOCATIONS .......................................... 1.12
1.9
ADDING EXTENDERS TO KEYS ..................................................................................... 1.13
1.10 CHECKING STATION STATUS ........................................................................................ 1.14
1.11 CHANGING YOUR TIME AND DATE DISPLAY .......................................................... 1.15
1.12 SETTING STATION ON/OFF OPTIONS ........................................................................ 1.16
1.13 SELECTING A RING TONE ............................................................................................... 1.19
1.14 ALARM REMINDER............................................................................................................ 1.20
1.15 STATION VOLUME ............................................................................................................ 1.21
1.16 SETTING A PROGRAMMED MESSAGE ........................................................................ 1.23
1.17 ALARM REMINDER WITH MESSAGE ........................................................................... 1.24
1.18 CALLER ID DISPLAY .......................................................................................................... 1.25
2
SMT-i5243 USER GUIDE
3
SMT-i5230 USER GUIDE
4
SMT-i5220 USER GUIDE
5
SMT-i5210 USER GUIDE
6
SMT-i3105 USER GUIDE
7
ITP-5112L USER GUIDE
8
ITP-5121D USER GUIDE
9
ITP-5107S USER GUIDE
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
10
DS 5000 SERIES USER GUIDE
11
iDCS KEYSET USER GUIDE
12
DCS KEYSET USER GUIDE
13
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION AND SPECIAL FEATURES GUIDE
14
STANDARD TELEPHONE USER GUIDE
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
PART 1. ENHANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING
1.1 OVERVIEW
•
iDCS KEYSETS
This diagram illustrates the keys on a
iDCS 28 BUTTON and a iDCS 18
BUTTON keyset that have special
functions during programming. When
required, these keys will be referred to by
the names described in the diagram.
1.1
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
This diagram illustrates the keys on a iDCS 8 BUTTON
keyset that have special functions during
programming. When required, these keys will be
referred to by the names described in the diagram.
•
SMT-i SERIES, ITP, and DS 5000 Series Keysets
This diagram illustrates the keys on an ITP 5121-D keyset. The ITP and DS 5000 keysets have
keys that have special functions during programming. When required, these keys will be
referred to by the names described in the diagram.
ABCDE F
1.2
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
• SMT-i Series Keysets
1.3
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
1.2 LOCKING YOUR KEYSET
You can lock your keyset to prevent other people from making or receiving calls while you are
away. You can unlock it when you return.
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 100
Display shows
[201] STN LOCK
PASSCODE:_
2. Enter your passocde
Default is 1234
[201] STN LOCK
UNLOCKED
3. Enter 1 for locking outgoing calls (Internal
calls will still be allowed).
[201] STN LOCK
LOCKED OUTGOING
OR
[201] STN LOCK
LOCKED ALL CALLS
4. Enter 2 for locking all calls (Internal and
external calls will not be allowed).
5. Enter 0 to unlock your phone.
[201] STN LOCK
UNLOCKED
6. Press the transfer key to save and exit
1.4
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
1.3 CHANGING YOUR PASSCODE
Each keyset user can set or change his/her individual passcode. This passcode is used to lock
or unlock keysets, for toll restriction override and to access the DISA feature.
NOTE: Default passcodes cannot be used for toll restriction override or for DISA access.
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 101
Display shows
[201] PASSCODE
OLD CODE:_
2. Enter the existing passcode (default = 1234)
[201] PASSCODE
OLD CODE:****
3. Enter the new passcode
[201] PASSCODE
NEW CODE:_
4. Reenter the new passcode to verify the number
If reentered correctly, display shows
[201] PASSCODE
VERIFY :SUCCESS
5. Press the transfer key to save and exit
1.5
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
1.4 CALL FORWARDING
The OfficeServ 7200-S allows the system administrator to program the call forward
destinations for other station users. This MMC also allows call forward to be set after the
destination has been entered.
The OfficeServ 7030 system allows six types of call forwarding. There is an option, FORWARD
BUSY/NO ANSWER, that allows both busy and no answer to be activated at the same time,
provided that destinations have been entered for both. The destinations for all these forwards
can be either an internal number or an external number.
0 = FORWARD CANCEL
1 = ALL CALL
2 = BUSY
3 = NO ANSWER
4 = BUSY/NO ANSWER
5 = FORWARD DND
6 = FOLLOW ME
0 = FORWARD CANCEL
This option will cancel any call forwarding set in MMC 102. It
will not remove the programmed destination and will not
override any preset forward settings in MMC 316.
1 = ALL CALL
This option, when set, will forward all calls to the
programmed destination. If the programmed destination is a
station then that station can call the forwarded station to put
calls through.
2 = BUSY
This option, when set, will forward calls to the programmed
destination when the forwarded keyset is busy.
3 = NO ANSWER
This option, when set, will forward calls to the
programmed destination if the forwarded station does
not answer a call before the forward no answer timer in
MMC 502 expires.
4 = BUSY/NO ANSWER
This option will activate both the BUSY option and the NO
ANSWER option at the same time.
5 = FWD DND
This option will forward all calls to the programmed
destination whenever the forwarded station goes into DND.
6 = FOLLOW ME
This option will forward all calls from another station to this
one.
1.6
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
ACTION
DISPLAY
1.
Press the transfer key followed by 102
Display shows
[201] FORWARD
0:FORWARD CANCEL
2.
Dial 0 –  to select forward type
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select forward type and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
[201] FORWARD
1:ALL CALL:NONE
3.
Dial destination number (e.g., 201)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select destination and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
[201] FORWARD
1:ALL CALL:205
4.
Dial 1 for YES, 0 for NO
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO and
press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2
[201] FORWARD
CURENTLY SET :YES
5.
Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.7
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
1.5 SETTING YOUR ANSWER MODE
Each keyset can have its answer mode for intercom calls set to one of the following options:
RING MODE—The station will ring in one of eight custom ring patterns. Calls are answered by
pressing the ANS/RLS key or lifting the handset.
AUTO ANSWER MODE—After giving a short attention tone, the station will automatically
answer calls on the speakerphone. When a C.O. line is transferred to a station in Auto Answer,
the screened portion of the call will be Auto Answer, but the keyset will ring when the transfer
is complete if the user has not pressed the ANS/RLS key or lifted the handset.
VOICE ANNOUNCE—The station will not ring. After a short attention tone, callers can make an
announcement. The called party must press the ANS/RLS key or lift the handset to reply.
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 103
Display shows
[201] ANS MODE
RING MODE
2. Dial 0, 1 or 2 to change the ring mode, e.g., 2
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select the ring mode
[201] ANS MODE
VOICE ANNOUNCE
3. Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.8
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
1.6 PROGRAMMING YOUR STATION’S NAME
Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character. Pressing the dial pad
key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory name is “SAM SMITH,”
press the number “7” four times to get the letter “S.” Press the number “2” once to get the
letter “A.” Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message.
Pressing the bottom left programmable key will change the letter from upper case to lower
case. There are up to 11 characters that can be used.
NOTES:
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous
character, press the VOLUME UP or DOWN keys to move the cursor to the right or to
the left.
2. When the system is equipped with a Samsung Voicemail System, and your System
Administrator has enabled it, changing the station name here will also update the
name in your voicemail box.
•
iDCS KEYSETS, ITP KEYSETS, and SMT-i KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 
1
2
3
4
5
<
space
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
>
?
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
=
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
[
)
!
@
#
$
%
^
S

Z
]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /,
=, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character,
press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
1.9
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 104
Display shows
[201] STN NAME
2. Enter the station name using the procedure
described above
[201] STN NAME
SAMSUNG
3. Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.10
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
1.7 PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED DIAL LOCATIONS
You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial list. Each
station user begins with ten numbers 00–09 and may be assigned up to fifty numbers. See
your system administrator to determine the amount assigned to your station.
NOTE: Press button B for flash and button C for pause.
Display keyset users may want to hide some speed dial numbers so they will not show in the
display. Before entering a telephone number, press button E. All digits after this will be
hidden. Press button E again to begin displaying digits.
If your system uses rotary (or pulse) dialing C.O. lines, pressing button D before entering a
speed dial will cause all subsequent digits to be sent as DTMF tones until the D button is
pressed again.
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 105
Display shows
[201] SPEED DIAL
00:
[201] SPEED DIAL
SPDBLK NOT EXIST
If you have no speed dial bins,
the display will be as shown
2. Dial the location number (e.g., 05)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select the location
Press the right soft key to move cursor
[201] SPEED DIAL
05:_
3. Enter the trunk access code (e.g., 9) followed
by the number to be dialed (e.g., 4264100)
OR
Press the left soft key to return to step 2
[201] SPEED DIAL
05:9-4264100_
4. Press the F button to access the next program
OR
Press the transfer key to save and exit
1.11
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
1.8 NAMING YOUR PERSONAL SPEED DIAL LOCATIONS
This program allows a character name to be entered for each personal speed dial location.
This name enables the speed dial number to be located when using the directory dial feature.
The directory dial feature allows the display keyset user to select a speed dial location by
scanning its name. There are up to 11 characters that can be used.
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 106
Display shows
[201] SPEED NAME
00:
2. Dial the speed dial location (e.g., 01)
OR
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through the location
numbers and use the right soft key to move the
cursor
[201] SPEED NAME
01:_
3. Enter the location name using the procedure
described in Programming Your Station’s Name
[201] SPEED NAME
01:SAMSUNG_
4. Press UP or DOWN to move to the next location
OR
Press the F key to program speed dial numbers
5. Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.12
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
1.9 ADDING EXTENDERS TO KEYS
This program allows you to assign key extenders to make a general access feature key more
specific. Some common feature keys that can have extenders are listed below:
FEATURE KEY
BOSS
DP
DS
FWRD
GPIK
IG
MMPG
PAGE
PARK
RP
SPD
PMSG
DIR
VT
SG
DESCRIPTION
EXTENDER
Boss and Secretary
Direct Pickup
Direct Station Select
Call Forward
Group Pickup
In/Out of Group
Meet Me Page
Page
Park (orbits)
Ring Plan
Speed Dial
Programmed Message
Directory
Voice Mail Transfer
Station Group
1–4
Extension or station group number
Any extension number
0–5
01–20
Any group number you are part of
0–9, 
0–9, 
0–9
1–6 or HOLD for None
00–49, 500–999
01–13
PERS (1), SYS (2) or STN (3)
Voice Mail Group (501–519)
Any group number (500–519)
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 107
Display shows the first station
[201] EXT (KTS)
01:CALL1 
2. Enter the key number, e.g., 18
OR
Use UP and DOWN to scroll through the keys
Use the right soft key to move the cursor
OR
Press the key to be programmed
[201] EXT (KTS)
18:DS

3. Dial the extender according to above table
Press the right soft key to return to step 2
OR
Press the transfer key to store and exit
OR
Press the speaker key to store and advance to the
next program
[201] EXT (KTS)
18:DS
DS207
1.13
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
1.10 CHECKING STATION STATUS
This program displays the following attributes of a station port. This is a read only feature.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6,7,8
9
PORT #
TYPE
PICKUP GROUP
SGR
BOSS-SECR
PAGE
COS NO
TENANT GROUP
Cabinet 2 Slot 3
Telephone model
None, 01–20
Station Group Number
None, 1–4
Page Zone (1–4)
COS (1–30) per Ring Plan (01–06)
1
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 108
Display shows
[201] STN STATUS
PORT:C1-S02-P01
2. Press UP or DOWN to view the status items
[201] STN STATUS
TYPE:24B US SET
3. Press the transfer key to exit
1.14
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
1.11 CHANGING YOUR TIME AND DATE DISPLAY
Display keysets will always have the date and time displayed when not in use. You can select
from the following display options:
0
COUNTRY
Sets overall display format and has two options
0 = ORIENTAL MM/DD DAY HH:MM
1 = WESTERN DAY DD MM HH:MM
1
CLOCK Sets format of clock display and has two options
0 = 12 HOUR (Displays 1 P.M. as 01:00)
1 = 24 HOUR (Displays 1 P.M. as 13:00)
2
DISPLAY
Sets format of DAY and MONTH display and has two options
0 = UPPER CASE (Displays Friday as FRI and March as MAR)
1 = LOWER CASE (Displays Friday as Fri and March as Mar)
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 109
Display shows
[201] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:WESTERN
2. Press UP or DOWN to select the display mode
Press the right soft key to move the cursor
[201] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:ORIENTAL
3. Press the right soft key to return to step 2
OR
Press the left soft key to return to step 3
4. Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.15
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
1.12 SETTING STATION ON/OFF OPTIONS
The OfficeServ 7200-S allows the system administrator to set any of the keyset features listed
below.
OPTION
00
NAME
AUTO
HOLD
VALUE
1
ON
Automatically hold the current caller
before accessing another trunk or CALL
key.
0
OFF
Disconnect the current caller before
accessing another trunk or CALL key.
01
NOT AVAILABLE IN THE USA
02
HEADSET USE
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
1
ON
Enable headset mode operation.
0
OFF
Enable handset mode operation.
1
ON
Allow dialing from an idle state.
0
OFF
Require the user to lift the handset or
press the speakerphone key before
dialing a number.
1
ON
Generate a tone each time a key is
pressed on the keyset.
0
OFF
Disable key tone generation.
1
ON
Connect to an in-process page after
disconnecting a caller.
0
OFF
Connect a page only if the keyset is idle
at the beginning of the page.
1
ON
Allow the user to answer calls by lifting
the handset or pressing the
speakerphone button.
0
OFF
Require users to press a CALL / DT / DS
key in order to answer calls.
HOT KEYPAD
KEY TONE
DESCRIPTION
PAGE REJOIN
RING PREF.
NOT AVAILABLE IN THE USA
1
ON
Automatically camp-on when calling to
a busy station.
0
OFF
Require the user to manually activate
the CAMP-ON feature.
AUTO CAMP-ON
NOT AVAILABLE IN THE USA
1.16
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPTION
10
11
12
13
14
15
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
NAME
VALUE
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
Require user to enter their AME
password to listen o messages as they
are being recorded.
Messages being recorded will always
be audible.
Display the Speed Dial bin name
instead of the dialed number when
calling to a Speed Dial number.
Display the dialed number when
calling to a Speed Dial number.
1
ON
Store all calls in the CID Review block.
0
OFF
Store only missed calls in the CID
Review block.
1
ON
0
OFF
AME PASSCODE
DISP SPD NAME
CID REVIEW ALL
SECURE OHVA
17
18
Receive Off-Hook Voice Announce
(OHVA) audio through the handset.
Receive OHVA audio through the
speakerphone.
NOT AVAILABLE IN THE USA
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
AUTO ANS CO
ENBLOCK 2LCD
16
DESCRIPTION
This option
affects all display
0 OFF
phones.
STN NO RING
FEATURE TONE
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
0
OFF
1.17
Automatically answer CO calls when
the keyset is set for AUTO ANSWER
MODE in MMC 103.
Do not automatically answer CO calls
regardless of AUTO ANSWER MODE
setting in MMC 103.
Require the user to press SEND to dial
the call when 2 LINE ENBLOCK is set to
ENABLE in MMC 861.
Dial calls soon as digits are entered.
Do not ring on incoming calls, only
flash the CALL / DT / DS button.
On incoming calls ring and flash the
CALL / DT / DS button.
Change dial tone to a higher pitch to
indicate that a phone status feature is
active (DND, Forward All, Station Lock,
etc).
Disable status feature activation
notification tone.
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPTION
19
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
NAME
RCV GPU INFO
VALUE
1
ON
0
OFF
1
ON
MISSED CALLS
20
21
22
23
24
This option
affects all display
0 OFF
phones.
NOT AVAILABLE IN THE USA
USE STN RING
1 ON
This option only
affects the ITP5112L and SMT
Series wired IP
keysets.
0
OFF
DESCRIPTION
Generate a short burst of ring tone
when a call rings at another member of
the pickup group when PINGRING
SERVICE is set to ENABLE in MMC
861.
Do not ring when another member of
the pickup group receives a call.
Display a notification of missed calls
including number of missed calls and
the CID of the most recent call missed.
Do not display missed calls notification
screen.
Allow the user to select a ringtone
stored in the keyset instead of a
system-generated ringtone.
Limit ringtone selections to systemgenerated ringtones found in MMC
111.
NOT AVAILABLE IN THE USA
NOT AVAILABLE IN THE USA
ACTION
DISPLAY
[201] STN ON/OFF
AUTO HOLD
:OFF
Press TRANSFER 110
Display shows
1.18
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
1.13 SELECTING A RING TONE
Each keyset user can select one of eight ring frequencies.
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 111
Display shows
[201] RING TONE
SELECTION 6
2. Dial 1–8 to select the ring tone
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select the ring tone
Press the right soft key to move the cursor
[201] RING TONE
SELECTION 5
3. Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.19
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
1.14 ALARM REMINDER
Station users can have three alarms programmed at their phones. Each alarm may be one of
the following three types:
0. NOTSET
1. TODAY ONLY
2. DAILY
The alarm is not set.
The alarm will ring at the programmed time and be canceled
automatically.
The alarm will ring each day at this time.
IMPORTANT NOTE
On the SMT-i5200 Series phones this feature is handled by the local phone. It cannot be
programmed through the phone system and it will show as feature not permitted.
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 112
Display shows
[201] ALM CLK(1)
HHMM: NOTSET
2. Dial 1–3 to select the alarm (e.g., 2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select alarm
Press the right soft key to move the cursor
OR
Press the left soft key to return to step 2
[201] ALM CLK(2)
HHMM: NOTSET
3. Enter alarm time in 24 hour format (e.g., 1300)
Display automatically advances to step 5
[201] ALM CLK (2)
HHMM:1300NOTSET
4. Enter alarm type (e.g., 2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select alarm type
Press the right soft key to move the cursor
and return to step 2
[201] ALM CLK
HHMM:1300DAILY
5. Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.20
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
1.15 STATION VOLUME
This procedure allows users to view and set the level of the volume for your keyset.
0. RING VOLUME
Set a level for your keyset ring volume. There are eight levels of
volume; level 1 is the lowest and level 8 is the highest.
1. OFF-RING VOL
Set a level for your keyset off-hook ring volume. There are eight levels
of volume; level 1 is the lowest and level 8 is the highest.
2. HANDSET VOL
Set a level for your keyset handset volume. There are eight levels of
volume; level 1 is the lowest and level 8 is the highest.
3. SPEAKER VOL
Set a level for your keyset speaker volume. There are sixteen levels of
volume; level 1 is the lowest and level 16 is the highest.
4. BGM VOLUME
Set a level for your keyset background music volume. There are
sixteen levels of volume; level 1 is the lowest and level 16 is the
highest.
5. PAGE VOLUME
This is the volume you will hear internal page over the keyset speaker
when your keyset is idle and BGM is turned on. There are 16 volume
levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 114
Display shows
[201] STN VOLUME
RING VOLUME :OFF
2. Dial 1-8 to select the volume to change
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select the volume to change
Press the right soft key to move the cursor
[201] STN VOLUME
OFF-RING VOL:OFF
3. Press UP or DOWN to select ON or OFF
Press the left or right soft key to return to step 2
[201] STN VOLUME
OFF-RING VOL:ON
OR
Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF
If option 0 from above list is dialed at step 2
[201] STN VOLUME
RING VOLUME :4
If option 1 from above list is dialed at step 2
[201] STN VOLUME
OFF-RING VOL:4
1.21
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
If option 2 from above list is dialed at step 2
[201] STN VOLUME
HANDSET VOL:4
If option 3 from above list is dialed at step 2
[201] STN VOLUME
SPEAKER VOL:13
If option 4 from above list is dialed at step 2
[201] STN VOLUME
BGM VOLUME :13
4. Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.22
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
1.16 SETTING A PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you can leave a programmed
message. Display stations calling you will see this message and be informed of your status or
follow your instructions.
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 115
Display shows
[201] PGMMSG(00)
CANCEL VAC MSG
2. Dial 00–20 to select message number, e.g., 05
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select message
[201] PGMMSG(05)
PAGE ME
3. Press the left or right soft key to return to step 2
OR
Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.23
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
1.17 ALARM REMINDER WITH MESSAGE
Station users can have three alarms programmed at their phones. Each alarm may be one of
the following three types:
0. NOTSET
1. TODAY ONLY
2. DAILY
The alarm is not set.
The alarm will ring at the programmed time and be canceled
automatically.
The alarm will ring each day at this time.
In addition, each alarm may be accompanied by a 16 character message that will be displayed
while the alarm is ringing.
NOTE: These are the same three alarms described in Alarm Reminder. This procedure allows a
message to be added. A display keyset is necessary to view messages.
IMPORTANT NOTE
On the SMT-i5200 Series phones this feature is handled by the local phone. It cannot be
programmed through the phone system and it will show as feature not permitted.
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 116
Display shows
[201] ALM REM(1)
HHMM: NOTSET
2. Dial 1–3 to select the alarm (e.g., 2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select the alarm
Press the right soft key to move the cursor
[201] ALM REM(1)
HHMM: NOTSET
3. Enter the alarm time in 24 hour clock format (e.g.,
1300)
Display automatically advances to step 4
[201] ALM REM (2)
HHMM:1300NOTSET
4. Dial the valid entry from the above list for the
alarm type
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select the alarm type
Press the right soft key to move the cursor
[201] ALM REM
HHMM:1300DAILY
5. Enter messages using the method in Programming
Your Station’s Name
Press the right soft key to return to step 2
[201] ALM REM
TAKE MEDICATION
6. Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.24
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
1.18 CALLER ID DISPLAY
The station user can change the order in which the CLI, Caller ID and/or ANI information is
displayed on an LCD set during a transferred call.
CLI display options are the following:
0. NO DISPLAY
No CLI data will be displayed.
1. NUMBER FIRST
The CLI number received from the Central Office will be
displayed first.
2. NAME FIRST
The CLI name received from the Central Office will be displayed
first.
Caller ID display options are the following:
0. NO DISPLAY
No CID data will be displayed.
1. NUMBER FIRST
The CID number received from the Central Office will be
displayed first.
2. NAME FIRST
The CID name received from the Central Office will be displayed
first.
ANI display options are the following:
0. NO DISPLAY
No ANI data will be displayed.
1. NUMBER FIRST
The ANI number received from the Central Office will be
displayed first.
2. NAME FIRST
Since there is no name sent by the Central Office, The only time
you will receive a name is when your service company has
programmed a name to be associated with the number
otherwise your display will read “no ANI name”.
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press the transfer key followed by 119
Display shows
[201] CID DISP
NUMBER FIRST
1.25
Home Page
OfficeServ 7200-S
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MAY 2010
2. Dial 0 or 1 to select CID or ANI
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select CID or ANI and press
the right soft key
[201] ANI DISP
NUMBER FIRST
3. Dial display option 0, 1 or 2, e.g., 2
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select option
[201] CID DISP
NAME FIRST
4. Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.26
Home Page
SMT-i5243
Keyset User Guide
For OfficeServ™ 7000 Series Systems
05/2010
Home Page
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS BOOK ......................................................................................................1
SECTION 1. CAUTION AND PREPARATION ....................................2
CAUTION ..............................................................................................................................3
PREPARATION ..................................................................................................................4
Check the Contents of the Box ................................................................................4
Phone Installation ......................................................................................................4-5
Optional Equipment..................................................................................................5-6
SECTION 2. PHONE FUNCTIONS ..................................................................7
SMT-i5243 LAYOUT ....................................................................................................8
Names and Functions ..............................................................................................8-9
KEY FUNCTIONS ..........................................................................................................10
Telephone Status Indicator ......................................................................................10
Screen Structure ..........................................................................................................10
Text Input Method ......................................................................................................11
Description of Icons....................................................................................................12
Calling Status Information........................................................................................13
Navigating the Menus................................................................................................13
Navigation Button and Select Switch for FWD/DND/Absent MSG ..........13
SMT-i5243 SETUP ......................................................................................................15
Initializing the SMT-i5243 ........................................................................................15
Setup Mode ..................................................................................................................15
Easy Install Wizard ......................................................................................................15
Setting IP Manually ....................................................................................................16
Setting Up Extension Login ....................................................................................16
Configuration Menu Structure................................................................................17
Copyright 2010 Samsung Telecommunications America.
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic,
electronic or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying or information retrieval systems—
without express written permission of the publisher of this material.
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing
may warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from
the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.
SECTION 3. FREQUENTLY USED
FEATURE OPERATION ..........................................................18
EXTENSION LOG IN & OUT ................................................................................19
PLACING CALLS............................................................................................................19
ANSWERING CALLS ..................................................................................................21
PLACING A CALL ON HOLD ..............................................................................21
TRANSFERRING CALLS ..........................................................................................21
Home Page
TRANSFERRING WITH CAMP-ON..................................................................22
CALL WAITING ..............................................................................................................22
CONFERENCE CALLS ................................................................................................22
FORWARDING CALLS ..............................................................................................23
OTHER FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS ..................................................23-26
LCR POWER SAVING FEATURE ........................................................................27
SECTION 4. PHONE FEATURES ....................................................................28
BASIC MENUS ................................................................................................................29
Soft Button Structure ................................................................................................29
Call Menus ......................................................................................................................30
Service Soft Button ....................................................................................................38
Phone Soft Button ......................................................................................................38
Setting Soft Button ....................................................................................................39
Func. Soft Button..........................................................................................................40
AOM Soft Button..........................................................................................................40
SECTION 5. OFFICESERV 7000 SYSTEM FEATURES ..........41
OUTSIDE CALLS ..........................................................................................................42
Making Calls from AOM ............................................................................................42
Universal Answer ........................................................................................................42
Recall Dial Tone ............................................................................................................42
Sending a Flash ............................................................................................................42
Busy Line Queuing with Callback..........................................................................42
Busy Station Callback ................................................................................................43
Canceling Callback......................................................................................................43
Busy Station Camp-On ..............................................................................................43
INTERCOM CALLS ......................................................................................................45
Voice Announce Mode ..............................................................................................45
Auto Answer Mode ....................................................................................................45
Calling your System Operator ................................................................................45
CALL PROCESSING ....................................................................................................46
System Hold ..................................................................................................................46
Exclusive Hold ..............................................................................................................46
Remote Hold ................................................................................................................46
Hold Recall ....................................................................................................................47
Consultation Hold ......................................................................................................47
Retrieving Calls Held at Another Station............................................................47
Call Transfer ..................................................................................................................48
Transfer with Camp-On ............................................................................................48
Transfer to Voice Mail ................................................................................................49
Call Waiting....................................................................................................................49
Call Forward Options ................................................................................................49
Station Call Pickup ......................................................................................................50
Group Call Pickup........................................................................................................51
My Group Pickup ........................................................................................................51
Privacy Release ............................................................................................................51
DIALING FEATURES ..................................................................................................52
Speed Dialing................................................................................................................52
Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers ..................................................52
Directory Dialing..........................................................................................................53
Last Number Redial ....................................................................................................54
Save Number with Redial ........................................................................................54
Automatic Redial/Retry ............................................................................................54
Pulse to Tone Changeover ......................................................................................54
PAGING AND MESSAGING ..................................................................................55
Making and Internal Page ........................................................................................55
Making an External Page..........................................................................................55
All Page ..........................................................................................................................55
Meet Me Page ..............................................................................................................56
Call Park and Page ......................................................................................................56
Messages—Set and Cancel ..............................................................................57-58
Returning Messages ..................................................................................................58
Programmed Messages ............................................................................................58
CONVENIENCE FEATURES ..................................................................................59
Logging In and Out ....................................................................................................59
Do Not Disturb ............................................................................................................59
One Time DND..............................................................................................................59
Mute ................................................................................................................................60
Background Music ......................................................................................................60
Established Call Pick-Up............................................................................................60
Door Phone Calls ..................................................................................................60-61
Executive/Secretary Hotline ....................................................................................61
Group Listening ..........................................................................................................62
Account Codes ............................................................................................................62
Locking Your Keyset ..................................................................................................63
Manual Signalling........................................................................................................63
Off-Hook Voice Announce ......................................................................................64
OHVA Block....................................................................................................................64
Home Page
OHVA Reject ..................................................................................................................64
In Group/Out of Group..............................................................................................65
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET ..........................................................................66
AME Password ..............................................................................................................66
Auto Camp-On ............................................................................................................66
Select Ring Tone ..........................................................................................................66
Change Your Passcode ..............................................................................................66
Set Answer Mode (Intercom) ..................................................................................67
Set Answer Mode (CO) ..............................................................................................67
Automatic Hold............................................................................................................67
Headset Operation......................................................................................................67
Hot Keypad ....................................................................................................................68
Key Confirmation Tone..............................................................................................68
Rejoining a Page ..........................................................................................................68
Ring Preference............................................................................................................68
Display Speed Dial Name ........................................................................................69
Caller ID Review All ....................................................................................................69
Secure OHVA ................................................................................................................69
Configure Mobile Extensions (MOBEX) ........................................................69-70
DISPLAY FEATURES ..................................................................................................71
Directory Information................................................................................................71
Display Number Dialed ............................................................................................71
Call Duration Timer ....................................................................................................71
Auto Timer ....................................................................................................................71
Timer Function ............................................................................................................72
Viewing Station Message Indications..................................................................72
Station Names ..............................................................................................................72
Personal Speed Dial Names ....................................................................................72
Station Names ..............................................................................................................72
Managing Programmable Key Assignments ....................................................73
Backspace with LCR ....................................................................................................73
CALLER ID..........................................................................................................................74
Selecting Your Caller ID Display ............................................................................74
Viewing the Next Caller ID Call ..............................................................................75
Inquire Caller ID Park/Hold Info ............................................................................75
FEATURE ACCESS CODES ....................................................................................76
SECTION 6. APPLICATIONS ..............................................................................77
SAMSUNG VOICEMAIL ..........................................................................................78
Accessing Your Mailbox ............................................................................................79
SVMi E-Series Subscriber Services Menu Diagram ..................................80–81
Getting Started ............................................................................................................82
Listen to your Messages ...........................................................................................82
Subscriber Services Menu .......................................................................................82
Listening to Old or New Messages ......................................................................83
Group New or Old Messages ..................................................................................84
Record and Send a Message ..................................................................................84
Access Manager ..........................................................................................................86
Personal Greetings......................................................................................................87
Mailbox Administration ............................................................................................90
Message Broadcast ....................................................................................................92
Personal Services ........................................................................................................92
Personal Administration Settings ........................................................................93
Keyset User Features ................................................................................................94
Shortcuts ......................................................................................................................96
Interactive Displays ....................................................................................................96
E-Mail Gateway (EMG) ........................................................................................96–98
USB PORT ..........................................................................................................................99
Setting Up a Bluetooth Headset............................................................................99
Setting Up a Video Camera ..................................................................................101
Flash USB Memory Stick ........................................................................................102
External USB Port Specifications ..............................................................102–103
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS ................................................104–105
Home Page
ABOUT THIS BOOK
The new Samsung Multimedia Telephone SMT-i5243 keyset is part of the
OfficeServ 7000 Series.
The SMT-i5243 keyset represents a new concept of Internet phone, in that it uses
an IP address to Send/Receive voice and data. For voice communications, the SMTi5243 uses the data network line already in place in most offices and increasing
number of homes.
This guide contains 6 sections: Section 1. Caution and Preparation, Section 2.
Phone Functions, Section 3. Frequently Used Feature Operation, Section 4. Phone
Features, 5. OfficeServ 7000 System Features, and Section 6. Applications. Please
take the time to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation of
your keyset. Keep this guide handy, as you may need to look up instructions for
infrequently used features.
This book is written based on factory default settings, for the feature access codes.
Sometimes, due to programming requirements, these codes may be changed. If
you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book, please contact your installation and service company to determine the correct code.
1
Home Page
CAUTION
SECTION 1.
CAUTION AND PREPARATION
2
•
Read the installation instructions before connecting the system to its power
source.
•
If there is dirt or moisture on the pin contact surface of a power plug, pull out
the plug and wipe it away with a cloth. If dirt or moisture remains on the product even after wiping, contact the service center.
•
For the power connection port of the phone, use the supplied power
adapter.(The power adapter is supplied separately.) Use of a power adapter
that does not meet the specifications may cause the product to become damaged, to overheat, or to explode.
•
Do not place the phone in a location with a lot of dust, in a location that is subject to severe changes in temperature, or near a heating device (cigarette
heat, heater, etc.)
•
Do not use or store flammable spray or materials near the phone.
•
Do not place vases, flowerpots, cups, or a container of cosmetics or drugs near
the phone.
•
Installation of equipment must not route interconnecting cables or external
power supply sources outdoors.
•
The LAN cable to the network should be connected to the LAN port of a
phone, NOT to the PC connection port.
•
Use a soft and dry cloth when cleaning the phone. Do not spray water directly onto the product; and do not use chemicals such as wax, benzene, alcohol,
thinner, mosquito killer, perfume spray, lubricant, detergent, etc.
3
Home Page
PREPARATION
CHECK THE CONTENTS OF THE BOX
Check if the product package box includes all the components as follows:
•
•
•
•
Phone body including a base
Handset
Handset cord
Patch cable
t
r
e
NOTE: Power adapter sold separately. If any of these items are missing or damaged, please contact your dealer.
PHONE INSTALLATION
Connecting the Phone Body
Remove the base of the phone by
pressing the [Push] mark on the top
of the base.
Note: The base can be used to adjust
the phone angle in the high or low
position.
q
w
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
q Handset Connection
w PC Connection
e Internet Connection
r Power Connection
t Headset Connection
SMT-i5264 [ADD-ON MODULE]
1 Connect a handset to the handset port on the back of the phone.
2
Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the computer, and attach it to the PC
port on the back of your IP phone.
3 Connect the Ethernet port in your workspace to the LAN port on the back of
your phone, using the provided LAN (UTP) cable.Your IP phone now shares a
network connection with your computer.
Connect a standard power outlet in your workspace to the power port using
4
the AC power adapter. The phone will subsequently boot. If your system
administrator delivered your phone without a power supply, your phone
probably receives power through the Ethernet connection.
5
4
The SMT-i5264 IP AOM can be registered and programmed
to function with any ITP 5100 keysets, SMT-i Series, and TDM
phones. This add-on module was cosmetically designed to
match the SMT-i5000 Series phones. In some applications
multiple IP AOMs can be supported per IP phone. For installation instructions, see your System Administrator.
SMT-A52GE [GIGABIT ADAPTER]
The SMT-A52GE Gigabit Adapter processes the Gigabit
data for a Gigabit LAN connection on the PC connected to
the SMT-i5200 Series IP phones. The SMT-A52GE can be
installed to function with any of the SMT-i5200 Series IP
phones. For installation instructions, see your System
Administrator.
To use a headset, connect the headset to the headset port on the back of
your phone.
5
Home Page
WALL MOUNT BRACKET
An optional bracket is available for wall mounting the SMT-i5200 Series phones to
the wall. For installation instructions, see your System Administrator.
SMT-A53PW [POWER ADAPTER]
The power adapter is sold separately.
SECTION 2.
PHONE FUNCTIONS
6
7
Home Page
Button
SMT-i5243 LAYOUT
o Navigation Button
2!
LCD Screen 2)
q
LED
(Telephone
Status
Indicator)
w
Selector
Buttons
Handset
Selector Switch
for FWD/DND/
Phone
Book
Button
Message
Button
Service
Button
e Absent Msg
r SoftButtons
t Enter/OK
y Conference
u Transfer
i Hold
;
l
k
o Navigation
Button
Mute
Button
Volume
Button
Headset
Button
j
h
g
Speaker
Button f
a USB Port
a USB Port
s Programmable Buttons
Used to move the display cursor up and down, left and
right on certain menus.
Supports Web video camera, Bluetooth® dongle
(to connect Bluetooth headset), and USB memory stick
(up to 4 GB) used for phonebook upload and download,
and software upgrade.
5 desiless buttons used to set up and label function
buttons on the phone.
d Dial Button
Used to dial the phone number.
f Speaker Button
Used to enable/disable the use of a speaker phone.
g Headset Button
Used to activate and deactivate the headset jack.
h Volume Button
Used to control the volume settings.
j Mute Button
Used to silence the transmit voice to the remote party.
k Service Button
For use with the Unified Communicator Server (optional)
l Message Button
; Phone Book Button
d Dial Button
Function
s Programmable Buttons
Used to access all the messaging options: Voicemail
Messages, Station Messages, SMS, and E-Mail Messages.
Used to search for a phone number saved in the phone,
or to register a new number. Pressing this button shows
the main screen of the phone book.
Used to move downward on various list screens.
NOTE: The words “key” and “button” are interchangeable.
2) LCD Screen
A backlit display showing the phone’s status (busy,
ringing, receiving an internal message, etc.)
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
2! Handset
Used for two-way voice conversation.
Button
q LED (TSI)
The blinking pattern differs depending on the phone
status (Telephone Status Indicator).
w Selector Buttons
Used to select the desired function from the soft
menus displayed at the right of the LCD screen.
e Selector Switch for FWD/
DND/Absent Msg
r Soft Buttons
8
Function
Used to select or deselect the Call Forwarding/
DND/Absent Message setting by using the Selector
Switch control.
Used to select the desired function from the soft
menus displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen.
t Enter/OK
Used to make selection or to save an entry.
y Conference Button
Used for conference calls.
u Transfer Button
Used to enable the call transfer function.
i Hold Button
Used to place a call on hold.
9
Home Page
TEXT INPUT METHOD
KEY FUNCTIONS
Using the dial and direction buttons on the phone, you can enter and modify the
English characters, numeric and special characters.
NETWORK: The SMT-i5243 uses VoIP communication through an alreadyinstalled data network.
,] on a text input screen, the input mode is
Whenever you press the dial button [,
changed in sequence.
Text Input Example
LCD SCREEN: Various functions are displayed on the LCD screen, so you can use
them conveniently by using the Navigation buttons on the phone.
SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE (SMS): You can exchange text messages using
The indicators are turned on or off depending on the status of relevant functions.
Screen
Status
When station is busy
LED Indicator
Red colored indicator is
constant.
When station is receiving an
incoming call
Red indicator (slow flash).
When there is a message
During “Do Not Disturb”
Incoming Trunk Call
Hold Recalls
Red indicator (fast flash).
Green colored indicator
flashes.
Amber colored indicator
flashes.
•
,] button, and type numNumber Input: Select this mode by pressing the [,
bers by pressing the dial buttons.
Special Character Input: Select this mode by pressing the [#] button; select
a desired character by using the Navigation button; and press the OK button
to enter it.
Keypad Character Entry
1
A
2
a
3
1
(Uppercase)
(Lowercase)
The LCD screen consists of three areas.
Dial #
Not Used
Dial 0
Not Used
Dial 1
Not Used
•
•
•
10
STATUS DISPLAY: On the top of the screen, the icons representing phone
function settings are displayed.
MAIN SCREEN: On the main screen, selectable menus, call processing status,
and various messages are displayed.
MENU DISPLAY: At the bottom of the screen, menus that the user can select
depending on status are displayed.
Special Character Input Mode
,]
English Input: Select this mode (uppercase/lowercase) by pressing the [,
button, and type text by repeated pressing the dial buttons.
Count
Menu Display
Lowercase Input Mode
Use the dial buttons to type English text and numbers; and use the
Navigation button to move the cursor left and right and OK buttons to complete input. When removing the typed characters, select the Del soft button.
Dial ,
Main Screen
a
#
SCREEN STRUCTURE
Status Display
Uppercase Input Mode
123 Numeric Input Mode
this function. This function is available on internal IP stations.
TELEPHONE STATUS INDICATOR
A
Dial 2
A
Dial 3
Dial 4
4
$
(Numbers) (Special Characters)
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Dial 5
J
K
L
Dial 6
M
N
O
Dial 7
P
Q
R
Dial 8
T
U
V
Dial 9
W
X
Y
S
Z
11
Home Page
DESCRIPTION OF ICONS
The following icons are displayed on the screen.
Icon
Description
Shows that ‘Call Forward’ is enabled.
CALLING STATUS INFORMATION
Describes the different animation images displayed according to call status.
ANIMATION
IMAGE
DESCRIPTION
Shows that ‘Do Not Disturb’ is enabled.
Dial input/system function is being conducted.
Appears when there are unread Short Messages in the
message inbox. Once they are read, it disappears.
A call is being made.
Internal Station Messages.
Station Locked.
Busy status.
A secret call is being made.
Recording during calling.
A call is being received.
Bluetooth dongle connection and bluetooth headset
registration status.
Call end (displayed when a call ends and the phone is in an off-hook
status).
Photo icon.
Call recording.
Shows that a LAN cable is connected to the PC port.
Shows that a LAN cable is connected to the LAN port but
that the system is not connected.
Shows that a LAN cable is connected to the LAN port and
that the system is connected normally.
Outgoing Call icon in Call Log.
Incoming Call icon in Call Log.
Missed Call icon.
Appears when there is an IP connection.
Appears when the Headset button is active.
Shows when there is a Cell phone number for the entry in
the Phone Book.
Shows when there is a Home phone number for the entry in
the Phone Book.
Shows when there is a Office phone number for the entry in
the Phone Book.
Shows when there is an internal Extension number for the
entry in the Phone Book.
NAVIGATING THE MENUS
When programming within various menu options, information can be entered via
Q] dial keys. The button used for editing and
the dial pad keys using [0]-[9] and [Q
their features are summarized below.
BUTTONS
Volume + and Hold
Transfer
FEATURES
To move the cursor left and right, up and down.
To clear/delete an entire field such as station name.
To write the changes and exit programming.
NAVIGATION BUTTON and SELECTOR
SWITCH FOR FWD/DND/ABSENT MSG
The SMT-i5243 phone has a navigation button and a Selector Switch for
FWD/DND/Absent Message to allow users to use its functions easily.
Selector Switch
Up Navigation Button
Navigation Button
Left
Navigation
Button
Right
Navigation
Button
OK/Enter Button
Down Navigation Button
The Selector Switch can be used to manually set and cancel station Call
Forwarding and Do Not Disturb. NOTE: Do not use the access codes or the func12
13
Home Page
tion menu to cancel FWD/DND when the selector switch is set in the left or right
position because the switch takes precedence over the access codes/function
menu.
BUTTON
Selector Switch
FUNCTION
Left
Users can set the phone to the call forward
state.
Center
The default standby status. (Normal Mode)
Right
This is set to “Do Not Disturb” or “Absent
Message Status”.
Direction Key
Users can edit the contents on the screen or
move between menu items.
OK/Enter
Users can select or save the item where a
cursor is placed in a menu mode.
Users can check the caller information
received from a station line during receiving.
Navigation
SMT-i5243 SETUP
INITIALIZING THE SMT-i5243
Initially the SMT-i5243 IP keyset will need to be setup to operate within the users
network. The Setup Menu is also used to make changes to the keyset, in the event
that the system information should change. The option chosen will be highlighted.
The station numbers will be automatically set by the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems once the necessary information has been entered into the IP keyset. Enter ID
and password of the server, as described below to register the phone.
See your system administrator for specific Network and Server addresses. The
addresses necessary to set up the SMT-i5243 are:
•
•
•
•
•
IP Address of Station
Network Gateway Address
IP Address of System’s main processor
User ID
Password
SETUP MODE [EXAMPLE OF SETTING MANUAL IP]
To set up the phone, power up the phone and wait for it to boot up. After booting
up, the display will show Easy Install Menu.
EASY INSTALL WIZARD
•
•
•
•
•
14
On [1. Start Easy Install] screen, make sure the network cable is connected to the LAN port of the
phone and then press the Next soft button.
On [2. Setting Language] screen, select the language and KeyPad Type and press the Next soft button.
On [3. Setting Register Server] screen, set the Server IP (the phone system’s
IP address 192.xxx.x.200).
Enter the station ID (example 3205). Enter the password (example 1234).
Enter Server type OfficeServ (default); then press the Next Soft button.
15
Home Page
SETTING IP MANUALLY
CONFIGURATION MENU STRUCTURE
•
This menu is for administrator use and requires a password. The Configuration
Menu options are as follows:
•
•
•
•
On [4. Setting Network Information] screen, set the Network Mode (example Static). Enter the station IP address (192.xxx.x.195), Gateway (192.xxx.x.1),
and Subnet mask (255.255.255.0).
Press Next soft button to skip [5. Setting VLAN].
Press Next soft button to skip [6. Setting 802.1x].
Press the Done soft button to complete the setup.
Press the Yes soft button the complete the installation and reboot the phone.
SETTING UP EXTENSION LOGIN [HOT DESKING]
Hot Desking allows you to log in and out of your SMT-i5243 IP keyset without
rebooting.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Phone soft button.
Scroll to Phone Information and press OK button.
Enter the administrator’s password (please contact your phone system administrator).
Scroll to Extension Login then press OK button.
Choose the ON option and press OK button. (Note: ON to allow, OFF to deny
hot desking).
Press the OK button then Save soft button to complete the setup.
When the phone restarts, enter the ID (eg; extension 2809) and password.
Press the Login soft button to complete the login.
1. EASY INSTALL
This option will guide you through setting up all required parameters for connecting the SMT keyset to your system.
2. PHONE INFORMATION
1. Version Info: Provides boot rom, software, DSP, and hardware version
information.
2. Network Info: Displays network mode, IP address of phone, network, and
gateway information.
3. MAC Address
3. NETWORK
Displays Static IP, Dynamic IP, PPPoE, NAT, 802.1x, VLAN (LAN), and VLAN (PC).
4. SERVER
1. Primary System: The main processor’s IP address.
2. System 1~3: Up to 4 server IPs can be set.
5. EXTENSION LOGIN
Allows the user to choose the option of permitting the phone either
login/logout from idle mode or only register to the server on power up. Once
the phone is placed into Extension Login mode, a display will show up to allow
you to enter any valid User ID and password. This function is also referred to
as hot desking (idle login).
6. VIDEO OPTION (OPTIONAL)
This option is used to set video parameters for using video phone features or
video services. This feature is optional.
7. SOFTWARE UPGRADE
One of the following methods can be used HTTP, TFTP, and USB.
8. FACTORY RESET
This option resets the SMT-i5243 to factory default settings.
9. PHONE RESTART
This option reboots the SMT-i5243 phone.
16
17
Home Page
This section provides the basic operation of your Samsung Multimedia Telephone
SMT-i5243.
EXTENSION LOG IN & OUT [HOT DESKING]
If enabled, your SMT-i5243 telephone may require you to log in before making or
receiving calls. In these cases your telephone system administrator will provide
you with an extension number, password, and the feature code used to log out.
TO LOG IN
SECTION 3.
FREQUENTLY USED FEATURE
OPERATION
•
•
•
•
Dial your extension number in the Server ID field.
Use the Navigation button to move down to the
Password field.
Dial your password in the password field (example
1234).
Press Login soft button.
TO LOG OUT
•
Dial the feature code provided by your administrator (for example 77).
PLACING CALLS
IMPORTANT: Put your phone in Normal (Overlap) Mode by pressing the
Menu button, select Settings soft button and then select Application Settings,
press OK, select Call, press OK, scroll to Dial Mode, change it to Normal (Overlap)
Mode by using the Navigation Button. If your phone is in Mobile Phone mode
(Enbloc) you must always press the Call soft button after dialing the digits to send
the call.
NOTE: All examples of making phone calls are based on the phone being set for
overlap dialing mode.
OUTSIDE CALLS - To place a call to an outside party:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press an idle outside line button, line group button, or dial a line access code
to receive dial tone.
Dial the telephone number.
Hang up the handset when the call is completed.
NOTE: Frequently called telephone numbers can be added to the PhoneBook.
When making internal and external calls from AOM (programmable buttons) list,
press the AOM soft button to access the programmable button screens. Then use
the Navigation button to scroll to and highlight the desired programmable button. Press OK to complete the call.
18
19
Home Page
INTERNAL CALLS - To place a call to another extension at your location:
ANSWERING CALLS
•
•
•
OUTSIDE/INTERNAL/VOICE ANNOUNCE CALLS - To answer these
•
Lift the handset.
Dial the extension number or group number.
Wait for the party to answer. If you hear a brief tone burst instead of ringback
tone, the station called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer. Begin speaking after the tone.
Hang up the handset when the call is completed.
NOTES:
1.
2.
If you have a DSS button assigned to an extension or station group, you may
press this button instead of dialing the number.
If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
SPEAKERPHONE CALLS - Your Samsung SMT-i5243 has full-duplex speakerphone capability. This feature is used for both internal or external calls. To activate
this feature:
•
•
•
Press the Speaker button.
Place an internal or external call.
Press Speaker button to disconnect the call.
NOTE: The handset can be used at any time during the conversation. To resume
handsfree operation, press the Speaker button, and hang up the handset.
HEADSET CALLS - If a headset is connected to the phone, you need to press
the headset key to direct the call to the headset. The headset key will be lit. To use
the headset:
•
•
•
Press the Speaker button.
Place an internal or external call.
Press Speaker button to disconnect the call.
three types of calls:
•
•
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer on Speakerphone.
Hang up the handset when the call is completed.
NOTE: The volume can be adjusted at any time by pressing the up and down buttons on your navigation button.
PLACING A CALL ON HOLD
Calls can be placed on System Hold or Exclusive Hold. A call placed on System
Hold can be picked up from any extension. Calls placed on Exclusive Hold can only
be picked up from the extension that placed them on hold.
SYSTEM HOLD - To place a call on hold:
•
•
•
Press the Hold button. The Call button will flash green at your telephone.
To take the caller off hold, press that button and the red flashing light will go
steady red again.
Resume conversation.
EXCLUSIVE HOLD - To place a call on hold at your telephone so that other
users cannot answer it:
•
•
Press the Hold button twice.The call button will flash green at your telephone.
To retrieve the call, press the flashing red line button or press the line button
a third time.
NOTE: Internal calls are always placed on exclusive hold.
NOTES:
TRANSFERRING CALLS
1.
You can transfer a call by notifying the party to which the call is being transferred
or without notification.
2.
20
If you need to switch between the headset and the handset during the call,
you need to place the call on hold first.
Headset key can be enabled or disabled in the Menu, Settings, Application
Setting, Headset.
•
•
•
•
While on a call, press the Transfer button then dial an extension number.
Confirm you hear a ringback tone.
Wait for the called party to answer and announce the call (optional).
Replace the handset.
21
Home Page
TRANSFERRING WITH CAMP-ON
FORWARDING CALLS
When you transfer a call to another station and receive a busy signal, you can
camp the call on to this station. Hang up when you hear the busy signal.The called
party is alerted that a call is waiting.
You can forward your calls to another station, group of stations, or an external telephone number. Program a destination for the type of forwarding you want by
moving the Selector Switch to the left and set the forwarding number for All,
Busy, No Answer, and Busy/No Answer.
•
•
•
Call another internal station.
When receiving a busy tone, press the Func. soft button.
Scroll to Camp On and press OK button (here ringback tone).Wait for party to
answer the call.
Icon
OTHER FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
NOTE: If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to
receive another call. Press Transfer to return to the caller.
VOLUME CONTROL - Vol button is used to adjust the volume of a handset,
CALL WAITING
Volume Control of a Handset
If an outside call is camped-on to your phone or another station is camped-on to
you:
•
•
•
Your keyset rings and the call that is waiting (camped-on) flashes red.
Press the flashing button to answer; the other call is put on hold automatically if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press
Hold and then the flashing button or finish the first call and hang up; the waiting call will ring.
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer.
NOTE: Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.
speaker and ringing sound.
•
•
•
Adjusts the handset volume while busy (handset offhook).
To increase the volume of a handset, press the top side [+] of the Vol button.
To decrease the volume of a handset, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button.
Volume Control of a Speaker
•
•
•
Adjusts the speaker volume while busy (handsfree).
To increase the volume of a speaker, press the top side [+] of the Vol button
while ringing.
To decrease the volume of a handset, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button while ringing.
CONFERENCE CALLS
Volume Control of a Ringing Tone
To make a conference call while engaged in a conversation:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Conference button and receive conference tone.
Make another call, either intercom or outside, press the Conference
button and receive conference tone.
Make another call or press the Conference button to join all parties. You can
conference up to five parties (you and four others).
Repeat the last step until all parties are added.
Hang up to leave the conference call.
NOTE: When attempting to add another party to the conference and you
are not able to reach the desired person, hang up. Simply press the
Conference button again to return to the previous conversation.
To increase the volume of a speaker, press the top side [+] of the Vol button
while ringing.
To decrease the volume of a handset, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button while ringing.
Volume Control of Key Tone
•
•
To increase the volume of the key tones, press the top side [+] of the Vol
button.
To decrease the volume of the key tones, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button.
NOTE: By pressing the Vol button in idle mode, the user can also adjust the key
tone volume.
To drop a party from your conference call:
•
Press the Conference button and dial the extension or line number that is to
be dropped.
•
Press the Conference button again to reestablish the conference.
22
23
Home Page
LAST NUMBER REDIAL - To redial the last dialed telephone number, when in
BOTTOM ROW SOFT BUTTONS
Function Mode, scroll to Last Redial, then press the Selection button in the
upper right corner of the phone.
HOME: The Home icon button function is used to return the phone to the main
default screen from the other display screens.
PHONE BOOK BUTTON - Provides direct access to personal phonebook
SERVICE: Allows a user to access additional services. These services require set up
by the system administrator.
(local to the phone) or company phonebook (required administrator set-up).
MESSAGE BUTTON - This function allows users to select which desired type
of messages is viewed. Users can select and view the following options: Voicemail
Messages, Station Messages, E-Mail (optional with IP-UMS only), and Short
Message Service (SMS). Short Message Service is similar to sending text messaging [Function only supported on Samsung IP phones].
SERVICE BUTTON - Used to allow station users access to setting and editing
the scheduler (alarm clock) feature. Also used to connect the OfficeServ
Communicator when application is available (UC is optional).
MENU SOFT BUTTON - This menu displays the
following options:
NOTE: The Navigation button can be used to scroll
through these options.
1. PHONEBOOK: Maintains frequently dialed names and numbers in a
Phonebook. Search and initiate calls by: Speed Dial, Associated Names,
Telephone Numbers, Assigned Groups, or Previous Calls registered to your
phone.
2. CALL LOG: Provides direct access to a list of most recent calls, outgoing calls,
incoming calls, missed calls, and an option to delete/delete all (or clear) all
calls from the Call Log. Press the Navigation Right or Left button to display
only missed calls, incoming calls, or outgoing calls.The type of calls is classified
by icon.
3. MESSAGES: This function allows users to select which desired type of messages is viewed. Users can select and view the following options: Voicemail
Messages, Station Messages, E-Mail (optional with IP-UMS only), and Short
Message Service (SMS). Short Message Service is similar to sending text messaging [Function only supported on Samsung IP phones].
4. CONFERENCE: Allows a user to setup a conference group to call multiple
parties simultaneously to join the conference call.
PHONE: Allows the user to set many phone options for the phone such as ring
tones, background screens, languages, forward, DND, etc.
SETTINGS: This function allows the user to set the following option: Application
Set., Call Forward, Absent Message, AOM Setting, Network Info., and Clear
User Set.
CALL LOG SOFT BUTTON - Provides direct access
to a list of most recent calls, outgoing calls, incoming
calls, missed calls, and an option to delete/delete all (or
clear) all calls from the Call Log. Press the Navigation
Right or Left button to display only missed calls, incoming calls, or outgoing calls. The type of calls is classified
by icon.
BACK SOFT BUTTON - The Back soft button (only displayed for Missed calls
or Messages) is actually a toggle between the multi-purpose selection buttons in
the upper right side of the phone. When the station user has messages or missed
calls, the main screen show the Back soft button to display the status of all
Message types (Missed Calls, Voicemail, Station message, Email,and Short
Message). Pressing the Back button will change to Function button and display
features. Pressing the Function soft button again will display the 99 buttton AOM,
and pressing the AOM soft button will move to the HomeBuddy screen (optional). Pressing the HomeBuddy soft button will return to the Function button.
FUNC. SOFT BUTTON - This function allows a user
one touch easy access to many of the system features.
When pressed, the following options are displayed: Last
number redial, Save/Repeat, Speed Dial, Directory, VM
Message, Station Message, Page Pickup, Direct Pickup,
DND, In/Out Group, Status Message, Hold pickup, Page, Meet me Page, OHVA
Block, Group Pickup, and My Group Pickup. The Navigation button can be used
to scroll up and down the list of features under the Func. button.
NOTE: EXE/SECR MSG is displayed only when the phone is programmed for
Boss/Secretary feature.
24
25
Home Page
Example of using the Last Number Redial feature:
•
When in Function Mode, scroll to Last Redial, then press the Selection button. The last number called from the phone is called.
NOTE: For detail operation of the list of features under the Func. soft button,
please refer to the System Features section of the user guide.
AOM SOFT BUTTON - This function is used to display all 99 programmable feature buttons of the phone.
The Navigation button can be used to scroll up and
down the list of 99 programmable feature buttons
under the soft AOM.
LCD POWER SAVING FEATURE
SMT-i5243 LCD display has a power saving feature.The display will be automatically turned off after the pre-defined time. The default time setting is 08:00 to 18:00.
Users can change the period to meet their needs.
The display will automatically go dim after some inactivity during this pre-defined
time. The default dim time is 30 seconds but users can adjust it. The display will
automatically turn on with any user activity or incoming call.
To change the LCD power saving setting, press Menu, Phone, Screen, LCD Power
Saving.
Example of dialing a Speed Dial Number using the AOM function:
•
Press the AOM soft button, scroll to desired Speed Dial, then press Selector
button. The number is called from the phone.
NOTE: Some programmed features such as speed
dialing and DSS buttons can be used to process
calls; other programmed buttons such as Call buttons can only be viewed.
The soft AOM button can also display status indications for station keys, trunks,
voice mail messages, etc.
Example of programming a DSS button on the soft AOM:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button.
Press the Settings soft button then scroll to Application Setting, and press
OK.
Scroll to AOM Setting and press OK.
Scroll to soft AOM button to program (for example: 4).
Press the Edit soft button (the display will show feature).
Scroll to the feature option (for example: DSS).
Move down and enter the extension number (for example: 2003).
Move down, use the dial pad to enter name (for example: John Dow).
Press the Save soft button to exit and save the setting.
•
LCD Dim: The display will go dim after the defined time. Default time is 30
seconds.
•
LCD Dim Level: The display can go to one of the three dim levels. The default
level is High. The display will turn off or go dark after the dim time if the level
is set to off.
•
LCD Off: The display will be turned off with the defined time. The default
setting is “User Configuration” with “On Start Time: 08:00 and ON End Time:
18:00”.
OK/ENTER BUTTON - This function is used to enter, save or complete the
selected option in the display.
SPEAKER BUTTON - This function is used to go on and off hook in the handsfree speakerphone mode.
26
27
Home Page
BASIC MENUS
The basic menus screen is displayed if you select the Menu from the soft menu at
the left bottom of a idle screen. Using the Navigation button, move to a desired
function, and press the OK button to execute the function.
SOFT BUTTON STRUCTURE
SECTION 4.
PHONE FEATURES
MENU SOFT BUTTON
Button
Call
Sub-Item
01. Phonebook
02. Call Log
03. Messages
04. Conference
Service
01. Buddy List
02. Buddy Setting
03. Video Contents
04. Scheduler
Description
Provides the function to save, search and
register a phonebook.
Shows all information on inbound/
outbound calls and missed calls.
Enables the creation/saving and
sending/receiving of a message.
Supports a conference call.
The user can view the buddy list registered
by a user, or add the data (optional, requires
OfficeServ Messenger).
The status of a user who logged into the
presence server can be changed (optional,
requires OfficeServ Messenger).
The user can view and play the Video
Contents of the Video Contents Server
(optional).
The user can register and manage his
schedule.
The user can search and use the information provided from the XML browser server
(for future use).
Allows the user to set many phone options for the phone such as
ring tones, background screens, languages, etc.
05. XML Browser
Phone
01. UC Dial: Right
02. Screen
03. Sound
28
Options are DND and Absent Message.
Options are Display Time, Font, and LCD
Power.
Options are Volumes, Ring Tone, and Key
Tone.
29
Home Page
Button
Phone (Continuation)
Sub-Item
Description
04. Language
Options are English and Korean.
05. Security
Change Password, Dial and Phone
Lock.
Easy Install: Used to register and
authenticate the phone to the server.
06. Phone Information
Phone Information: Includes Version
Info, Network Info, and MAC Address.
Network: Options are Static IP, Dynamic
IP, PPPoE, VLAN (LAN Port), VLAN (PC
Port), 802.1x.
Server: Used to register the phone to
one or more Servers. Options are
Primary, System 1, System 2, System 3.
Extension Login: Used to log phone on
and off (Hot Desking).
CALL MENUS
Item
01. Phonebook
Personal Phonebook Unassigned
Search
Allows a user to search for a registered
phone number by name/number.
New
Saves a phone number or group name; and
allows a user to specify a speed dialing
number and ringtone.
S/W Upgrade: Upgrade Server, Upgrade:
used to upgrade software on phones.
Edit Group
Allows a user to delete/delete all the
phone numbers saved in the phone.
Factory Reset: Used to default the
phone settings.
Back
Used to move back one menu screen.
Home
Retuns to the phone main screen.
Call
Used to make a callback from the call log.
Save
This is used to save entries from call log to
phonebook.
Edit Mode
This is used to delete entries from the call
log.
Back
This is used to to move back one menu
screen.
Voice Mail (0)
Allows a user to retrieve voice mail
messages from the mailbox.
02. Call Log
This function is used to allow station users to set application
settings, call forwarding, absent messaging, AOM setting, view
Note: All options are not station network information, view phone firmware or initialize
explained in this manual. the phone. Other settings include the following:
Settings
03. Absent Message
04. Network Information
05. User Data
Management
30
Shows the entire list of phone numbers
stored in the phone.
This is a list of number that are not
assigned any group.
Returns to the phone main screen.
License: Display the licensing policy.
02. Call Forward
All
Description
Home
Phone Restart: Used to reboot the
phones.
The options are initiative
and menu driven for an
easy, user friendly menus 01. Application Setting
to guide you through
navigating the Setting
Menu Options.
Sub-Item
Options are Call, Video Call, Short
Message, Station on/off, AOM Setting,
Extension Login, and Headset.
Options are Not Use, All, Busy, No
Answer, Busy/No Answer, DND, and
Follow Me Status.
Used to leave station messages in
display informing other internal parties
of your status when your station is called.
Used to view the current network
settings.
Options are Clear User Settings, Export
Phonebook to USB, Import Phonebook
from USB.
03. Messages
Station Message (0)
Email (0)
Short Message (0)
Allows a user to retrieve station messages
(internal) from another user.
Allows a user to to view how many e-mail
messages have been received via IP-UMS
(optional).
Allows a user to retrieve and send internal
short messages (SMS) like text message to
other internal phones. [Not Supported Over
Networking]
31
Home Page
Item
04. Conference
Sub-Item
Description
Allows a user to setup (show, add and edit) a conference group
to call multiple parties simultaneously to join the conference call.
Home
Add Group
Edit
Delete
Back
01. PHONEBOOK
Company phonebook requires setup by the System
Administrator.
Returns to the phone main screen.
Allows a user to create a new conference
group with up to 4 members.
Allows a user to modify the numbers
saved in the group.
Allows a user the option to delete an
entry in the conference group.
Used to move back one menu screen.
PERSONAL PHONEBOOK
NOTE: Personal phonebook is stored locally in phone memory.
All
Shows the entire list of phone numbers saved in the phone book.
•
•
Press the Phonebook button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK, scroll to All, and then press OK.
The entire list of phone numbers saved in the phone book is shown on the
screen. Using the Navigation button, move to a desired entry, and select the
Call soft button to place a call.
Unassigned Group
The Unassigned option is a list of all the phonebook entries that have not been
assigned to a group. Once an entry is assigned to a group, the entry is removed
from the unassigned list.
TO CREATE A PHONEBOOK GROUP
To create a group in the phonebook:
•
•
•
Press the Phonebook button, then press the Edit Group soft button, then
press the Add Group soft button.
Using the key pad, input the name of the group and ring tone, then press the
Save soft button. See Text Input Method.
Press Save soft button to exit.
TO MOVE UNASSIGNED ENTRY TO PHONEBOOK GROUP
•
•
•
•
•
32
Press the Phonebook button, scroll to Unassigned option then press OK button.
Scroll to the entry that is to be moved to an assigned group and press OK button.
Press Edit Mode soft button, scroll to and highlight the desired entry, press
OK. Scroll to Group option.
Using the Navigation button, move Left or Right to the group name (eg;
Personal) which you want to move the entry into.
Once the correct entry is displayed, press the Save button. The entry is now
assigned to the group.
33
Home Page
Navigation Right or Left button to display only missed calls, incoming calls, or
outgoing calls. The type of calls is classified by icon.
Search
Allows a user to search by name/number for a phone saved in the phone book.
•
•
Press the Phonebook button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK.
Press the Search soft button from the dial pad enter the characters of the
name (case sensitive) or number to search and press the OK button, the
matching phone number is displayed. Move to a desired name/number using
the Navigation button, and select the Call soft button to place a call.
Add New Entry to Phone Book [+]
This is the function used to register a phone number.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Phonebook button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK.
Press the New soft button, and then New.
Enter a name by using the dial pad, scroll down and enter a mobile number,
home number, office number, internal extension number, fax number,
and e-mail address.
Assign a Group (if needed).
Select a Ring Tone.
Add Memo information (up to 50 characters).
Press the Save soft button to save the new entry to the Phone Book.
DELETE / DELETE ALL
This is the function used to delete all the phone numbers saved in the phone
book.
•
•
•
•
Press the Phonebook button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK.
Scroll to All and press OK button. Scroll to entry to delete.
Press Edit Mode soft button. Press Del. to delete the selected entry or Del All.
Press the Yes to Delete entry.
DELETE / DELETE ALL
This is the function used to delete an entry or all entries in the Call Log.
•
•
•
•
TO ADD A CALL LOG ENTRY TO PHONE BOOK
•
Outgoing
Incoming
Missed Icons
This function lists all the recent numbers for outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
•
•
34
Press the Call Log soft button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Call Log, press OK. A phone number list of recent outgoing, incoming and
missed calls is displayed.
Scroll to an entry and press the Call soft button to dial the number. Press the
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Call Log, press OK. Scroll to desired Call
Log entry and press the Save soft button then press the New soft button.
Make changes to the name and number if necessary. When finished, press the
Save soft button. The Call Log number is added as a new entry to the phonebook list.
03. MESSAGES
1. Voice Mail
This function allows users to retrieve voice mail message from the mailbox.
•
Press the Message button—OR—press Menu soft button, scroll to
Messages, press OK, scroll to Voice Mail [ ], and then press OK to access the
voicemail box and retrieve messages.
2. Station Message
This function allows users to retrieve station messages (internal) from another
user.
•
02. CALL LOG
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Call Log, press OK.
Scroll to entry to delete.
Press Edit Mode soft button. Press Del. to delete the selected entry or Del All.
Press the Yes to Delete entry.
•
•
•
Press the Message button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Messages, press OK, scroll to Station Message [ ], and then press OK.
To return a call to the station that left the message: press the Reply soft button.
To delete the station message: press the Clear soft button.
To view the next station message: press the Next soft button.
3. E-Mail
This function allows users to view the amount of e-mails for a station user’s
account. This function is only available when the IP-UMS application is enabled.
Please refer to the IP-UMS manuals for detailed operation.
35
Home Page
4. Short Message (SMS)
04. CONFERENCE [Group]
This function is used to send and create internal short messages or text messaging.
This function allows a user to setup a conference group
to call multiple parties simultaneously to join the conference call.
INBOX
•
•
•
•
Press the Message button—OR—press the Menu soft button.
Scroll to Short Message, press OK.
Scroll to Inbox, then press OK to view a short text message(s) in you Inbox.
Press the Edit Mode soft button, then the Delete/Delete All soft button, and
the Yes soft button to delete the selected short text message or press the
Back soft button to exit Short Message.
NEW MESSAGE (SEND)
CREATING CONFERENCE GROUP
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Conference, and press OK.
Press Add Group soft button, enter the name and phone number (up to 4
numbers) of the parties included in the Conference Group.
Press the Save soft button.
TO CREATE AN UNSUPERVISED CONFERENCE
This function is used to create and send a new short text message.
•
•
•
•
•
TO DISCONNECT A PARTY FROM CONFERENCE GROUP
•
•
Press the Message button—OR—press the Menu soft button.
Scroll to Short Message, press OK.
Press New soft button. Write or create a new short message and press the
Number Set soft button. See Text Input Method on how to enter characters in
text messages.
Enter the internal extension(s) to send the short message. Scroll to other
entries and enter the station number to send to more users. (Each short message can be sent to 1 through 10 users).
Press the Send soft button to deliver the short message to other user’s inbox.
NOTES:
1.
When the message is sent successfully, the message “Completed” is displayed.
When the message fails to send the “Failed to send” is displayed.
2.
SMS messages can only be sent to internally ITP, SMT-W, or SMT-i phones.TDM
and single line phones cannot send or receive SMS messages. SMS messaging
is not supported over networking.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
36
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Conference button, and press OK.
Scroll to the Name of the Group to be edited and press Edit soft button.
Edit the group name. When complete, press the Save soft button to save
changes.
TO EDIT CONFERENCE GROUP PHONE NUMBER LIST
•
•
•
This function is used to create and send a new short text message.
Press the Message button—OR—press the Menu soft button.
Scroll to Short Message, press OK.
Scroll to Outbox, then press OK to view short text message sent from your
phone.
Press the Edit Mode soft button, then Del/Del All soft button to delete the
short text message(s) or press the Back soft button to exit SMS.
Highlight the party to be disconnected from the conference group.
Press the Disc. soft button. The party is disconnected.
Press the Reconnect soft button to call back and add the party back to the
conference group.
TO EDIT A CONFERENCE GROUP
OUTBOX
•
•
•
During the conference, the host can press the Host soft button.
The host is dropped and the other parties remain in conference.
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Conference button, and press OK.
Scroll to the Name of the Group to be edited and press Edit soft button.
Edit the name and phone number list—OR—
Press Search soft button to search for phone number to add to group from
the phonebook. Highlight the entry and press the OK button to add the number to the Conference Group list.
When complete with the editing, press the Save soft button to save changes.
37
Home Page
SERVICE SOFT BUTTON
03. Sound
Allows a user to set the alarm clock function.
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Service button—OR—press the Menu
soft button, scroll to Scheduler, then press OK.
Press the New soft button.
Enter the Title, Place of the scheduler using the dial pad and navigation buttons.
Enter the Date, Time, Alarm Type, and Ring Tone. Press Save soft button
when finished.
TO DELETE A SCHEDULE
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press Menu soft button. Scroll to Service button, and press the OK button.
Select Scheduler and press the OK button.
To delete a current schedule, press the All List soft button.
Select and highlight the entry to be deleted and press Delete soft button—
OR—press the Delete All soft button to clear all schedules.
Select Yes to confirm or No to deny the deletion of a schedule(s).
Press Back soft buttons twice to exit the scheduler.
PHONE SOFT BUTTON
Allows the user to set many phone options for phone
such as ring tones, background screens, languages, etc.
01. UC Dial: Right
This option is used to select which function will be enabled when the selector
switch is moved to the right position.
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone.
Scroll to UC Dial: Right and press OK.
Select DND or Absent Message and press Save soft button.
02. Screen
•
•
38
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone and press OK. Select Screen and
press OK. Set the following Idle Screen Decoration, Brightness, LCD Power
Saving, and Screen Saver of the SMT-i5243 phone, select the option and
adjust the screen settings.
Press the Save soft button to store the screen settings.
•
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone. Select Sound and press OK. Set
the following Volumes, Ring Tone, Key Tone, and Short Message Tone of the
SMT-i5243 phone, select the option and adjust the sound settings.
Press the Save soft button to save the sound settings.
04. Language
•
•
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone. Select Language and press OK.
Select English (Default English).
Press the Save soft button.
05. Security
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone. Scroll to Security and press OK.
Enter the station password [default 1234].
Press OK soft button to Change Password.
Scroll to Call Lock to Unlock, Lock Out (Outgoing), or Lock All.
Scroll to Phone Lock to Unlock or Lock the Menu.
Press the Save soft button.
06. Phone Information
Allows a user to set up the following options: Easy Install Wizard (registering the
phone), Phone Information (Version, Network, MAC Address), Network (Static,
Dynamic, etc.), Server (Phone can register to 1 to 4 servers), Video Option,
Extension Login (logging in and out IP phones), Software Upgrade (Upgrading
the phone or server software), Factory Reset (defaulting the phone), and Phone
Restart (rebooting the phone).
NOTE: The license policy can be viewed by pressing the License soft button.
SETTING SOFT BUTTON
This function is used to allow station users to set
Application Settings, Call Forward, Absent Message,
Network Information, and User Data Management.
39
Home Page
FUNC. SOFT BUTTON
This function allows a user one touch easy access to
many of the system features. When pressed, the following options are displayed: Last Number Redial,
Save/Repeat, Speed Dial, Directory, VM Message,
Station Message, Page Pickup, Directory Pickup, DND, In/Out Group, Status
Message, Hold Pickup, Page, Meet Me Page, OHVA Block, Group Pickup, and
My Group Pickup. The Navigation button can be used to scroll up and down the
list of features under the Func. button.
NOTE: For detailed operation of the list of features under the Func. soft button,
please refer to the System Features section of this user guide.
AOM SOFT BUTTON
SECTION 5.
OFFICESERV™ 7000
SYSTEM FEATURES
This function is used to display all 99 programmable feature buttons of the phone. The Navigation button can
be used to scroll up and down the list of 99 programmable feature buttons under the AOM module. The feature
buttons can be programmed by a technician.
40
41
Home Page
OUTSIDE CALLS
MAKING CALLS FROM AOM
Note: When making calls, internal or outside calls, in order to access the Selector
button screens, press the Right soft button to toggle to AOM mode. Then you can
utilize the Navigation button to scroll the list.
•
•
When the desired number is highlighted, press the associated Selector
button.
The number will be automatically dialed.
NOTES:
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set
a callback, the cursor associated with the Callback button will be solid black.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing.
BUSY STATION CALLBACK
When you call another station and receive a busy signal:
•
•
•
Press the Callback button, if programmed, or dial 44.
When the busy station becomes free, your keyset will ring.
Lift the handset or press the Call soft button to call the now idle station.
Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device. To answer
calls ringing this device, dial 67—OR—press the UA button. This device can operate in any one of the six different ring plans.
NOTES:
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set
a callback, the cursor associated with the Callback button, will be solid black.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Call soft button before dialing.
CANCELING CALLBACK
RECALL DIAL TONE
A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set a callback, the cursor associated with the Callback button, will be solid black.
•
To cancel a callback:
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
Press the New button to disconnect your existing call, wait for dial tone and
then make a new call on the same line.
NOTE: If this button does not appear on your keyset, the Flash button may be programmed to recall dial tone.
SENDING A FLASH
While on an outside call, press the Flash button to send a flash to the telephone
company. This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use.
NOTE: Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit.
BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK
If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line, this means that
the line or group of lines is busy.
•
•
•
•
42
Press the Callback button, if programmed, or dial 44, you will hear confirmation tone.
Hang up or press Speaker button.
When the line becomes free, the system will call you back.
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer, wait for dial tone and
dial the telephone number or speed dial number again.
•
•
Press the Callback button, if programmed, or dial 44.The display will show the
callback details, press the Clear soft button.
This will cancel the last set callback and display the next set callback. This
process is repeated until all callbacks are cleared from memory.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature is turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press the Call soft button before dialing.
BUSY STATION CAMP-ON
When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to
wait for a callback:
MANUAL CAMP-ON
•
•
•
•
Press the Camp-On soft button or dial 45.
The called station will receive off-hook ring tone repeated every few seconds
and the cursor associated with the first available Call button will flash black to
indicate your call is waiting.
Wait for the called party to answer.
The called station must release its first call or place it on hold before answering your camp-on.
43
Home Page
NOTES:
1. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no available button to
accept your call. Hang up or leave a message.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Call soft button before dialing.
INTERCOM CALLS
VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE
AUTO CAMP-ON
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
you will hear the caller’s announcement.
When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the
camp on button every time you call a busy station, you can set your phone for auto
camp-on.
•
•
•
•
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
to ON.
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 081 to turn On auto camp-on or dial 080 to turn it Off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
•
Press the Speaker button to turn on the microphone and speak handsfree—
OR—lift the handset to reply.
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the Speaker button.
AUTO ANSWER MODE
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
then automatically answer the call.
•
•
Your microphone and speaker are turned on and you can speak handsfree. For
privacy, use the handset.
To finish the call, replace the handset.
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
to ON.
CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR
•
•
Dial 0 to call your system operator or group of operators.
If you want to call a specific operator, dial that person’s extension number.
NOTE: If the Hot keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Call soft button or dial 0 before you begin dialing.
44
45
Home Page
CALL PROCESSING
SYSTEM HOLD
When you are connected to any call, press Hold. The call will flash at the keyset. If
this call appears on a line button at other keysets, it will flash at those keysets also.
•
To take the caller off hold, press that button and the flashing LED will go
steady again. Resume the conversation—OR—press the Hold button. The
flashing LED will go steady again and you will be connected to the call again.
Resume the conversation.
NOTE: While on a call, pressing a line button, route button or flashing Call button
will automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call. See
Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset.
EXCLUSIVE HOLD
To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it:
•
•
Press the Hold button twice.The call will flash on your keyset and this line will
show a steady indication on other keysets.
To retrieve the call, press the flashing line button or press the Hold button a
third time.
NOTE: Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold.
REMOTE HOLD
When you wish to place an outside call on hold at another station.
•
•
Press Transfer and dial the station number (or press the appropriate DSS button)
Press the Hold button. This will place the call on system hold on an available
Call button or Line button at the remote station and return you to dial tone.
NOTES:
1. If the destination station does not have any free Call buttons or line buttons
you will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other party by pressing the Transfer button.
2. Intercom calls cannot be put on remote hold.
46
HOLD RECALL
If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer, it will recall your station. The
button that the call appears on will have a slow flashing indicator.
•
•
When your phone rings, lift the handset or press the Speaker button to
answer the recall.
If you do not answer this recall within a pre-programmed period of time, it will
go to the system operator.
NOTE: The Led will flash amber during hold recall.
CONSULTATION HOLD
When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with another extension:
•
•
•
•
Press the Transfer button; you will receive transfer dial tone.Your call is placed
on transfer hold.
Dial the extension number.
Consult with the internal party.
Press Transfer to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call.
NOTE: Repeatedly pressing the Transfer button will toggle between the outside
party and internal extension. If necessary you may disconnect either one of the
parties by pressing the Cancel soft button.
RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT ANOTHER
STATION [HOLD PICKUP]
When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset, press the Line button with
the flashing indicator.
When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset, dial 12 plus the line
number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Call soft button before you begin dialing.
47
Home Page
CALL TRANSFER
TRANSFER TO VOICE MAIL
Transfer is used to send any calls to another extension in one of two ways.You can
do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can
do a blind transfer without notification.
This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailbox.Your keyset must have
a correctly programmed VT button to accomplish this. To transfer a call directly to
a voice mailbox:
•
•
•
•
•
•
While on a call, press the Transfer button and dial an extension number or
group number. Your call is automatically put on transfer hold—OR—press a
DSS button or station group button. Your call is automatically put on transfer
hold.
Hang up when you hear ringing (this is an unscreened or blind transfer)—
OR—wait for the called party to answer and advise him/her of the call and
hang up. If the transfer is refused, you will be reconnected to the outside line
when the called station hangs up or you can press Transfer to return to the
outside party.
If you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the first
station to hang up, simply press another DSS button—OR—press the Call
button or C.O. line button to return to the outside party and begin the transfer process again.
When you are transferring a call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto
Answer, the transferred call will always ring.
NOTES:
1. After the inside party answers, you may alternate back and forth between the
parties by pressing the Transfer button.
2. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to receive another call. Press Transfer to return to the other party.
3. You cannot transfer an Intercom call by pressing a DSS button.You must press
the Transfer button and dial the destination extension number.
CALL WAITING
If an outside call has been camped-on to your phone or another station has
camped-on to you:
•
•
•
You will hear a tone in the earpiece and the call that is waiting for you
(camped-on) will flash. In addition the bottom line of the display will indicate
the number of the station or trunk party camped-on.
Press the flashing button to answer; your other call will go on hold automatically if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press
Hold and then the flashing button—OR—finish the first call and hang up; the
waiting call will ring.
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer.
NOTE: Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.When using the speakerphone
the camp-on tone will come through the speaker.
CALL FORWARD OPTIONS
A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations. Call
forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display features. To review or change call forward options:
TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON
•
When you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal,
you may camp the call on to this station. Simply hang up when you hear the busy
signal. The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them.
•
•
NOTE: If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to
receive another call. Press Transfer to return to the outside caller.
•
•
•
•
48
While on a call, press the VT button and dial the mailbox number.
Hang up when dialing is completed.
Press the Menu button, press the Settings soft button, scroll to the Call
Forward entry and press OK.
Scroll to the desired Forward Option.
Enter the Forward Destination, and press the Save soft button.
—OR—
Press Transfer 102.
Dial 0-5 to select the forward type (e.g., 1)—OR—
Press the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] to select the forward type
Press the Right soft key to move the cursor.
Dial the destination number (e.g., 202)—OR—
Press the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] to select the destination and
press the Right soft key to move the cursor.
Dial 1 to set—OR—press the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] to select
Yes or No and press Transfer to store and exit.
—OR—
49
Home Page
To Forward ALL Calls to Another Station
GROUP CALL PICKUP
•
•
To pick up (answer) a call ringing in any pickup group, lift the handset and dial 66
plus the desired group number (01-10 on the OfficeServ 7030, 01-20 on the
OfficeServ 7200-S, 01-99, and 01-99 on the OfficeServ 7000 Series) or press the
flashing GROUP PICKUP button if available.
Dial 601 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To Forward Calls to Another Station when you are on the Phone (BUSY):
•
•
Dial 602 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To Forward Calls to Another Station when you DO NOT ANSWER:
•
•
Dial 603 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
When you have both Forward ON BUSY and Forward NO ANSWER
Destination Programmed:
•
•
You can activate them simultaneously.
Dial 604. Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To Forward Calls when DND is Activated:
•
•
Dial 605 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To Forward Calls to the Station Where You Currently Are
(FORWARD FOLLOW ME):
•
•
Dial 606 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
NOTES:
1. A group pickup button can have an extender for a specific pickup group.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Call soft button before dialing the access code.
MY GROUP PICKUP
If desired, a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same
pickup group as you are in. Like “66” above except you do not need to dial the
desired group number. See your installation company for the assigned access
code. MY GROUP PICKUP: __________________.
PRIVACY RELEASE
This feature will allow another station to join in our conversation by releasing privacy on the C.O. from your phone.
To Release Privacy: While you are talking on a C.O. line and you wish to have other
internal parties (or up to three) join the conversation.
•
To clear all call forward conditions set at your station lift the handset and dial 600.
STATION CALL PICKUP
To pick up (answer) a call ringing at another station, lift the handset and dial 65 plus
the extension number of the ringing phone.If you have a DP key assigned with a station number, you only need to press this DP (Direct Pickup) key with the flashing
light to answer this ringing station.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Call soft button before you begin dialing.
50
Press the PRB button (the PRB indicator will be steady). Inform the other party
that he/she may now join the conversation.
After the other party (or parties) has joined the conversation and you wish to
return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation, press the
PRB button a second time, the PRB button LED will be off.
To Join a Non-Private Conversation: When someone has informed you that you
can join a conversation:
•
•
Press the C.O. line button that he/she has indicated OR
Dial the C.O. line number that he/she has indicated.
51
Home Page
DIALING FEATURES
All “DIALING FEATURES” instructions are written to support Overlap Dialing mode.
This is the technical name for dialing from a telephone as it has been for many
years. In recent years the cell phone industry has changed the cell phones to use
Enblock Dialing. With this dialing mode all the digits are dialed and then sent to
the carrier after pressing the CALL key. Please check your telephone setup to confirm what dialing mode is used.
For the purposes of programming
speed dial numbers, the programmable buttons are know as A, B, C, D, E,
and F.
•
•
•
•
SPEED DIALING
You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system-wide
speed dial list of numbers 500–999 or from your personal list of numbers 00–49.
Your system may be set for 950 system wide numbers. If so the system speed dial
access codes are 050~999 and the station speed dial codes are 000~049.
•
•
•
From the idle screen with the handset on-hook, press the AOM soft button, or
dial 16, scroll to the Speed Dial button, press the OK button.
Dial the desired speed dial bin number.
The telephone number is automatically dialed for you.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Call soft button before you begin dialing.
PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED
DIAL NUMBERS
You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial
list. A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers, 00–49. See your system administrator to determine the amount assigned to your station. The phone itself maintains 1000 station speed dial numbers.
•
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 105.
Dial a speed dial number (00–49).
Dial a line or line group access code.
Dial the telephone number to be stored (24 digits maximum). It can include #,
,, FLASH, CONVERSION, and PAUSE.
Press Transfer to store the number.
•
•
•
A (Not Used) & D (Conversion)
B (Flash) & E (Hide)
C (Pause) & F (Not Used)
The A button is not used.
The B button inserts a flash.
The C button inserts a pause.
(Clear)
The D button is used for pulse to
tone conversion. If your system
uses rotary (or pulse) dialing C.O.
lines, pressing D while entering a
speed dial number causes all subsequent digits to be sent as DTMF
tones.
The E button is used to hide digits. Display keyset users may want to hide
some speed dial numbers so that they will not show in the display. When you
are entering a telephone number, press E. All subsequent digits will be hidden. Press E again to begin displaying digits.
The F button is used to enter a speed dial name or number. See Personal Speed
Dial Names under Display Features.
Use the Hold button to clear a speed dial number.
DIRECTORY DIALING
•
•
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Directory, press OK.
Press Func. soft button, scroll to the desired directory, press OK.
STATION DIRECTORY - Accesses Station name directory.
PERSONAL DIRECTORY - Accesses your personal speed dial name list.
SYSTEM DIRECTORY - Accesses System speed dial name list.
•
•
•
•
Enter the first letter of the desired party.
Press the +/- buttons to scroll to the desired entry.
Press the Func. soft button.
Select the appropriate operation, press OK.
DIAL - Dials the displayed number.
EXIT - Exit programming and return to idle screen.
PREVIOUS - Moves you to the previous entry.
NEXT - Moves you to the next entry.
•
Press Back to return to idle screen.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Call soft key before you begin dialing.
52
53
Home Page
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
PAGING AND MESSAGING
To redial the last outgoing telephone number you dialed, press the Func. soft button, scroll to Last Redial, or dial 19.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Call soft button before you begin dialing.
2. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL
To save the number you just dialed for later use, press the Save/Repeat button
before hanging up.
To redial this saved number at any time, press the Save/Repeat, press OK button
or dial 17. The same line will be selected for you.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Call soft button before you begin dialing.
2. The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another
number.
3. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
AUTOMATIC REDIAL/RETRY
When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal, the system can
automatically redial the number for you. It will automatically redial at a pre-programmed interval for up to 15 attempts.
•
•
•
When you hear a busy signal, press the Retry button.
The system will reserve the line and automatically redial the same number for
you. You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker. The microphone is muted.
When the called party answers, lift the handset or press the flashing Speaker
to begin speaking.
NOTES:
1. If you make another call, auto-redial is canceled.
2. To cancel an auto-retry, lift and replace the handset.
PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER
When making an outside call on a dial pulse line, press #. All digits dialed after the
# with be sent as tones.
54
MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE
To make an announcement through the keyset speakers in the idle condition:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Scroll to Page button or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
NOTES:
1. If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press Page
and dial a zone number.
2. If allowed by your system administrator you may be able to initiate a page
from a speakerphone by pressing the Page key or dialing 55 without lifting
the handset.
MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE
To make an announcement through the external paging speakers:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Scroll to Page button or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 5, 6, 7 or 8—OR—dial 9 to page all external
zones.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
NOTES:
1. If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press Page
and dial a zone number.
2. If allowed by your system administrator you may be able to initiate a page
from a speakerphone by pressing the Page key or dialing 55 without lifting
the handset.
ALL PAGE
To page all designated keysets in internal zone 0 and all external zones at the same
time:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Scroll to Page button or dial 55.
Dial , or press the All Page button.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
55
Home Page
NOTES:
1. The LED on the Page button will only light when an All Page is in progress.
2. If allowed by your system administrator you may be able to initiate a page
from a speakerphone by pressing the Page key or dialing 55 without lifting
the handset.
MEET ME PAGE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the Meet Me Page (MMPG) button or dial 54.
Dial the desired zone number.
After the attention tone, instruct the paged person to dial 56.
Press Answer Wait button.
Remain off-hook until the person dials 56 from any phone.
The paged person will be automatically connected with you.
CALL PARK AND PAGE
When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his/her desk, you can
park the call prior to paging. The OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ
7000 Series systems offer two different methods:
AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE BUTTON
•
•
•
While in conversation, press the Page button. The call is automatically parked
at your station.
Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number.
Make announcement indicating your extension number or the line number.
Hang up.
To retrieve an automatically parked call:
•
Dial 10 plus the number that was announced. If you have a PAGPK button,
press it and dial the number that was announced. If you have a Park button,
press it and dial the announced orbit number.
•
You will be connected to the parked call.
NOTES:
1. If the call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it will recall
your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park and page
intercom calls.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Call soft button before you begin dialing.
MANUAL PARK ORBITS
SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION
•
•
When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy
signal, you can leave a message indication:
•
•
•
While in conversation, press the Park button.
Entered a desired orbit number (0-9), if the orbit number is busy dial another
orbit number. Display users can press , to automatically place the call in any
available orbit number and see the number in the display.
Remember the selected orbit number.
Replace the handset when finished.
Lift the handset and make a page announcement as previously described
(example:“John Smith park two”).
•
•
Scroll to Message or dial 43 and receive confirmation tone. Hang up.
The message button on the Main Programmable Button screen and the TSI
will flash red at the called station.
To retrieve a parked call from orbit:
NOTES:
1. A station can have up to five message indications.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Call soft button before you begin dialing.
•
•
CANCELING MESSAGES
Press the Park button and dial the announced orbit number (0-9).
You will be connected to the parked call.
NOTES:
1. You must have a Park button or park access code to retrieve and place calls in
park orbits.
2. If the parked call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it
will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park
and page intercom calls.
3. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Call soft button before you begin dialing.
56
To cancel a message indication that you left at another station, dial 42 plus the
extension number of the station at which you left a message.
•
To cancel all message indications left at your keyset, dial 42 plus your extension. Your Message button indicator will stop flashing and the TSI will go out.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the
handset or press the Call soft button before you begin dialing.
57
Home Page
•
•
—OR—
Press Message button, scroll to Station Messages, press OK.
Press Clear.
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
RETURNING MESSAGES
LOGGING IN AND OUT
•
If enabled, your SMT-i5243 telephone may require you to log in before making or
receiving calls. In these cases your telephone system administrator will provide
you with an extension number, password, and the feature code used to log out.
•
•
Press Message button, scroll to Station Message, press OK, press REPLY or
dial 43. The first station that left a message will be called automatically. If that
station does not answer, the called station Message button indicator will continue to flash and the TSI will stay on.
Repeat until all messages have been returned in the order received.
Your Message button indicator will stop flashing and the TSI will turn off
when all messages have been returned.
NOTES:
1. Display keyset users can view message indications and return them in any
order. See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Call soft button before you begin dialing.
3. If a message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer, you must
manually cancel the message after it has been returned.
PROGRAMMED MESSAGES
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you can leave a
programmed station message. Display stations calling you will see this message
and be informed of your status or follow your instructions.
•
•
•
Dial 48 plus any of the message codes (01–20) listed on the back of this user
guide.
To cancel any of these messages you might have selected, dial 48 plus 00.
Press Transfer to exit and store your selection.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Call soft button.
You can have multiple programmed message buttons (PMSG) and each one can
have a different message code:
•
•
58
Press any programmed message (PMSG) button. The message is set and the
PGM MSG button indicator will be lit steady. Press the button again to turn off
the programmed message and the indicator will go blank.
Pressing another programmed message (PMSG) button will turn the previous
one off and set a different programmed message.
To log in:
•
•
•
At Extension Login Screen enter your ID which is your extension number.
Scroll down to the password field and enter your station password.
Press on Save soft button or OK button.
To log out:
•
Dial the feature code provided by your administrator (for example 77).
DO NOT DISTURB
Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset.
•
•
While on-hook, press the DND button or dial 401. The DND button indicator
will be lit steady to remind you of this mode.
To cancel DND, press the DND button again or dial 400.The DND button indicator goes blank. You can make calls while in the DND mode.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Call soft button.
2. If you place your keyset in DND mode and you do not have a DND button,
your Telephone Status Indicator button will fast flash red to indicate DND
status.
3. The selector switch can also be used to set/cancel DND.
ONE TIME DND
If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call, you
can press the DND button and place your station in Do Not Disturb. When you
hang up at the end of the call, DND will be automatically canceled and your keyset will be able to receive new calls. This feature requires a DND button.
59
Home Page
MUTE
You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversation:
•
•
Press the Mute button. The Mute button indicator will be lit steady.
To resume speaking, press the Mute button again. The Mute button indicator
goes blank.
BACKGROUND MUSIC
When a music source is supplied, you may listen to music through the speaker in
your keyset:
•
•
While on-hook, press the Hold button to hear music.
Press the Hold button again to turn music off.
You can set the level of background music by using the Volume buttons while listening to the music. This does not affect the speakerphone level.
ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP
To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to
a computer modem on your PC.
•
•
Press the EP button for that station on your keyset and the call is automatically moved to your keyset.
The single line extension on your modem will be disconnected.
NOTE: You must have an assigned (EP button) button on your regular keyset, for
the single line station.
ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE
When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone:
•
•
•
You will receive three short rings repeated.
Lift the handset. You are connected to the door phone.
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
CALLING THE DOOR PHONE/
ROOM MONITOR
You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in
another room.
•
•
•
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Call soft button.
EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY [HOT LINE]
If programmed, an executive boss and a secretary can have a hot line between
them. When the executive station is in the DND mode, all of its calls will ring the
secretary station. If the secretary does not answer, the caller will go to the secretary’s voice mail box if setup.
When an Executive/Secretary hotline is programmed to this keyset, the keyset
offers an additional screen option. This screen has options for setting the status of
the keyset user. This status update is viewable to EasySet users only.
•
•
Either person can press the Boss button to make a voice call to the other station.
Using the hot line will override DND at the other station.This button will have
a flashing indication when the other station is in use.
To transfer a call to a Boss in DND:
•
•
Press the Boss button.
Wait for the Boss to answer, then announce the call and hang up to complete
the transfer—OR—hang up to complete a blind transfer.
Executive/Secretary (Messaging):
When the Boss or Secretary is needing to inform the other party of their current
status, they can send a message to their display. Both the Boss and Secretary
phone must be SMT-i5200 Series model phones for Executive/Secretary
Messaging to work.
•
•
•
•
60
Dial the extension number of the door phone.
You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have a conversation.
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
Scroll to EXE/SECR MSG, scroll to Messages, and press Select soft button.
Select and hightlight one of the Return On messages and press the Edit soft
button.
Press and hold the Delete soft button to erase the default message.
Using the dial pad, type in the new message (refer to Text Input Method).
61
Home Page
•
When finished press the OK soft button then the Send soft button to display
the message on the other (Boss/Secretary) phone.
GROUP LISTENING
When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset, you may want
other people to hear the distant party’s voice over the speaker:
•
•
•
•
Press the Group Listen button to turn on the speaker. The microphone is not
in use, so the distant party does not hear other parties present in your office.
Press Group Listen again to turn the speaker off and resume private conversation.
Repeat if necessary.
—OR—
During a conversation, scroll to Group Listen.
LOCKING YOUR KEYSET
You can lock your keyset to control misuse of your phone while you are away. You
can unlock it when you return.
•
•
•
•
CHANGE PASSWORD: This can be used to change the station password.
CALL LOCK: Allows the station user the option to select Lock All, Lock
Outgoing, or Unlocked.
1.
2.
NOTE: Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office, it may be
advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up. This will eliminate a momentary squeal.
ACCOUNT CODES
When enabled, your system allows calls to be charged to different accounts. You
can enter account codes either by dialing the full code, by entering an account
code “bin number”, or by pressing your ACC (Account) key if one is assigned. Bin
numbers are a 3 digit short code that will automatically insert the appropriate
account code. Account codes may be a maximum of 12 digits (# may be used); if
the account code is to be less than 12 characters you may end the code by pressing , or the right soft key.The type of code used is determined by your telephone
system administrator. Codes can be entered before or during a call as follows:
To enter an account code before placing the call:
•
•
•
•
Press your ACC (Account) key or dial 47.
Dial the account code or bin number.
You will receive a confirmation tone and display.
When prompted dial a trunk or trunk group (i.e. 9) and the telephone number
to call.
To enter an account code by interrupting the conversation:
•
•
While on an outside call press the ACC (Account) key or press Transfer followed by 47.
Dial the account number or bin number (if you are entering an account code
you will need to press your ACC (Account) key or right soft key to finalize the
entry).
Press Menu button and press Phone soft button.
Scroll to Security option.
Enter the Password [Default Password is “1234”]. Press OK.
There are three options available:
3.
•
•
•
UNLOCKED - No restrictions. User may complete internal and outside
calls.
LOCK OUTGOING - Restricted to incoming calls only. No outside calls can
be made. When 911 is programmed, 911 emergency dialing is allowed.
LOCK ALL - No calls, incoming or outgoing allowed to or from the set.
PHONE LOCK: Allows the user to lock or unlock the menu from being
changed at the station.
Use the navigation soft button to scroll Left/Right to choose the desired
mode.
Press the Save soft button.
Press the Back soft button to return to Menu, and press Home soft button
again to return to idle screen.
MANUAL SIGNALLING
Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another station, regardless of the status of your phone (on-hook, off-hook, handsfree, DND, or
ringing).
To send a signal to another station:
•
•
Press the Manual Signalling (MS) button.
You may press the MS button repeatedly to send multiple signals to the designated station.
NOTE:Your phone must have a Manual Signalling (MS) button with a station number extender assigned to it. Manual Signalling will override DND.
NOTE: If you make an error simply repeat the procedure with the correct code.
Only the most recent account code dialed will be recorded.
62
63
Home Page
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
IN GROUP/OUT OF GROUP
Keysets may receive a voice announcement while on another call. The calling station must have an OHVA button. When you are in DND, you cannot receive OHVA
calls. The OHVA feature will work with intercom and transferred calls.
If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group, you can remove your keyset from
the group and then put it back in. While you are out of the group, you can receive
calls to your extension number but not calls to the group number. If you have an
IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button with the group number assigned.
When you receive an OHVA and secure OHVA is ON, you will hear the announcement in the handset receiver, if you are using the handset. If secure OHVA is OFF
then you will hear the announcement on the speaker, if you are talking on the
handset. If you are using the speakerphone the announcement will always be
heard through the speaker.
•
•
Press the IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button. The button indicator will be lit steady
when your keyset is in the group.
Press the IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button again to exit the group and the indicator will go blank. Repeat as necessary.
To make an off-hook voice announcement:
If you do not have an IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Dial the extension number or press the DSS button.
When you receive a busy signal, press the OHVA button.
After the attention tone, begin speaking.
Finish the call by replacing the handset.
Press the flashing Call button on your keyset. This will place the original party
on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party.
To return to your first party, press the button corresponding to your original
call. This will disconnect the OHVA call.
Dial the IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) access code number ________________, then
the group number, then 0 to exit the group or 1 to enter the group.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press Call soft button.
The IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button can include an extender to indicate the specific group that this button will affect. This means that if you are in multiple groups,
you can decide for which groups you will receive calls.
NOTES:
1. When you are voice announcing to a station close to you, use the handset to
avoid an echo effect.
2. You cannot off-hook voice announce to single line telephones.
OHVA BLOCK
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Block (Block) button. Pressing this
button will prevent anyone from making an OHVA to you until you press the button again and cancel the blocking.
OHVA REJECT
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject (Reject) button. Pressing
this button while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing
party and return you to your original call.
64
65
Home Page
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET
•
•
Redial the new passcode. If successful, you will hear two beeps. Four beeps
indicate an incorrect code to confirm, reenter the code again.
Press Transfer to store the new passcode.
AME PASSWORD
SET ANSWER MODE (INTERCOM)
This feature allows customers using the AME feature to enable password protection. This will prevent unauthorized users from listening to your messages being
left. The passcode is the same as your station passcode. This feature only applies if
there is a Samsung Voicemail card installed in the system and your keyset has a
programmed AME button.
You can receive internal calls in one of three modes (see Answering Intercom Calls
under Intercom Calls for descriptions).
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSCODE or 100 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
AUTO CAMP-ON
This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on, if possible, when
a busy station is called.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 081 to turn CAMP-ON on or 080 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
SELECT RING TONE
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 103.
Dial 0 for Ringing, 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
NOTE: When your keyset is programmed for Voice Announce and you have Forward No Answer (FNA) turned on, you must answer screened transfers by pressing
the OK button before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward.
SET ANSWER MODE (CO)
Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom answer mode.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO.
Press the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] key to change status.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
Each SMT-i5243 user can select from a variety of ring tones.
AUTOMATIC HOLD
From the LCD:
While on an outside call, pressing a line button, route button or a flashing Call button will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call. This
feature can be turned on or off at your keyset.
•
•
•
•
•
Press Menu button, press Phone button.
Scroll to Sound option.
Select Ring Tone.
Use Navigation button to scroll through the available ring tones and press
Save soft button to store your selection.
Press Home soft button to return to idle screen.
CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE
From the factory, your station passcode is 1234.You can change your station passcode whenever you desire.
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 101.
Dial your old passcode.
Dial a new passcode (must be four characters). You can use 0–9.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
HEADSET OPERATION
Keyset users can switch between headset mode and handset mode. When using
headset mode, press the Speaker button to answer and Speaker button to
release calls.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 021 to use the headset or 020 to use the handset.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
Your keyset is equipped with a Headset button. Pressing this button while the
indicator is off will cause the keyset to enter headset mode and the button indica66
67
Home Page
tor to be lit solid to indicate this. Pressing the button while the button indicator is
lit solid will cause the keyset to return to handset mode and the button indicator
will go off.
NOTE: If you need to switch between headset mode and handset mode (or speaker phone) during a conversation, you will need to put the call on hold first.
HOT KEYPAD
On your phone system your keyset’s keypad can be made “live” or “hot” so that it is
not necessary to lift the handset or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing. Calls can be made and features activated by simply dialing the C.O. line number, trunk group access code, intercom number or feature access code.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
KEY CONFIRMATION TONE
You can hear a short beep (confirmation tone) each time you press a button on the
dial pad. This tone can be turned on or off.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 040 to turn tones off or 041 to turn tones on.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
Additional ring tones can be selected from the Menu, Phone, Sound,
Keytone option.
REJOINING A PAGE
This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page
after you return your keyset to idle. To enable this feature:
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
RING PREFERENCE
This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset. This
method will always answer calls in the order they arrived at your keyset.When you
turn ring preference off, you must press the flashing button to answer a call, allowing you to answer calls in the order you choose.
•
•
•
68
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 061 to turn ring preference on or 060 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME
This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as
it is dialed.
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
CALLER ID REVIEW ALL
This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls
sent to their stations.This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in, first out basis.
The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station but that
you did not answer. When reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the
person back. The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number.
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 121 to turn CID REVIEW ALL on or 120 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
SECURE OHVA
This option allows you to receive OHVA (Over Head Voice Announce) calls via the
speaker while you are on the handset.
•
•
•
With your handset on hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 131 to turn SECURE OHVA ON or 130 to turn it OFF.
Press Transfer to savve your selection.
CONFIGURE MOBILE EXTENSIONS [MOBEX]
This feature allows you to configure options for any Mobile Extension (MOBEX)
ports that are assigned to you by your telephone system administrator. You can
turn a port on or off; set the telephone number for the port; or set the caller ID you
will be calling in from.The caller ID field has no effect unless you have been authorized as an Executive MOBEX user. Check with your telephone system administrator
for further details on your specific system configuration.
To set the phone number a MOBEX port can reach you on:
•
•
•
•
Press Transfer and then dial 126.
Dial your station pass code.
Dial the number of the port you wish to configure (1-5) (you may also use the
Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] keys to select a port and press the Right
soft key to confirm).
Press Right soft button to move to telephone number.
69
Home Page
•
•
•
Dial the number of a C.O. line or trunk group to use when making calls to this
MOBEX port.
Dial the phone number you can be reached at by users calling this MOBEX
port.
Press Transfer to store your selection and exit programming.
To set the caller ID of the location you will be calling in from:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press Transfer and then dial 126.
Dial your station pass code.
Dial the number of the port you wish to configure (1-5) (you may also use the
Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] keys to select a port and press the right
soft key to confirm).
Press Right soft button twice.
Dial the contact number.
Press Transfer to store your selection and exit programming.
To turn a MOBEX port ON or OFF:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press Transfer and then dial 126.
Dial your station pass code.
Dial the number of the port you wish to configure (1-5) (you may also use the
Volume Up and Volume Down keys to select a port and press the Right soft
key to confirm).
Dial 2 to select the activation status option.
Dial 0 to turn the port on, dial 1 to turn the port off.
Press Transfer to store your selection and exit programming.
DISPLAY FEATURES
DIRECTORY INFORMATION
An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number.
Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before answering.
Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name. Incoming calls can be
easily identified and answered with different greetings.
Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display [CALL FOR xxx]
where xxx is the station group number. This allows you to answer calls directed to
you differently than calls directed to your group.
DISPLAY NUMBER DIALED
Display keysets begin showing digits as they are dialed. They will stay in the display until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the Timer button is
pressed. If the call duration timer is not used, the number dialed will be displayed
until the call is released, transferred or put on hold.
CALL DURATION TIMER
The system can be set to automatically time outside calls. A few seconds after you
dial a telephone number, the timer appears in the display. It appears immediately
for incoming calls. The call timer continues for the duration of the call. Call duration times are displayed in minutes and seconds. If a call lasts longer than 60 minutes, the timer restarts.
You can press the Timer button to manually begin timing a call. Press it again to
stop timing. If you press it while the automatic timer is on, the call duration time is
restarted.
AUTO TIMER
Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer
incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call.
•
•
•
70
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 119.
Dial 41 to turn the auto timer on or 40 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
71
Home Page
Display keyset users may use this feature as a simple stopwatch.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MANAGING PROGRAMMABLE
KEY ASSIGNMENTS
TIMER FUNCTION
When the keyset is idle, press the Timer button to start timing.
Press the Timer button again to stop timing.
Read the elapsed time in the display.
Lift the handset and replace it. The display will return to date and time.
Select Phone Name.
Enter Station Name. Use the Navigation button to move cursor.
Press OK and then Save soft button to store the name.
VIEWING STATION MESSAGE INDICATIONS
You can manage your programmable key assignments for easy one touch operation of frequently used features.
You can view all of your message indications before you return them:
•
•
•
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press the Message button with the flashing indicator.
Scroll to Station Message and press OK.
The first station that left a message indication will be displayed.
Press the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] keys to scroll through the stations that left message indications. Use the soft keys to reply, clear or advance
to the next message.
Press the End button to return your keyset to the idle condition.
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES
Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it.
This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory.
•
•
•
•
•
Press Transfer and then dial 106.
Dial the speed dial bin number 00–49.
Using the dial pad, enter the station name. (See Station Names)
Press the Transfer button to store the speed dial name.
Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary.
NOTE: Use the Navigation button to move the cursor left or right, and use the
Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] buttons to increment the speed dial bins.
See Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers Section.
STATION NAMES
•
•
•
•
•
72
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 104.
Enter the Station Name. Use the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] buttons
to move cursor.
Press Transfer to store the name.
—OR—
Press Menu button, select Settings soft button.
Select Call, scroll to Phone Name.
•
•
•
Press the Function button to display the current key assignments.
—OR—
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 107.
Use the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] buttons to scroll through all of
your programmable buttons.
Press Transfer to exit programming.
To program the programmable keys, press Menu, Settings, Application Settings,
AOM Setting.
For example:
If you want to press a key that will direct calls to Joel at extension 3201. Select
an empty key and set the following:
•
•
•
Feature:
Ext. Number:
Display Name:
DSS
3201
Joel
If you want to press a key that will direct calls to Sue’s external phone number at
972-444-3456. Select an empty key and set the following:
•
•
•
•
Feature:
Speed
Ext. Number:
01
Display Name:
Sue
Use Transfer 105 to set speed dial number:
[xxxx] SPEED DIAL
01: 9-9724443456
Please consult your installation company to requested a complete list of descriptions for any keys you may have programmed on your keyset.
NOTE: Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender.
BACKSPACE WITH LCR
If you misdial while using LCR, you can delete digits shown in the display by pressing the Backspace soft button as many times as necessary or by pressing Clear to
delete all.
73
Home Page
CALLER ID
SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID DISPLAY
Simultaneous display of Caller ID name and number on incoming CO calls on both
lines of display keysets is supported on all OfficeServ systems. On Transferred CO
calls, you can decide if you want to see the Caller ID name or Caller ID number in
the display. Regardless of which data is selected, you can press the NND button to
view the other pieces of Caller ID information. To select the type of Caller ID information you wish to view:
•
•
•
•
•
•
74
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 119.
To set the first line of a ringing call display dial 0.
To set the second line of a ringing call display dial 1.
Set the data to display from the following:
- To show nothing dial 0.
- To show Caller ID Number dial 1.
- To show Caller ID Name dial 2.
- To show the DID Number the call came in on dial 3.
- To show the Name of the DID the call came in on dial 4.
- To show the Name of the Group the call came in for dial 5.
- To show the DID Number and then Name of the DID dial 6.
- To show the Name of the DID and then the DID Number dial 7.
To set the top line of the display shown after answering a call dial 2.
Set the data to display from the following:
- To show Caller ID Number dial 0.
- To show Caller ID Name dial 1.
- To show the DID Number the call came in on dial 2.
- To show the Name of the DID the call came in on dial 3.
- To show Caller ID Number and then the DID Number dial 4.
- To show Caller ID Name and then the DID Number dial 5.
- To show the DID Number and then the name of the DID dial 6.
- To show the Name of the DID and then the DID Number dial 7.
- To show the C.O. line information dial 8.
To set the format if the C.O. line information when the above is set to show C.O.
line information dial 3.
- To show the C.O. line number and the dialed or Caller ID Number dial 0.
- To show only the dialed or Caller ID Number dial 1.
Press Transfer to exit and store your selection.
VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL
In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped-on call at your keyset, you
can press the Next button to display the Caller ID information associated with the
call in queue at your keyset. Either the CID name or CID number will show in the
display depending on you Name/Number selection.
To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped-on to your keyset,
press the Next button.
INQUIRE CALLER ID PARK/HOLD INFO
If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you, you
may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call. This may influence
how you choose to handle the call.
From an idle keyset:
•
•
•
Press the Inquire button—OR—press CID button.
Dial the trunk number.
You may now answer the call by pressing the Answer button—OR—
Name/Number to view more information about this call—OR—you can
return to the idle condition by pressing Ignore.
If you are on a call:
•
•
•
Press the Inquire button. Your existing call will go on hold.
Dial the trunk number.
You may now answer the call by pressing the Answer button—OR—you may
use Name/Number to view more information about this call—OR—you can
return to the idle condition by pressing Ignore.
NOTES:
1. If you are on an intercom call or you have Automatic Hold turned off, you must
finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring.
2. If you inquire about an outgoing call, you will receive a [call no longer available] display.
75
Home Page
FEATURE ACESS CODES
Paging Zones - Dial 55 plus
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Q
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
All External Zones
All Page
SECTION 6.
APPLICATIONS
Feature Access Codes
0
10 + xxx
12 + xxx
13
16 + xxx
17
18
19
400
401
42 + xxx
43
44
45
46
47
48 + xx
49
53 + xxx + 1
53 + xxx + 0
76
Operator
Pick Up A Parked Call
Pick Up a Held Call
Door Lock Release
Speed Dialing
Save And Redial Number
New Call (Recall)
Last Number Redial
Cancel Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
Cancel Sent Message
Return Message
Callback
Busy Station Camp-On
Conference
Account Code
Cancel Programmed MSG
Send Flash to C.O. or PBX
In Group
Out of Group
56
600
601 + xxx
602 + xxx
603 + xxx
604 + xxx
605 + xxx
606 + xxx
65 + xxx
66 + xx
67
Q
Meet Me Answer
Cancel All Call Forward
Set Forward All Calls
Set Forward Busy
Set Forward No Answer
Set Forward Busy/No Answer
Set Forward on DND
Set Forward Follow Me
Pick Up Ringing Extension
Pick Up Group
Universal Answer
Authorization Code
77
Home Page
Samsung Voicemail
This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a
Subscriber. A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the various
features and services available in the Samsung Voicemail. Please review this section carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Services, known as
Subscriber Services.
Voice Mail is one of the Subscriber Services available. Your voice mail box has the
capability of storing private messages, and offers a number of options for sending
or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new messages.
Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager. This allows you control over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your
callers in the event you are unable to speak to them directly. The ‘events’ are
referred to as “Call Conditions”. No-Answer, Busy, and Blocked are the most commonly used Call Conditions.
This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones
outside the office. The basic operation is the same, but the access method will be
different. See the Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more details.
Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all
Subscribers. See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature
availability.
ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX
[Also known as Subscriber Services Menu]
Inside Callers [Subscriber logging in from their Desk]
•
•
Dial the voicemail access number or press the key assigned to ring
voicemail [VMMSG].
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is 0000).
Outside Callers [Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the
office environment]
•
•
•
Dial the phone number that will be answered by the voicemail. The main
greeting will answer.
At the main greeting dial [#] plus your Subscriber (or mailbox) number
(Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number).
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is 0000).
Access your Subscriber Services (or Mailbox) from a Station
other than your Own (or checking a mailbox associated with a
different station)
•
•
•
Press the [VMMSG] key or dial the voicemail group number. You will be
prompted to enter a password.
Press [,]. This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu.
Press [#] plus the Subscriber number of your choice. You will be prompted to
enter you password.
At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions. You will
hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox.You will then
hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options:
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
,
Listen to New Messages - See Listening to your Message.
Record and Send Message - See Sending Messages.
Review Saved Messages - See Listening to your Message.
Access Manager - See Access Manager.
Personal Greetings - See Personal Greetings.
Mailbox Administration - See Mailbox Administration.
Personal Services - See Personal Services.
Return to Main Menu.
Voicemail and the Function Soft button: When accessing and retrieving voicemails from the mailbox, the service options such as (1) Listening to Messages, (2)
Record and Send Messages, and (3) Review Saved Messages are available and
can be accessed through the dial pad or through the Function soft key. When
pressing the function soft button the options will be displayed. Scroll to and press
the OK button to select an option from the Function Menu.
78
79
Home Page
Subscriber Services Menu
Group New
Messages
Group Saved
Messages
11
33
Listen to New Review Saved
Messages
Messages
Group Messages Menu
1
Group
Urgent Messages
2
Group
Callback Requests
3
Group
Reminders
4
5
Group
Private Messages
Group
Fax Only Messages
1
9
#
0
*
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Listen Menu
1
11
Mailbox
Administration
Personal
Services
Pause, Resume
Play Menu
Options
Exit
2
4
5
6
#
8
0
*
2
Save
Message
3
Discard
Message
4
Reply to Sender
5
Place
Call to Sender
Forward a
Copy of Message
7
Rewind
5 Seconds
8
Pause, Resume
Message Playback
9
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
##
Change
Playback Speed
Skip to
Next Message
Scan Messages
To Create a
Reminder
1
Review
Recording
2
Stop, Append to
Recording
3
ng
Discard Recording
and Rerecord
4
Set
Delivery Options
s
5
Specify
Future Delivery
6
SEND Message,
Then Copy
7
Rewind
5 Seconds
77
Change
Playback Volume
e
8
Pause, Resume
Record/Playback
k
9
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
99
Change
Playback Speed
0
Play
Menu Options
#
SEND Message,
Then Exit Record
d
00
Play Message
Information
0
Play
Menu Options
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
*
1
Follow Me
For a Directory
of Subscribers
"Enter the Recipient's Number""
Change
Playback Volume
Play
Message Inventory
#
##
Deliver Copy
of Fax Message
6
99
#
Play Previous
Message
77
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
Personal
Greetings
Record Menu
Play
Message
Group
A Specific Sender
Play
Menu Options
Access
Manager
3
55
8
Record & Send
Messages
1
Assign and/or Edit
Primary Greeting
1
Change
Message Alert
1
Review
Workload
2
Assign and/or Edit
Busy Greeting
2
Change
Pager Notification
Notifica
2
Edit Stored
Telephone Numbers
3
Block All Calls
3
Assign and/or Edit
Blocking Greeting
3
Review Deleted
Delete
Me sages
Messages
3
Change
Weekly Schedule
1
Change
Password
4
Call forwarding
4
Assign and/or Edit
Night Greeting
4
Review Undelivered
Undel
Me sages
Messages
5
Place a
Direct Call
2
Record
Name
5
Call Screening
5
Assign and/or Edit
Screened Greeting
5
Auto Play
New Messages
Message
3
Enter Directory
Name
6
Find Me
6
Edit Only
Personal Greetings
6
Auto Play Mes
Message
Information
7
Personal
Administration
4
Extended
Prompting
7
Auto Set
Night Intercept
7
Edit Only
Mailbox Greeting
8
Pause, Resume
Resum
Menu Prompting
Prompti
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
9
Record and Se
Send
Broadcast Message
Mes
0
Play
Menu Options
#
Play
Access Coverage
0
Play
Menu Options
0
Play
Menu Options
#
Record
a Reminder
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
0
Play
Menu Options
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
0
Play
Menu Options
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
rvices
NOTE: All options shown MAY NOT be authorized. If an option is not available
please speak to your system administrator.
*Change Playback Speed and Volume not available on the OfficeServ 7030,
OfficeServ 7100, OfficeServ 7200-S or OfficeServ IP-UMS.
80
81
Home Page
GETTING STARTED
1 or 3
Using your new Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services is as simple as following a
few simple spoken instructions. First time users should read this section as a tutorial. You should start with the following steps:
LISTENING TO OLD OR NEW MESSAGES
•
1
Play / replay the message you just heard.
From the Subscriber Services Menu:
11
Play the previous message.
•
•
•
•
•
2
Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
3
Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
4
Reply to the message.
Access your Subscriber Services Menu - You already know how to do this.
Record a Primary/No-Answer Personal Greeting. Dial [5][1].
Record a Mailbox Greeting. Dial [5][7].
Change your access code (Password). Dial [#][7][1].
Record your name. Dial [#][7][2].
Enter your directory name. Dial [#][7][3].
After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and
ready to use.
LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES
This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender (if the
sender has a mailbox on this system).
5
This will work for internal and external callers, but Caller ID service is needed to use this feature on an outside call.
55
If there are new messages in your mailbox your [VMMSG] key will be lit. Call the
Samsung Voicemail by pressing this key, and when prompted enter your password. You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu. Select [1] to listen to new
messages or [3] to listen to saved messages.
Note: After you enter your password, if “Autoplay of New Messages” is enabled and
you have new messages the Samsung Voicemail will begin to play them automatically. A subscriber can control this feature. From the Subscriber Services Menu [6]
[5] toggles “Autoplay of New Messages” ON/OFF.
6
82
Forward the message and saves a copy.
The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailbox number (nnn), using
the directory service (#) or you may also add comments and leave it as a
memo to yourself (##).
The Send and Copy Service (option 6) allows a user to send copies of a message to multiple recipients easily. A different introduction message may be
left for each recipient.
The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu.
LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES
GROUP NEW MESSAGES
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES
GROUP OLD MESSAGES
ACCESS MANAGER
PERSONAL GREETINGS
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
PAUSE / RESUME
PLAY MENU OPTIONS
EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT
PERSONAL SERVICES
Deliver a fax copy.
This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document(s). Faxmail documents can be delivered to any fax machine of your choice as long as out
calling is authorized. You can also have faxmail messages automatically
delivered to the fax machine of your choice.
SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU
1
11
2
3
33
4
5
6
8
0
,
#
Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message.
7
Rewind the message 5 seconds.
77
Change playback volume of the recording. [Not available on the OS 7030,
OS 7100, OS 7200-S or OS IP-UMS]
There are two levels of volume during playback. Dialing this code will toggle between the two levels.
8
Pause or resume during message playback.
9
Fast forward the message 5 seconds.
99
Change playback speed of the recording. [Not available on OS 7030, OS
7100, OS 7200-S or OS IP-UMS]
There are two levels of speed during playback. Dialing this code will toggle
between the two speeds.
83
Home Page
Play options.
0
3
4
5
6
#
Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this
point.
Discard and Re-Record
Set Message Attributes (Delivery Options)
Schedule Future Delivery
Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else
Save and Send the Recording
00
Hear the time and date, and sender's information of the message you just
heard. Sender information is not available on outside calls.
#
Move to the next message. This does not Save or Discard the current message - it is retained as new.
Setting Message Attributes
##
Scan. Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message. This is
similar to the scan button on a radio. It will allow you to find a specific message quickly. To stop scanning press [1].
If after recording a message you select [4] you can set up any combination of the
following delivery options:
,
Cancel and return to previous menu.
11 or 33
GROUP NEW OR OLD MESSAGES
Messages can be grouped as either Reminders, press [3] or Messages from a specific sender, press [9].
Additionally you can press [#] and hear a summary of your mailbox contents:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Number of messages
Number of reminders
Number of urgent messages
Number of messages needing a callback
Number of private messages
Number of fax messages
1
2
3
4
5
,
Urgent Delivery
Return Receipt Requested
Request a Call Back
Private Delivery
Reply Required
Exit
Scheduling Future Delivery
If after recording a message you select [5] to schedule future delivery, you will be
able to set message attributes and set this message as:
#
1
2
3
4
5
,
Immediate Delivery
Next Few Hours
End of Current Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
Beginning of Next Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
A Coming Day of the Week
Specific Day / Time
Exit
2
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
This option is used to send a message to another subscriber. The steps are simple:
a)
Enter the recipient’s mailbox number, or if this is not known enter [#] to use
the system directory.
b) Record your message at the tone. After recording the message, you will hear
the Send Menu with the following functions:
1
2
84
Review
Continue Recording
85
Home Page
6
4
Find Me
Find Me, when enabled, will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list of
preprogrammed phone numbers. The stored phone numbers are entered in
'Personal Services' [#][2] (if allowed by the Administrator). The stored telephone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers.
The Find Me feature only use the first five.
ACCESS MANAGER
The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when,
where and how, and/or if the Samsung Voicemail contacts you when a caller dials
your extension number. All of the options are toggled on/off based on their current status when you access them.
7
Night Intercept
This feature is dependent on your weekly availability schedule, which is
entered in 'Personal Services' [#][3] (if allowed by the Administrator). When
Night Intercept is active the Samsung Voicemail will first ring your extension
then play your primary, No Answer greeting during the day (when you are
available) and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greeting during the night (when you are not available).
Note: ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed by the System
Administrator for each Subscriber. They are:
1
Follow Me
Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new
destination (Designated Location) will be active.This number may be an internal or external number. This is useful if you are frequently traveling or changing the number where you can be reached.
When Follow Me is activated, the transfer will be supervised and confirmed.
This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at
the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber’s mailbox.
3
Note: This does NOT use the Day and Night schedules of the phone system. It
is solely controlled by the Subscriber’s Availability Schedule.
8
Pause / Resume
,
Exit from Access Manager
0
Play All Options
#
Play Access Coverage
This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings are set. It
will also tell you what greetings will play under each of the call conditions you
have setup.
Call Blocking
When this feature is active, callers will not be transferred to your extension,
they will hear your 'blocked' greeting (if recorded) and will go directly to your
mailbox if they do not select any or are not offered any other options.
4
Call Forwarding
Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alternate
location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to another Subscriber. The “Forwarded To” Subscriber will now be in control of the
caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber’s Mailbox. If the
“Forwarded To” Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow what
ever the “Forwarded To” Subscriber has set up for their call conditions. The
Caller will hear “Forwarding to”“{Subscriber Name}” before actually being forwarded.
5
Call Screening
If this is turned on, the caller will be asked their name and the Samsung
Voicemail will play this name to you before the transfer, giving you an option
to accept or reject the call.
86
5
PERSONAL GREETINGS
The options available in this menu will be determined by your System
Administrator, and not all of them may be available to you. In the simplest systems,
only a mailbox greeting will be available, additional greetings may be accessible in
more complex systems.
Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension
and you do not answer.
You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings, and you may assign any one of them
to be active. There are several different 'Call Coverage' conditions to which you
may assign any of your 9 greetings. The Call Coverage Conditions are: No-Answer,
Busy, and Do Not Disturb (or Forwarded All). This will allow different greetings to
play depending on the type of call forward that you have set, or the condition of
your telephone.
87
Home Page
The Call Coverage conditions that you can assign specific greetings to are selected by the following digits:
1
5
Used while Call Screening is enabled, and you REJECT a caller after listening to
the caller's record name.
Primary/No Answer Greeting
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Screening' feature.
Used when in your office, away from your desk or during the time period you
are scheduled available. If this is the only Personal Greeting you record, it will
play for all call coverage conditions.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm sorry, but I am not available to speak with
you at this time. If someone else can help you, please enter the extension
number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Basic
Greeting' feature.
Example:“Hi this is John Smith. I'm sorry I am not available to answer your call.
If someone else can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to
leave me a message, press 1.”
2
6
Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your
greeting. When you are done recording your greeting, you will be able to listen to the greeting you recorded, save the greeting you recorded and return
to the previous menu, record the greeting again, or exit without saving the
greeting.
Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension
or the telephone at your Designated Location.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Busy
Greeting' feature.
3
Call Blocking Greeting
Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone
is forwarded ALL or DND.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Blocking' feature.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. Sorry I missed your call, but I'm going to be out
of the office for the next few hours. If someone else can help you, please enter
the extension number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
4
Night Greeting
Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE, usually after
business hours during the evening and at night.
Edit Personal Greetings
You may also edit/record each one of the greetings (1-9) at any time.
Busy Greeting
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm on another line right now. If someone else
can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave a message,
press 1.”
Call Screening Greeting
Note: If you record only the greeting assigned to the No-Answer Call Coverage
Condition, then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage
Conditions (No-Answer, Busy, Blocked, Night, and Rejected Caller). In this case,
the salutation part of the greeting should be very general.
7
Edit Mailbox Greeting
Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded any
of the Call Coverage greetings. The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox
greeting directly, is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mailbox using the VT (VoiceMail Transfer) key.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Mailbox
Greeting Option' feature.
Example: “Hi, this is John Smith. Please leave me a message, I will call you as
soon as I can.”
Note: This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has
played to the caller. A common usage for this Greeting is when another
Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to transfer the caller directly to your Mailbox.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the
'Scheduling' feature.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I've left the office for the evening. If you would
like to try someone else, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave
me a message, press 1.”
88
89
Home Page
3
6
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to
undelete any messages that you have recently deleted (up to the programmed Daily Maintenance Time, which is set to 3 a.m. by Default the following morning).
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notification, message alert options and other message control features.
1
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call any outside or
inside telephone number, after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
4
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [3] for Deleted Messages.
Undelivered Retrieval
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to recall
any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been picked up by the recipient.
Setting Up Message Alert:
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [4] for Undelivered Messages.
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
n
Press [1] for Message Alert.
n
There are 4 options available to you:
This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet
been picked up by the recipient.
Press [1] to toggle message alert on and off.
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be notified.
5
Press [4] to set the destination phone number.
Pager Notification
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call your beeper
service and notify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [2] for pager notification.
n
There are 4 options available to you:
Press [1] to toggle pager notification on and off.
Auto Play New Messages
If this option is enabled, after you enter your password correctly any new messages will immediately begin to play. To enable (or if already enabled toggle
and disable) this feature:
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
2
n
Deleted voice mail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a.m.
the following day. Select this option to recover ("undelete") previously deleted messages, during this period of time.
Message Alert
To hear your message at the remote location when the Samsung Voicemail
calls you, after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed
that there is a message and to enter your password. Simply enter your password and you will now be logged in.
Undelete
6
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [5] to Set Auto Play of New Messages.
Auto Play Message Information
If this option is enabled, the date, time and sender’s name will be played automatically before each message. If this is disabled, the information must be
requested manually by pressing ‘00’. To enable (or if already enabled toggle
and disable) this feature:
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be paged.
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
n
Press [6] to Set Auto Play of Message Information.
Press [4] to set the pager phone number.
90
91
Home Page
to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to
your callers. All other times you will be considered unavailable.
9
MESSAGE BROADCAST
5
Allows you to place a direct call out of the Samsung Voicemail from anywhere.
You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1-5 that corresponds to a
stored number (See Personal Services, 2 - Stored Numbers). This feature must
be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited or opened to
internal, local, and long distance calls.
This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System
Administrator.
Broadcast to All Mailboxes
If you have been designated as a Subscriber Administrator, you may send a
message to ALL mailboxes in the system.
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [9] for Broadcast Messages.
This option will only be available if your mailbox has been assigned
Subscriber Administration privileges.
7
PERSONAL SERVICES
This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings (see next
section).
PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS
1
The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your
name. Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator.
2
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][1].
n
The current password will be played and you will have the chance to
change it.
Recording your Name
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][2].
Stored Numbers
n
Allows you to enter up to 9 stored phone numbers. The first five of these are
used in the 'Find Me' feature, but any of them (1-9) can be easily dialed using
only one digit followed by the pound key, to be used by many other features
from within your subscriber space. (ie: “Follow Me, “Message Alert”, “Pager
Alert”, and “Direct Call”).
The current name will be played and you will have the chance to change
it.
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name and/or enter your
Directory Name (described below), you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
Schedule Availability
Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with Night Personal
Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature. Follow the spoken directions
92
n
Use this option to record your name. Your recorded name is played in several
different situations. It is important to record your name for proper operation
of the Samsung Voicemail system.
3
3
Setting your Password
Workload Management
Allows you to access to all reminders, both Active and Pending. If authorized
you can group your reminders as Commitments, Follow-Ups or Tasks for better organization. The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending
(pending means scheduled for future delivery).
2
Personal Administration
This menu allows you to make changes to basic setup settings, that are rarely
changed. Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings.
You probably will not need to change them after that.
#
1
Place a Direct Call
Entering your Directory Name
Use this option to enter your Directory Name. Your Directory Name is used by
callers to find you if they do not know your extension number.
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][3].
93
Home Page
n
The current Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are
equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad. Follow the
instructions to enter a new name.You will be prompted to enter your last
name and then your first name.
This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly.
4
To activate this feature press the AME button. The associated indicator will be lit
steady. Press again to turn off. If this key is pressed while a station is ringing (during forward no answer), the feature will be turned on for the current call only.
While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may:
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name (described above)
and/or enter your Directory Name, you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
n
Press [#] to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it.
n
Press [,] to immediately disconnect your station.The caller continues to leave
a message normally.
Extended Prompting
n
Pick up the handset and monitor privately.
Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the
subscriber interface (mailbox prompts). Change this setting only if you are
very familiar with the user operation of the SVMi E-Series.
n
Press ANS / RLS to answer the call (using the handset or speaker).
Note: Remember if you know what digits to press, you can enter them at any
time you do not have to wait to be prompted. This feature can be toggled
on/off at anytime. Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber
menu to press zero for more options. This enables you to still be able to find
out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled.
KEYSET USER FEATURES
AME Password
If your keyset has AME PASSWORD (MMC 110) set to YES, you must enter your
station password to listen to messages being left. This will prevent unauthorized
people from listening to messages being left for you.
If the password option is turned on, while a message is being left, press the flashing AME indicator and enter your station password (not your SVMi E-Series password). You will then hear the message being left.
The following options are available if you have a display keyset.They require setup
by the System Administrator.
Call Record
Message Waiting Lights
If you have a call record button assigned to your phone, you may press it at any
time, to record the conversation in progress. If you have a display keyset, you will
also have the soft key options to pause and time the message.
When new messages are left in your mailbox, the voice mail message light on your
keyset will flash. Press this flashing key [VMMSG] and follow the prompts to
retrieve messages.This key may be pressed at any time to log into your Subscriber
Main Menu.
Answer Machine Emulation
If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset, you
can use it to monitor calls going to your voice mail, and optionally answer them.
The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering
machine.
Your keyset must be set to forward on no answer to voice mail. After ringing your
station the caller will be connected to your voice mail and hear your personal
greeting before leaving a message. During this time you will be monitoring the
connection between the caller and your voice mail box. At this time you will only
be monitoring the call, you can not talk to the other party until you answer. You
may pick up the call at any time or ignore it.
94
95
Home Page
SHORTCUTS
Calling
1.
E-MESSAGE DELIVERY: Voice mail messages (.wav) and/or fax mail messages
(.tiff ) are "delivered" to your Inbox with the appropriate attached file.
2.
E-MESSAGE NOTIFICATION: You will receive an e-mail, with NO attachments,
notifying you that you have a voice and/or fax mail message in your Voice Mail
Box.
Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press [#] to immediately
send the call to the called parties mailbox.
•
Call Divert to Voicemail
•
While receiving an incoming (ringing) call, dial [,] to immediately send the caller
to your personal voicemail box. This will override the call forward no answer setting.
Direct Messaging
[#] + DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without having to dial their extension number first, keyset users may simply dial [#] plus a
mailbox (extension) number and leave a message directly. If you dial a busy extension press [#] to connect directly with the mailbox.
•
Functionality
•
Self Memo (Reminder)
•
Pressing [##] will leave a message in your own mailbox. This is useful to remind
yourself of things to do now or in the future. Messages can be sent with future
delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due.
•
With either type of EMG, when Caller ID (CID) is provided, the callers telephone number will appear in the subject field of the email along with the date
and time stamp of when the voice message was originally recorded in your
Voice Mail Box.
If the caller is also a subscriber on the system and the E-Mail Gateway is set up
with a valid "Reply To" address, the Subscriber's name will also appear in the
"From" field. Otherwise, the "From" field will display the name of the Samsung
voice mail system (SVMi-8E, SVMi-16E, or SVMi-20E) sending the message.
Client will use their PC's Multi-Media kit (equipped with either speakers
and/or a headset) to listen to messages delivered to their e-mail Inbox.
INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS
IMPORTANT NOTE: If the PC/Laptop/PDA/Smart Phone/etc… is not
equipped with hardware and software capable of playing a '.WAV' file then
the E-Mail Gateway will not work for them until they add some method to
listen to '.WAV' files delivered to their Inbox.
Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays
to play, save, delete, reply, call, forward, rewind, pause, fast forward, change the volume, get message information, or help.
The same applies to Fax Mail messages, if the device the subscriber is using
does not support the viewing of '.TIFF' files, then the E-Mail Gateway for
Fax Mail will not work for them until they add some method to view .tiff
files delivered to their inbox.
Viewing Mailbox Contents
If you have new messages, in addition to the Telephone Status Indicator (TSI) you
will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the SVMi
E-Series.
•
No Synchronization of messages is performed between the Voice Mail Box
and the E-mail Inbox.
E-MAIL GATEWAY (EMG)
-
The E-Mail Gateway feature integrates your voice mail box with your email client.
No matter what email client software you are using or where you use it, you can
send voice mail messages and fax mail messages to your E-Mail inbox.
-
There are two parts to the E-Mail Gateway; E-Message Delivery and E-Message
Notification.
96
As a subscriber you can use either E-Message Delivery and/or E-Message
Notification.
As a subscriber you can have multiple e-mail addresses. (a maximum of 5
valid email addresses).
E-Message Notification can be set to one e-mail address while E-Message
Delivery is set to different e-mail address.
Messages listened to, forwarded, deleted, and/or saved within an e-mail
inbox will NOT effect the status of that same new message in the Voice
Mail or the MWI (Message Waiting Indicator) associated with that message on the phone.
Also messages listened to in the Voice Mail, from a phone, will not change
the Unread/Read status of the same message in an e-mail inbox.
97
Home Page
-
•
However, the Voice Mail Administrator can adjust parameters per subscriber or group of subscribers that decide how, when, or if to delete the
original voice message after it is sent to the E-Mail Server.
When full synchronization of messages between Voicemail Box and E-mail
Inbox is required, ask your Samsung representative about the OfficeServ IPUMS. This is an Internet Protocol based fully synchronized Unified Messaging
System.
Benefits
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Store and Archive Voice and Fax Mail Messages in visible folders.
Voice and Fax Mail Messages can now easily be dragged and dropped into
folders the same way e-mail messages are organized and saved.
Voice and Fax Mail Messages are now essentially the same as any other e-mail
message.
Backups and Message Archives can be made when they are made for all other
types of e-mail messages.
Add text notes and comments to use for reference later.
Some (if not all) e-mail clients will allow you to edit the body of the e-mail to
add comments.
Some will allow you to edit the subject field to help you find a particular message quickly in a large archive of messages.
Call Back Numbers and Date & Time Stamp are easily displayed in the Subject
field.
Easily forward Voice messages received, to others even if they are not a Voice
Mail Subscriber on your system.
No EMG System or Client Software to load on your Local PC or Network
Servers.
USB Port
The SMT-i5243 phone has one built-in USB v1.1 port that supports three types of
external USB devices:
1.
USB BLUETOOTH DEVICES: Users can make and receive calls through a bluetooth wireless headset when connected with the USB bluetooth dongle.
2.
USB CAMERA: Users can make and receive video calls among SMT-i5243
phones at local or remote site (requires MPS channels) when connected to a
USB camera.
3.
USB FLASH MEMORY: When connected to an external USB memory stick,
users can upload or download phonebook items to the phone. Administrator
can also use the USB memory to upgrade the phone software.
SETTING UP A BLUETOOTH HEADSET
1
Plug in a supported Bluetooth USB dongle.
Refer to External USB Port Specifications at the end of this section.
To pair the Bluetooth headset to the phone, refer to the Bluetooth headset
2 set up instruction from the manufacture and use the following instructions
for the phone.
3
Press Menu soft button when the phone is
in idle screen.
Therefore compatible with most:
-
E-Mail providers and E-Mail Clients
-
PCs, Laptops, PDA, and/or Smartphones
4
NOTE: If you are not sure you have this functionality on your system and
you would like to use it, please contact your on Site system administrator
to see if it is available.
Press Settings soft button.
5
Press 01 Application Settings.
98
99
Home Page
6
Press Headset. The headset option is the
last selection of this menu.
12
Enable the following items:
1. Headset: Use
2. Headset Type: Bluetooth
3. Incoming BT Connection: Accept
13
7
Press Bluetooth Headset Setting.
8
Press Connect soft button (make sure the
Bluetooth Headset is on and in the initial
paring mode).
1
9
Press Connect again when it finds the
Bluetooth headset.
3
10
Press Yes to confirm to pair with this
Bluetooth headset.
100
Press the Home icon. The Bluetooth icons
should appear in the main idle screen. The
Bluetooth headset is now ready to be used.
SETTING UP A VIDEO CAMERA
2
11
After validation and registration processes
are completed, the headset will display as
registered.
Enter the PIN and press OK. The PIN is
assigned by the Bluetooth headset
manufacture. The default PIN is usually 0000.
Plug in a supported video camera into the USB port.
Refer to External USB Port Specifications at the end of this section.
With a phone in idle screen, press Menu,
Settings, Application Setting, and then
Video Call.
Enable the following items:
a. Call Mode: Video
b. Camera: ON
4 The main idle screen will show the Video
Mode icon and CallMode soft button will
appear. The video camera is ready to use.
User can disable or enable the video mode
by pressing the CallMode soft button.
101
Home Page
FLASH USB MEMORY STICK
Bluetooth Headset:
USB memory stick can be used to copy personal phonebook items or to upgrade
the phone software. Instruction on software upgrade is available to administrator
only. User should not attempt to upgrade the software.
•
•
•
•
•
•
To copy phonebook items follow the instructions below.
1 Plug the supported USB memory stick into the USB port.
2
When phone is in idle screen, press Menu,
Settings, and then User Data
Management.
Use Export Phonebook to USB to save
3 your personal phonebook stored in the
SMT-i5243 phone into the USB memory, and
Import Phonebook from USB to upload
the phonebook stored in the USB to your
SMT-i5243 personal phonebook.
EXTERNAL USB PORT SPECIFICATIONS
The SMT-i5243 phone has one built-in USB v1.1 port that supports three types of
external USB devices (USB port does not support USB hub):
1.
USB BLUETOOTH DEVICES: Users can make and receive calls through a bluetooth wireless headset when connected with the USB bluetooth dongle.
USB Bluetooth Dongle
Most of USB Bluetooth dongle that contains CSR (Cambridge Silicon Radio)
chipsets will work with the phone.There is no way to verify all the products in
the market. The following products have been verified with the phones:
•
•
•
•
•
•
102
2.
Jabra BT530
Aliph Jawbone II Bluetooth Headset with NoiseAssassin
Samsung WEP 250
Plantronics Voyager 925
Plantronics Voyager pro
Plantronics Discovery 925
USB CAMERA: Users can make and receive video calls among SMT-i5243
phones at local or remote site (required MPS channels) when connected to a
USB camera.
Most of the USB camera with UVC (USB video class) driver should not have
issue with the phone. There is no way to verify all the products in the market.
The following products have been verified with the phones:
•
•
•
•
•
3.
Logitech QuickCam Pro 9000
Logitech QuickCam Deluxe
Logitech Webcam C250
Logitech Webcam C300
Microsoft LifeCam VX-800
USB FLASH MEMORY: When connected to an external USB memory stick,
users can upload or download phone book items to the phone. Administrator
can also use the USB memory to upgrade the phone software.
Any USB memory sticks that support Linux operation system should not have
any issue with the phone. Most of recent USB memory sticks can support both
Windows and Linux operating systems. The phone support USB memory
sticks with maximum size of 4 GB.
The following products have been verified with the phones:
•
•
Kingston DataTraveler I 2GB
Kingston DataTraveler I 4GB
Billionton USB Bluetooth Adapter (v2.1 + EDR)
Belkin Mini Bluetooth Adapter
Billionton BT0003
Inparo H-20
Collection SS-BT2
Hama Nano-Bluetooth USB Bluetooth Adapter v2.1 + EDR
103
Home Page
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
00
_________________________
_________________________
25
_________________________
_________________________
01
_________________________
_________________________
26
_________________________
_________________________
02
_________________________
_________________________
27
_________________________
_________________________
03
_________________________
_________________________
28
_________________________
_________________________
04
_________________________
_________________________
29
_________________________
_________________________
05
_________________________
_________________________
30
_________________________
_________________________
06
_________________________
_________________________
31
_________________________
_________________________
07
_________________________
_________________________
32
_________________________
_________________________
08
_________________________
_________________________
33
_________________________
_________________________
09
_________________________
_________________________
34
_________________________
_________________________
10
_________________________
_________________________
35
_________________________
_________________________
11
_________________________
_________________________
36
_________________________
_________________________
12
_________________________
_________________________
37
_________________________
_________________________
13
_________________________
_________________________
38
_________________________
_________________________
14
_________________________
_________________________
39
_________________________
_________________________
15
_________________________
_________________________
40
_________________________
_________________________
16
_________________________
_________________________
41
_________________________
_________________________
17
_________________________
_________________________
42
_________________________
_________________________
18
_________________________
_________________________
43
_________________________
_________________________
19
_________________________
_________________________
44
_________________________
_________________________
20
_________________________
_________________________
45
_________________________
_________________________
21
_________________________
_________________________
46
_________________________
_________________________
22
_________________________
_________________________
47
_________________________
_________________________
23
_________________________
_________________________
48
_________________________
_________________________
24
_________________________
_________________________
49
_________________________
_________________________
104
105
Home Page
Home Page
SMT-i5230
Keyset User Guide
For OfficeServ™ 7000 Series Systems
05/2010
Home Page
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS BOOK ......................................................................................................1
SECTION 1. CAUTION AND PREPARATION ....................................2
CAUTION ..............................................................................................................................3
PREPARATION ..................................................................................................................4
Check the Contents of the Box ................................................................................4
Phone Installation ......................................................................................................4-5
Optional Equipment..................................................................................................5-6
SECTION 2. PHONE FUNCTIONS ..................................................................7
SMT-i5230 LAYOUT ....................................................................................................8
Names and Functions ..................................................................................................8
KEY FUNCTIONS ..........................................................................................................10
Telephone Status Indicator ......................................................................................10
Screen Structure ..........................................................................................................10
Text Input Method ......................................................................................................11
Description of Icons....................................................................................................12
Navigating the Menus................................................................................................13
Navigation Button and Selector Switch for FWD/DND/ABSENT MSG ....13
SMT-i5230 SETUP ......................................................................................................14
Initializing the SMT-i5230 ........................................................................................14
Setup Mode ..................................................................................................................14
Easy Install Wizard ......................................................................................................15
Selecting the Static IP Option ................................................................................15
Setting Up Hot Desking (Idle Login) ..............................................................15-16
Configuration Menu Structure................................................................................16
Copyright 2010 Samsung Telecommunications America.
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic,
electronic or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying or information retrieval systems—
without express written permission of the publisher of this material.
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing
may warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from
the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.
SECTION 3. FREQUENTLY USED
FEATURE OPERATION ..........................................................17
EXTENSION LOG IN & OUT ................................................................................18
PLACING CALLS............................................................................................................18
ANSWERING CALLS ..................................................................................................19
PLACING A CALL ON HOLD ..............................................................................20
TRANSFERRING CALLS ..........................................................................................20
Home Page
TRANSFERRING WITH CAMP-ON..................................................................21
CALL WAITING ..............................................................................................................21
Group Call Pickup........................................................................................................47
My Group Pickup ........................................................................................................48
Privacy Release ............................................................................................................48
CONFERENCE CALLS ................................................................................................21
FORWARDING CALLS ..............................................................................................22
DIALING FEATURES ..................................................................................................49
OTHER FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS ..................................................22-25
SECTION 4. PHONE FEATURES ....................................................................26
BASIC MENUS ................................................................................................................27
Soft Button Structure ................................................................................................27
Menu Soft Button ........................................................................................27-37
Func. Soft Button ................................................................................................37
AOM Soft Button ................................................................................................37
SECTION 5. OFFICESERV 7000 SYSTEM FEATURES ..........38
OUTSIDE CALLS ..........................................................................................................39
Making Calls from AOM ............................................................................................39
Universal Answer ........................................................................................................39
Recall Dial Tone ............................................................................................................39
Sending a Flash ............................................................................................................39
Busy Line Queuing with Callback..........................................................................39
Busy Station Callback ................................................................................................40
Canceling Callback......................................................................................................40
Busy Station Camp-On ..............................................................................................40
INTERCOM CALLS ......................................................................................................42
Voice Announce Mode ..............................................................................................42
Auto Answer Mode ....................................................................................................42
Calling your System Operator ................................................................................42
CALL PROCESSING ....................................................................................................43
System Hold ..................................................................................................................43
Exclusive Hold ..............................................................................................................43
Remote Hold ................................................................................................................43
Hold Recall ....................................................................................................................44
Consultation Hold ......................................................................................................44
Retrieving Calls Held at Another Station............................................................44
Call Transfer ..................................................................................................................45
Transfer with Camp-On ............................................................................................45
Transfer to Voice Mail ................................................................................................46
Call Waiting....................................................................................................................46
Call Forward Options ................................................................................................46
Station Call Pickup ......................................................................................................47
Speed Dialing................................................................................................................49
Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers ..................................................49
Directory Dialing..........................................................................................................50
Last Number Redial ....................................................................................................51
Save Number with Redial ........................................................................................51
Automatic Redial/Retry ............................................................................................51
Pulse to Tone Changeover ......................................................................................51
PAGING AND MESSAGING ..................................................................................52
Making and Internal Page ........................................................................................52
Making an External Page..........................................................................................52
All Page ..........................................................................................................................52
Meet Me Page ..............................................................................................................53
Call Park and Page ................................................................................................53-54
Messages—Set and Cancel ....................................................................................54
Returning Messages ..................................................................................................55
Programmed Messages ............................................................................................55
CONVENIENCE FEATURES ..................................................................................56
Logging In and Out ....................................................................................................56
Do Not Disturb ............................................................................................................56
One Time DND..............................................................................................................56
Mute ................................................................................................................................57
Background Music ......................................................................................................57
Established Call Pick-Up............................................................................................57
Door Phone Calls ..................................................................................................57-58
Executive/Secretary....................................................................................................58
Group Listening ..........................................................................................................59
Account Codes ............................................................................................................59
Locking Your Keyset ..................................................................................................60
Manual Signalling........................................................................................................60
Off-Hook Voice Announce ......................................................................................61
OHVA Block....................................................................................................................61
OHVA Reject ..................................................................................................................61
In Group/Out of Group..............................................................................................62
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET ..........................................................................63
AME Password ..............................................................................................................63
Auto Camp-On ............................................................................................................63
Select Ring Tone ..........................................................................................................63
Change Your Passcode ..............................................................................................63
Home Page
Set Answer Mode (Intercom) ..................................................................................64
Set Answer Mode (CO) ..............................................................................................64
Automatic Hold............................................................................................................64
Headset Operation......................................................................................................64
Hot Keypad ....................................................................................................................65
Key Confirmation Tone..............................................................................................65
Rejoining a Page ..........................................................................................................65
Ring Preference............................................................................................................66
Display Speed Dial Name ........................................................................................66
Caller ID Review All ....................................................................................................66
Secure OHVA ................................................................................................................66
Configure Mobile Extensions (MOBEX) ........................................................66-67
DISPLAY FEATURES ..................................................................................................68
Directory Information................................................................................................68
Display Number Dialed ............................................................................................68
Call Duration Timer ....................................................................................................68
Auto Timer ....................................................................................................................68
Timer Function ............................................................................................................69
Viewing Station Message Indications..................................................................69
Personal Speed Dial Names ....................................................................................69
Station Names ..............................................................................................................69
Managing Programmable Key Assignments ....................................................70
Backspace with LCR ....................................................................................................70
CALLER ID..........................................................................................................................71
Selecting Your Caller ID Display ............................................................................71
Viewing the Next Caller ID Call ..............................................................................72
Inquire Caller ID Park/Hold Info ............................................................................72
FEATURE ACCESS CODES ....................................................................................73
SECTION 6. APPLICATIONS ..............................................................................74
SAMSUNG VOICEMAIL ..........................................................................................75
SVMi E-Series Subscriber Services Menu Diagram ..................................76–77
Accessing Your Mailbox ............................................................................................78
Getting Started ............................................................................................................79
Listen to your Messages ...........................................................................................79
Subscriber Services Menu........................................................................................79
Listening to Old or New Messages ......................................................................80
Group New or Old Messages ..................................................................................81
Record and Send a Message ..................................................................................81
Access Manager ..........................................................................................................83
Personal Greetings......................................................................................................84
Mailbox Administration ............................................................................................87
Message Broadcast ....................................................................................................89
Personal Services ........................................................................................................89
Personal Administration Settings ........................................................................90
Keyset User Features ................................................................................................91
Shortcuts ......................................................................................................................93
Interactive Displays ....................................................................................................93
E-Mail Gateway (EMG) ........................................................................................93–95
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS......................................................96–97
Home Page
ABOUT THIS BOOK
The new Samsung Multimedia Telephone SMT-i5230 keyset is part of the
OfficeServ 7000 Series.
The SMT-i5230 keyset represents a new concept of Internet phone, in that it uses
an IP address to Send/Receive voice and data. For voice communications, the SMTi5230 uses the data network line already in place in most offices and increasing
number of homes.
This guide contains 6 sections: Section 1. Caution and Preparation, Section 2.
Phone Functions, Section 3. Frequently Used Feature Operation, Section 4. Phone
Features, 5. OfficeServ 7000 System Features, and Section 6. Applications. Please
take the time to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation of
your keyset. Keep this guide handy, as you may need to look up instructions for
infrequently used features.
This book is written based on factory default settings, for the feature access codes.
Sometimes, due to programming requirements, these codes may be changed. If
you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book, please contact your installation and service company to determine the correct code.
1
Home Page
CAUTION
SECTION 1.
CAUTION AND PREPARATION
2
•
Read the installation instructions before connecting the system to its power
source.
•
If there is dirt or moisture on the pin contact surface of a power plug, pull out
the plug and wipe it away with a cloth. If dirt or moisture remains on the product even after wiping, contact the service center.
•
For the power connection port of the phone, use the supplied power
adapter.(The power adapter is supplied separately.) Use of a power adapter
that does not meet the specifications may cause the product to become damaged, to overheat, or to explode.
•
Do not place the phone in a location with a lot of dust, in a location that is subject to severe changes in temperature, or near a heating device (cigarette
heat, heater, etc.)
•
Do not use or store flammable spray or materials near the phone.
•
Do not place vases, flowerpots, cups, or a container of cosmetics or drugs near
the phone.
•
Installation of equipment must not route interconnecting cables or external
power supply sources outdoors.
•
The LAN cable to the network should be connected to the LAN port of a
phone, NOT to the PC connection port.
•
Use a soft and dry cloth when cleaning the phone. Do not spray water directly onto the product; and do not use chemicals such as wax, benzene, alcohol,
thinner, mosquito killer, perfume spray, lubricant, detergent, etc.
3
Home Page
Connect the LAN cable to the LAN port of the phone, as shown in the figure.
PREPARATION
When power is supplied from the LAN port (PoE), the phone is booted upon
LAN connection.
CHECK THE CONTENTS OF THE BOX
Check if the product package box includes all the components as follows:
•
•
•
•
Phone body including a base
Handset
Handset cord
Patch cable
NOTE: Power transformer sold separately. If any of these items are missing or damaged, please contact your dealer.
If PoE is not supported, connect the power adapter to the power port of the
phone. If the connected power adapter is plugged into an outlet, the phone
is booted. (The power adapter is supplied separately.)
4 Fix the base to the phone body by
fitting the bottom groove and then
securing the top side.
PHONE INSTALLATION
Connecting the Phone Body
1 Remove the base of the phone by
pressing the [Push] mark on the top
of the base.
5 Secure the cable along the cable
guideline as shown in the figure. For
the cable of power adaptor, give
some slack before securing the cable
to the guideline to prevent easy
disconnect.
Note: The base can be used to adjust
the phone angle in the high or low
position.
2 Connect a handset to the handset port
of the phone. (See handset icon )
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
SMT-i5264 [ADD-ON MODULE]
3 OPTIONAL: Connect the cable
through the middle hole of the cradle
to the PC, as shown in the figure.
When connecting to PC, connect one
end of the cable to the PC port of the
phone, and the other end of the cable
to the LAN port of the PC.
e
t
q
w
r
The SMT-i5264 IP AOM can be registered and programmed
to function with any ITP 5100 keysets, SMT-i Series, and TDM
phones. This add-on module was cosmetically designed to
match the SMT-i5000 Series phones. In some applications
multiple IP AOMs can be supported per IP phone. For installation instructions, see your System Administrator.
qAC Power (5VDC) wHeadset eHandset Cord rLAN to Phone System tPhone to PC
4
5
Home Page
SMT-A52GE [GIGABIT ADAPTER]
The SMT-A52GE Gigabit Adapter processes the Gigabit
data for a Gigabit LAN connection on the PC connected to
the SMT-i5200 Series IP phones. The SMT-A52GE can be
installed to function with any of the SMT-i5200 Series IP
phones. For installation instructions, see your System
Administrator.
WALL MOUNT BRACKET
An optional bracket is available for wall mounting the SMT-i5200 Series phones to
the wall. For installation instructions, see your System Administrator.
SMT-A53PW [POWER ADAPTER]
SECTION 2.
PHONE FUNCTIONS
The power adapter is sold separately.
6
7
Home Page
Button
SMT-i5230 LAYOUT
q
Handset
LCD Backlit
Screen
Phone
Book
Button
Message
Button
Service
Button
2!
2)
LED
(Telephone
Status
Indicator)
Selector
Switch for
FWD/DND/
Absent MSG
w
e SoftButtons
r Enter/OK
t Conference
y Transfer
u Hold
;
l
k
Navigation
Button
Scroll Up
i
Mute
Button
Volume
Button
Headset
Button
j
h
g
Speaker
Button f
o
o Scroll Up Button
Move up through 20 pages of AOM (99 total).
a Scroll Down Button
Move down through 20 pages of AOM (99 total).
s Programmable Buttons
5 desiless buttons used to set up and label function
buttons on the phone.
d Dial Button
Used to dial the phone number.
f Speaker Button
Used to enable/disable the use of a speaker phone.
g Headset Button
Used to activate and deactivate the headset jack.
h Volume Button
Used to control the volume settings.
g Mute Button
Used to silence the transmit voice to the remote party.
h Service Button
For use with the Unified Communicator Server (optional)
j Message Button
k Phone Book Button
Scroll
a Down
d Dial Button
Used to access all the messaging options: Voicemail
Messages, Station Messages, SMS, and E-Mail Messages.
Used to search for a phone number saved in the phone, or
to register a new number. Pressing this button shows the
main screen of the phone book.
Used to move downward on various list screens.
l LCD Screen
A backlit display showing the phone’s status (busy,
ringing, receiving an internal message, etc.)
; Handset
Used for two-way voice conversation.
Programmable Buttons
s Desiless Display
Function
NOTE: The words “key” and “button” are interchangeable.
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Button
Function
The blinking pattern differs depending on the phone
status (Telephone Status Indicator).
Used to select or deselect the Call Forwarding/
w Selector Switch for FWD/DND DND/Absent Message setting by using the Selector
Switch control.
Used to select the desired function from the soft
e Soft Buttons
menus displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen.
q LED (TSI)
8
r Enter/OK
Used to make selection or to save an entry.
t Conference Button
Used for conference calls.
y Transfer Button
Used to enable the call transfer function.
u Hold Button
Used to place a call on hold.
i Navigation Button
Used to move the display cursor up and down, left
and right on certain menus.
9
Home Page
TEXT INPUT METHOD
KEY FUNCTIONS
Using the dial and direction buttons on the phone, you can enter and modify the
English characters, numeric and special characters.
NETWORK: The SMT-i5230 uses VoIP communication through an alreadyinstalled data network.
,] on a text input screen, the input mode is
Whenever you press the dial button [,
changed in sequence.
Text Input Example
LCD SCREEN: Various functions are displayed on the LCD screen, so you can use
A
Uppercase Input Mode
a
Lowercase Input Mode
SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE (SMS): You can exchange text messages using
1
Numeric Input Mode
this function. This function is available on internal IP stations.
$
Special Character Input Mode
them conveniently by using the Navigation buttons on the phone.
TELEPHONE STATUS INDICATOR
The indicators are turned on or off depending on the status of relevant functions.
Screen
Status
LED Indicator
Red colored indicator is
constant.
When station is busy
When station is receiving an
incoming call
Red indicator (slow flash).
When there is a message
During “Do Not Disturb”
Incoming Trunk Call
Hold Recalls
Red indicator (fast flash).
Green colored indicator
flashes.
Amber colored indicator
flashes.
SCREEN STRUCTURE
Use the dial buttons to type English text and numbers; and use the
Navigation Button to move the cursor left and right and OK buttons to complete input. When removing the typed characters, select the Del soft button.
Alpha Characters Input: Select this mode (uppercase/lowercase) by pressing
,] button, and type text by repeated pressing the dial buttons, characters
the [,
will auto advance after a time limit.
,] button on keypad, move
Number Input: Select this mode by pressing the [,
the cursor highlighted to 1, then use the keypad to enter digits.
,] button on keySpecial Character Input: Select this mode by pressing the [,
pad; select a desired character by using the Navigation Button; and press the
OK button to enter it.
Keypad Character Entry
Count
Dial ,
The screen consists of three areas.
Icon Area
Text Area
Soft Menu Area
Area
•
Description
1
A
2
a
3
1
(Uppercase)
(Lowercase)
(Numbers) (Special Characters)
Dial #
Not Used
Dial 0
Not Used
Dial 1
Not Used
Dial 2
A
B
C
Dial 3
D
E
F
G
H
I
Icon Area
Displays various icons.
Dial 4
Displays date, time, extension number, name, message,
phone number, etc.
Dial 5
Text Area
J
K
L
Dial 6
M
N
O
Dial 7
P
Q
R
Soft Menu Area
Displays the functions allocated to the 4 soft buttons.
Service menus are provided depending on the state of the
phone. A user can use the service or feature menus by
pressing the soft button.
Dial 8
T
U
V
Dial 9
W
X
Y
10
4
$
S
Z
11
Home Page
DESCRIPTION OF ICONS
NAVIGATING THE MENUS
The following icons are displayed on the screen.
When programming within various menu options, information can be entered via
Q] dial keys. The button used for editing and
the dial pad keys using [0]-[9] and [Q
their features are summarized below.
Icon
Description
Shows that ‘Call Forward’ is enabled.
Shows that ‘Do Not Disturb’ is enabled.
Shows that ‘Mute’ function is enabled. When the call ends to
become a standby status or this function is disabled, this icon
disappears.
Shows that the call is hold state. When call is reconnect or
disconnected, this icon disappears.
Appears when there are unread Short Messages in the
message inbox. Once they are read, it disappears.
Shows that a LAN cable is connected to the PC port.
Shows that a LAN cable is connected to the LAN port but that
the system is not connected.
Shows that a LAN cable is connected to the LAN port and
that the system is connected normally.
Outgoing Call icon.
BUTTONS
FEATURES
To move the cursor left and right, up and down.
Volume + and -
To clear/delete an entire field such as station name.
Hold
To write the changes and exit programming.
Transfer
NAVIGATION BUTTON and SELECTOR
SWITCH FOR FWD/DND/ABSENT MSG
The SMT-i5230 phone has a navigation button and a Selector Switch for FWD/DND
to allow users to use its functions easily.
Selector Switch
Up Navigation Button
Left
Navigation
Button
Navigation Button
Incoming Call icon.
Missed Call icon.
Appears when the Speaker button is active.
Appears when the Headset button is active.
Shows when there is a Cell phone number for the entry in the
Phone Book.
Shows when there is a Home phone number for the entry in
the Phone Book.
Shows when there is a Office phone number for the entry in
the Phone Book.
OK/Enter Button
Down Navigation Button
The Selector Switch can be used to manually set and cancel station Call
Forwarding and Do Not Disturb. NOTE: Do not use the access codes or the function menu to cancel FWD/DND when the selector switch is set in the left or right
position because the switch takes precedence over the access codes/function
menu.
BUTTON
Selector Switch
Shows when there is an internal Extension number for the
entry in the Phone Book.
FUNCTION
Left
Users can set the phone to the call forward
state.
Center
The default standby status. (Normal Mode)
Right
This is set to “Do Not Disturb” and absent
message status.
Direction Key
Users can edit the contents on the screen or
move between menu items.
OK/Enter
Users can select or save the item where a
cursor is placed in a menu mode.
Users can check the caller information
received from a station line during receiving.
Navigation
12
Right
Navigation
Button
13
Home Page
SMT-i5230 SETUP
INITIALIZING THE SMT-i5230
Initially the SMT-i5230 IP keyset will need to be setup to operate within the users
network. The Setup Menu is also used to make changes to the keyset, in the event
that the system information should change. The option chosen will be highlighted.
EASY INSTALL WIZARD
By selecting this option, the System Easy Wizard can guide you through setting up
your network parameters. If you want to set up these parameters individually, follow the instructions below.
•
From the idle phone press Menu, scroll to Phone, and press OK button. Scroll
to Phone Information and press OK button. From the keypad, enter the
administrator’s password (please contact your phone system administrator).
Scroll to Easy Install and press OK button.
The station numbers will be automatically set by the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems once the necessary information has been entered into the IP keyset. Enter ID
and password of the server, as described below to register the phone.
SELECTING THE STATIC IP OPTION
See your system administrator for specific Network and Server addresses. The
addresses necessary to set up the SMT-i5230 are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
IP Address of Station
Network Gateway Address
IP Address of System’s main processor
User ID
Password
SETUP MODE
To get to the Setup Mode unplug the power cord from the SMT-i5230. Press and
hold the , button while you plug power back into the phone. Release the , button when you see Samsung in the display. If you have a PoE (Power over Ethernet)
connection, the same procedure can be done by unplugging and plugging the
Ethernet cable into the phone while pressing and holding the , button.
When the phone reboot is complete, the Language
Menu will display. Press the Yes soft button to advance to
the Configuration Menu.
Once the Configuration Menu is displayed, you can move to each menu in the
Setup by using the navigation button and [1]-[8] dial buttons of the SMT-i5230 IP
phone. To learn how to navigate the menus refer to the previous section.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wait a second for the phone to reboot. The phone should register and authenticate itself to the phone system. Test SMT-i5230 for proper operation.
SETTING UP HOT DESKING [IDLE LOGIN]
Hot Desking allows you to log in and out of your SMT-i5230 IP keyset without
rebooting.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
14
When the Static IP option is selected, enter the System Type OSSP (KP), and
press OK.
Enter the Static IP Address for the phone (eg. 192.168.9.193) then press the
OK button.
Enter the Subnet Mask (eg. 255.255.255.0); press OK button.
Enter Gateway Address (eg. 192.168.9.1), press OK button.
NOTE: Press the , key on the dial pad to enter the “.” in the IP address.
Skip [VLAN-PHONE], [VLAN-PC], [802.1x Setting] by pressing the OK button
three times.
Enter the System IP address (eg. 192.168.9.200), press OK button.
Enter System ID XXXX (eg. 3201), then press OK button.
Enter Password XXXX (eg. 1234) then press OK button.
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Phone then press OK button.
Scroll to Phone Information and press OK button.
Enter the administrator’s password (please contact your phone system administrator).
Scroll to Extension Login then press OK button.
Choose the ON option and press OK button. (Note: ON to allow, OFF to deny
hot desking).
Press the Save soft button to complete the setup.
When the phone restarts, enter the ID (eg; extension 2809) and password.
Press the Save soft button to complete the login.
15
Home Page
CONFIGURATION MENU STRUCTURE
This menu is for administrator use and required a password. The Configuration
Menu options are as follows:
1. EASY INSTALL
This option will guide you through setting up all required parameters for connecting the SMT keyset to your system.
2. PHONE INFORMATION
1. Version Info: Provides boot rom, software, DSP, and hardware version
information.
2. Network Info: Displays network mode, IP address of phone, network, and
gateway information.
3. MAC Address
SECTION 3.
FREQUENTLY USED FEATURE
OPERATION
3. NETWORK
Displays Static IP, Dynamic IP, PPPoE, NAT, 802.1x, VLAN (LAN), and VLAN (PC).
4. SERVER
1. Primary System: The main processor’s IP address.
2. System 1~3: Up to 4 server IPs can be set.
5. EXT. LOGIN
Allows the user to choose the option of permitting the phone either
login/logout from idle mode or only register to the server on power up. Once
the phone is placed into Extension Login mode, a display will show up to allow
you to enter any valid User ID and password. This function is also referred to
as hot desking (idle login).
6. S/W UPGRADE
1. TFTP Server: The IP address of the TFTP server containing the IP software.
2. Upgrade: Starts the IP software upgrade process.
7. FACTORY RESET
This option resets the SMT-i5230 to factory default settings.
8. PHONE RESTART
This option reboots the SMT-i5230 phone.
16
17
Home Page
This section provides the basic operation of your Samsung Multimedia Telephone
SMT-i5230.
INTERNAL CALLS - To place a call to another extension at your location:
EXTENSION LOG IN & OUT [HOT DESKING]
•
•
•
If enabled, your SMT-i5230 telephone may require you to log in before making or
receiving calls. In these cases your telephone system administrator will provide
you with an extension number, password, and the feature code used to log out.
•
TO LOG IN
•
•
•
•
Dial your extension number in the ID field (example
3201).
Press the OK button.
Dial your password in the password field (example 1234).
Press Save soft button.
TO LOG OUT
•
Dial the feature code provided by your administrator (for example 77).
PLACING CALLS
IMPORTANT: Put your phone in Overlap Mode by pressing the Menu button,
select Settings and then select Application Set., press OK, select Call, press OK,
scroll to Dial Mode, change it to Overlap by using the Navigation Button. If your
phone is not in Overlap mode you must always press the Call soft button after
dialing the digits to send the call.
NOTE: All examples of making phone calls are based on the phone being set for
overlap dialing mode.
OUTSIDE CALLS - To place a call to an outside party:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press an idle outside line button, line group button, or dial a line access code
to receive dial tone.
Dial the telephone number.
Hang up the handset when the call is completed.
Lift the handset.
Dial the extension number or group number.
Wait for the party to answer. If you hear a brief tone burst instead of ringback
tone, the station called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer. Begin speaking after the tone.
Hang up the handset when the call is completed.
NOTES:
1.
2.
If you have a DSS button assigned to an extension or station group, you may
press this button instead of dialing the number.
If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
SPEAKERPHONE CALLS - Your Samsung SMT-i5230 has full-duplex speakerphone capability. This feature is used for both internal or external calls. To activate
this feature:
•
•
•
Press the Speaker button.
Place an internal or external call.
Press Speaker button to disconnect the call.
NOTE: The handset can be used at any time during the conversation. To resume
handsfree operation, press the Speaker button, and hang up the handset.
HEADSET CALLS - If a headset is connected to the phone, you need to press
the headset key to direct the call to the headset. The headset key will be lit. To use
the headset:
•
•
•
Press the Speaker button.
Place an internal or external call.
Press Speaker button to disconnect the call.
NOTES:
1.
2.
If you need to switch between the headset and the handset during the call,
you need to place the call on hold first.
Headset key can be enabled or disabled in the Menu, Settings, Application
Setting, Headset.
NOTE: Frequently called telephone numbers can be added to the PhoneBook.
When making internal and external calls from AOM (programmable buttons) list,
press the AOM soft button to access the programmable button screens. Then use
the Navigation button to scroll to and highlight the desired programmable button. Press OK to complete the call.
18
19
Home Page
ANSWERING CALLS
TRANSFERRING WITH CAMP-ON
OUTSIDE/INTERNAL/VOICE ANNOUNCE CALLS - To answer these
When you transfer a call to another station and receive a busy signal, you can
camp the call on to this station. Hang up when you hear the busy signal.The called
party is alerted that a call is waiting.
three types of calls:
•
•
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer on Speakerphone.
Hang up the handset when the call is completed.
NOTE: The volume can be adjusted at any time by pressing the up and down buttons on your navigation button.
PLACING A CALL ON HOLD
•
•
•
Call another internal station.
When receiving a busy tone, press the Func. soft button.
Scroll to Camp On and press OK button (here ringback tone).Wait for party to
answer the call.
NOTE: If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to
receive another call. Press Transfer to return to the caller.
Calls can be placed on System Hold or Exclusive Hold. A call placed on System
Hold can be picked up from any extension. Calls placed on Exclusive Hold can only
be picked up from the extension that placed them on hold.
CALL WAITING
SYSTEM HOLD - To place a call on hold:
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Hold button. The Call button will flash green at your telephone.
To take the caller off hold, press that button and the red flashing light will go
steady red again.
Resume conversation.
EXCLUSIVE HOLD - To place a call on hold at your telephone so that other
users cannot answer it:
•
•
Press the Hold button twice.The call button will flash green at your telephone.
To retrieve the call, press the flashing red line button or press the line button
a third time.
If an outside call is camped-on to your phone or another station is camped-on to
you:
•
Your keyset rings and the call that is waiting (camped-on) flashes red.
Press the flashing button to answer; the other call is put on hold automatically if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press
Hold and then the flashing button or finish the first call and hang up; the waiting call will ring.
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer.
NOTE: Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.
CONFERENCE CALLS
To make a conference call while engaged in a conversation:
NOTE: Internal calls are always placed on exclusive hold.
•
•
TRANSFERRING CALLS
•
You can transfer a call by notifying the party to which the call is being transferred
or without notification.
•
•
•
•
•
•
NOTE: When attempting to add another party to the conference and you
are not able to reach the desired person, hang up. Simply press the
Conference button again to return to the previous conversation.
While on a call, press the Transfer button then dial an extension number.
Confirm you hear a ringback tone.
Wait for the called party to answer and announce the call (optional).
Replace the handset.
Press the Conference button and receive conference tone.
Make another call, either intercom or outside, press the Conference
button and receive conference tone.
Make another call or press the Conference button to join all parties. You can
conference up to five parties (you and four others).
Repeat the last step until all parties are added.
Hang up to leave the conference call.
To drop a party from your conference call:
•
Press the Conference button and dial the extension or line number that is to
be dropped.
•
Press the Conference button again to reestablish the conference.
20
21
Home Page
FORWARDING CALLS
Icon
You can forward your calls to another station, group of stations, or an external telephone number. Program a destination for the type of forwarding you want by
moving the Selector Switch to the left and set the forwarding number for All,
Busy, No Answer, and Busy/No Answer.
LAST NUMBER REDIAL - To redial the last dialed telephone number, press
the Func. soft key scroll to Last Redial and press OK.
PHONE BOOK BUTTON - Provides direct access to Personal Phonebook
(local to phone) or Company Phonebook (requires set-up by administrator).
MESSAGE BUTTON - This function allows users to select which desired type
OTHER FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
VOLUME CONTROL - Vol button is used to adjust the volume of a handset,
speaker and ringing sound.
Volume Control of a Handset
•
•
•
Adjusts the handset volume while busy (handset offhook).
To increase the volume of a handset, press the top side [+] of the Vol button.
To decrease the volume of a handset, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button.
Volume Control of a Speaker
•
•
•
Adjusts the speaker volume while busy (handsfree).
To increase the volume of a speaker, press the top side [+] of the Vol button.
To decrease the volume of a handset, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button.
Volume Control of a Ringing Tone
•
•
To increase the volume of a speaker, press the top side [+] of the Vol button
while ringing.
To decrease the volume of a handset, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button while ringing.
Volume Control of Key Tone
•
•
To increase the volume of the key tones, press the top side [+] of the Vol
button.
To decrease the volume of the key tones, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button.
NOTE: By pressing the Vol button in idle mode, the user can also adjust the key
tone volume.
of messages is viewed. Users can select and view the following options: Voicemail
Messages, Station Messages, E-Mail (optional with IP-UMS only), and Short
Message Service (SMS). Short Message Service is similar to sending text messaging [Function only supported on Samsung IP phones].
SERVICE BUTTON - Used to allow station users access to setting and editing
the scheduler (alarm clock) feature. Also used to connect the OfficeServ
Communicator when application is available (UC is optional).
MENU SOFT BUTTON- This menu displays the following options:
NOTE: The Navigation button can be used to scroll
through these options.
1. PHONEBOOK: Maintains frequently dialed names and numbers in a
Phonebook. Search and initiate calls by: Speed Dial, Associated Names,
Telephone Numbers, Assigned Groups, or Previous Calls registered to your
phone.
2. CALL LOG: Provides direct access to a list of most recent calls, outgoing calls,
incoming calls, missed calls, and an option to delete/delete all (or clear) all
calls from the Call Log.
3. MESSAGES: This function allows users to select which desired type of messages is viewed. Users can select and view the following options: Voicemail
Messages, Station Messages, E-Mail (optional with IP-UMS only), and Short
Message Service (SMS). Short Message Service is similar to sending text messaging [Function only supported on Samsung IP phones].
4. CONFERENCE: Allows a user to setup a conference group to call multiple
parties simultaneously to join the conference call.
5. SERVICE: Allows a user to set the scheduler (alarm reminder) function.
6. PHONE: Allows the user to set many phone options for the phone such as ring
tones, background screens, languages, forward, DND, etc.
7. SETTINGS: This function allows the user to set the following option:
Application Set., Call Forward, Absent Message, AOM Setting, Network
Info., and Clear User Set.
22
23
Home Page
CALL LOG SOFT BUTTON- Provides direct access to
Example of programming a DSS button on the soft AOM:
a list of most recent calls, outgoing calls, incoming calls,
missed calls, and an option to delete/delete all (or clear)
all calls from the Call Log.
•
•
FUNC. SOFT BUTTON - This function allows a user
one touch easy access to many of the system features.
When pressed, the following options are displayed: Last
number redial, Save/Repeat, Speed Dial, Directory, VM
Message, Station Message, Page Pickup, Direct Pickup,
DND, In/Out Group, Status Message, Hold pickup, Page, Meet me Page, OHVA
Block, Group Pickup, and My Group Pickup. The Navigation button can be used
to scroll up and down the list of features under the Func. button.
NOTE: EXE/SECR MSG is displayed only when the phone is programmed for
Boss/Secretary feature.
Example of using the Last Number Redial feature:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button.
Using the Navigation button, scroll to Settings and press OK, then scroll to
and select AOM Setting.
Scroll to the soft AOM button to program (for example: 4).
Press the Edit soft button (the display will show AOM index 4).
Press Edit soft button again, scroll to the feature option (for example: DSS).
Move down and enter the extension number (for example: 2003).
Move down, use the dial pad to enter name (for example: John Dow). Refer to
Text Input Method.
Press the Save soft button to exit and save the setting.
OK/ENTER BUTTON - This function is used to enter, save or complete the
selected option in the display.
SPEAKER BUTTON - This function is used to go on and off hook in the handsfree speakerphone mode.
Press the Func. Soft button, scroll to Last Redial, then press OK button. The
last number called from the phone is called.
NOTE: For detail operation of the list of features under the Func. soft button,
please refer to the System Features section of the user guide.
AOM SOFT BUTTON - This function is used to display all 99 programmable feature buttons of the phone.
The Navigation button can be used to scroll up and
down the list of 99 programmable feature buttons under
the soft AOM.
Example of dialing a Speed Dial Number using the AOM function:
•
Press the AOM soft button, scroll to Speed Dial, then press OK button. The
number is called from the phone.
NOTE: Some programmed features such as speed
dialing and DSS buttons can be used to process calls;
other programmed buttons such as Call buttons can
only be viewed.
The soft AOM button can also display status indications for station keys, trunks,
voice mail messages, etc.
24
25
Home Page
BASIC MENUS
The basic menus screen is displayed if you select the Menu from the soft menu at
the left bottom of a idle screen. Using the Up/Down button, move to a desired
function, and press the OK button to execute the function.
SOFT BUTTON STRUCTURE
SECTION 4.
PHONE FEATURES
MENU SOFT BUTTON
Item
1. Phonebook
Sub-Item
All
Personal Phonebook Unassigned
Search
New
Edit [+]
2. Call Log
Call
Description
Shows the entire list of phone numbers
stored in the phone.
This is a list of number that are not assigned
any group.
Allows a user to search for a registered
phone number by name/number.
Saves a phone number or group name; and
allows a user to specify a speed dialing
number and ringtone.
Allows a user to delete all the phone
numbers saved in the phone.
Used to make a callback from the call log.
This is used to save entries from call log to
phonebook.
This is used to delete entries from the call
[+] Delete
log.
This is used to to move back one menu
Back
screen.
Allows a user to delete all the call history
Delete All
saved in the phone.
Allows a user to retrieve voice mail
1. Voice Mail [0]
messages from the mailbox.
Allows a user to retrieve station messages
2. Station Message [0]
(internal) from another user.
Allows a user to to view how many e-mail
3. Email [0]
messages have been received via IP-UMS
(optional).
Allows a user to retrieve and send internal
short messages (SMS) like text message to
4. Short Message[0]
other internal phones. [Not Supported Over
Networking]
Save
3. Messages
26
27
Home Page
Item
4. Conference
5. Service
6. Phone
Sub-Item
Description
Allows a user to setup (show, add and edit) a conference group
to call multiple parties simultaneously to join the conference call.
Allows a user to set the alarm clock function.
Allows the user to set a timed reminder
1. Scheduler
alarm to give an audible indication or
alarm clock function.
Allows the user to set many phone options for the phone such as
ring tones, background screens, languages, etc.
1. UC Dial: Right
Options are DND and Absent Message.
2. Screen
Options are Display Time, Font, and LCD
Power.
3. Sound
Options are Volumes, Ring Tone, and Key
Tone.
4. Language
Options are English and Korean.
5. Security
Change Password, Dial and Phone Lock.
Easy Install: Used to register and authenticate the phone to the server.
6. Phone Information
Item
Sub-Item
Description
This function is used to allow station users to set application
settings, call forwarding, absent messaging, AOM setting,
view station network information, view phone firmware or iniNote: All options are not
tialize the phone. Other settings include the following:
explained in this manual.
Options are Call (CID 1, CID 2, Dial Mode),
The options are initiative
Phone Number, Boss Answer, Short
and menu driven for an
1. Application Set.
easy, user friendly menus
Message, Station On/Off, and Extension
to guide you through
Login.
navigating the Setting
Options are Not Use, All, Busy, No
Menu Options.
2. Call Forward
Answer, Busy/No Answer, DND, and
Follow Me Status.
7. Settings
3. Absent Message
Used to leave station messages in display informing other internal parties of
your status when your station is called.
4. AOM Setting
Used to set the name and number
function to the 99 AOM buttons.
5. Network Info.
Used to view the current network
settings.
6. Clear User Set.
Clear your local setting such as phonebook, call log, etc.
Phone Information: Includes Version
Info, Network Info, and MAC Address.
Network: Options are Static IP, Dynamic
IP, PPPoE, VLAN (LAN Port), VLAN (PC Port),
802.1x.
Server: Used to register the phone to one
or more Servers. Options are Primary,
System 1, System 2, and System 3.
Extension Login: Used to log phone on
and off (Hot Desking).
S/W Upgrade: Upgrade Server, Upgrade:
used to upgrade software on phones.
Factory Reset: Used to default the phone
settings.
Phone Restart: Used to reboot the
phones.
License: Display the licensing policy.
28
29
Home Page
1. PHONEBOOK
Company phonebook requires setup by the System
Administrator.
PERSONAL PHONEBOOK
Search
Allows a user to search by name/number for a phone saved in the phone book.
•
•
NOTE: Personal phonebook is stored locally in phone memory.
Press the Phonebook button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK.
Press the Search soft button from the dial pad enter the characters of the
name (case sensitive) or number to search and press the OK button, the
matching phone number is displayed. Move to a desired name/number using
the Navigation button, and select the Call soft button to place a call.
All
Shows the entire list of phone numbers saved in the phone book.
•
•
Press the Phonebook button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK, scroll to All, and then press OK.
The entire list of phone numbers saved in the phone book is shown on the
screen. Using the Navigation button, move to a desired entry, and select the
Call soft button to place a call.
Add New Entry to Phone Book [+]
This is the function used to register a phone number.
•
•
•
Unassigned Group
The Unassigned option is a list of all the phonebook entries that have not been
assigned to a group. Once an entry is assigned to a group, the entry is removed
from the unassigned list.
•
•
•
•
Press the Phonebook button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK.
Press the [+] soft button, and then New.
Enter a name by using the dial pad, scroll down and enter a mobile number,
home number, office number, internal extension number, fax number,
and e-mail address.
Assign a Group (if needed).
Select a Ring Tone.
Add Memo information (up to 50 characters).
Press the Save soft button to save the new entry to the Phone Book.
TO CREATE A PHONEBOOK GROUP
To create a group in the phonebook:
•
•
•
Press the Phonebook button, then press the [+] soft button, then press the
New soft button.
Using the key pad, input the name of the group, then press the Save soft button. See Text Input Method.
Press Edit soft button or press Back soft button to exit.
TO MOVE UNASSIGNED ENTRY TO PHONEBOOK GROUP
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Phonebook button, scroll to Unassigned option then press OK button.
Scroll to the entry that is to be moved to an assigned group and press OK button.
Press Edit soft button, scroll to and highlight the Group option.
Using the Navigation button, move Left or Right to the group name (eg;
Personal) which you want to move the entry into.
Once the correct entry is displayed, press the Save button. The entry is now
assigned to the group.
DELETE / DELETE ALL
This is the function used to delete all the phone numbers saved in the phone
book.
•
•
•
•
2. CALL LOG
Outgoing
Incoming
Missed Icons
This function lists all the recent numbers for outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
•
•
30
Press the Phonebook button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK.
Scroll to All and press OK button. Scroll to entry to delete.
Press [+] soft button. Press Del. to delete the selected entry or Del All.
Press the Yes to Delete entry.
Press the Log soft button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to Call
Log, press OK. A phone number list of recent outgoing, incoming and missed
calls is displayed.
Scroll to an entry and press the Call soft button to dial the number.
31
Home Page
VIEWING DETAIL CALL LOG RECORD
To view the details of each of the call log entry, highlight the entry and press the
OK button to display the full Caller ID record which includes the name, date and
time.
DELETE / DELETE ALL
This is the function used to delete an entry or all entries in the Call Log.
•
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Call Log, press OK.
Scroll to entry to delete.
Press [+] soft button. Press Del. to delete the selected entry or Del All.
Press the Yes to Delete entry.
TO ADD A CALL LOG ENTRY TO PHONE BOOK
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Call Log, press OK. Scroll to desired Call
Log entry and press the Edit soft button. Make changes to the name and
number if necessary. When finished, press the Save soft button. The Call Log
number is added as a new entry to the phonebook list.
3. E-Mail
This function allows users to view the amount of e-mails for a station user’s
account. This function is only available when the IP-UMS application is enabled.
Please refer to the IP-UMS manuals for detailed operation.
4. Short Message (SMS)
This function is used to send and create internal short messages or text messaging.
INBOX
•
•
•
•
Press the Message button—OR—press the Menu soft button.
Scroll to Short Message, press OK.
Scroll to Inbox, then press OK to view a short text message(s) in you Inbox.
Press the [+] soft button, press Del. soft button, and the Yes soft button to
delete the selected short text message or press the Back soft button to exit
Short Message.
NEW MESSAGE (SEND)
3. MESSAGES
1. Voice Mail
This function is used to create and send a new short text message.
•
•
•
This function allows users to retrieve voice mail message from the mailbox.
•
Press the Message button—OR—press Menu soft button, scroll to
Messages, press OK, scroll to Voice Mail [ ], and then press OK to access the
voicemail box and retrieve messages.
2. Station Message
This function allows users to retrieve station messages (internal) from another
user.
•
•
•
•
32
Press the Message button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Messages, press OK, scroll to Station MSG [ ], and then press OK.
To return a call to the station that left the message: press the Func. soft button, scroll to Reply, then press OK.
To delete the station message: press the Func. soft button, scroll to Clear, then
press OK.
To view the next station message: press the Func. soft button, scroll to Next,
then press OK.
•
•
Press the Message button—OR—press the Menu soft button.
Scroll to Short Message, press OK.
Press New Msg soft button.Write or create a new short message and press the
Next soft button. See Text Input Method on how to enter characters in text
messages.
Enter the internal extension(s) to send the short message. Scroll to other
entries and enter the station number to send to more users. (Each short message can be sent to 1 through 10 users).
Press the Send soft button to deliver the short message to other user’s inbox.
NOTES:
1.
When the message is sent successfully, the message “Sent” is displayed. When
the message fails to send the “Failed to send” is displayed.
2.
SMS messages can only be sent to internally ITP, SMT-W, or SMT-i phones.TDM
and single line phones cannot send or receive SMS messages. SMS messaging
is not supported over networking.
33
Home Page
OUTBOX
TO EDIT CONFERENCE GROUP PHONE NUMBER LIST
This function is used to create and send a new short text message.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Message button—OR—press the Menu soft button.
Scroll to Short Message, press OK.
Scroll to Outbox, then press OK to view short text message sent from your
phone.
Press the [+] soft button, then Del/Del All soft button to delete the short text
message(s) or press the Back soft button to exit SMS.
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Conference button, and press OK.
Scroll to the Name of the Group to be edited and press Edit soft button.
Press the Edit soft button. Edit the phone number list—OR—
Press Search soft button to search for phone number to add to group from
the phonebook. Highlight the entry and press the OK button to add the number to the Conference Group list.
When complete with the editing, press the Save soft button to save changes.
4. CONFERENCE [Group]
5. SERVICE
This function allows a user to setup a conference group
to call multiple parties simultaneously to join the conference call.
Allows a user to set the alarm clock function.
CREATING CONFERENCE GROUP
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Conference, and press OK.
Press New soft button, enter phone number (up to 4 numbers) of the parties
included in the Conference Group.
Press the Call soft button to initiate the Conference Group.
TO CREATE AN UNSUPERVISED CONFERENCE
•
•
During the conference, the host can press the Host soft button.
The host is dropped and the other parties remain in conference.
TO DISCONNECT A PARTY FROM CONFERENCE GROUP
•
•
•
Highlight the party to be disconnected from the conference group.
Press the Disc. soft button. The party is disconnected.
Press the Call soft button to call back and add the party back to the conference group.
SAVING A CONFERENCE GROUP
•
•
After completing the group conference, press the Save soft button.
Enter the Name of the Group, and press Save soft button.
•
•
•
•
Press the Service button—OR—press the Menu soft
button, scroll to Scheduler, then press OK.
Press the New soft button.
Enter the name of the scheduler using the dial pad and navigation buttons.
Press the Next soft button. Enter the Date, Time, Alarm Type, and Ring Tone.
Press Save soft button when finished.
TO DELETE A SCHEDULE
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press Menu soft button. Scroll to Service button, and press the OK button.
Select Scheduler and press the OK button.
To delete a current schedule, press the [+] soft button.
Select and highlight the entry to be deleted and press Delete soft button—
OR—press the Delete All soft button to clear all schedules.
Select Yes to confirm or No to deny the deletion of a schedule(s).
Press Back and End soft buttons to exit the scheduler.
6. PHONE
Allows the user to set many phone options for phone
such as ring tones, background screens, languages, etc.
1. UC Dial: Right
This option is used to select which function will be
enabled when the selector switch is moved to the right position.
TO EDIT A CONFERENCE GROUP
•
•
•
34
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Conference button, and press OK.
Scroll to the Name of the Group to be edited and press Edit soft button.
Edit the group name. When complete, press the Save soft button to save
changes.
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone and press OK.
Scroll to UC Dial: Right and press OK.
Select DND or Absent Message and press Save soft button.
35
Home Page
2. Screen
7. SETTINGS
•
This function is used to allow station users to set
Application Settings, Call Forward, Absent Message,
AOM Setting, Network Information, and to Clear User
Settings such as Call Log and Phonebook.
•
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone and press OK. Select Screen and
press OK. Set the following Time Format, Font, and LCD Power Saving of the
SMT-i5230 phone, select the option and adjust the screen settings.
Press the Save soft button to store the screen settings.
3. Sound
•
•
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone and press OK. Select Sound and
press OK. Set the following Volumes, Ring Tone, and Key Tone of the SMTi5230 phone, select the option and adjust the sound settings.
Press the Save soft button to save the sound settings.
4. Language
•
•
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone and press OK. Select Language
and press OK. Select English (Default English).
Press the Save soft button.
5. Security
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone and press OK. Scroll to Security
and press OK.
Enter the station password [default 1234].
Press OK to Change Password and press Back soft button.
Scroll to Dial to Unlock, Lock Out (Outgoing), or Lock All.
Scroll to Phone to Unlock or Lock the Menu.
Press the Save soft button.
FUNC. SOFT BUTTON
This function allows a user one touch easy access to
many of the system features.When pressed, the following
options are displayed: Last Number Redial,
Save/Repeat, Speed Dial, Directory, VM Message, Station Message, Page
Pickup, Directory Pickup, DND, In/Out Group, Status Message, Hold Pickup,
Page, Meet Me Page, OHVA Block, Group Pickup, and My Group Pickup. The
Navigation button can be used to scroll up and down the list of features under the
Func. button.
NOTE: For detailed operation of the list of features under the Func. soft button,
please refer to the System Features section of this user guide.
AOM SOFT BUTTON
This function is used to display all 99 programmable feature buttons of the phone.The Navigation button can be
used to scroll up and down the list of 99 programmable
feature buttons under the AOM module. The feature buttons can be programmed
by a technician.
6. Phone Information
Allows a user to set up the following options: Easy Install Wizard (registering the
phone), Phone Info (Version, Network, MAC Address), Network (Static, Dynamic,
etc.), Server (Phone can register to 1 to 4 servers), Extension Login (logging in
and out IP phones), Software Upgrade (Upgrading the phone or server software),
Factory Reset (defaulting the phone), and Phone Restart (rebooting the phone).
NOTE: The license policy can be viewed by pressing the License soft button.
36
37
Home Page
OUTSIDE CALLS
MAKING CALLS FROM AOM
Note: When making calls, internal or outside calls, in order to access the programmable button screens, press the AOM soft button. Then you can utilize the
Navigation button to scroll the list.
SECTION 5.
OFFICESERV™ 7000
SYSTEM FEATURES
•
•
When the desired number is highlighted, press the OK button.
The number will be automatically dialed.
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device. To answer
calls ringing this device, dial 67—OR—press the UA button. This device can operate in any one of the six different ring plans.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing.
RECALL DIAL TONE
•
Press the New button to disconnect your existing call, wait for dial tone and
then make a new call on the same line.
NOTE: If this button does not appear on your keyset, the Flash button may be programmed to recall dial tone.
SENDING A FLASH
While on an outside call, press the Flash button to send a flash to the telephone
company. This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use.
NOTE: Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit.
BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK
If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line, this means that
the line or group of lines is busy.
•
•
•
•
38
Press the Callback button, if programmed, or dial 44, you will hear confirmation tone.
Hang up or press Speaker button.
When the line becomes free, the system will call you back.
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer, wait for dial tone and
dial the telephone number or speed dial number again.
39
Home Page
NOTES:
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set
a callback, the cursor associated with the Callback button will be solid black.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing.
BUSY STATION CALLBACK
When you call another station and receive a busy signal:
•
•
•
Press the Callback button, if programmed, or dial 44.
When the busy station becomes free, your keyset will ring.
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to call the now idle station.
NOTES:
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set
a callback, the cursor associated with the Callback button, will be solid black.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing.
•
The called station must release its first call or place it on hold before answering your camp-on.
NOTES:
1. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no available button to
accept your call. Hang up or leave a message.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing.
AUTO CAMP-ON
When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the
camp on button every time you call a busy station, you can set your phone for auto
camp-on.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 081 to turn On auto camp-on or dial 080 to turn it Off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
CANCELING CALLBACK
A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set a callback, the cursor associated with the Callback button, will be solid black.
To cancel a callback:
•
•
Press the Callback button, if programmed, or dial 44.The display will show the
callback details, press the Func. soft button and then Clear.
This will cancel the last set callback and display the next set callback, also with
the option to Clear.This process is repeated until all callbacks are cleared from
memory.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature is turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press the Speaker button before dialing.
BUSY STATION CAMP-ON
When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to
wait for a callback:
MANUAL CAMP-ON
•
•
•
40
Press the Camp button or dial 45.
The called station will receive off-hook ring tone repeated every few seconds
and the cursor associated with the first available Call button will flash black to
indicate your call is waiting.
Wait for the called party to answer.
41
Home Page
INTERCOM CALLS
CALL PROCESSING
VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE
SYSTEM HOLD
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
you will hear the caller’s announcement.
When you are connected to any call, press Hold. The call will flash at the keyset. If
this call appears on a line button at other keysets, it will flash at those keysets also.
•
•
•
Press the Speaker button to turn on the microphone and speak handsfree—
OR—lift the handset to reply.
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the Speaker button.
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
to ON.
To take the caller off hold, press that button and the flashing LED will go
steady again. Resume the conversation—OR—press the Hold button. The
flashing LED will go steady again and you will be connected to the call again.
Resume the conversation.
AUTO ANSWER MODE
NOTE: While on a call, pressing a line button, route button or flashing Call button
will automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call. See
Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset.
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
then automatically answer the call.
EXCLUSIVE HOLD
•
•
Your microphone and speaker are turned on and you can speak handsfree. For
privacy, use the handset.
To finish the call, replace the handset.
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
to ON.
To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it:
•
•
Press the Hold button twice.The call will flash on your keyset and this line will
show a steady indication on other keysets.
To retrieve the call, press the flashing line button or press the Hold button a
third time.
NOTE: Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold.
CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR
•
•
Dial 0 to call your system operator or group of operators.
If you want to call a specific operator, dial that person’s extension number.
NOTE: If the Hot keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button or dial 0 before you begin dialing.
REMOTE HOLD
When you wish to place a call on hold at another station.
•
•
Press Transfer and dial the station number (or press the appropriate DSS button)
Press the Hold button. This will place the call on system hold on an available
Call button or Line button at the remote station and return you to dial tone.
NOTES:
1. If the destination station does not have any free Call buttons or line buttons
you will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other party by pressing the Transfer button.
2. Intercom calls cannot be put on remote hold.
42
43
Home Page
HOLD RECALL
CALL TRANSFER
If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer, it will recall your station. The
button that the call appears on will have a slow flashing indicator.
Transfer is used to send any calls to another extension in one of two ways.You can
do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can
do a blind transfer without notification.
•
•
When your phone rings, lift the handset or press the Speaker button to
answer the recall.
If you do not answer this recall within a pre-programmed period of time, it will
go to the system operator.
NOTE: The Led will flash amber during hold recall.
•
•
CONSULTATION HOLD
When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with another extension:
•
•
•
•
Press the Transfer button; you will receive transfer dial tone.Your call is placed
on transfer hold.
Dial the extension number.
Consult with the internal party.
Press Transfer to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call.
•
•
While on a call, press the Transfer button and dial an extension number or
group number. Your call is automatically put on transfer hold—OR—press a
DSS button or station group button. Your call is automatically put on transfer
hold.
Hang up when you hear ringing (this is an unscreened or blind transfer)—
OR—wait for the called party to answer and advise him/her of the call and
hang up. If the transfer is refused, you will be reconnected to the outside line
when the called station hangs up or you can press Transfer to return to the
outside party.
If you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the first
station to hang up, simply press another DSS button—OR—press the Call
button or C.O. line button to return to the outside party and begin the transfer process again.
When you are transferring a call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto
Answer, the transferred call will always ring.
RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT ANOTHER
STATION [HOLD PICKUP]
NOTES:
1. After the inside party answers, you may alternate back and forth between the
parties by pressing the Transfer button.
2. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to receive another call. Press Transfer to return to the other party.
3. You cannot transfer an Intercom call by pressing a DSS button.You must press
the Transfer button and dial the destination extension number.
When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset, press the Line button with
the flashing indicator.
TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON
When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset, dial 12 plus the line
number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold.
When you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal,
you may camp the call on to this station. Simply hang up when you hear the busy
signal. The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
NOTE: If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to
receive another call. Press Transfer to return to the outside caller.
NOTE: Repeatedly pressing the Transfer button will toggle between the outside
party and internal extension. If necessary you may disconnect either one of the
parties by pressing the Func. soft button, then press the Cancel soft button.
44
45
Home Page
TRANSFER TO VOICE MAIL
To Forward ALL Calls to Another Station
This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailbox.Your keyset must have
a correctly programmed VT button to accomplish this. To transfer a call directly to
a voice mailbox:
•
•
•
•
•
•
While on a call, press the VT button and dial the mailbox number.
Hang up when dialing is completed.
CALL WAITING
If an outside call has been camped-on to your phone or another station has
camped-on to you:
•
•
•
You will hear a tone in the earpiece and the call that is waiting for you
(camped-on) will flash. In addition the bottom line of the display will indicate
the number of the station or trunk party camped-on.
Press the flashing button to answer; your other call will go on hold automatically if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press
Hold and then the flashing button—OR—finish the first call and hang up; the
waiting call will ring.
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer.
NOTE: Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.When using the speakerphone
the camp-on tone will come through the speaker.
CALL FORWARD OPTIONS
A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations. Call
forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display features. To review or change call forward options:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
46
Press the Menu button, scroll to Settings, press the OK button.
Scroll to Call Forward and press the OK button.
Scroll to the desired Forwarding option, enter the destination extension, and
press the Save soft button.
—OR—
Press Transfer 102.
Dial 0-5 to select the forward type (e.g., 1)—OR—
Press Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] to select the forward type
Press the right soft key to move the cursor.
Dial the destination number (e.g., 202)—OR—
Press Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] to select the destination and press
the Right soft key to move the cursor.
Dial 1 to set—OR—press Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] to select Yes or
No and press Transfer to store and exit.
—OR—
Dial 601 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To Forward Calls to Another Station when you are on the Phone (BUSY):
Dial 602 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To Forward Calls to Another Station when you DO NOT ANSWER:
•
•
Dial 603 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
When you have both Forward ON BUSY and Forward NO ANSWER
Destination Programmed:
•
•
You can activate them simultaneously.
Dial 604. Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To Forward Calls when DND is Activated:
•
•
Dial 605 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To Forward Calls to the Station Where You Currently Are
(FORWARD FOLLOW ME):
•
•
Dial 606 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To clear all call forward conditions set at your station lift the handset and dial 600.
STATION CALL PICKUP
To answer a call ringing at another station, lift the handset and dial 65 plus the
extension number of the ringing phone. If you have a DP key assigned with a station
number, you only need to press this DP (Direct Pickup) key with the flashing light to
answer this ringing station. NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you
must first lift the handset or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
GROUP CALL PICKUP
To pick up (answer) a call ringing in any pickup group, lift the handset and dial 66
plus the desired group number (01-10 on the OfficeServ 7030, 01-20 on the
OfficeServ 7200-S, 01-99, and 01-99 on the OfficeServ 7000 Series) or press the
flashing GROUP PICKUP button if available.
NOTES:
1. A group pickup button can have an extender for a specific pickup group.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing the access code.
47
Home Page
MY GROUP PICKUP
If desired, a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same
pickup group as you are in. Like “66” above except you do not need to dial the
desired group number. See your installation company for the assigned access
code. MY GROUP PICKUP: __________________.
PRIVACY RELEASE
This feature will allow another station to join in our conversation by releasing privacy on the C.O. from your phone.
To Release Privacy: While you are talking on a C.O. line and you wish to have other
internal parties (or up to three) join the conversation.
•
Press the PRB button (the PRB indicator will be steady). Inform the other party
that he/she may now join the conversation.
After the other party (or parties) has joined the conversation and you wish to
return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation, press the
PRB button a second time, the PRB button LED will be off.
To Join a Non-Private Conversation: When someone has informed you that you
can join a conversation:
•
•
Press the C.O. line button that he/she has indicated OR
Dial the C.O. line number that he/she has indicated.
DIALING FEATURES
All “DIALING FEATURES” instructions are written to support Overlap Dialing mode.
This is the technical name for dialing from a telephone as it has been for many
years. In recent years the cell phone industry has changed the cell phones to use
Enblock Dialing. With this dialing mode all the digits are dialed and then sent to
the carrier after pressing the CALL key. Please check your telephone setup to confirm what dialing mode is used.
SPEED DIALING
You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system-wide
speed dial list of numbers 500–999 or from your personal list of numbers 00–49.
Your system may be set for 950 system wide numbers. If so the system speed dial
access codes are 050~999 and the station speed dial codes are 000~049.
•
•
•
From the idle screen with the handset on-hook, press the AOM soft button, or
dial 16, scroll to the Speed Dial button, press the OK button.
Dial the desired speed dial bin number.
The telephone number is automatically dialed for you.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED
DIAL NUMBERS
You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial
list. A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers, 00–49. See your system administrator to determine the amount assigned to your station. The phone itself maintains 1000 station speed dial numbers.
•
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 105.
Dial a speed dial number (00–49).
Dial a line or line group access code.
Dial the telephone number to be stored (24 digits maximum). It can include #,
,, FLASH and PAUSE.
Press Transfer to store the number.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker key before you begin dialing.
48
49
Home Page
For the purposes of programming
speed dial numbers, the programmable buttons are know as A, B, C, D, E,
and F.
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
•
•
•
•
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
2. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
•
•
•
The A button is not used.
The B button inserts a flash.
The C button inserts a pause.
(Clear)
The D button is used for pulse to
A
tone conversion. If your system
(Flash) B
uses rotary (or pulse) dialing C.O.
(Pause) C
lines, pressing D while entering a
(Conversion) D
speed dial number causes all sub(Hide) E
sequent digits to be sent as DTMF
(Name/Number) F
tones.
The E button is used to hide digits. Display keyset users may want to hide
some speed dial numbers so that they will not show in the display. When you
are entering a telephone number, press E. All subsequent digits will be hidden. Press E again to begin displaying digits.
The F button is used to enter a speed dial name or number. See Personal Speed
Dial Names under Display Features.
Use the Hold button to clear a speed dial number.
DIRECTORY DIALING
•
•
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Directory, press OK.
Press Func. soft button, scroll to the desired directory, press OK.
STATION DIRECTORY - Accesses Station name directory.
PERSONAL DIRECTORY - Accesses your personal speed dial name list.
SYSTEM DIRECTORY - Accesses System speed dial name list.
•
•
•
•
Enter the first letter of the desired party.
Press the +/- buttons to scroll to the desired entry.
Press the Func. soft button.
Select the appropriate operation, press OK.
DIAL - Dials the displayed number.
EXIT - Exit programming and return to idle screen.
PREVIOUS - Moves you to the previous entry.
NEXT - Moves you to the next entry.
•
Press Back to return to idle screen.
To redial the last outgoing telephone number you dialed, press the Func. soft button, scroll to Last Redial, or dial 19.
SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL
To save the number you just dialed for later use, press the Save/Repeat button
before hanging up.
To redial this saved number at any time, press the Func. soft button, scroll to
Save/Repeat, press OK button or dial 17. The same line will be selected for you.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
2. The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another
number.
3. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
AUTOMATIC REDIAL/RETRY
When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal, the system can
automatically redial the number for you. It will automatically redial at a pre-programmed interval for up to 15 attempts.
•
•
•
When you hear a busy signal, press the Retry button.
The system will reserve the line and automatically redial the same number for
you. You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker. The microphone is muted.
When the called party answers, lift the handset or press the flashing Speaker
to begin speaking.
NOTES:
1. If you make another call, auto-redial is canceled.
2. To cancel an auto-retry, lift and replace the handset.
PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER
When making an outside call on a dial pulse line, press #. All digits dialed after the
# with be sent as tones.
50
51
Home Page
PAGING AND MESSAGING
MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE
To make an announcement through the keyset speakers in the idle condition:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Page button, press OK or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
NOTES:
1. If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press Page
and dial a zone number.
2. If allowed by your system administrator you may be able to initiate a page
from a speakerphone by pressing the Page key or dialing 55 without lifting
the handset.
MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE
NOTES:
1. The LED on the Page button will only light when an All Page is in progress.
2. If allowed by your system administrator you may be able to initiate a page
from a speakerphone by pressing the Page key or dialing 55 without lifting
the handset.
MEET ME PAGE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the Meet Me Page (MMPG) button or dial 54.
Dial the desired zone number.
After the attention tone, instruct the paged person to dial 56.
Press Func. soft button, then Answer Wait, then OK button.
Remain off-hook until the person dials 56 from any phone.
The paged person will be automatically connected with you.
CALL PARK AND PAGE
When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his/her desk, you can
park the call prior to paging. The OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ
7000 Series systems offer two different methods:
To make an announcement through the external paging speakers:
MANUAL PARK ORBITS
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Page button, press OK or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 5, 6, 7 or 8—OR—dial 9 to page all external
zones.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
NOTES:
1. If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press Page
and dial a zone number.
2. If allowed by your system administrator you may be able to initiate a page
from a speakerphone by pressing the Page key or dialing 55 without lifting
the handset.
ALL PAGE
To page all designated keysets in internal zone 0 and all external zones at the same
time:
•
•
•
•
52
Lift the handset.
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Page button, press OK or dial 55.
Dial , or press the All Page button.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
•
•
•
While in conversation, press the Park button.
Entered a desired orbit number (0-9), if the orbit number is busy dial another
orbit number. Display users can press , to automatically place the call in any
available orbit number and see the number in the display.
Remember the selected orbit number.
Replace the handset when finished.
Lift the handset and make a page announcement as previously described
(example:“John Smith park two”).
To retrieve a parked call from orbit:
•
•
Press the Park button and dial the announced orbit number (0-9).
You will be connected to the parked call.
NOTES:
1. You must have a Park button or park access code to retrieve and place calls in
park orbits.
2. If the parked call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it
will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park
and page intercom calls.
3. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
53
Home Page
AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE BUTTON
•
•
•
While in conversation, press the Page button. The call is automatically parked
at your station.
Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number.
Make announcement indicating your extension number or the line number.
Hang up.
•
•
RETURNING MESSAGES
•
To retrieve an automatically parked call:
•
Dial 10 plus the number that was announced. If you have a PAGPK button,
press it and dial the number that was announced. If you have a Park button,
press it and dial the announced orbit number.
•
You will be connected to the parked call.
NOTES:
1. If the call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it will recall
your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park and page
intercom calls.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION
When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy
signal, you can leave a message indication:
•
•
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Message, press OK—OR—dial 43 and
receive confirmation tone. Hang up.
The message button on the Main Programmable Button screen and the TSI
will flash red at the called station.
NOTES:
1. A station can have up to five message indications.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
CANCELING MESSAGES
To cancel a message indication that you left at another station, dial 42 plus the
extension number of the station at which you left a message.
•
To cancel all message indications left at your keyset, dial 42 plus your extension. Your Message button indicator will stop flashing and the TSI will go out.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the
handset or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
54
—OR—
Press Message button, scroll to Station Messages, press OK.
Press Func. soft button, scroll to Clear, press OK.
•
•
Press Menu, scroll to Message, press OK, scroll to Station Message, press OK,
press Func. soft button, press REPLY, and then press OK, or dial 43. The first
station that left a message will be called automatically. If that station does not
answer, the called station Message button indicator will continue to flash and
the TSI will stay on.
Repeat until all messages have been returned in the order received.
Your Message button indicator will stop flashing and the TSI will turn off
when all messages have been returned.
NOTES:
1. Display keyset users can view message indications and return them in any
order. See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
3. If a message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer, you must
manually cancel the message after it has been returned.
PROGRAMMED MESSAGES
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you can leave a
programmed station message. Display stations calling you will see this message
and be informed of your status or follow your instructions.
•
•
•
Dial 48 plus any of the message codes (01–20) listed on the back of this user
guide.
To cancel any of these messages you might have selected, dial 48 plus 00.
Press Transfer to exit and store your selection.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button.
You can have multiple programmed message buttons (PMSG) and each one can
have a different message code:
•
•
Press any programmed message (PMSG) button. The message is set and the
PGM MSG button indicator will be lit steady. Press the button again to turn off
the programmed message and the indicator will go blank.
Pressing another programmed message (PMSG) button will turn the previous
one off and set a different programmed message.
55
Home Page
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
LOGGING IN AND OUT
If enabled, your SMT-i5230 telephone may require you to log in before making or
receiving calls. In these cases your telephone system administrator will provide
you with an extension number, password, and the feature code used to log out.
To log in:
•
•
•
At Extension Login Screen enter your ID which is your extension number.
Scroll down to the password field and enter your station password
Press on Save soft button or OK button.
To log out:
•
Dial the feature code provided by your administrator (for example 77).
MUTE
You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversation:
•
•
Press the Mute button. The Mute button indicator will be lit steady.
To resume speaking, press the Mute button again. The Mute button indicator
goes blank.
BACKGROUND MUSIC
When a music source is supplied, you may listen to music through the speaker in
your keyset:
•
•
While on-hook, press the Hold button to hear music.
Press the Hold button again to turn music off.
You can set the level of background music by using the Volume buttons while listening to the music. This does not affect the speakerphone level.
DO NOT DISTURB
ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP
Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset.
To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to
a computer modem on your PC.
•
•
While on-hook, press the Func. soft button, scroll to DND, press OK, press 1 to
turn it ON, or dial 401. The DND button indicator will be lit steady to remind
you of this mode.
To cancel DND, press the Func. soft button, scroll to DND, press OK, press 0 to
turn it OFF, or dial 400. The DND button indicator goes blank. You can make
calls while in the DND mode.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button.
2. If you place your keyset in DND mode and you do not have a DND button,
your Telephone Status Indicator button will fast flash red to indicate DND
status.
3. The selector switch can also be used to set DND.
•
•
Press the EP button for that station on your keyset and the call is automatically moved to your keyset.
The single line extension on your modem will be disconnected.
NOTE: You must have an assigned (EP button) button on your regular keyset, for
the single line station.
ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE
When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone:
•
•
•
You will receive three short rings repeated.
Lift the handset. You are connected to the door phone.
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
ONE TIME DND
If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call, you
can press the DND button and place your station in Do Not Disturb. When you
hang up at the end of the call, DND will be automatically canceled and your keyset will be able to receive new calls. This feature requires a DND button.
56
57
Home Page
CALLING THE DOOR PHONE/
ROOM MONITOR
You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in
another room.
•
•
•
Dial the extension number of the door phone.
You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have a conversation.
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button.
EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY [HOT LINE]
If programmed, an executive boss and a secretary can have a hot line between
them. When the executive station is in the DND mode, all of its calls will ring the
secretary station. If the secretary does not answer, the caller will go to the secretary’s voice mail box if setup.
When an Executive/Secretary hotline is programmed to this keyset, the keyset
offers an additional screen option. This screen has options for setting the status of
the keyset user. This status update is viewable to EasySet users only.
•
•
Either person can press the Boss button to make a voice call to the other station.
Using the hot line will override DND at the other station.This button will have
a flashing indication when the other station is in use.
To transfer a call to a Boss in DND:
•
•
Press the Boss button.
Wait for the Boss to answer, then announce the call and hang up to complete
the transfer—OR—hang up to complete a blind transfer.
GROUP LISTENING
When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset, you may want
other people to hear the distant party’s voice over the speaker:
•
•
•
•
NOTE: Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office, it may be
advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up. This will eliminate a momentary squeal.
ACCOUNT CODES
When enabled, your system allows calls to be charged to different accounts. You
can enter account codes either by dialing the full code, by entering an account
code “bin number”, or by pressing your ACC (Account) key if one is assigned. Bin
numbers are a 3 digit short code that will automatically insert the appropriate
account code. Account codes may be a maximum of 12 digits (# may be used); if
the account code is to be less than 12 characters you may end the code by pressing , or the right soft key.The type of code used is determined by your telephone
system administrator. Codes can be entered before or during a call as follows:
To enter an account code before placing the call:
•
•
•
•
•
When the Boss or Secretary is needing to inform the other party of their current
status, they can send a message to their display.
•
•
•
•
58
Press the Func. soft button. Scroll to EXE/SECR MSG and press OK.
Select and hightlight one of the Return On messages and press the Edit soft
button.
Press and hold the Delete soft button to erase the default message.
Using the dial pad, type in the new message (refer to Text Input Method).
When finished press the Save then the Send soft button to display the message on the other (Boss/Secretary) phone.
Press your ACC (Account) key or dial 47.
Dial the account code or bin number.
You will receive a confirmation tone and display.
When prompted dial a trunk or trunk group (i.e. 9) and the telephone number
to call.
To enter an account code by interrupting the conversation:
Executive/Secretary (Messaging):
•
•
Press the Listen button to turn on the speaker. The microphone is not in use,
so the distant party does not hear other parties present in your office.
Press Listen again to turn the speaker off and resume private conversation.
Repeat if necessary.
—OR—
During a conversation, press Func. scroll to Group Listen and press OK.
While on an outside call press the ACC (Account) key or press Transfer followed by 47.
Dial the account number or bin number (if you are entering an account code
you will need to press your ACC (Account) key or right soft key to finalize the
entry)
NOTE: If you make an error simply repeat the procedure with the correct code.
Only the most recent account code dialed will be recorded.
59
Home Page
LOCKING YOUR KEYSET
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
You can lock your keyset to control misuse of your phone while you are away. You
can unlock it when you return.
Keysets may receive a voice announcement while on another call. The calling station must have an OHVA button. When you are in DND, you cannot receive OHVA
calls. The OHVA feature will work with intercom and transferred calls.
•
•
•
•
Press Menu button, scroll to Phone, press OK.
Scroll to Security option. Press OK.
Enter the Password [Default Password is “1234”]. Press Enter.
There are three options available:
CHANGE PASSWORD: This can be used to change the station password.
DIAL: Allows the station user the option to select Lock All, Lock Outgoing, or
Unlocked.
1. UNLOCKED - No restrictions. User may complete internal and outside
calls.
2. LOCK OUTGOING - Restricted to incoming calls only. No outside calls can
be made. When 911 is programmed, 911 emergency dialing is allowed.
3. LOCK ALL - No calls, incoming or outgoing allowed to or from the set.
•
•
•
PHONE MODE: Allows the user to lock or unlock the menu from being
changed at the station.
Use the navigation soft button to scroll Left/Right to choose the desired
mode.
Press the OK button.
Press the Back soft button to return to Menu, and press Back soft button
again to return to idle screen.
MANUAL SIGNALLING
Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another station, regardless of the status of your phone (on-hook, off-hook, handsfree, DND, or
ringing).
To send a signal to another station:
•
•
Press the Manual Signalling (MS) button.
You may press the MS button repeatedly to send multiple signals to the designated station.
NOTE:Your phone must have a Manual Signalling (MS) button with a station number extender assigned to it. Manual Signalling will override DND.
60
When you receive an OHVA and secure OHVA is ON, you will hear the announcement in the handset receiver, if you are using the handset. If secure OHVA is OFF
then you will hear the announcement on the speaker, if you are talking on the
handset. If you are using the speakerphone the announcement will always be
heard through the speaker.
To make an off-hook voice announcement:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Dial the extension number or press the DSS button.
When you receive a busy signal, press the OHVA button.
After the attention tone, begin speaking.
Finish the call by replacing the handset.
Press the flashing Call button on your keyset. This will place the original party
on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party.
To return to your first party, press the button corresponding to your original
call. This will disconnect the OHVA call.
NOTES:
1. When you are voice announcing to a station close to you, use the handset to
avoid an echo effect.
2. You cannot off-hook voice announce to single line telephones.
OHVA BLOCK
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Block (Block) button. Pressing this
button will prevent anyone from making an OHVA to you until you press the button again and cancel the blocking.
OHVA REJECT
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject (Reject) button. Pressing
this button while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing
party and return you to your original call.
61
Home Page
IN GROUP/OUT OF GROUP
If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group, you can remove your keyset from
the group and then put it back in. While you are out of the group, you can receive
calls to your extension number but not calls to the group number. If you have an
IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button with the group number assigned.
•
•
Press the IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button. The button indicator will be lit steady
when your keyset is in the group.
Press the IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button again to exit the group and the indicator will go blank. Repeat as necessary.
If you do not have an IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button:
•
Dial the IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) access code number ________________, then
the group number, then 0 to exit the group or 1 to enter the group.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press Speaker button.
The IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button can include an extender to indicate the specific group that this button will affect. This means that if you are in multiple groups,
you can decide for which groups you will receive calls.
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET
AME PASSWORD
This feature allows customers using the AME feature to enable password protection. This will prevent unauthorized users from listening to your messages being
left. The passcode is the same as your station passcode. This feature only applies if
there is a Samsung Voicemail card installed in the system and your keyset has a
programmed AME button.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSCODE or 100 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
AUTO CAMP-ON
This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on, if possible, when
a busy station is called.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 081 to turn CAMP-ON on or 080 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
SELECT RING TONE
Each SMT-i5230 user can select from a variety of ring tones.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
•
•
Press Menu button, scroll to Phone, press OK.
Scroll to Sound option and press OK.
Select Ring Tone and press OK—OR—you may dial 1 and immediately enter
the option.
Use Navigation button to scroll through the available ring tones and press
OK or Save soft button to store your selection.
Press End soft button to return to idle screen.
CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE
From the factory, your station passcode is 1234.You can change your station passcode whenever you desire.
•
•
•
62
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 101.
Dial your old passcode.
Dial a new passcode (must be four characters). You can use 0–9.
63
Home Page
•
•
Redial the new passcode. If successful, you will hear two beeps. Four beeps
indicate an incorrect code to confirm, reenter the code again.
Press Transfer to store the new passcode.
SET ANSWER MODE (INTERCOM)
You can receive internal calls in one of three modes (see Answering Intercom Calls
under Intercom Calls for descriptions).
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 103.
Dial 0 for Ringing, 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
NOTE: When your keyset is programmed for Voice Announce and you have Forward No Answer (FNA) turned on, you must answer screened transfers by pressing
the OK button before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward.
SET ANSWER MODE (CO)
Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom answer mode.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO.
Press the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] key to change status.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
AUTOMATIC HOLD
While on an outside call, pressing a line button, route button or a flashing Call button will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call. This
feature can be turned on or off at your keyset.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
HEADSET OPERATION
Keyset users can switch between headset mode and handset mode. When using
headset mode, press the Speaker button to answer and Speaker button to
release calls.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 021 to use the headset or 020 to use the handset.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
tor to be lit solid to indicate this. Pressing the button while the button indicator is
lit solid will cause the keyset to return to handset mode and the button indicator
will go off.
NOTE: If you need to switch between headset mode and handset mode (or speaker phone) during a conversation, you will need to put the call on hold first.
HOT KEYPAD
On your phone system your keyset’s keypad can be made “live” or “hot” so that it is
not necessary to lift the handset or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing. Calls can be made and features activated by simply dialing the C.O. line number, trunk group access code, intercom number or feature access code.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
KEY CONFIRMATION TONE
You can hear a short beep (confirmation tone) each time you press a button on the
dial pad. This tone can be turned on or off.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 040 to turn tones off or 041 to turn tones on.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
Additional ring tones can be selected from the Menu, Phone, Sound,
Keytone option.
REJOINING A PAGE
This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page
after you return your keyset to idle. To enable this feature:
•
•
•
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
—OR—
Press the Menu button, scroll to Phone, press OK.
Scroll to Sound and press OK, scroll to Keytone, and press OK.
Using the Navigation button scroll to Select New Ring Tone, press Save soft
button.
Your keyset is equipped with a Headset button. Pressing this button while the
indicator is off will cause the keyset to enter headset mode and the button indica64
65
Home Page
RING PREFERENCE
This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset or press
the Speaker button.This method will always answer calls in the order they arrived
at your keyset.When you turn ring preference off, you must press the flashing button to answer a call, allowing you to answer calls in the order you choose.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 061 to turn ring preference on or 060 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME
ized as an Executive MOBEX user. Check with your telephone system administrator
for further details on your specific system configuration.
To set the phone number a MOBEX port can reach you on:
•
•
•
•
•
This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as
it is dialed.
•
•
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
CALLER ID REVIEW ALL
This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls
sent to their stations.This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in, first out basis.
The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station but that
you did not answer. When reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the
person back. The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number.
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 121 to turn CID REVIEW ALL on or 120 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
SECURE OHVA
This option allows you to receive OHVA (Over Head Voice Announce) calls via the
speaker while you are on the handset.
•
•
•
With your handset on hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 131 to turn SECURE OHVA ON or 130 to turn it OFF.
Press Transfer to savve your selection.
Press Transfer and then dial 126.
Dial your station pass code.
Dial the number of the port you wish to configure (1-5) (you may also use the
Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] keys to select a port and press the Right
soft key to confirm).
Press Right soft button to move to telephone number.
Dial the number of a C.O. line or trunk group to use when making calls to this
MOBEX port.
Dial the phone number you can be reached at by users calling this MOBEX
port.
Press Transfer to store your selection and exit programming.
To set the caller ID of the location you will be calling in from:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press Transfer and then dial 126.
Dial your station pass code.
Dial the number of the port you wish to configure (1-5) (you may also use the
Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] keys to select a port and press the right
soft key to confirm).
Press Right soft button twice.
Dial the contact number.
Press Transfer to store your selection and exit programming.
To turn a MOBEX port ON or OFF:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press Transfer and then dial 126.
Dial your station pass code.
Dial the number of the port you wish to configure (1-5) (you may also use the
Volume Up and Volume Down keys to select a port and press the Right soft
key to confirm).
Dial 2 to select the activation status option.
Dial 0 to turn the port on, dial 1 to turn the port off.
Press Transfer to store your selection and exit programming.
CONFIGURE MOBILE EXTENSIONS (MOBEX)
This feature allows you to configure options for any Mobile Extension (MOBEX)
ports that are assigned to you by your telephone system administrator. You can
turn a port on or off; set the telephone number for the port; or set the caller ID you
will be calling in from.The caller ID field has no effect unless you have been author66
67
Home Page
DISPLAY FEATURES
DIRECTORY INFORMATION
An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number.
Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before answering.
Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name. Incoming calls can be
easily identified and answered with different greetings.
Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display [CALL FOR xxx]
where xxx is the station group number. This allows you to answer calls directed to
you differently than calls directed to your group.
TIMER FUNCTION
Display keyset users may use this feature as a simple stopwatch.
•
•
•
•
VIEWING STATION MESSAGE INDICATIONS
You can view all of your message indications before you return them:
•
•
•
DISPLAY NUMBER DIALED
Display keysets begin showing digits as they are dialed. They will stay in the display until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the Timer button is
pressed. If the call duration timer is not used, the number dialed will be displayed
until the call is released, transferred or put on hold.
CALL DURATION TIMER
When the keyset is idle, press the Timer button to start timing.
Press the Timer button again to stop timing.
Read the elapsed time in the display.
Lift the handset and replace it. The display will return to date and time.
•
With the handset on-hook, press the Message button with the flashing indicator.
The first station that left a message indication will be displayed.
Press the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] keys to scroll through the stations that left message indications. Use the soft keys to reply, clear or advance
to the next message.
Press the End button to return your keyset to the idle condition.
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES
Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it.
This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory.
The system can be set to automatically time outside calls. A few seconds after you
dial a telephone number, the timer appears in the display. It appears immediately
for incoming calls. The call timer continues for the duration of the call. Call duration times are displayed in minutes and seconds. If a call lasts longer than 60 minutes, the timer restarts.
•
•
•
•
•
You can press the Timer button to manually begin timing a call. Press it again to
stop timing. If you press it while the automatic timer is on, the call duration time is
restarted.
NOTE: Use the Navigation button to move the cursor left or right, and use the
Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] buttons to increment the speed dial bins.
AUTO TIMER
Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer
incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 119.
Dial 41 to turn the auto timer on or 40 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
See Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers Section.
STATION NAMES
•
•
•
•
•
•
68
Press Transfer and then dial 106.
Dial the speed dial bin number 00–49.
Using the dial pad, enter the station name. (See Station Names)
Press the Transfer button to store the speed dial name.
Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary.
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 104.
Enter the Station Name. Use the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] buttons
to move cursor.
Press Transfer to store the name.
—OR—
Press Menu button, select Settings, press OK.
Select Application Set., press OK.
Select Phone Name, press OK.
69
Home Page
•
•
Enter Station Name. Use the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] buttons to
move cursor.
Press Save soft button and then End soft button to store the name.
MANAGING PROGRAMMABLE
KEY ASSIGNMENTS
You can manage your key assignments for easy one touch operation of frequently used features.
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 107.
Use the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] buttons to scroll through all of
your programmable buttons.
Press Transfer to exit programming.
To program the programmable keys, press Menu, Settings, AOM Setting.
CALLER ID
SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID DISPLAY
Simultaneous display of Caller ID name and number on incoming CO calls on both
lines of display keysets is supported on all OfficeServ systems. On Transferred CO
calls, you can decide if you want to see the Caller ID name or Caller ID number in
the display. Regardless of which data is selected, you can press the NND button to
view the other pieces of Caller ID information. To select the type of Caller ID information you wish to view:
•
•
•
For example:
If you want to press a key that will direct calls to Joel at extension 3201. Select
an empty key and set the following:
•
•
•
Feature:
Ext. Number:
Display Name:
DSS
3201
Joel
If you want to press a key that will direct calls to Sue’s external phone number at
972-444-3456. Select an empty key and set the following:
•
•
•
•
Feature:
Speed
Ext. Number:
01
Display Name:
Sue
Use Transfer 105 to set speed dial number:
•
[xxxx] SPEED DIAL
01: 9-9724443456
Please consult your installation company to requested a complete list of descriptions for any keys you may have programmed on your keyset.
NOTE: Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender.
•
BACKSPACE WITH LCR
If you misdial while using LCR, you can delete digits shown in the display by pressing the Backspace soft key as many times as necessary or by pressing Clear to
delete all.
ing the Del soft key as many times as necessary.
70
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 119.
To set the first line of a ringing call display dial 0.
To set the second line of a ringing call display dial 1.
Set the data to display from the following:
- To show nothing dial 0.
- To show Caller ID Number dial 1.
- To show Caller ID Name dial 2.
- To show the DID Number the call came in on dial 3.
- To show the Name of the DID the call came in on dial 4.
- To show the Name of the Group the call came in for dial 5.
- To show the DID Number and then Name of the DID dial 6.
- To show the Name of the DID and then the DID Number dial 7.
To set the top line of the display shown after answering a call dial 2.
Set the data to display from the following:
- To show Caller ID Number dial 0.
- To show Caller ID Name dial 1.
- To show the DID Number the call came in on dial 2.
- To show the Name of the DID the call came in on dial 3.
- To show Caller ID Number and then the DID Number dial 4.
- To show Caller ID Name and then the DID Number dial 5.
- To show the DID Number and then the name of the DID dial 6.
- To show the Name of the DID and then the DID Number dial 7.
- To show the C.O. line information dial 8.
To set the format if the C.O. line information when the above is set to show C.O.
line information dial 3.
- To show the C.O. line number and the dialed or Caller ID Number dial 0.
- To show only the dialed or Caller ID Number dial 1.
Press Transfer to exit and store your selection.
71
Home Page
VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL
In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped-on call at your keyset, you
can press the Next button to display the Caller ID information associated with the
call in queue at your keyset. Either the CID name or CID number will show in the
display depending on you Name/Number selection.
To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped-on to your keyset,
press the Next button.
INQUIRE CALLER ID PARK/HOLD INFO
If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you, you
may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call. This may influence
how you choose to handle the call.
From an idle keyset:
•
•
•
Press the Inquire button—OR—press CID button, then Func. soft button, and
the Inquire soft key.
Dial the trunk number.
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button—OR—you may use
Func. soft button and NND to view more information about this call—OR—
you can return to the idle condition by pressing Ignore.
If you are on a call:
•
•
•
Press the Func. soft button and then Inquire button. Your existing call will go
on hold—OR—press the CID button and Func. soft button then Inquire soft
button to place the first call on hold.
Dial the trunk number.
You may now answer the call by pressing the Func. soft button then the ANS
button—OR—you may use NND to view more information about this call—
OR—you can return to the idle condition by pressing the Func. soft button
and then Ignore.
NOTES:
1. If you are on an intercom call or you have Automatic Hold turned off, you must
finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring.
2. If you inquire about an outgoing call, you will receive a [call no longer available] display.
72
FEATURE ACCESS CODES
Paging Zones - Dial 55 plus
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Q
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
All External Zones
All Page
Feature Access Codes
0
10 + xxx
12 + xxx
13
16 + xxx
17
18
19
400
401
42 + xxx
43
44
45
46
47
48 + xx
49
53 + xxx + 1
53 + xxx + 0
Operator
Pick Up A Parked Call
Pick Up a Held Call
Door Lock Release
Speed Dialing
Save And Redial Number
New Call (Recall)
Last Number Redial
Cancel Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
Cancel Sent Message
Return Message
Callback
Busy Station Camp-On
Conference
Account Code
Cancel Programmed MSG
Send Flash to C.O. or PBX
In Group
Out of Group
56
600
601 + xxx
602 + xxx
603 + xxx
604 + xxx
605 + xxx
606 + xxx
65 + xxx
66 + xx
67
Q
Meet Me Answer
Cancel All Call Forward
Set Forward All Calls
Set Forward Busy
Set Forward No Answer
Set Forward Busy/No Answer
Set Forward on DND
Set Forward Follow Me
Pick Up Ringing Extension
Pick Up Group
Universal Answer
Authorization Code
73
Home Page
Samsung Voicemail
This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a
Subscriber. A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the various
features and services available in the Samsung Voicemail. Please review this section carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Services, known as
Subscriber Services.
SECTION 6.
APPLICATIONS
Voice Mail is one of the Subscriber Services available. Your voice mail box has the
capability of storing private messages, and offers a number of options for sending
or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new messages.
Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager. This allows you control over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your
callers in the event you are unable to speak to them directly. The ‘events’ are
referred to as “Call Conditions”. No-Answer, Busy, and Blocked are the most commonly used Call Conditions.
This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones
outside the office. The basic operation is the same, but the access method will be
different. See the Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more details.
Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all
Subscribers. See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature
availability.
74
75
Home Page
Subscriber Services Menu
Group New
Messages
Group Saved
Messages
11
33
Listen to New Review Saved
Messages
Messages
Group Messages Menu
1
Group
Urgent Messages
2
Group
Callback Requests
3
Group
Reminders
4
5
Group
Private Messages
Group
Fax Only Messages
1
9
#
0
*
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Listen Menu
1
11
Mailbox
Administration
Personal
Services
Pause, Resume
Play Menu
Options
Exit
2
4
5
6
#
8
0
*
2
Save
Message
3
Discard
Message
4
Reply to Sender
5
Place
Call to Sender
Forward a
Copy of Message
7
Rewind
5 Seconds
8
Pause, Resume
Message Playback
9
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
##
Change
Playback Speed
Skip to
Next Message
Scan Messages
To Create a
Reminder
1
Review
Recording
2
o
Stop, Append to
Recording
3
ing
Discard Recording
and Rerecord
4
Set
Delivery Options
ns
5
Specify
Future Delivery
6
SEND Message,,
Then Copy
7
Rewind
5 Seconds
77
Change
Playback Volume
me
8
Pause, Resume
e
Record/Playback
ck
9
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
99
Change
Playback Speed
d
0
Play
Menu Options
#
SEND Message,,
Then Exit Record
rd
00
Play Message
Information
0
Play
Menu Options
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
*
1
Follow Me
For a Directory
of Subscribers
r"
"Enter the Recipient's Number"
Change
Playback Volume
Play
Message Inventory
#
##
Deliver Copy
of Fax Message
6
99
#
Play Previous
Message
77
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
Personal
Greetings
Record Menu
Play
Message
Group
A Specific Sender
Play
Menu Options
Access
Manager
3
55
8
Record & Send
Messages
1
Assign and/or Edit
Primary Greeting
1
Change
Message Alert
Aler
1
Review
Workload
2
Assign and/or Edit
Busy Greeting
2
Change
Pager Notification
Notific
2
Edit Stored
Telephone Numbers
3
Block All Calls
3
Assign and/or Edit
Blocking Greeting
3
Review Deleted
Delet
Messages
3
Change
Weekly Schedule
1
Change
Password
4
Call forwarding
4
Assign and/or Edit
Night Greeting
4
Review Undelivered
Unde
Messages
5
Place a
Direct Call
2
Record
Name
5
Call Screening
5
Assign and/or Edit
Screened Greeting
5
Auto Play
New Messages
Message
3
Enter Directory
Name
6
Find Me
6
Edit Only
Personal Greetings
6
Auto Play Me
Message
Information
7
Personal
Administration
4
Extended
Prompting
7
Auto Set
Night Intercept
7
Edit Only
Mailbox Greeting
8
Pause, Resume
Resum
Menu Prompting
Prompt
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
9
Record and Send
S
Broadcast Message
Me
0
Play
Menu Options
#
Play
Access Coverage
0
Play
Menu Options
0
Play
Menu Options
#
Record
a Reminder
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
0
Play
Menu Options
*
Cancel, Retur
Return
to Subscriber Services
0
Play
Menu Options
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
ervices
NOTE: All options shown MAY NOT be authorized. If an option is not available
please speak to your system administrator.
*Change Playback Speed and Volume not available on the OfficeServ 7030,
OfficeServ 7100, OfficeServ 7200-S or OfficeServ IP-UMS.
76
77
Home Page
ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX
GETTING STARTED
[Also known as Subscriber Services Menu]
Inside Callers [Subscriber logging in from their Desk]
Using your new Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services is as simple as following a
few simple spoken instructions. First time users should read this section as a tutorial. You should start with the following steps:
•
•
Dial the voicemail access number or press the key assigned to ring
voicemail [VMMSG].
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is 0000).
Outside Callers [Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the
office environment]
•
•
•
Dial the phone number that will be answered by the voicemail. The main
greeting will answer.
At the main greeting dial [#] plus your Subscriber (or mailbox) number
(Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number).
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is 0000).
Access your Subscriber Services (or Mailbox) from a Station
other than your Own (or checking a mailbox associated with a
different station)
•
•
•
Press the [VMMSG] key or dial the voicemail group number. You will be
prompted to enter a password.
Press [,]. This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu.
Press [#] plus the Subscriber number of your choice. You will be prompted to
enter you password.
At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions. You will
hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox.You will then
hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options:
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
,
Listen to New Messages - See Listening to your Message.
Record and Send Message - See Sending Messages.
Review Saved Messages - See Listening to your Message.
Access Manager - See Access Manager.
Personal Greetings - See Personal Greetings.
Mailbox Administration - See Mailbox Administration.
Personal Services - See Personal Services.
Return to Main Menu.
Voicemail and the Function Soft button: When accessing and retrieving voicemails from the mailbox, the service options such as (1) Listening to Messages, (2)
Record and Send Messages, and (3) Review Saved Messages are available and
can be accessed through the dial pad or through the Function soft key. When
pressing the function soft button the options will be displayed. Scroll to and press
the OK button to select an option from the Function Menu.
78
•
Access your Subscriber Services Menu - You already know how to do this.
From the Subscriber Services Menu:
•
•
•
•
•
Record a Primary/No-Answer Personal Greeting. Dial [5][1].
Record a Mailbox Greeting. Dial [5][7].
Change your access code (Password). Dial [#][7][1].
Record your name. Dial [#][7][2].
Enter your directory name. Dial [#][7][3].
After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and
ready to use.
LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES
If there are new messages in your mailbox your [VMMSG] key will be lit. Call the
Samsung Voicemail by pressing this key, and when prompted enter your password. You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu. Select [1] to listen to new
messages or [3] to listen to saved messages.
Note: After you enter your password, if “Autoplay of New Messages” is enabled and
you have new messages the Samsung Voicemail will begin to play them automatically. A subscriber can control this feature. From the Subscriber Services Menu [6]
[5] toggles “Autoplay of New Messages” ON/OFF.
SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU
The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu.
1
11
2
3
33
4
5
6
8
0
,
#
LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES
GROUP NEW MESSAGES
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES
GROUP OLD MESSAGES
ACCESS MANAGER
PERSONAL GREETINGS
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
PAUSE / RESUME
PLAY MENU OPTIONS
EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT
PERSONAL SERVICES
79
Home Page
1 or 3
LISTENING TO OLD OR NEW MESSAGES
1
Play / replay the message you just heard.
11
Play the previous message.
2
Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
3
Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
4
Reply to the message.
This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender (if the
sender has a mailbox on this system).
5
Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message.
This will work for internal and external callers, but Caller ID service is needed to use this feature on an outside call.
55
Deliver a fax copy.
This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document(s). Faxmail documents can be delivered to any fax machine of your choice as long as out
calling is authorized. You can also have faxmail messages automatically
delivered to the fax machine of your choice.
6
Forward the message and saves a copy.
The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailbox number (nnn), using
the directory service (#) or you may also add comments and leave it as a
memo to yourself (##).
The Send and Copy Service (option 6) allows a user to send copies of a message to multiple recipients easily. A different introduction message may be
left for each recipient.
Play options.
0
Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this
point.
00
Hear the time and date, and sender's information of the message you just
heard. Sender information is not available on outside calls.
#
Move to the next message. This does not Save or Discard the current message - it is retained as new.
##
Scan. Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message. This is
similar to the scan button on a radio. It will allow you to find a specific message quickly. To stop scanning press [1].
,
Cancel and return to previous menu.
11 or 33
GROUP NEW OR OLD MESSAGES
Messages can be grouped as either Reminders, press [3] or Messages from a specific sender, press [9].
Additionally you can press [#] and hear a summary of your mailbox contents:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Number of messages
Number of reminders
Number of urgent messages
Number of messages needing a callback
Number of private messages
Number of fax messages
2
7
Rewind the message 5 seconds.
77
Change playback volume of the recording. [Not available on the OS 7030,
OS 7100, OS 7200-S or OS IP-UMS]
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
There are two levels of volume during playback. Dialing this code will toggle between the two levels.
This option is used to send a message to another subscriber. The steps are simple:
8
Pause or resume during message playback.
a)
9
Fast forward the message 5 seconds.
99
Change playback speed of the recording. [Not available on OS 7030, OS
7100, OS 7200-S or OS IP-UMS]
There are two levels of speed during playback. Dialing this code will toggle
between the two speeds.
80
Enter the recipient’s mailbox number, or if this is not known enter [#] to use
the system directory.
b) Record your message at the tone. After recording the message, you will hear
the Send Menu with the following functions:
1
2
Review
Continue Recording
81
Home Page
3
4
5
6
#
Discard and Re-Record
Set Message Attributes (Delivery Options)
Schedule Future Delivery
Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else
Save and Send the Recording
Setting Message Attributes
If after recording a message you select [4] you can set up any combination of the
following delivery options:
1
2
3
4
5
,
Urgent Delivery
Return Receipt Requested
Request a Call Back
Private Delivery
Reply Required
Exit
4
ACCESS MANAGER
The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when,
where and how, and/or if the Samsung Voicemail contacts you when a caller dials
your extension number. All of the options are toggled on/off based on their current status when you access them.
Note: ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed by the System
Administrator for each Subscriber. They are:
1
Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new
destination (Designated Location) will be active.This number may be an internal or external number. This is useful if you are frequently traveling or changing the number where you can be reached.
Scheduling Future Delivery
When Follow Me is activated, the transfer will be supervised and confirmed.
This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at
the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber’s mailbox.
If after recording a message you select [5] to schedule future delivery, you will be
able to set message attributes and set this message as:
#
1
2
3
4
5
,
Immediate Delivery
Next Few Hours
End of Current Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
Beginning of Next Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
A Coming Day of the Week
Specific Day / Time
Exit
Follow Me
3
Call Blocking
When this feature is active, callers will not be transferred to your extension,
they will hear your 'blocked' greeting (if recorded) and will go directly to your
mailbox if they do not select any or are not offered any other options.
4
Call Forwarding
Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alternate
location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to another Subscriber. The “Forwarded To” Subscriber will now be in control of the
caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber’s Mailbox. If the
“Forwarded To” Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow what
ever the “Forwarded To” Subscriber has set up for their call conditions. The
Caller will hear “Forwarding to”“{Subscriber Name}” before actually being forwarded.
5
Call Screening
If this is turned on, the caller will be asked their name and the Samsung
Voicemail will play this name to you before the transfer, giving you an option
to accept or reject the call.
82
83
Home Page
6
Find Me
Find Me, when enabled, will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list of
preprogrammed phone numbers. The stored phone numbers are entered in
'Personal Services' [#][2] (if allowed by the Administrator). The stored telephone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers.
The Find Me feature only use the first five.
7
The Call Coverage conditions that you can assign specific greetings to are selected by the following digits:
1
Used when in your office, away from your desk or during the time period you
are scheduled available. If this is the only Personal Greeting you record, it will
play for all call coverage conditions.
Night Intercept
This feature is dependent on your weekly availability schedule, which is
entered in 'Personal Services' [#][3] (if allowed by the Administrator). When
Night Intercept is active the Samsung Voicemail will first ring your extension
then play your primary, No Answer greeting during the day (when you are
available) and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greeting during the night (when you are not available).
Primary/No Answer Greeting
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Basic
Greeting' feature.
Example:“Hi this is John Smith. I'm sorry I am not available to answer your call.
If someone else can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to
leave me a message, press 1.”
2
Busy Greeting
Note: This does NOT use the Day and Night schedules of the phone system. It
is solely controlled by the Subscriber’s Availability Schedule.
Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension
or the telephone at your Designated Location.
8
Pause / Resume
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Busy
Greeting' feature.
,
Exit from Access Manager
0
Play All Options
#
Play Access Coverage
This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings are set. It
will also tell you what greetings will play under each of the call conditions you
have setup.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm on another line right now. If someone else
can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave a message,
press 1.”
3
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Blocking' feature.
5
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. Sorry I missed your call, but I'm going to be out
of the office for the next few hours. If someone else can help you, please enter
the extension number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
PERSONAL GREETINGS
The options available in this menu will be determined by your System
Administrator, and not all of them may be available to you. In the simplest systems,
only a mailbox greeting will be available, additional greetings may be accessible in
more complex systems.
Call Blocking Greeting
Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone
is forwarded ALL or DND.
4
Night Greeting
Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE, usually after
business hours during the evening and at night.
Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension
and you do not answer.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the
'Scheduling' feature.
You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings, and you may assign any one of them
to be active. There are several different 'Call Coverage' conditions to which you
may assign any of your 9 greetings. The Call Coverage Conditions are: No-Answer,
Busy, and Do Not Disturb (or Forwarded All). This will allow different greetings to
play depending on the type of call forward that you have set, or the condition of
your telephone.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I've left the office for the evening. If you would
like to try someone else, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave
me a message, press 1.”
84
85
Home Page
5
Call Screening Greeting
6
Used while Call Screening is enabled, and you REJECT a caller after listening to
the caller's record name.
6
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Screening' feature.
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm sorry, but I am not available to speak with
you at this time. If someone else can help you, please enter the extension
number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notification, message alert options and other message control features.
Edit Personal Greetings
1
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call any outside or
inside telephone number, after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
You may also edit/record each one of the greetings (1-9) at any time.
Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your
greeting. When you are done recording your greeting, you will be able to listen to the greeting you recorded, save the greeting you recorded and return
to the previous menu, record the greeting again, or exit without saving the
greeting.
To hear your message at the remote location when the Samsung Voicemail
calls you, after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed
that there is a message and to enter your password. Simply enter your password and you will now be logged in.
Note: If you record only the greeting assigned to the No-Answer Call Coverage
Condition, then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage
Conditions (No-Answer, Busy, Blocked, Night, and Rejected Caller). In this case,
the salutation part of the greeting should be very general.
7
Message Alert
Setting Up Message Alert:
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [1] for Message Alert.
n
There are 4 options available to you:
Edit Mailbox Greeting
Press [1] to toggle message alert on and off.
Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded any
of the Call Coverage greetings. The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox
greeting directly, is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mailbox using the VT (VoiceMail Transfer) key.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Mailbox
Greeting Option' feature.
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be notified.
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
Press [4] to set the destination phone number.
2
Pager Notification
Example: “Hi, this is John Smith. Please leave me a message, I will call you as
soon as I can.”
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call your beeper
service and notify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
Note: This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has
played to the caller. A common usage for this Greeting is when another
Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to transfer the caller directly to your Mailbox.
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [2] for pager notification.
n
There are 4 options available to you:
Press [1] to toggle pager notification on and off.
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be paged.
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
Press [4] to set the pager phone number.
86
87
Home Page
3
Undelete
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to
undelete any messages that you have recently deleted (up to the programmed Daily Maintenance Time, which is set to 3 a.m. by Default the following morning).
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [3] for Deleted Messages.
Deleted voice mail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a.m.
the following day. Select this option to recover ("undelete") previously deleted messages, during this period of time.
4
9
MESSAGE BROADCAST
This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System
Administrator.
Broadcast to All Mailboxes
If you have been designated as a Subscriber Administrator, you may send a
message to ALL mailboxes in the system.
Undelivered Retrieval
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to recall
any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been picked up by the recipient.
n
Press [9] for Broadcast Messages.
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [4] for Undelivered Messages.
This option will only be available if your mailbox has been assigned
Subscriber Administration privileges.
#
This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet
been picked up by the recipient.
PERSONAL SERVICES
5
Auto Play New Messages
If this option is enabled, after you enter your password correctly any new messages will immediately begin to play. To enable (or if already enabled toggle
and disable) this feature:
6
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [5] to Set Auto Play of New Messages.
The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your
name. Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator.
1
Allows you to access to all reminders, both Active and Pending. If authorized
you can group your reminders as Commitments, Follow-Ups or Tasks for better organization. The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending
(pending means scheduled for future delivery).
Auto Play Message Information
If this option is enabled, the date, time and sender’s name will be played automatically before each message. If this is disabled, the information must be
requested manually by pressing ‘00’. To enable (or if already enabled toggle
and disable) this feature:
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [6] to Set Auto Play of Message Information.
Workload Management
2
Stored Numbers
Allows you to enter up to 9 stored phone numbers. The first five of these are
used in the 'Find Me' feature, but any of them (1-9) can be easily dialed using
only one digit followed by the pound key, to be used by many other features
from within your subscriber space. (ie: “Follow Me, “Message Alert”, “Pager
Alert”, and “Direct Call”).
3
Schedule Availability
Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with Night Personal
Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature. Follow the spoken directions
88
89
Home Page
to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to
your callers. All other times you will be considered unavailable.
5
n
Place a Direct Call
Allows you to place a direct call out of the Samsung Voicemail from anywhere.
You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1-5 that corresponds to a
stored number (See Personal Services, 2 - Stored Numbers). This feature must
be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited or opened to
internal, local, and long distance calls.
This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly.
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name (described above)
and/or enter your Directory Name, you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
4
7
Personal Administration
This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings (see next
section).
PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS
This menu allows you to make changes to basic setup settings, that are rarely
changed. Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings.
You probably will not need to change them after that.
1
2
Setting your Password
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][1].
n
The current password will be played and you will have the chance to
change it.
Recording your Name
Use this option to record your name. Your recorded name is played in several
different situations. It is important to record your name for proper operation
of the Samsung Voicemail system.
Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the
subscriber interface (mailbox prompts). Change this setting only if you are
very familiar with the user operation of the SVMi E-Series.
Note: Remember if you know what digits to press, you can enter them at any
time you do not have to wait to be prompted. This feature can be toggled
on/off at anytime. Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber
menu to press zero for more options. This enables you to still be able to find
out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled.
KEYSET USER FEATURES
The following options are available if you have a display keyset.They require setup
by the System Administrator.
Message Waiting Lights
When new messages are left in your mailbox, the voice mail message light on your
keyset will flash. Press this flashing key [VMMSG] and follow the prompts to
retrieve messages.This key may be pressed at any time to log into your Subscriber
Main Menu.
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][2].
Answer Machine Emulation
n
The current name will be played and you will have the chance to change
it.
If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset, you
can use it to monitor calls going to your voice mail, and optionally answer them.
The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering
machine.
Entering your Directory Name
Use this option to enter your Directory Name. Your Directory Name is used by
callers to find you if they do not know your extension number.
n
90
Extended Prompting
n
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name and/or enter your
Directory Name (described below), you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
3
The current Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are
equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad. Follow the
instructions to enter a new name.You will be prompted to enter your last
name and then your first name.
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][3].
Your keyset must be set to forward on no answer to voice mail. After ringing your
station the caller will be connected to your voice mail and hear your personal
greeting before leaving a message. During this time you will be monitoring the
connection between the caller and your voice mail box. At this time you will only
be monitoring the call, you can not talk to the other party until you answer. You
may pick up the call at any time or ignore it.
91
Home Page
To activate this feature press the AME button. The associated indicator will be lit
steady. Press again to turn off. If this key is pressed while a station is ringing (during forward no answer), the feature will be turned on for the current call only.
SHORTCUTS
While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may:
Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press [#] to immediately
send the call to the called parties mailbox.
n
Press [#] to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it.
n
Press [,] to immediately disconnect your station.The caller continues to leave
a message normally.
n
Pick up the handset and monitor privately.
n
Press ANS / RLS to answer the call (using the handset or speaker).
AME Password
If your keyset has AME PASSWORD (MMC 110) set to YES, you must enter your
station password to listen to messages being left. This will prevent unauthorized
people from listening to messages being left for you.
If the password option is turned on, while a message is being left, press the flashing AME indicator and enter your station password (not your SVMi E-Series password). You will then hear the message being left.
Call Record
If you have a call record button assigned to your phone, you may press it at any
time, to record the conversation in progress. If you have a display keyset, you will
also have the soft key options to pause and time the message.
Calling
Call Divert to Voicemail
While receiving an incoming (ringing) call, dial [,] to immediately send the caller
to your personal voicemail box. This will override the call forward no answer setting.
Direct Messaging
[#] + DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without having to dial their extension number first, keyset users may simply dial [#] plus a
mailbox (extension) number and leave a message directly. If you dial a busy extension press [#] to connect directly with the mailbox.
Self Memo (Reminder)
Pressing [##] will leave a message in your own mailbox. This is useful to remind
yourself of things to do now or in the future. Messages can be sent with future
delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due.
INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS
Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays
to play, save, delete, reply, call, forward, rewind, pause, fast forward, change the volume, get message information, or help.
Viewing Mailbox Contents
If you have new messages, in addition to the Telephone Status Indicator (TSI) you
will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the SVMi
E-Series.
E-MAIL GATEWAY (EMG)
The E-Mail Gateway feature integrates your voice mail box with your email client.
No matter what email client software you are using or where you use it, you can
send voice mail messages and fax mail messages to your E-Mail inbox.
There are two parts to the E-Mail Gateway; E-Message Delivery and E-Message
Notification.
92
93
Home Page
1. E-MESSAGE DELIVERY: Voice mail messages (.wav) and/or fax mail messages
(.tiff ) are "delivered" to your Inbox with the appropriate attached file.
2. E-MESSAGE NOTIFICATION: You will receive an e-mail, with NO attachments,
notifying you that you have a voice and/or fax mail message in your Voice Mail
Box.
•
•
•
As a subscriber you can use either E-Message Delivery and/or E-Message
Notification.
As a subscriber you can have multiple e-mail addresses. (a maximum of 5
valid email addresses).
E-Message Notification can be set to one e-mail address while E-Message
Delivery is set to different e-mail address.
Functionality
•
•
•
With either type of EMG, when Caller ID (CID) is provided, the callers telephone number will appear in the subject field of the email along with the date
and time stamp of when the voice message was originally recorded in your
Voice Mail Box.
If the caller is also a subscriber on the system and the E-Mail Gateway is set up
with a valid "Reply To" address, the Subscriber's name will also appear in the
"From" field. Otherwise, the "From" field will display the name of the Samsung
voice mail system (SVMi-8E, SVMi-16E, or SVMi-20E) sending the message.
Client will use their PC's Multi-Media kit (equipped with either speakers
and/or a headset) to listen to messages delivered to their e-mail Inbox.
IMPORTANT NOTE: If the PC/Laptop/PDA/Smart Phone/etc… is not
equipped with hardware and software capable of playing a '.WAV' file then
the E-Mail Gateway will not work for them until they add some method to
listen to '.WAV' files delivered to their Inbox.
The same applies to Fax Mail messages, if the device the subscriber is using
does not support the viewing of '.TIFF' files, then the E-Mail Gateway for
Fax Mail will not work for them until they add some method to view .tiff
files delivered to their inbox.
•
No Synchronization of messages is performed between the Voice Mail Box
and the E-mail Inbox.
-
-
94
-
•
However, the Voice Mail Administrator can adjust parameters per subscriber or group of subscribers that decide how, when, or if to delete the
original voice message after it is sent to the E-Mail Server.
When full synchronization of messages between Voicemail Box and E-mail
Inbox is required, ask your Samsung representative about the OfficeServ IPUMS. This is an Internet Protocol based fully synchronized Unified Messaging
System.
Benefits
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Store and Archive Voice and Fax Mail Messages in visible folders.
Voice and Fax Mail Messages can now easily be dragged and dropped into
folders the same way e-mail messages are organized and saved.
Voice and Fax Mail Messages are now essentially the same as any other e-mail
message.
Backups and Message Archives can be made when they are made for all other
types of e-mail messages.
Add text notes and comments to use for reference later.
Some (if not all) e-mail clients will allow you to edit the body of the e-mail to
add comments.
Some will allow you to edit the subject field to help you find a particular message quickly in a large archive of messages.
Call Back Numbers and Date & Time Stamp are easily displayed in the Subject
field.
Easily forward Voice messages received, to others even if they are not a Voice
Mail Subscriber on your system.
No EMG System or Client Software to load on your Local PC or Network
Servers.
Therefore compatible with most:
-
E-Mail providers and E-Mail Clients
-
PCs, Laptops, PDA, and/or Smartphones
NOTE: If you are not sure you have this functionality on your system and
you would like to use it, please contact your on Site system administrator
to see if it is available.
Messages listened to, forwarded, deleted, and/or saved within an e-mail
inbox will NOT effect the status of that same new message in the Voice
Mail or the MWI (Message Waiting Indicator) associated with that message on the phone.
Also messages listened to in the Voice Mail, from a phone, will not change
the Unread/Read status of the same message in an e-mail inbox.
95
Home Page
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
00
_________________________
_________________________
25
_________________________
_________________________
01
_________________________
_________________________
26
_________________________
_________________________
02
_________________________
_________________________
27
_________________________
_________________________
03
_________________________
_________________________
28
_________________________
_________________________
04
_________________________
_________________________
29
_________________________
_________________________
05
_________________________
_________________________
30
_________________________
_________________________
06
_________________________
_________________________
31
_________________________
_________________________
07
_________________________
_________________________
32
_________________________
_________________________
08
_________________________
_________________________
33
_________________________
_________________________
09
_________________________
_________________________
34
_________________________
_________________________
10
_________________________
_________________________
35
_________________________
_________________________
11
_________________________
_________________________
36
_________________________
_________________________
12
_________________________
_________________________
37
_________________________
_________________________
13
_________________________
_________________________
38
_________________________
_________________________
14
_________________________
_________________________
39
_________________________
_________________________
15
_________________________
_________________________
40
_________________________
_________________________
16
_________________________
_________________________
41
_________________________
_________________________
17
_________________________
_________________________
42
_________________________
_________________________
18
_________________________
_________________________
43
_________________________
_________________________
19
_________________________
_________________________
44
_________________________
_________________________
20
_________________________
_________________________
45
_________________________
_________________________
21
_________________________
_________________________
46
_________________________
_________________________
22
_________________________
_________________________
47
_________________________
_________________________
23
_________________________
_________________________
48
_________________________
_________________________
24
_________________________
_________________________
49
_________________________
_________________________
96
97
Home Page
Home Page
SMT-i5220
Keyset User Guide
For OfficeServ™ 7000 Series Systems
05/2010
Home Page
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS BOOK ......................................................................................................1
SECTION 1. CAUTION AND PREPARATION ....................................2
CAUTION ..............................................................................................................................3
PREPARATION ..................................................................................................................4
Check the Contents of the Box ................................................................................4
Phone Installation ......................................................................................................4-5
Optional Equipment ....................................................................................................5
SECTION 2. PHONE FUNCTIONS ..................................................................6
SMT-i5220 LAYOUT ....................................................................................................7
Names and Functions ..................................................................................................7
KEY FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................9
Telephone Status Indicator ........................................................................................9
Screen Structure ............................................................................................................9
Text Input Method ......................................................................................................10
Description of Icons....................................................................................................11
Navigating the Menus................................................................................................12
Navigation Button and Select Switch for FWD/DND/ABSENT MSG..........12
SMT-i5220 SETUP ......................................................................................................13
Initializing the SMT-i5220 ........................................................................................13
Setup Mode ..................................................................................................................13
Easy Install Wizard ......................................................................................................14
Selecting the Static IP Option ................................................................................14
Setting Up Hot Desking (Idle Login) ....................................................................14
Configuration Menu Structure................................................................................15
Copyright 2010 Samsung Telecommunications America.
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic,
electronic or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying or information retrieval systems—
without express written permission of the publisher of this material.
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing
may warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from
the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.
SECTION 3. FREQUENTLY USED
FEATURE OPERATION ....................................................................................16
EXTENSION LOG IN & OUT ................................................................................17
PLACING CALLS............................................................................................................17
ANSWERING CALLS ..................................................................................................19
PLACING A CALL ON HOLD ..............................................................................19
TRANSFERRING CALLS ..........................................................................................19
Home Page
TRANSFERRING WITH CAMP-ON..................................................................20
CALL WAITING ..............................................................................................................20
Group Call Pickup........................................................................................................47
My Group Pickup ........................................................................................................47
Privacy Release ............................................................................................................47
CONFERENCE CALLS ................................................................................................20
FORWARDING CALLS ..............................................................................................21
DIALING FEATURES ..................................................................................................48
OTHER FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS ..................................................21-24
SECTION 4. PHONE FEATURES ....................................................................25
BASIC MENUS ................................................................................................................26
Soft Button Structure ................................................................................................26
Menu Soft Button ........................................................................................26-35
Func. Soft Button ................................................................................................36
AOM Soft Button ................................................................................................36
SECTION 5. OFFICESERV 7000 SYSTEM FEATURES ..........37
OUTSIDE CALLS ..........................................................................................................38
Making Calls from AOM ............................................................................................38
Universal Answer ........................................................................................................38
Recall Dial Tone ............................................................................................................38
Sending a Flash ............................................................................................................38
Busy Line Queuing with Callback..........................................................................38
Busy Station Callback ................................................................................................39
Canceling Callback......................................................................................................39
Busy Station Camp-On........................................................................................39-40
INTERCOM CALLS ......................................................................................................41
Voice Announce Mode ..............................................................................................41
Auto Answer Mode ....................................................................................................41
Calling your System Operator ................................................................................41
CALL PROCESSING ....................................................................................................42
System Hold ..................................................................................................................42
Exclusive Hold ..............................................................................................................42
Remote Hold ................................................................................................................42
Hold Recall ....................................................................................................................43
Consultation Hold ......................................................................................................43
Retrieving Calls Held at Another Station............................................................43
Call Transfer ..................................................................................................................44
Transfer with Camp-On ............................................................................................44
Transfer to Voice Mail ................................................................................................45
Call Waiting....................................................................................................................45
Call Forward Options ................................................................................................45
Station Call Pickup ......................................................................................................46
Speed Dialing................................................................................................................48
Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers ..................................................49
Directory Dialing..........................................................................................................49
Last Number Redial ....................................................................................................50
Save Number with Redial ........................................................................................50
Automatic Redial/Retry ............................................................................................50
Pulse to Tone Changeover ......................................................................................50
PAGING AND MESSAGING ..................................................................................51
Making and Internal Page ........................................................................................51
Making an External Page..........................................................................................51
All Page ..........................................................................................................................51
Meet Me Page ..............................................................................................................52
Call Park and Page ......................................................................................................52
Messages—Set and Cancel ..............................................................................53-54
Returning Messages ..................................................................................................54
Programmed Messages ............................................................................................54
CONVENIENCE FEATURES ..................................................................................55
Logging In and Out ....................................................................................................55
Do Not Disturb ............................................................................................................55
One Time DND..............................................................................................................55
Mute ................................................................................................................................56
Background Music ......................................................................................................56
Established Call Pick-Up............................................................................................56
Door Phone Calls ..................................................................................................56-57
Executive/Secretary....................................................................................................57
Group Listening ..........................................................................................................58
Account Codes ............................................................................................................58
Locking Your Keyset ..................................................................................................59
Manual Signalling........................................................................................................59
Off-Hook Voice Announce ......................................................................................60
OHVA Block....................................................................................................................60
OHVA Reject ..................................................................................................................60
In Group/Out of Group..............................................................................................61
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET ..........................................................................62
AME Password ..............................................................................................................62
Auto Camp-On ............................................................................................................62
Select Ring Tone ..........................................................................................................62
Change Your Passcode ..............................................................................................62
Home Page
Set Answer Mode (Intercom) ..................................................................................63
Set Answer Mode (CO) ..............................................................................................63
Automatic Hold............................................................................................................63
Headset Operation......................................................................................................63
Hot Keypad ....................................................................................................................64
Key Confirmation Tone..............................................................................................64
Rejoining a Page ..........................................................................................................64
Ring Preference............................................................................................................65
Display Speed Dial Name ........................................................................................65
Caller ID Review All ....................................................................................................65
Secure OHVA ................................................................................................................65
Configure Mobile Extensions (MOBEX) ........................................................65-66
DISPLAY FEATURES ..................................................................................................67
Directory Information................................................................................................67
Display Number Dialed ............................................................................................67
Call Duration Timer ....................................................................................................67
Auto Timer ....................................................................................................................67
Timer Function ............................................................................................................68
Viewing Station Message Indications..................................................................68
Personal Speed Dial Names ....................................................................................68
Station Names ..............................................................................................................68
Managing Programmable Key Assignments ....................................................69
Backspace with LCR ....................................................................................................69
CALLER ID..........................................................................................................................70
Selecting Your Caller ID Display ............................................................................70
Viewing the Next Caller ID Call ..............................................................................71
Inquire Caller ID Park/Hold Info ............................................................................71
FEATURE ACCESS CODES ....................................................................................72
SECTION 6. APPLICATIONS ..............................................................................73
SAMSUNG VOICEMAIL ..........................................................................................74
Accessing Your Mailbox ............................................................................................75
SVMi E-Series Subscriber Services Menu Diagram ..................................76–77
Getting Started ............................................................................................................78
Listen to your Messages ...........................................................................................78
Subscriber Services Menu .......................................................................................78
Listening to Old or New Messages ......................................................................79
Group New or Old Messages ..................................................................................80
Record and Send a Message ..................................................................................80
Access Manager ..........................................................................................................82
Personal Greetings......................................................................................................83
Mailbox Administration ............................................................................................86
Message Broadcast ....................................................................................................88
Personal Services ........................................................................................................88
Personal Administration Settings ........................................................................89
Keyset User Features ................................................................................................90
Shortcuts ......................................................................................................................92
Interactive Displays ....................................................................................................92
E-Mail Gateway (EMG) ........................................................................................92–94
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS......................................................95–96
Home Page
ABOUT THIS BOOK
The new Samsung Multimedia Telephone SMT-i5220 keyset is part of the
OfficeServ 7000 Series.
The SMT-i5220 keyset represents a new concept of Internet phone, in that it uses
an IP address to Send/Receive voice and data. For voice communications, the SMTi5220 uses the data network line already in place in most offices and increasing
number of homes.
This guide contains 6 sections: Section 1. Caution and Preparation, Section 2.
Phone Functions, Section 3. Frequently Used Feature Operation, Section 4. Phone
Features, Section 5. OfficeServ 7000 System Features and Section 6. Applications.
Please take the time to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation
of your keyset. Keep this guide handy, as you may need to look up instructions for
infrequently used features.
This book is written based on factory default settings, for the feature access codes.
Sometimes, due to programming requirements, these codes may be changed. If
you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book, please contact your installation and service company to determine the correct code.
1
Home Page
CAUTION
SECTION 1.
CAUTION AND PREPARATION
2
•
Read the installation instructions before connecting the system to its power
source.
•
If there is dirt or moisture on the pin contact surface of a power plug, pull out
the plug and wipe it away with a cloth. If dirt or moisture remains on the product even after wiping, contact the service center.
•
For the power connection port of the phone, use the supplied power
adapter.(The power adapter is supplied separately.) Use of a power adapter
that does not meet the specifications may cause the product to become damaged, to overheat, or to explode.
•
Do not place the phone in a location with a lot of dust, in a location that is subject to severe changes in temperature, or near a heating device (cigarette
heat, heater, etc.)
•
Do not use or store flammable spray or materials near the phone.
•
Do not place vases, flowerpots, cups, or a container of cosmetics or drugs near
the phone.
•
Installation of equipment must not route interconnecting cables or external
power supply sources outdoors.
•
The LAN cable to the network should be connected to the LAN port of a
phone, NOT to the PC connection port.
•
Use a soft and dry cloth when cleaning the phone. Do not spray water directly onto the product; and do not use chemicals such as wax, benzene, alcohol,
thinner, mosquito killer, perfume spray, lubricant, detergent, etc.
3
Home Page
PREPARATION
CHECK THE CONTENTS OF THE BOX
Check if the product package box includes all the components as follows:
•
•
•
•
Phone body including a base
Handset
Handset cord
Patch cable
t
r
e
NOTE: Power transformer sold separately. If any of these items are missing or damaged, please contact your dealer.
PHONE INSTALLATION
Connecting the Phone Body
Remove the base of the phone by
pressing the [Push] mark on the top
of the base.
Note: The base can be used to adjust
the phone angle in the high or low
position.
q
w
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
q Handset Connection
w PC Connection
e Internet Connection
r Power Connection
t Headset Connection
SMT-i5264 [ADD-ON MODULE]
1 Connect a handset to the handset port on the back of the phone.
2
Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the computer, and attach it to the PC
port on the back of your IP phone.
3 Connect the Ethernet port in your workspace to the LAN port on the back of
your phone, using the provided LAN (UTP) cable.Your IP phone now shares a
network connection with your computer.
4
5
Connect a standard power outlet in your workspace to the power port using
the AC power adapter. The phone will subsequently boot. If your system
administrator delivered your phone without a power supply, your phone
probably receives power through the Ethernet connection.
To use a headset, connect the headset to the headset port on the back of
your phone.
The SMT-i5264 IP AOM can be registered and programmed
to function with any ITP 5100 keysets, SMT-i Series, and TDM
phones. This add-on module was cosmetically designed to
match the SMT-i5000 Series phones. In some applications
multiple IP AOMs can be supported per IP phone. For installation instructions, see your System Administrator.
SMT-A52GE [GIGABIT ADAPTER]
The SMT-A52GE Gigabit Adapter processes the Gigabit
data for a Gigabit LAN connection on the PC connected to
the SMT-i5200 IP phones. The SMT-A52GE can be installed
to function with any of the SMT-i5200 Series IP phones. For
installation instructions, see your System Administrator.
WALL MOUNT BRACKET
An optional bracket is available for wall mounting the SMT-i5200 Series phones to
the wall. For installation instructions, see your System Administrator.
SMT-A53PW [POWER ADAPTER]
The power adapter is sold separately.
4
5
Home Page
SMT-i5220 LAYOUT
LCD Screen
; 2) Soft Buttons
q LED (TSI)
Selector
for
w Switch
FWD/DND/
Absent MSG
SECTION 2.
PHONE FUNCTIONS
UserDefined
Keys
Navigation/
Enter Button
Conference
Handset
l
e
Phone
Book
Button
Message
Button
Service
Button
k
j
h
r
t
y Transfer
u Hold
Mute
Button
Volume
Button
Headset
Button
g
f
i
Programmable
Buttons (24)
d
s Speaker a Dial
o Microphone
NOTE: The words “key” and “button” are interchangeable.
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Button
q LED (TSI)
w Selector Switch for
FWD/DND/Absent Message
The blinking pattern differs depending on the phone
status (Telephone Status Indicator).
Used to select or deselect the Call Forwarding/DND/
Absent Message setting by using the Selector Switch
control.
e User-Defined Function Keys
Provide access to phone lines, web-based services,
and phone features.
r Navigation/ Enter Button
Used to scroll through menus and highlight items.
User to enter the selected menus or items.
t Conference Button
y Transfer Button
u Hold Button
i 24 Programmable Keys
6
Function
Used for conference calls.
Used to enable the call transfer function.
Used to place a call on hold.
24 Buttons used to set up function buttons through
interworking with a system.
7
Home Page
Button
Function
o Microphone
Allows other callers to hear you clearly when you are
speaking to them.
a Dial Pad
Used to dial the phone number.
s Speaker Button
Used to enable/disable the use of a speaker phone.
d Headset Button
Used to activate and deactivate the headset jack.
f Volume Button
Used to control the volume settings.
g Mute Button
Used to silence the transmit voice to the remote party.
h Service Button
j Message Button
k Phone Book Button
l Handset
; LCD Screen
2) Soft Buttons
For use with the Unified Communicator Server and to set
Scheduler (optional).
Used to access all the messaging options: Voicemail
Messages, Station Messages, SMS, and E-Mail Messages.
Used to search for a phone number saved in the phone,
or to register a new number. Pressing this button shows
the main screen of the phone book. Used to move
downward on various list screens.
KEY FUNCTIONS
NETWORK: The SMT-i5220 uses VoIP communication through an alreadyinstalled data network.
LCD SCREEN: Various functions are displayed on the LCD screen, so you can use
them conveniently by using the Navigation buttons on the phone.
SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE (SMS): You can exchange text messages using
this function. This function is available on IP internal stations.
TELEPHONE STATUS INDICATOR
The indicators are turned on or off depending on the status of relevant functions.
Screen
Status
LED Indicator
Red colored indicator is
constant.
Used for two-way voice conversation.
When station is busy
A display showing the phone’s status (busy, ringing,
receiving an internal message, etc.)
Perform the functions indicated by the screen text on the
bottom of the display.
When station is receiving an
incoming call
Red indicator (slow flash).
When there is a message
During “Do Not Disturb”
Incoming Trunk Call
Hold Recalls
Red indicator (fast flash).
Green colored indicator
flashes.
Green/Amber colored
indicator flashes.
SCREEN STRUCTURE
The screen consists of three areas.
Icon Area
Text Area
Soft Menu Area
Area
8
Description
Icon Area
Displays various icons.
Text Area
Displays date, time, extension number, name, message,
phone number, etc.
Soft Menu Area
Displays the functions allocated to the 4 soft buttons.
Service menus are provided depending on the state of the
phone. A user can use the service or feature menus by
pressing the soft button.
9
Home Page
TEXT INPUT METHOD
DESCRIPTION OF ICONS
Using the dial and direction buttons on the phone, you can enter and modify the
English characters, numeric and special characters.
The following icons are displayed on the screen.
,] on a text input screen, the input mode is
Whenever you press the dial button [,
changed in sequence.
Text Input Example
•
A
Uppercase Input Mode
a
Lowercase Input Mode
1
Numeric Input Mode
$
Special Character Input Mode
Use the dial buttons to type English text and numbers; and use the
Navigation Button to move the cursor left and right and OK buttons to complete input. When removing the typed characters, select the Del soft button.
Description
Shows that ‘Call Forward’ is enabled.
Shows that ‘Do Not Disturb’ is enabled.
Shows that ‘Mute’ function is enabled. When the call ends to
become a standby status or this function is disabled, this icon
disappears.
Shows that the call is hold state. When call is reconnect or
disconnected, this icon disappears.
Appears when there are unread Short messages in the
message inbox. Once they are read, it disappears.
Shows that a LAN cable is connected to the PC port.
Shows that a LAN cable is connected to the LAN port but that
the system is not connected.
,]
English Input: Select this mode (uppercase/lowercase) by pressing the [,
button, and type text by repeated pressing the dial buttons.
Shows that a LAN cable is connected to the LAN port and
that the system is connected normally.
,] button, and type numNumber Input: Select this mode by pressing the [,
bers by pressing the dial buttons.
Outgoing Call icon.
,] button; select
Special Character Input: Select this mode by pressing the [,
a desired character by using the Direction Arrows soft button; and press the
OK button to enter it.
Missed Call icon.
Keypad Character Entry
Count
Dial ,
10
Icon
1
A
2
a
3
1
(Uppercase)
(Lowercase)
Not Used
Dial 0
Not Used
Dial 1
Not Used
Dial 2
A
B
C
Dial 3
D
E
F
Dial 4
G
H
I
Dial 5
J
K
L
Dial 6
M
N
O
Dial 7
P
Q
R
Dial 8
T
U
V
Dial 9
W
X
Y
Appears when the Speaker button is active.
Appears when the Headset button is active.
4
$
(Numbers) (Special Characters)
Dial #
Incoming Call icon.
Shows when there is a Cell phone number for the entry in the
Phone Book.
Shows when there is a Home phone number for the entry in
the Phone Book.
Shows when there is a Office phone number for the entry in
the Phone Book.
Shows when there is an internal Extension number for the
entry in the Phone Book.
S
Z
11
Home Page
NAVIGATING THE MENUS
When programming within various menu options, information can be entered via
Q] dial keys. The button used for editing and
the dial pad keys using [0]-[9] and [Q
their features are summarized below.
BUTTONS
FEATURES
To move the cursor left and right, up and down.
Volume + and -
To clear/delete an entire field such as station name.
Hold
Transfer
To write the changes and exit programming.
Speaker
To write the changes and exit programming.
NAVIGATION BUTTON and SELECTOR
SWITCH FOR FWD/DND/ABSENT MSG
The SMT-i5220 phone has a navigation button and a Selector Switch for FWD/DND
to allow users to use its functions easily.
Selector Switch
Up Navigation Button
Left
Navigation
Button
Navigation Button
Right
Navigation
Button
OK/Enter Button
Down Navigation Button
The Selector Switch can be used to manually set and cancel station Call
Forwarding and Do Not Disturb. NOTE: Do not use the access codes or the function menu to cancel FWD/DND/ABSENT MESSAGE when the selector switch is set
in the left or right position because the switch takes precedence over the access
codes/function menu.
BUTTON
Selector Switch
FUNCTION
Left
Users can set the phone to the call forward
state.
Center
The default standby status. (Normal Mode)
Right
This is set to “Do Not Disturb” and absent
messge status.
Direction Key
Users can edit the contents on the screen or
move between menu items.
OK/Enter
Users can select or save the item where a
cursor is placed in a menu mode.
Users can check the caller information
received from a station line during receiving.
Navigation
12
SMT-i5220 SETUP
INITIALIZING THE SMT-i5220
Initially the SMT-i5220 IP keyset will need to be setup to operate within the users
network. The Setup Menu is also used to make changes to the keyset, in the event
that the system information should change. The option chosen will be highlighted.
The station numbers will be automatically set by the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems once the necessary information has been entered into the IP keyset. Enter ID
and password of the server, as described below to register the phone.
See your system administrator for specific Network and Server addresses. The
addresses necessary to set up the SMT-i5220 are:
•
•
•
•
•
IP Address of Station
Network Gateway Address
IP Address of System’s main processor
User ID
Password
SETUP MODE
To get to the SETUP MODE unplug the power cord from the SMT-i5220. Press and
hold the , button while you plug power back into the phone. Release the , button when you see Samsung in the display. If you have a PoE (Power over Ethernet)
connection, the same procedure can be done by unplugging and plugging the
Ethernet cable into the phone while pressing and holding the , button.
When the phone reboot is complete, the Language
Menu will display. Press the Yes soft button to advance to
the Configuration Menu.
Once the Configuration Menu is displayed, you can move to each menu in the
Setup by using the navigation button and [1]-[8] dial buttons of the SMT-i5220 IP
phone. To learn how to navigate the menus refer to the previous section.
13
Home Page
EASY INSTALL WIZARD
CONFIGURATION MENU STRUCTURE
By selecting this option, the System Easy Wizard can guide you through setting up
your network parameters. If you want to set up these parameters individually, follow the instructions below.
This menu is for administrator use and a password is required. The Configuration
Menu options are as follows:
•
From the idle phone press Menu, scroll to Phone, and press OK button. Scroll
to Phone Information and press OK button. From the keypad, enter the
administrator’s password (please contact your phone system administrator).
Scroll to Easy Install and press OK button.
SELECTING THE STATIC IP OPTION
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
When the Static IP option is selected, enter the System Type OSSP (KP), and
press OK.
Enter the Static IP Address for the phone (eg. 192.168.9.193) then press the
OK button.
Enter the Subnet Mask (eg. 255.255.255.0); press OK button.
Enter Gateway Address (eg. 192.168.9.1), press OK button.
NOTE: Press the , key on the dial pad to enter the “.” in the IP address.
Skip [VLAN-PHONE], [VLAN-PC], [802.1x Setting] by pressing the OK button
three times.
Enter the System IP address (eg. 192.168.9.200), press OK button.
Enter System ID XXXX (eg. 3201), then press OK button.
Enter Password XXXX (eg. 1234) then press OK button.
Wait a second for the phone to reboot. The phone should register and authenticate itself to the phone system. Test SMT-i5220 for proper operation.
SETTING UP HOT DESKING [IDLE LOGIN]
Hot Desking allows you to log in and out of your SMT-i5220 IP keyset without
rebooting.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
14
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Phone then press OK button.
Scroll to Phone Information and press OK button.
Enter the administrator’s password (please contact your phone system administrator).
Scroll to Extension Login then press OK button.
Choose the ON option and press OK button. (Note: ON to allow, OFF to deny
hot desking).
Press the Save soft button to complete the setup.
When the phone restarts, enter the ID (eg; extension 2809) and password.
Press the Save soft button to complete the login.
1. EASY INSTALL
This option will guide you through setting up all required parameters for connecting the SMT keyset to your system.
2. PHONE INFORMATION
1. Version Info: Provides boot rom, software, DSP, and hardware version
information.
2. Network Info: Displays network mode, IP address of phone, network, and
gateway information.
3. MAC Address
3. NETWORK
Displays Static IP, Dynamic IP, PPPoE, NAT, 802.1x, VLAN (LAN), and VLAN (PC).
4. SERVER
1. Primary System: The main processor’s IP address.
2. System 1~3: Up to 4 server IPs can be set.
5. EXT. LOGIN
Allows the user to choose the option of permitting the phone either
login/logout from idle mode or only register to the server on power up. Once
the phone is placed into Extension Login mode, a display will show up to allow
you to enter any valid User ID and password. This function is also referred to
as hot desking (idle login).
6. S/W UPGRADE
1. TFTP Server: The IP address of the TFTP server containing the IP software.
2. Upgrade: Starts the IP software upgrade process.
7. FACTORY RESET
This option resets the SMT-i5220 to factory default settings.
8. PHONE RESTART
This option reboots the SMT-i5220 phone.
15
Home Page
This section provides the basic operation of your Samsung Multimedia Telephone
SMT-i5220.
EXTENSION LOG IN & OUT [HOT DESKING]
If enabled, your SMT-i5220 telephone may require you to log in before making or
receiving calls. In these cases your telephone system administrator will provide
you with an extension number, password, and the feature code used to log out.
SECTION 3.
FREQUENTLY USED FEATURE
OPERATION
TO LOG IN
•
•
•
•
Dial your extension number in the ID field (example
3201).
Press the OK button.
Dial your password in the password field (example 1234).
Press Save soft button.
TO LOG OUT
•
Dial the feature code provided by your administrator (for example 77).
PLACING CALLS
IMPORTANT: Put your phone in Overlap Mode by pressing the Menu button,
select Settings and then select Application Set., press OK, select Call, press OK,
scroll to Dial Mode, change it to Overlap by using the Navigation Button. If your
phone is not in Overlap mode you must always press the Call soft button after
dialing the digits to send the call.
NOTE: All examples of making phone calls are based on the phone being set for
overlap dialing mode.
OUTSIDE CALLS - To place a call to an outside party:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press an idle outside line button, line group button, or dial a line access code
to receive dial tone.
Dial the telephone number.
Hang up the handset when the call is completed.
NOTE: Frequently called telephone numbers can be added to the PhoneBook.
When making internal and external calls from AOM (programmable) list, press the
AOM soft button to access the programmable button screens. Then use the
Navigation button to scroll to and hightlight the desired programmable button.
Press OK to complete the call.
16
17
Home Page
INTERNAL CALLS - To place a call to another extension at your location:
ANSWERING CALLS
•
•
•
OUTSIDE/INTERNAL/VOICE ANNOUNCE CALLS - To answer these
•
Lift the handset.
Dial the extension number or group number.
Wait for the party to answer. If you hear a brief tone burst instead of ringback
tone, the station called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer. Begin speaking after the tone.
Hang up the handset when the call is completed.
NOTES:
1.
2.
If you have a DSS button assigned to an extension or station group, you may
press this button instead of dialing the number.
If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
SPEAKERPHONE CALLS - Your Samsung SMT-i5220 has full-duplex speakerphone capability. This feature is used for both internal or external calls. To activate
this feature:
•
•
•
Press the Speaker button.
Place an internal or external call.
Press Speaker button to disconnect the call.
NOTE: The handset can be used at any time during the conversation. To resume
handsfree operation, press the SPEAKER button, and hang up the handset.
HEADSET CALLS - If a headset is connected to the phone, you need to press
the headset key to direct the call to the headset. The headset key will be lit. To use
the headset:
•
•
•
Press the Speaker button.
Place an internal or external call.
Press Speaker button to disconnect the call.
three types of calls:
•
•
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer on Speakerphone.
Hang up the handset when the call is completed.
NOTE: The volume can be adjusted at any time by pressing the up and down buttons on your navigation button.
PLACING A CALL ON HOLD
Calls can be placed on System Hold or Exclusive Hold. A call placed on System
Hold can be picked up from any extension. Calls placed on Exclusive Hold can only
be picked up from the extension that placed them on hold.
SYSTEM HOLD - To place a call on hold:
•
•
•
Press the Hold button. The Call button will flash green at your telephone.
To take the caller off hold, press that button and the red flashing light will go
steady red again.
Resume conversation.
EXCLUSIVE HOLD - To place a call on hold at your telephone so that other
users cannot answer it:
•
•
Press the Hold button twice.The call button will flash green at your telephone.
To retrieve the call, press the flashing red line button or press the line button
a third time.
NOTE: Internal calls are always placed on exclusive hold.
NOTES:
TRANSFERRING CALLS
1.
You can transfer a call by notifying the party to which the call is being transferred
or without notification.
2.
18
If you need to switch between the headset and the handset during the call,
you need to place the call on hold first.
Headset key can be enabled or disabled in the Menu, Settings, Application
Setting, Headset.
•
•
•
•
While on a call, press the Transfer button then dial an extension number.
Confirm you hear a ringback tone.
Wait for the called party to answer and announce the call (optional).
Replace the handset.
19
Home Page
TRANSFERRING WITH CAMP-ON
FORWARDING CALLS
When you transfer a call to another station and receive a busy signal, you can
camp the call on to this station. Hang up when you hear the busy signal.The called
party is alerted that a call is waiting.
You can forward your calls to another station, group of stations, or an external telephone number. Program a destination for the type of forwarding you want by
moving the Selector Switch to the left and set the forwarding number for All,
Busy, No Answer, and Busy/No Answer.
•
•
•
Call another internal station.
When receiving a busy tone, press the Func. soft button.
Scroll to Camp On and press OK button (here ringback tone).Wait for party to
answer the call.
NOTE: If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to
receive another call. Press Transfer to return to the caller.
CALL WAITING
If an outside call is camped-on to your phone or another station is camped-on to
you:
•
•
•
Your keyset rings and the call that is waiting (camped-on) flashes red.
Press the flashing button to answer; the other call is put on hold automatically if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press
Hold and then the flashing button or finish the first call and hang up; the waiting call will ring.
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer.
NOTE: Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.
CONFERENCE CALLS
To make a conference call while engaged in a conversation:
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Conference button and receive conference tone.
Make another call, either intercom or outside, press the Conference
button and receive conference tone.
Make another call or press the Conference button to join all parties. You can
conference up to five parties (you and four others).
Repeat the last step until all parties are added.
Hang up to leave the conference call.
NOTE: When attempting to add another party to the conference and you
are not able to reach the desired person, hang up. Simply press the
Conference button again to return to the previous conversation.
Icon
OTHER FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
VOLUME CONTROL - Vol button is used to adjust the volume of a handset,
speaker and ringing sound.
Volume Control of a Handset
•
•
•
Adjusts the handset volume while busy (handset offhook).
To increase the volume of a handset, press the top side [+] of the Vol button.
To decrease the volume of a handset, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button.
Volume Control of a Speaker
•
•
•
Adjusts the speaker volume while busy (handsfree).
To increase the volume of a speaker, press the top side [+] of the Vol button.
To decrease the volume of a handset, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button.
Volume Control of a Ringing Tone
•
To increase the volume of a speaker, press the top side [+] of the Vol button
while ringing.
•
To decrease the volume of a handset, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button while ringing.
Volume Control of Key Tone
•
To increase the volume of the key tones, press the top side [+] of the Vol
button.
•
To decrease the volume of the key tones, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button.
NOTE: By pressing the Vol button in idle mode, the user can also adjust the key
tone volume
To drop a party from your conference call:
Press the Conference button and dial the extension or line number that is to
be dropped.
Press the Conference button again to reestablish the conference.
20
21
Home Page
LAST NUMBER REDIAL - To redial the last dialed telephone number, press
the Func. soft key scroll to Last Redial and press OK.
PHONE BOOK BUTTON - Provides direct access to Personal Phonebook
CALL LOG BUTTON - Provides direct access to a list
of most recent calls, outgoing calls, incoming calls, missed
calls, and an option to delete all (or clear) all calls from the
Call Log.
(local to the phone) or Company phonebook (requires set-up by administtrator).
FUNC. SOFT BUTTON - This function allows a user
MESSAGE BUTTON - This function allows users to select which desired type
of messages is viewed. Users can select and view the following options: Voicemail
Messages, Station Messages, E-Mail (optional with IP-UMS only), and Short
Message Service (SMS). Short Message Service is similar to sending text messaging [Function only supported on Samsung IP phones].
SERVICE BUTTON - Used to allow station users access to setting and editing
the scheduler (alarm clock) feature. Also used to connect the OfficeServ
Communicator when application is available (UC is optional).
MENU SOFT BUTTON - This menu displays the
following options:
NOTE: The Navigation button can be used to scroll
through these options.
1. PHONEBOOK: Maintains frequently dialed names and numbers in a
PhoneBook. Search and initiate calls by: Speed Dial, Associated Names,
Telephone Numbers, Assigned Groups, or Previous Calls registered to your
phone.
2. CALL LOG: Provides direct access to a list of most recent calls, outgoing calls,
incoming calls, missed calls, and an option to delete/delete all (or clear) all
calls from the Call Log.
3. MESSAGES: This function allows users to select which desired type of messages is viewed. Users can select and view the following options: Voicemail
Messages, Station Messages, E-Mail (optional with IP-UMS only), and Short
Message Service (SMS). Short Message Service is similar to sending text messaging [Function only supported on Samsung IP phones].
4. CONFERENCE: Allows a user to setup a conference group to call multiple
parties simultaneously to join the conference call.
5. SERVICE: Allows a user to set the scheduler (reminder) function.
6. PHONE: Allows the user to set many phone options for the phone such as ring
tones, background screens, languages, forward, DND, etc.
one touch easy access to many of the system features.
When pressed, the following options are displayed: Last
number redial, Save/Repeat, Speed Dial, Directory, VM
Message, Station Message, Page Pickup, Direct Pickup,
DND, In/Out Group, Status Message, Hold pickup, Page, Meet me Page, OHVA
Block, Group Pickup, and My Group Pickup. The Navigation button can be used
to scroll up and down the list of features under the Func. button.
NOTE: EXE/SECR MSG is displayed only when the phone is programmed for
Boss/Secretary feature.
Example of using the Last Number Redial feature:
Press the Func. Soft button, scroll to Last Redial, then press OK button. The
last number called from the phone is called.
NOTE: For detail operation of the list of features under the Func. soft button,
please refer to the System Features section of the user guide.
AOM SOFT BUTTON - This function is used to display all 99 programmable feature buttons of the phone.
The Navigation button can be used to scroll up and
down the list of 99 programmable feature buttons under
the soft AOM. The feature buttons can be programmed
by a technician.
Example of dialing a Speed Dial Number using the AOM function:
Press the AOM soft button, scroll to Speed Dial, then press OK button. The
number is called from the phone.
NOTE: Some programmed features such as speed dialing and DSS buttons
can be used to process calls; other programmed buttons such as Call buttons
can only be viewed.
The soft AOM button can also display status indications
for station keys, trunks, voice mail messages, etc.
7. SETTINGS: This function allows the user to set the following option:
Application Set., Call Forward, Absent Message, AOM Setting, Network
Info., and Clear User Set.
22
23
Home Page
Example of programming a DSS button on the soft AOM:
Press the Menu soft button.
Using the Navigation button, scroll to Settings and press OK, then scroll to
and select AOM Setting.
Scroll to the soft AOM button to program (for example: 4).
Press the Edit soft button (the display will show AOM index 4).
Press Edit soft button again, scroll to the feature option (for example: DSS).
Move down and enter the extension number (for example: 2003).
Move down, use the dial pad to enter name (for example: John Dow). Refer to
Text Input Method.
Press the Save soft button to exit and save the setting.
SECTION 4.
PHONE FEATURES
OK/ENTER BUTTON - This function is used to enter, save or complete the
selected option in the display.
SPEAKER BUTTON - This function is used to go on and off hook in the handsfree speakerphone mode.
24
25
Home Page
BASIC MENUS
Item
4. Conference
The basic menus screen is displayed if you select the Menu from the soft menu at
the left bottom of a idle screen. Using the Up/Down button, move to a desired
function, and press the OK button to execute the function.
SOFT BUTTON STRUCTURE
6. Phone
MENU SOFT BUTTON
Item
1. Phonebook
Sub-Item
All
Personal Phonebook Unassigned
Search
New
Edit [+]
2. Call Log
Call
3. Messages
26
Description
Shows the entire list of phone numbers
stored in the phone.
This is a list of number that are not assigned
any group.
Allows a user to search for a registered
phone number by name/number.
Saves a phone number or group name; and
allows a user to specify a speed dialing
number and ringtone.
Allows a user to delete all the phone
numbers saved in the phone.
Description
Allows a user to setup (show, add and edit) a conference group
to call multiple parties simultaneously to join the conference call.
Allows a user to set the alarm clock function.
Allows the user to set a timed reminder
1. Scheduler
alarm to give an audible indication or
alarm clock function.
Allows the user to set many phone options for the phone such as
ring tones, background screens, languages, etc.
1. UC Dial: Right
Options are DND and Absent Message.
2. Screen
Options are Display Time, Font, and LCD
Power.
3. Sound
Options are Volumes, Ring Tone, and Key
Tone.
4. Language
Options are English and Korean.
5. Security
Change Password, Dial and Phone Lock.
Easy Install: Used to register and authenticate the phone to the server.
Used to make a callback from the call log.
This is used to save entries from call log to
phonebook.
This is used to delete entries from the call
[+] Delete
log.
This is used to to move back one menu
Back
screen.
Allows a user to delete all the call history
Delete All
saved in the phone.
Allows a user to retrieve voice mail
1. Voice Mail [0]
messages from the mailbox.
Allows a user to retrieve station messages
2. Station Message [0]
(internal) from another user.
Allows a user to to view how many e-mail
3. Email [0]
messages have been received via IP-UMS
(optional).
Allows a user to retrieve and send internal
short messages (SMS) like text message to
4. Short Message
other internal phones. [Not Supported Over
Networking]
Save
5. Service
Sub-Item
6. Phone Information
Phone Information: Includes Version
Info, Network Info, and MAC Address.
Network: Options are Static IP, Dynamic
IP, PPPoE, VLAN (LAN Port), VLAN (PC Port),
802.1x.
Server: Used to register the phone to one
or more Servers. Options are Primary,
System 1, System 2, and System 3.
Extension Login: Used to log phone on
and off (Hot Desking).
S/W Upgrade: Upgrade Server, Upgrade:
used to upgrade software on phones.
Factory Reset: Used to default the phone
settings.
Phone Restart: Used to reboot the
phones.
License: Display the licensing policy.
27
Home Page
Item
Sub-Item
Description
This function is used to allow station users to set application
settings, call forwarding, absent messaging, AOM setting, view
station network information, view phone firmware or initialize
Note: All options are not
the phone. Other settings include the following:
explained in this manual.
Options are Call (CID 1, CID 2, Dial Mode),
The options are initiative
Phone Number, Boss Answer, Short
and menu driven for an
1. Application Set.
easy, user friendly menus
Message, Station On/Off, and Extension
to guide you through
Login.
navigating the Setting
Options are Not Use, All, Busy, No
Menu Options.
2. Call Forward
Answer, Busy/No Answer, DND, and
Follow Me Status.
7. Settings
3. Absent Message
Used to leave station messages in display informing other internal parties of
your status when your station is called.
4. AOM Setting
Used to set the name, number, and
function to the 99 AOM buttons.
5. Network Info.
Used to view the current network
settings.
6. Clear User Set.
Clear your local setting such as phone
book, call log, etc.
1. PHONEBOOK
Company phonebook requires setup by the System
Administrator.
PERSONAL PHONEBOOK
NOTE: Personal phonebook is stored locally in phone memory.
All
Shows the entire list of phone numbers saved in the phone book.
•
•
Press the Phone Book button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK, scroll to All, and then press OK.
The entire list of phone numbers saved in the phone book is shown on the
screen. Using the Navigation button, move to a desired entry, and select the
Call soft button to place a call.
Unassigned Group
The Unassigned option is a list of all the phonebook entries that have not been
assigned to a group. Once an entry is assigned to a group, the entry is removed
from the unassigned list.
TO CREATE A PHONEBOOK GROUP
To create a group in the phonebook:
•
•
•
Press the Phonebook button, then press the [+] soft button, then press the
New soft button.
Using the key pad, input the name of the group, then press the Save soft button. See Text Input Method.
Press Edit soft button or press Back soft button to exit.
TO MOVE UNASSIGNED ENTRY TO PHONEBOOK GROUP
•
•
•
•
•
28
Press the Phonebook button, scroll to Unassigned option then press OK button.
Scroll to the entry that is to be moved to an assigned group and press OK button.
Press Edit soft button, scroll to and highlight the Group option.
Using the Navigation button, move Left or Right to the group name (eg;
Personal) which you want to move the entry into.
Once the correct entry is displayed, press the Save button. The entry is now
assigned to the group.
29
Home Page
Search
Allows a user to search by name/number for a phone saved in the phone book.
•
•
Press the Phonebook button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK.
Press the Search soft button from the dial pad enter the characters of the
name (case sensitive) or number to search and press the OK button, the
matching phone number is displayed. Move to a desired name/number using
the Navigation button, and select the Call soft button to place a call.
VIEWING DETAIL CALL LOG RECORD
To view the details of each of the call log entry, highlight
the entry and press the OK button to display the full
Caller ID record which includes the name, date and time.
DELETE / DELETE ALL
This is the function used to delete an entry or all entries in the Call Log.
This is the function used to register a phone number.
•
•
•
•
•
TO ADD A CALL LOG ENTRY TO PHONE BOOK
Add New Entry to Phonebook [+]
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Phonebook button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK.
Press the [+] soft button, and then New.
Enter a name by using the dial pad, scroll down and enter a mobile number,
home number, office number, internal extension number, fax number,
and e-mail address.
Assign a Group (if needed).
Select a Ring Tone.
Add Memo information (up to 50 characters).
Press the Save soft button to save the new entry to the Phonebook.
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Call Log, press OK.
Scroll to entry to delete.
Press [+] soft button. Press Del. to delete the selected entry or Del All.
Press the Yes to Delete entry.
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Call Log, press OK. Scroll to desired Call
Log entry and press the Edit soft button. Make changes to the name and
number if necessary. When finished, press the Save soft button. The Call Log
number is added as a new entry to the phonebook list.
3. MESSAGES
1. Voice Mail
DELETE / DELETE ALL
This is the function used to delete all the phone numbers saved in the phone
book.
•
•
•
•
Press the Phonebook button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK.
Scroll to All and press OK button. Scroll to entry to delete.
Press [+] soft button. Press Del. to delete the selected entry or Del All.
Press the Yes to Delete entry.
2. CALL LOG
Outgoing
Incoming
Missed Icons
This function lists all the recent numbers for outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
•
•
30
Press the Log soft button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to Call
Log, press OK. A phone number list of recent outgoing, incoming and missed
calls is displayed.
Scroll to an entry and press the Call soft button to dial the number.
This function allows users to retrieve voice mail message from the mailbox.
•
Press the Message button—OR—press Menu soft button, scroll to
Messages, press OK, scroll to Voice Mail [ ], and then press OK to access the
voicemail box and retrieve messages.
2. Station Message
This function allows users to retrieve station messages (internal) from another
user.
•
•
•
•
Press the Message button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Messages, press OK, scroll to Station MSG [ ], and then press OK.
To return a call to the station that left the message: press the Func. soft button, scroll to Reply, then press OK.
To delete the station message: press the Func. soft button, scroll to Clear, then
press OK.
To view the next station message: press the Func. soft button, scroll to Next,
then press OK.
31
Home Page
3. E-Mail
This function allows users to view the amount of e-mails for a station user’s
account. This function is only available when the IP-UMS application is enabled.
Please refer to the IP-UMS manuals for detailed operation.
•
•
Scroll to Outbox, then press OK to view short text message sent from your
phone.
Press the [+] soft button, then Del/Del All soft button to delete the short text
message(s) or press the Back soft button to exit SMS.
4. Short Message (SMS)
4. CONFERENCE [Group]
This function is used to send and create internal short messages or text messaging.
This function allows a user to setup a conference group
to call multiple parties simultaneously to join the conference call.
INBOX
•
•
•
•
Press the Message button—OR—press the Menu soft button.
Scroll to Short Message, press OK.
Scroll to Inbox, then press OK to view a short text message(s) in you Inbox.
Press the [+] soft button, press Del. soft button, and the Yes soft button to
delete the selected short text message or press the Back soft button to exit
Short Message.
CREATING CONFERENCE GROUP
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Conference, and press OK.
Press New soft button, enter phone number (up to 4 numbers) of the parties
included in the Conference Group.
Press the Call soft button to initiate the Conference Group.
TO CREATE AN UNSUPERVISED CONFERENCE
NEW MESSAGE (SEND)
This function is used to create and send a new short text message.
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Message button—OR—press the Menu soft button.
Scroll to Short Message, press OK.
Press New Msg soft button.Write or create a new short message and press the
Next soft button. See Text Input Method on how to enter characters in text
messages.
Enter the internal extension(s) to send the short message. Scroll to other
entries and enter the station number to send to more users. (Each short message can be sent to 1 through 10 users).
Press the Send soft button to deliver the short message to other user’s inbox.
NOTES:
1.
2.
When the message is sent successfully, the message “Sent” is displayed. When
the message fails to send the “Failed to send” is displayed.
SMS messages can only be sent to internally ITP, SMT-W, or SMT-i phones.TDM
and single line phones cannot send or receive SMS messages. SMS messaging
is not supported over networking.
OUTBOX
This function is used to create and send a new short text message.
•
•
32
Press the Message button—OR—press the Menu soft button.
Scroll to Short Message, press OK.
•
•
During the conference, the host can press the Host soft button.
The host is dropped and the other parties remain in conference.
TO DISCONNECT A PARTY FROM CONFERENCE GROUP
•
•
•
Highlight the party to be disconnected from the conference group.
Press the Disc. soft button. The party is disconnected.
Press the Call soft button to call back and add the party back to the conference group.
SAVING A CONFERENCE GROUP
•
•
After completing the group conference, press the Save soft button.
Enter the Name of the Group, and press Save soft button.
TO EDIT A CONFERENCE GROUP
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Conference button, and press OK.
Scroll to the Name of the Group to be edited and press Edit soft button.
Edit the group name. When complete, press the Save soft button to save
changes.
TO EDIT CONFERENCE GROUP PHONE NUMBER LIST
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Conference button, and press OK.
Scroll to the Name of the Group to be edited and press Edit soft button.
Press the Edit soft button. Edit the phone number list—OR—
Press Search soft button to search for phone number to add to group from
33
Home Page
•
the phonebook. Highlight the entry and press the OK button to add the number to the Conference Group list.
When complete with the editing, press the Save soft button to save changes.
5. SERVICE
Allows a user to set the alarm clock function.
•
•
•
•
Press the Service button—OR—press the Menu soft
button, scroll to Scheduler, then press OK.
Press the New soft button.
Enter the name of the scheduler using the dial pad and navigation buttons.
Press the Next soft button. Enter the Date, Time, Alarm Type, and Ring Tone.
Press Save soft button when finished.
TO DELETE A SCHEDULE
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press Menu soft button. Scroll to Service button, and press the OK button.
Select Scheduler and press the OK button.
To delete a current schedule, press the [+] soft button.
Select and highlight the entry to be deleted and press Delete soft button—
OR—press the Delete All soft button to clear all schedules.
Select Yes to confirm or No to deny the deletion of a schedule(s).
Press Back and End soft buttons to exit the scheduler.
6. PHONE
Allows the user to set many phone options for phone
such as ring tones, background screens, languages, etc.
3. Sound
•
•
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone and press OK. Select Sound and
press OK. Set the following Volumes, Ring Tone, and Key Tone of the SMTi5220 phone, select the option and adjust the sound settings.
Press the Save soft button to save the sound settings.
4. Language
•
•
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone and press OK. Select Language
and press OK. Select English (Default English).
Press the Save soft button.
5. Security
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone and press OK. Scroll to Security
and press OK.
Enter the station password [default 1234].
Press OK to Change Password and press Back soft button.
Scroll to Dial to Unlock, Lock Out (Outgoing), or Lock All.
Scroll to Phone to Unlock or Lock the Menu.
Press the Save soft button.
6. Phone Information
Allows a user to set up the following options: Easy Install Wizard (registering the
phone), Phone Information (Version, Network, MAC Address), Network (Static,
Dynamic, etc.), Server (Phone can register to 1 to 4 servers), Extension Login (logging in and out IP phones), Software Upgrade (Upgrading the phone or server
software), Factory Reset (defaulting the phone), and Phone Restart (rebooting
the phone).
1. UC Dial: Right
This option is used to select which function will be
enabled when the selector switch is moved to the right position.
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone and press OK.
Scroll to UC Dial: Right and press OK.
Select DND or Absent Message and press Save soft button.
7. SETTINGS
This function is used to allow station users to set
Application Settings, Call Forward, Absent Message,
AOM Setting, Network Information, and to Clear User
Settings such as Call Log and Phonebook.
2. Screen
•
•
34
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone and press OK. Select Screen and
press OK. Set the following Time Format, Font, and LCD Power Saving of the
SMT-i5220 phone, select the option and adjust the screen settings.
Press the Save soft button to store the screen settings.
35
Home Page
FUNC. SOFT BUTTON
This function allows a user one touch easy access to
many of the system features.When pressed, the following
options are displayed: Last Number Redial,
Save/Repeat, Speed Dial, Directory, VM Message, Station Message, Page
Pickup, Directory Pickup, DND, In/Out Group, Status Message, Hold Pickup,
Page, Meet Me Page, OHVA Block, Group Pickup, and My Group Pickup. The
Navigation button can be used to scroll up and down the list of features under the
Func. button.
NOTE: For detailed operation of the list of features under the Func. soft button,
please refer to the System Features section of this user guide.
AOM SOFT BUTTON
SECTION 5.
OFFICESERV™ 7000
SYSTEM FEATURES
This function is used to display all 99 programmable feature buttons of the phone. The Navigation buttons can
be used to scroll up and down the list of 99 programmable feature buttons under the AOM module. The feature
buttons can be programmed by a technician.
36
37
Home Page
OUTSIDE CALLS
MAKING CALLS FROM AOM
Note: When making calls, internal or outside calls, in order to access the programmable button screens, press the AOM soft button. Then you can utilize the
Navigation button to scroll the list.
•
•
When the desired number is highlighted, press the OK button.
The number will be automatically dialed.
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device. To answer
calls ringing this device, dial 67—OR—press the UA button. This device can operate in any one of the six different ring plans.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing.
RECALL DIAL TONE
•
Press the New button to disconnect your existing call, wait for dial tone and
then make a new call on the same line.
NOTE: If this button does not appear on your keyset, the Flash button may be programmed to recall dial tone.
NOTES:
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set
a callback, the cursor associated with the Callback button will be solid black.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing.
BUSY STATION CALLBACK
When you call another station and receive a busy signal:
•
•
•
NOTES:
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set
a callback, the cursor associated with the Callback button, will be solid black.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing.
CANCELING CALLBACK
A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set a callback, the cursor associated with the Callback button, will be solid black.
To cancel a callback:
•
•
SENDING A FLASH
While on an outside call, press the Flash button to send a flash to the telephone
company. This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use.
NOTE: Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit.
BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK
If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line, this means that
the line or group of lines is busy.
•
•
•
•
38
Press the Callback button, if programmed, or dial 44, you will hear confirmation tone.
Hang up or press Speaker button.
When the line becomes free, the system will call you back.
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer, wait for dial tone and
dial the telephone number or speed dial number again.
Press the Callback button, if programmed, or dial 44.
When the busy station becomes free, your keyset will ring.
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to call the now idle station.
Press the Callback button, if programmed, or dial 44.The display will show the
callback details, press the Func. soft button and then Clear.
This will cancel the last set callback and display the next set callback, also with
the option to Clear.This process is repeated until all callbacks are cleared from
memory.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature is turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press the Speaker button before dialing.
BUSY STATION CAMP-ON
When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to
wait for a callback:
MANUAL CAMP-ON
•
•
•
Press the Camp button or dial 45.
The called station will receive off-hook ring tone repeated every few seconds
and the cursor associated with the first available Call button will flash black to
indicate your call is waiting.
Wait for the called party to answer.
39
Home Page
•
The called station must release its first call or place it on hold before answering your camp-on.
NOTES:
1. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no available button to
accept your call. Hang up or leave a message.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing.
AUTO CAMP-ON
When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the
camp on button every time you call a busy station, you can set your phone for auto
camp-on.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 081 to turn On auto camp-on or dial 080 to turn it Off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
INTERCOM CALLS
VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
you will hear the caller’s announcement.
•
•
Press the Speaker button to turn on the microphone and speak handsfree—
OR—lift the handset to reply.
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the Speaker button.
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
to ON.
AUTO ANSWER MODE
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
then automatically answer the call.
•
•
Your microphone and speaker are turned on and you can speak handsfree. For
privacy, use the handset.
To finish the call, replace the handset.
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
to ON.
CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR
•
•
Dial 0 to call your system operator or group of operators.
If you want to call a specific operator, dial that person’s extension number.
NOTE: If the Hot keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button or dial 0 before you begin dialing.
40
41
Home Page
CALL PROCESSING
SYSTEM HOLD
When you are connected to any call, press Hold. The call will flash at the keyset. If
this call appears on a line button at other keysets, it will flash at those keysets also.
•
To take the caller off hold, press that button and the flashing LED will go
steady again. Resume the conversation—OR—press the Hold button. The
flashing LED will go steady again and you will be connected to the call again.
Resume the conversation.
NOTE: While on a call, pressing a line button, route button or flashing Call button
will automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call. See
Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset.
EXCLUSIVE HOLD
To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it:
•
•
Press the Hold button twice.The call will flash on your keyset and this line will
show a steady indication on other keysets.
To retrieve the call, press the flashing line button or press the Hold button a
third time.
NOTE: Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold.
REMOTE HOLD
When you wish to place a call on hold at another station.
•
•
Press Transfer and dial the station number (or press the appropriate DSS button)
Press the Hold button. This will place the call on system hold on an available
Call button or Line button at the remote station and return you to dial tone.
NOTES:
1. If the destination station does not have any free Call buttons or line buttons
you will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other party by pressing the Transfer button.
2. Intercom calls cannot be put on remote hold.
42
HOLD RECALL
If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer, it will recall your station. The
button that the call appears on will have a slow flashing indicator.
•
•
When your phone rings, lift the handset or press the Speaker button to
answer the recall.
If you do not answer this recall within a pre-programmed period of time, it will
go to the system operator.
NOTE: The Led will flash amber during hold recall.
CONSULTATION HOLD
When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with another extension:
•
•
•
•
Press the Transfer button; you will receive transfer dial tone.Your call is placed
on transfer hold.
Dial the extension number.
Consult with the internal party.
Press Transfer to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call.
NOTE: Repeatedly pressing the Transfer button will toggle between the outside
party and internal extension. If necessary you may disconnect either one of the
parties by pressing the Func. soft button, then press the Cancel soft button.
RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT ANOTHER
STATION [HOLD PICKUP]
When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset, press the Line button with
the flashing indicator.
When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset, dial 12 plus the line
number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
43
Home Page
CALL TRANSFER
TRANSFER TO VOICE MAIL
Transfer is used to send any calls to another extension in one of two ways.You can
do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can
do a blind transfer without notification.
This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailbox.Your keyset must have
a correctly programmed VT button to accomplish this. To transfer a call directly to
a voice mailbox:
•
•
•
•
•
•
While on a call, press the Transfer button and dial an extension number or
group number. Your call is automatically put on transfer hold—OR—press a
DSS button or station group button. Your call is automatically put on transfer
hold.
Hang up when you hear ringing (this is an unscreened or blind transfer)—
OR—wait for the called party to answer and advise him/her of the call and
hang up. If the transfer is refused, you will be reconnected to the outside line
when the called station hangs up or you can press Transfer to return to the
outside party.
If you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the first
station to hang up, simply press another DSS button—OR—press the Call
button or C.O. line button to return to the outside party and begin the transfer process again.
When you are transferring a call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto
Answer, the transferred call will always ring.
NOTES:
1. After the inside party answers, you may alternate back and forth between the
parties by pressing the Transfer button.
2. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to receive another call. Press Transfer to return to the other party.
3. You cannot transfer an Intercom call by pressing a DSS button.You must press
the Transfer button and dial the destination extension number.
TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON
When you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal,
you may camp the call on to this station. Simply hang up when you hear the busy
signal. The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them.
NOTE: If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to
receive another call. Press Transfer to return to the outside caller.
CALL WAITING
If an outside call has been camped-on to your phone or another station has
camped-on to you:
•
•
•
You will hear a tone in the earpiece and the call that is waiting for you
(camped-on) will flash. In addition the bottom line of the display will indicate
the number of the station or trunk party camped-on.
Press the flashing button to answer; your other call will go on hold automatically if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press
Hold and then the flashing button—OR—finish the first call and hang up; the
waiting call will ring.
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer.
NOTE: Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.When using the speakerphone
the camp-on tone will come through the speaker.
CALL FORWARD OPTIONS
A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations. Call
forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display features. To review or change call forward options:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
44
While on a call, press the VT button and dial the mailbox number.
Hang up when dialing is completed.
Press the Menu button, scroll to Settings, press the OK button.
Scroll to Call Forward and press the OK button.
Scroll to the desired Forwarding option, enter the destination extension, and
press the Save soft button.
—OR—
Press Transfer 102.
Dial 0-5 to select the forward type (e.g., 1)—OR—
Press Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] to select the forward type
Press the right soft key to move the cursor.
Dial the destination number (e.g., 202)—OR—
Press Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] to select the destination and press
the Right soft key to move the cursor.
Dial 1 to set—OR—press Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] to select Yes or
No and press Transfer to store and exit.
—OR—
45
Home Page
To Forward ALL Calls to Another Station
GROUP CALL PICKUP
•
•
To pick up (answer) a call ringing in any pickup group, lift the handset and dial 66
plus the desired group number (01-10 on the OfficeServ 7030, 01-20 on the
OfficeServ 7200-S, 01-99, and 01-99 on the OfficeServ 7000 Series) or press the
flashing Group Pickup button if available.
Dial 601 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To Forward Calls to Another Station when you are on the Phone (BUSY):
•
•
Dial 602 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To Forward Calls to Another Station when you DO NOT ANSWER:
•
•
Dial 603 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
When you have both Forward ON BUSY and Forward NO ANSWER
Destination Programmed:
•
•
You can activate them simultaneously.
Dial 604. Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To Forward Calls when DND is Activated:
•
•
Dial 605 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To Forward Calls to the Station Where You Currently Are
(FORWARD FOLLOW ME):
•
•
Dial 606 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
NOTES:
1. A group pickup button can have an extender for a specific pickup group.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing the access code.
MY GROUP PICKUP
If desired, a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same
pickup group as you are in. Like “66” above except you do not need to dial the
desired group number. See your installation company for the assigned access
code. MY GROUP PICKUP: __________________.
PRIVACY RELEASE
This feature will allow another station to join in our conversation by releasing privacy on the C.O. from your phone.
To Release Privacy: While you are talking on a C.O. line and you wish to have other
internal parties (or up to three) join the conversation.
•
To clear all call forward conditions set at your station lift the handset and dial 600.
STATION CALL PICKUP
To pick up (answer) a call ringing at another station, lift the handset and dial 65 plus
the extension number of the ringing phone. If you have a DP (Direct Pickup) key
assigned with a station number, you only need to press this DP key with the flashing
light to answer this ringing station. NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned
off, you must first lift the handset or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
46
Press the PRB button (the PRB indicator will be steady). Inform the other party
that he/she may now join the conversation.
After the other party (or parties) has joined the conversation and you wish to
return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation, press the
PRB button a second time, the PRB button LED will be off.
To Join a Non-Private Conversation: When someone has informed you that you
can join a conversation:
•
•
Press the C.O. line button that he/she has indicated—OR—
Dial the C.O. line number that he/she has indicated.
47
Home Page
DIALING FEATURES
All “DIALING FEATURES” instructions are written to support Overlap Dialing mode.
This is the technical name for dialing from a telephone as it has been for many
years. In recent years the cell phone industry has changed the cell phones to use
Enblock Dialing. With this dialing mode all the digits are dialed and then sent to
the carrier after pressing the CALL key. Please check your telephone setup to confirm what dialing mode is used.
For the purposes of programming
speed dial numbers, the programmable buttons are know as A, B, C, D, E,
and F.
•
•
•
•
SPEED DIALING
You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system-wide
speed dial list of numbers 500–999 or from your personal list of numbers 00–49.
Your system may be set for 950 system wide numbers. If so the system speed dial
access codes are 050~999 and the station speed dial codes are 000~049.
•
•
•
From the idle screen with the handset on-hook, press the AOM soft button,
scroll to the Speed Dial button, press the OK button or dial 16.
Dial the desired speed dial number.
The telephone number is automatically dialed for you.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED
DIAL NUMBERS
You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial
list. A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers, 00–49. See your system administrator to determine the amount assigned to your station. The phone itself maintains 1000 station speed dial numbers.
•
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 105.
Dial a speed dial number (00–49).
Dial a line or line group access code.
Dial the telephone number to be stored (24 digits maximum). It can include #,
,, FLASH and PAUSE.
Press Transfer to store the number.
•
•
•
(Flash) A
(Pause) B
(Conversion) C
(Hide) D
The A button is not used.
(Name) E
The B button inserts a flash.
The C button inserts a pause.
(Clear)
The D button is used for pulse to
tone conversion. If your system
uses rotary (or pulse) dialing C.O.
lines, pressing D while entering a
speed dial number causes all subsequent digits to be sent as DTMF
tones.
The E button is used to hide digits. Display keyset users may want to hide
some speed dial numbers so that they will not show in the display. When you
are entering a telephone number, press E. All subsequent digits will be hidden. Press E again to begin displaying digits.
The F button is used to enter a speed dial name or number. See Personal Speed
Dial Names under Display Features.
Use the Hold button to clear a speed dial number.
DIRECTORY DIALING
•
•
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Directory, press OK.
Press Func. soft button, scroll to the desired directory, press OK.
STATION DIRECTORY - Accesses Station name directory.
PERSONAL DIRECTORY - Accesses your personal speed dial name list.
SYSTEM DIRECTORY - Accesses System speed dial name list.
•
•
•
•
Enter the first letter of the desired party.
Press the +/- buttons to scroll to the desired entry.
Press the Func. soft button.
Select the appropriate operation, press OK.
DIAL - Dials the displayed number.
EXIT - Exit programming and return to idle screen.
PREVIOUS - Moves you to the previous entry.
NEXT - Moves you to the next entry.
•
Press Back to return to idle screen.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker key before you begin dialing.
48
49
Home Page
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
PAGING AND MESSAGING
To redial the last outgoing telephone number you dialed, press the Func. soft button, scroll to Last Redial, or dial 19.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
2. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL
To save the number you just dialed for later use, press the Save/Repeat button
before hanging up.
To redial this saved number at any time, press the Func. soft button, scroll to
Save/Repeat, press OK button or dial 17. The same line will be selected for you.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
2. The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another
number.
3. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
AUTOMATIC REDIAL/RETRY
When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal, the system can
automatically redial the number for you. It will automatically redial at a pre-programmed interval for up to 15 attempts.
•
•
•
When you hear a busy signal, press the Retry button.
The system will reserve the line and automatically redial the same number for
you. You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker. The microphone is muted.
When the called party answers, lift the handset or press the flashing Speaker
to begin speaking.
NOTES:
1. If you make another call, auto-redial is canceled.
2. To cancel an auto-retry, lift and replace the handset.
PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER
When making an outside call on a dial pulse line, press #. All digits dialed after the
# will be sent as tones.
50
MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE
To make an announcement through the keyset speakers in the idle condition:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Page button, press OK or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
NOTES:
1. If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press Page
and dial a zone number.
2. If allowed by your system administrator you may be able to initiate a page
from a speakerphone by pressing the Page key or dialing 55 without lifting
the handset.
MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE
To make an announcement through the external paging speakers:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Page button, press OK or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 5, 6, 7 or 8—OR—dial 9 to page all external
zones.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
NOTES:
1. If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press Page
and dial a zone number.
2. If allowed by your system administrator you may be able to initiate a page
from a speakerphone by pressing the Page key or dialing 55 without lifting
the handset.
ALL PAGE
To page all designated keysets in internal zone 0 and all external zones at the same
time:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Page button, press OK or dial 55.
Dial , or press the All Page button.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
51
Home Page
NOTES:
1. The LED on the Page button will only light when an All Page is in progress.
2. If allowed by your system administrator you may be able to initiate a page
from a speakerphone by pressing the Page key or dialing 55 without lifting
the handset.
MEET ME PAGE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the Meet Me Page (MMPG) button or dial 54.
Dial the desired zone number (0~9).
After the attention tone, instruct the paged person to dial 56.
Press Func. soft button, then Answer Wait, then OK button.
Remain off-hook until the person dials 56 from any phone.
The paged person will be automatically connected with you.
CALL PARK AND PAGE
When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his/her desk, you can
park the call prior to paging. The OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ
7000 Series systems offer two different methods:
AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE BUTTON
•
•
•
While in conversation, press the Page button. The call is automatically parked
at your station.
Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number.
Make announcement indicating your extension number or the line number.
Hang up.
To retrieve an automatically parked call:
•
Dial 10 plus the number that was announced. If you have a PAGPK button,
press it and dial the number that was announced. If you have a Park button,
press it and dial the announced orbit number.
•
You will be connected to the parked call.
NOTES:
1. If the call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it will recall
your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park and page
intercom calls.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
MANUAL PARK ORBITS
SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION
•
•
When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy
signal, you can leave a message indication:
•
•
•
While in conversation, press the Park button.
Entered a desired orbit number (0-9), if the orbit number is busy dial another
orbit number. Display users can press , to automatically place the call in any
available orbit number and see the number in the display.
Remember the selected orbit number.
Replace the handset when finished.
Lift the handset and make a page announcement as previously described
(example:“John Smith park two”).
To retrieve a parked call from orbit:
•
•
Press the Park button and dial the announced orbit number (0-9).
You will be connected to the parked call.
NOTES:
1. You must have a Park button or park access code to retrieve and place calls in
park orbits.
2. If the parked call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it
will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park
and page intercom calls.
3. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
52
•
•
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Message, press OK—OR—dial 43 and
receive confirmation tone. Hang up.
The message button on the Main Programmable Button screen and the TSI
will flash red at the called station.
NOTES:
1. A station can have up to five message indications.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
CANCELING MESSAGES
To cancel a message indication that you left at another station, dial 42 plus the
extension number of the station at which you left a message.
To cancel all message indications left at your keyset, dial 42 plus your extension.
Your Message button indicator will stop flashing and the TSI will go out.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
53
Home Page
•
•
—OR—
Press Message button, scroll to Station Messages, press OK.
Press Func. soft button, scroll to Clear, press OK.
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
RETURNING MESSAGES
LOGGING IN AND OUT
•
If enabled, your SMT-i5220 telephone may require you to log in before making or
receiving calls. In these cases your telephone system administrator will provide
you with an extension number, password, and the feature code used to log out.
•
•
Press Menu, scroll to Message, press OK, scroll to Station Message, press OK,
press Func. soft button, press Reply, and then press OK, or dial 43. The first
station that left a message will be called automatically. If that station does not
answer, the called station Message button indicator will continue to flash and
the TSI will stay on.
Repeat until all messages have been returned in the order received.
Your Message button indicator will stop flashing and the TSI will turn off
when all messages have been returned.
NOTES:
1. Display keyset users can view message indications and return them in any
order. See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
3. If a message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer, you must
manually cancel the message after it has been returned.
To log in:
•
•
•
To log out:
•
Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset.
•
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you can leave a
programmed station message. Display stations calling you will see this message
and be informed of your status or follow your instructions.
•
•
•
Dial 48 plus any of the message codes (01–20) listed on the back of this user
guide.
To cancel any of these messages you might have selected, dial 48 plus 00.
Press Transfer to exit and store your selection.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button.
You can have multiple programmed message buttons (PMSG) and each one can
have a different message code:
•
•
54
Press any programmed message (PMSG) button. The message is set and the
PGM MSG button indicator will be lit steady. Press the button again to turn off
the programmed message and the indicator will go blank.
Pressing another programmed message (PMSG) button will turn the previous
one off and set a different programmed message.
Dial the feature code provided by your administrator (for example 77).
DO NOT DISTURB
PROGRAMMED MESSAGES
•
At Extension Login Screen enter your ID which is your extension number.
Scroll down to the password field and enter your station password
Press on Save soft button or OK button.
While on-hook, press the Func. soft button, scroll to DND, press OK, press 1 to
turn it ON, or dial 401. The DND button indicator will be lit steady to remind
you of this mode.
To cancel DND, press the Func. soft button, scroll to DND, press OK, press 0 to
turn it OFF, or dial 400. The DND button indicator goes blank. You can make
calls while in the DND mode.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button.
2. If you place your keyset in DND mode and you do not have a DND button,
your Telephone Status Indicator button will fast flash red to indicate DND
status.
3. The Selector Switch can also be used to set DND.
ONE TIME DND
If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call, you
can press the DND button and place your station in Do Not Disturb. When you
hang up at the end of the call, DND will be automatically canceled and your keyset will be able to receive new calls. This feature requires a DND button.
55
Home Page
MUTE
You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversation:
•
•
Press the Mute button. The Mute button indicator will be lit steady.
To resume speaking, press the Mute button again. The Mute button indicator
goes blank.
BACKGROUND MUSIC
When a music source is supplied, you may listen to music through the speaker in
your keyset:
•
•
While on-hook, press the Hold button to hear music.
Press the Hold button again to turn music off.
You can set the level of background music by using the Volume buttons while listening to the music. This does not affect the speakerphone level.
ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP
To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to
a computer modem on your PC.
•
•
Press the EP button for that station on your keyset and the call is automatically moved to your keyset.
The single line extension on your modem will be disconnected.
NOTE: You must have an assigned (EP button) button on your regular keyset, for
the single line station.
ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE
When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone:
•
•
•
You will receive three short rings repeated.
Lift the handset. You are connected to the door phone.
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
CALLING THE DOOR PHONE/
ROOM MONITOR
You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in
another room.
•
•
•
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button.
EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY [HOT LINE]
If programmed, an executive boss and a secretary can have a hot line between
them. When the executive station is in the DND mode, all of its calls will ring the
secretary station. If the secretary does not answer, the caller will go to the secretary’s voice mail box if setup.
When an Executive/Secretary hotline is programmed to this keyset, the keyset
offers an additional screen option. This screen has options for setting the status of
the keyset user. This status update is viewable to EasySet users only.
•
•
Either person can press the Boss button to make a voice call to the other station.
Using the hot line will override DND at the other station.This button will have
a flashing indication when the other station is in use.
To transfer a call to a Boss in DND:
•
•
Press the Boss button.
Wait for the Boss to answer, then announce the call and hang up to complete
the transfer—OR—hang up to complete a blind transfer.
Executive/Secretary (Messaging):
When the Boss or Secretary is needing to inform the other party of their current
status, they can send a message to their display.
•
•
•
•
•
56
Dial the extension number of the door phone.
You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have a conversation.
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
Press the Func. soft button. Scroll to EXE/SECR MSG and press OK.
Select and hightlight one of the Return On messages and press the Edit soft
button.
Press and hold the Delete soft button to erase the default message.
Using the dial pad, type in the new message (refer to Text Input Method).
When finished press the Save then the Send soft button to display the message on the other (Boss/Secretary) phone.
57
Home Page
GROUP LISTENING
LOCKING YOUR KEYSET
When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset, you may want
other people to hear the distant party’s voice over the speaker:
You can lock your keyset to control misuse of your phone while you are away. You
can unlock it when you return.
•
•
•
Press the Listen button to turn on the speaker. The microphone is not in use,
so the distant party does not hear other parties present in your office.
Press Listen again to turn the speaker off and resume private conversation.
Repeat if necessary.
•
•
•
•
CHANGE PASSWORD: This can be used to change the station password.
NOTE: Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office, it may be
advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up. This will eliminate a momentary squeal.
DIAL: Allows the station user the option to select Lock All, Lock Outgoing, or
Unlocked.
1. UNLOCKED - No restrictions. User may complete internal and outside
calls.
2. LOCK OUTGOING - Restricted to incoming calls only. No outside calls can
be made. When 911 is programmed, 911 emergency dialing is allowed.
3. LOCK ALL - No calls, incoming or outgoing allowed to or from the set.
ACCOUNT CODES
When enabled, your system allows calls to be charged to different accounts. You
can enter account codes either by dialing the full code, by entering an account
code “bin number”, or by pressing your ACC (Account) key if one is assigned. Bin
numbers are a 3 digit short code that will automatically insert the appropriate
account code. Account codes may be a maximum of 12 digits (# may be used); if
the account code is to be less than 12 characters you may end the code by pressing , or the right soft key.The type of code used is determined by your telephone
system administrator. Codes can be entered before or during a call as follows:
•
•
•
To enter an account code before placing the call:
•
•
•
•
Press your ACC (Account) key or dial 47.
Dial the account code or bin number.
You will receive a confirmation tone and display.
When prompted dial a trunk or trunk group (i.e. 9) and the telephone number
to call.
To enter an account code by interrupting the conversation:
•
•
While on an outside call press the ACC (Account) key or press Transfer followed by 47.
Dial the account number or bin number (if you are entering an account code
you will need to press your ACC (Account) key or right soft key to finalize the
entry)
NOTE: If you make an error simply repeat the procedure with the correct code.
Only the most recent account code dialed will be recorded.
58
Press Menu button, scroll to Phone, press OK.
Scroll to Security option. Press OK.
Enter the Password [Default Password is “1234”]. Press OK.
There are three options available:
PHONE MODE: Allows the user to lock or unlock the menu from being
changed at the station.
Use the navigation soft button to scroll Left/Right to choose the desired
mode.
Press the OK button.
Press the Back soft button to return to Menu, and press Back soft button
again to return to idle screen.
MANUAL SIGNALLING
Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another station, regardless of the status of your phone (on-hook, off-hook, handsfree, DND, or
ringing).
To send a signal to another station:
•
•
Press the Manual Signalling (MS) button.
You may press the MS button repeatedly to send multiple signals to the designated station.
NOTE:Your phone must have a Manual Signalling (MS) button with a station number extender assigned to it. Manual Signalling will override DND.
59
Home Page
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
IN GROUP/OUT OF GROUP
Keysets may receive a voice announcement while on another call. The calling station must have an OHVA button. When you are in DND, you cannot receive OHVA
calls. The OHVA feature will work with intercom and transferred calls.
If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group, you can remove your keyset from
the group and then put it back in. While you are out of the group, you can receive
calls to your extension number but not calls to the group number. If you have an
IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button with the group number assigned.
When you receive an OHVA and secure OHVA is ON, you will hear the announcement in the handset receiver, if you are using the handset. If secure OHVA is OFF
then you will hear the announcement on the speaker, if you are talking on the
handset. If you are using the speakerphone the announcement will always be
heard through the speaker.
•
•
Press the IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button. The button indicator will be lit steady
when your keyset is in the group.
Press the IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button again to exit the group and the indicator will go blank. Repeat as necessary.
To make an off-hook voice announcement:
If you do not have an IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Dial the extension number or press the DSS button.
When you receive a busy signal, press the OHVA button.
After the attention tone, begin speaking.
Finish the call by replacing the handset.
Press the flashing Call button on your keyset. This will place the original party
on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party.
To return to your first party, press the button corresponding to your original
call. This will disconnect the OHVA call.
Dial the IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) access code number ________________, then
the group number, then 0 to exit the group or 1 to enter the group.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press Speaker button.
The IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button can include an extender to indicate the specific group that this button will affect. This means that if you are in multiple groups,
you can decide for which groups you will receive calls.
NOTES:
1. When you are voice announcing to a station close to you, use the handset to
avoid an echo effect.
2. You cannot off-hook voice announce to single line telephones.
OHVA BLOCK
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Block (Block) button. Pressing this
button will prevent anyone from making an OHVA to you until you press the button again and cancel the blocking.
OHVA REJECT
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject (Reject) button. Pressing
this button while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing
party and return you to your original call.
60
61
Home Page
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET
•
•
Redial the new passcode. If successful, you will hear two beeps. Four beeps
indicate an incorrect code to confirm, reenter the code again.
Press Transfer to store the new passcode.
AME PASSWORD
SET ANSWER MODE (INTERCOM)
This feature allows customers using the AME feature to enable password protection. This will prevent unauthorized users from listening to your messages being
left. The passcode is the same as your station passcode. This feature only applies if
there is a Samsung Voicemail card installed in the system and your keyset has a
programmed AME button.
You can receive internal calls in one of three modes (see Answering Intercom Calls
under Intercom Calls for descriptions).
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSCODE or 100 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
AUTO CAMP-ON
This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on, if possible, when
a busy station is called.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 081 to turn CAMP-ON on or 080 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
SELECT RING TONE
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 103.
Dial 0 for Ringing, 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
NOTE: When your keyset is programmed for Voice Announce and you have Forward No Answer (FNA) turned on, you must answer screened transfers by pressing
the OK button before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward.
SET ANSWER MODE (CO)
Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom answer mode.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO.
Press the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] key to change status (On/Off).
Press Transfer to store your selection.
Each SMT-i5220 user can select from a variety of ring tones.
AUTOMATIC HOLD
From the LCD:
While on an outside call, pressing a line button, route button or a flashing Call button will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call. This
feature can be turned on or off at your keyset.
•
•
•
•
•
Press Menu button, scroll to Phone, press OK.
Scroll to Sound option and press OK.
Select Ring Tone and press OK—OR—you may dial 1 and immediately enter
the option.
Use Navigation button to scroll through the available ring tones and press
OK or Save soft button to store your selection.
Press End soft button to return to idle screen.
CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE
From the factory, your station passcode is 1234.You can change your station passcode whenever you desire.
•
•
•
62
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 101.
Dial your old passcode.
Dial a new passcode (must be four characters). You can use 0–9.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
HEADSET OPERATION
Keyset users can switch between headset mode and handset mode. When using
headset mode, press the Speaker button to answer and Speaker button to
release calls.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 021 to use the headset or 020 to use the handset.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
Your keyset is equipped with a Headset button. Pressing this button while the
indicator is off will cause the keyset to enter headset mode and the button indica63
Home Page
tor to be lit solid to indicate this. Pressing the button while the button indicator is
lit solid will cause the keyset to return to handset mode and the button indicator
will go off.
NOTE: If you need to switch between headset mode and handset mode (or speaker phone) during a conversation, you will need to put the call on hold first.
HOT KEYPAD
On your phone system your keyset’s keypad can be made “live” or “hot” so that it is
not necessary to lift the handset or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing. Calls can be made and features activated by simply dialing the C.O. line number, trunk group access code, intercom number or feature access code.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
KEY CONFIRMATION TONE
You can hear a short beep (confirmation tone) each time you press a button on the
dial pad. This tone can be turned on or off.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 040 to turn tones off or 041 to turn tones on.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
Additional ring tones can be selected from the Menu, Phone, Sound,
Keytone option.
REJOINING A PAGE
This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page
after you return your keyset to idle. To enable this feature:
•
•
•
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
—OR—
Press the Menu button, scroll to Phone, press OK.
Scroll to Sound and press OK, scroll to Keytone, and press OK.
Using the Navigation button scroll to Select New Ring Tone, press Save soft
button.
RING PREFERENCE
This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset or press
the Speaker button.This method will always answer calls in the order they arrived
at your keyset.When you turn ring preference off, you must press the flashing button to answer a call, allowing you to answer calls in the order you choose.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 061 to turn ring preference on or 060 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME
This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as
it is dialed.
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
CALLER ID REVIEW ALL
This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls
sent to their stations.This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in, first out basis.
The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station but that
you did not answer. When reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the
person back. The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number.
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 121 to turn CID Review All on or 120 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
SECURE OHVA
This option allows you to receive OHVA (Over Head Voice Announce) calls via the
speaker while you are on the handset.
•
•
•
With your handset on hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 131 to turn SECURE OHVA ON or 130 to turn it OFF.
Press Transfer to savve your selection.
CONFIGURE MOBILE EXTENSIONS [MOBEX]
This feature allows you to configure options for any Mobile Extension (MOBEX)
ports that are assigned to you by your telephone system administrator. You can
turn a port on or off; set the telephone number for the port; or set the caller ID you
will be calling in from.The caller ID field has no effect unless you have been author-
64
65
Home Page
ized as an Executive MOBEX user. Check with your telephone system administrator
for further details on your specific system configuration.
DISPLAY FEATURES
To set the phone number a MOBEX port can reach you on:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press Transfer and then dial 126.
Dial your station pass code.
Dial the number of the port you wish to configure (1-5) (you may also use the
Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] keys to select a port and press the right
soft key to confirm).
Press Right soft button to move to telephone number.
Dial the number of a C.O. line or trunk group to use when making calls to this
MOBEX port.
Dial the phone number you can be reached at by users calling this MOBEX
port.
Press Transfer to store your selection and exit programming.
DIRECTORY INFORMATION
An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number.
Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before answering.
Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name. Incoming calls can be
easily identified and answered with different greetings.
Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display [CALL FOR xxx]
where xxx is the station group number. This allows you to answer calls directed to
you differently than calls directed to your group.
To set the caller ID of the location you will be calling in from:
DISPLAY NUMBER DIALED
•
•
•
Display keysets begin showing digits as they are dialed. They will stay in the display until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the Timer button is
pressed. If the call duration timer is not used, the number dialed will be displayed
until the call is released, transferred or put on hold.
•
•
•
Press Transfer and then dial 126.
Dial your station pass code.
Dial the number of the port you wish to configure (1-5) (you may also use the
Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] keys to select a port and press the Right
soft key to confirm).
Press Right soft button twice.
Dial the contact number.
Press Transfer to store your selection and exit programming.
To turn a MOBEX port ON or OFF:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press Transfer and then dial 126.
Dial your station pass code.
Dial the number of the port you wish to configure (1-5) (you may also use the
Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] keys to select a port and press the right
soft key to confirm).
Dial 2 to select the activation status option.
Dial 0 to turn the port on, dial 1 to turn the port off.
Press Transfer to store your selection and exit programming.
CALL DURATION TIMER
The system can be set to automatically time outside calls. A few seconds after you
dial a telephone number, the timer appears in the display. It appears immediately
for incoming calls. The call timer continues for the duration of the call. Call duration times are displayed in minutes and seconds. If a call lasts longer than 60 minutes, the timer restarts.
You can press the Timer button to manually begin timing a call. Press it again to
stop timing. If you press it while the automatic timer is on, the call duration time is
restarted.
AUTO TIMER
Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer
incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call.
•
•
•
66
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 119.
Dial 41 to turn the auto timer on or 40 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
67
Home Page
TIMER FUNCTION
•
Display keyset users may use this feature as a simple stopwatch.
•
•
•
•
•
MANAGING PROGRAMMABLE
KEY ASSIGNMENTS
When the keyset is idle, press the Timer button to start timing.
Press the Timer button again to stop timing.
Read the elapsed time in the display.
Lift the handset and replace it. The display will return to date and time.
VIEWING STATION MESSAGE INDICATIONS
You can view all of your message indications before you return them:
•
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press the Message button with the flashing indicator.
The first station that left a message indication will be displayed.
Press the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] keys to scroll through the stations that left message indications. Use the soft keys to reply, clear or advance
to the next message.
Press the End button to return your keyset to the idle condition.
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES
Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it.
This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory.
•
•
•
•
•
Press Transfer and then dial 106.
Dial the speed dial bin number 00–49.
Using the dial pad, enter the station name (See Station Names).
Press the Transfer button to store the speed dial name.
Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary.
NOTE: Use the Navigation button to move the cursor left or right, and use the
Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] buttons to increment the speed dial bins.
See Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers Section.
STATION NAMES
•
•
•
•
•
•
68
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 104.
Enter the Station Name. Use the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] buttons
to move cursor.
Press Transfer to store the name.
—OR—
Press Menu button, select Settings, press OK.
Select Application Set., press OK.
Select Phone Name, press OK.
Enter Station Name. Use the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] buttons to
move cursor.
Press Save soft button and then End soft button to store the name.
You can manage your key assignments for easy one touch operation of frequently used features.
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 107.
Use the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] buttons to scroll through all of
your programmable buttons.
Press Transfer to exit programming.
To program the programmable keys, press Menu, Settings, AOM Setting.
For example:
If you want to press a key that will direct calls to Joel at extension 3201. Select
an empty key and set the following:
•
•
•
Feature:
Ext. Number:
Display Name:
DSS
3201
Joel
If you want to press a key that will direct calls to Sue’s external phone number at
972-444-3456. Select an empty key and set the following:
•
•
•
•
Feature:
Speed
Ext. Number:
01
Display Name:
Sue
Use Transfer 105 to set speed dial number:
[xxxx] SPEED DIAL
01: 9-9724443456
Please consult your installation company to requested a complete list of descriptions for any keys you may have programmed on your keyset.
NOTE: Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender.
BACKSPACE WITH LCR
If you misdial while using LCR, you can delete digits shown in the display by pressing the Backspace soft key as many times as necessary or by pressing Clear to
delete all.
69
Home Page
CALLER ID
SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID DISPLAY
Simultaneous display of Caller ID name and number on incoming CO calls on both
lines of display keysets is supported on all OfficeServ systems. On Transferred CO
calls, you can decide if you want to see the Caller ID name or Caller ID number in
the display. Regardless of which data is selected, you can press the NND button to
view the other pieces of Caller ID information. To select the type of Caller ID information you wish to view:
•
•
•
•
•
•
70
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 119.
To set the first line of a ringing call display dial 0.
To set the second line of a ringing call display dial 1.
Set the data to display from the following:
- To show nothing dial 0.
- To show Caller ID Number dial 1.
- To show Caller ID Name dial 2.
- To show the DID Number the call came in on dial 3.
- To show the Name of the DID the call came in on dial 4.
- To show the Name of the Group the call came in for dial 5.
- To show the DID Number and then Name of the DID dial 6.
- To show the Name of the DID and then the DID Number dial 7.
To set the top line of the display shown after answering a call dial 2.
Set the data to display from the following:
- To show Caller ID Number dial 0.
- To show Caller ID Name dial 1.
- To show the DID Number the call came in on dial 2.
- To show the Name of the DID the call came in on dial 3.
- To show Caller ID Number and then the DID Number dial 4.
- To show Caller ID Name and then the DID Number dial 5.
- To show the DID Number and then the name of the DID dial 6.
- To show the Name of the DID and then the DID Number dial 7.
- To show the C.O. line information dial 8.
To set the format if the C.O. line information when the above is set to show C.O.
line information dial 3.
- To show the C.O. line number and the dialed or Caller ID Number dial 0.
- To show only the dialed or Caller ID Number dial 1.
Press Transfer to exit and store your selection.
VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL
In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped-on call at your keyset, you
can press the Next button to display the Caller ID information associated with the
call in queue at your keyset. Either the CID name or CID number will show in the
display depending on you Name/Number selection.
To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped-on to your keyset,
press the Next button.
INQUIRE CALLER ID PARK/HOLD INFO
If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you, you
may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call. This may influence
how you choose to handle the call.
From an idle keyset:
•
•
•
Press the Inquire button—OR—press CID button, then Func. soft button, and
the Inquire soft key.
Dial the trunk number.
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button—OR—you may use
Func. soft button and NND to view more information about this call—OR—
you can return to the idle condition by pressing Ignore.
If you are on a call:
•
•
•
Press the Func. soft button and then Inquire button. Your existing call will go
on hold—OR—press the CID button and Func. soft button then Inquire soft
button to place the first call on hold.
Dial the trunk number.
You may now answer the call by pressing the Func. soft button then the ANS
button—OR—you may use NND to view more information about this call—
OR—you can return to the idle condition by pressing the Func. soft button
and then Ignore.
NOTES:
1. If you are on an intercom call or you have Automatic Hold turned off, you must
finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring.
2. If you inquire about an outgoing call, you will receive a [call no longer available] display.
2. Your system must have LCR correctly programmed to allow you to Dial numbers from the review list or to Store entries from the review list.
71
Home Page
FEATURE ACCESS CODES
Paging Zones - Dial 55 plus
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Q
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
All External Zones
All Page
SECTION 6.
APPLICATIONS
Feature Access Codes
0
10 + xxx
12 + xxx
13
16 + xxx
17
18
19
400
401
42 + xxx
43
44
45
46
47
48 + xx
49
53 + xxx + 1
53 + xxx + 0
72
Operator
Pick Up A Parked Call
Pick Up a Held Call
Door Lock Release
Speed Dialing
Save And Redial Number
New Call (Recall)
Last Number Redial
Cancel Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
Cancel Sent Message
Return Message
Callback
Busy Station Camp-On
Conference
Account Code
Cancel Programmed MSG
Send Flash to C.O. or PBX
In Group
Out of Group
56
600
601 + xxx
602 + xxx
603 + xxx
604 + xxx
605 + xxx
606 + xxx
65 + xxx
66 + xx
67
Q
Meet Me Answer
Cancel All Call Forward
Set Forward All Calls
Set Forward Busy
Set Forward No Answer
Set Forward Busy/No Answer
Set Forward on DND
Set Forward Follow Me
Pick Up Ringing Extension
Pick Up Group
Universal Answer
Authorization Code
73
Home Page
Samsung Voicemail
This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a
Subscriber. A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the various
features and services available in the Samsung Voicemail. Please review this section carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Services, known as
Subscriber Services.
Voice Mail is one of the Subscriber Services available. Your voice mail box has the
capability of storing private messages, and offers a number of options for sending
or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new messages.
Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager. This allows you control over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your
callers in the event you are unable to speak to them directly. The ‘events’ are
referred to as “Call Conditions”. No-Answer, Busy, and Blocked are the most commonly used Call Conditions.
This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones
outside the office. The basic operation is the same, but the access method will be
different. See the Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more details.
Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all
Subscribers. See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature
availability.
ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX
[Also known as Subscriber Services Menu]
Inside Callers [Subscriber logging in from their Desk]
•
•
Dial the voicemail access number or press the key assigned to ring
voicemail [VMMSG].
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is 0000).
Outside Callers [Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the
office environment]
•
•
•
Dial the phone number that will be answered by the voicemail. The main
greeting will answer.
At the main greeting dial [#] plus your Subscriber (or mailbox) number
(Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number).
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is 0000).
Access your Subscriber Services (or Mailbox) from a Station
other than your Own (or checking a mailbox associated with a
different station)
•
•
•
Press the [VMMSG] key or dial the voicemail group number. You will be
prompted to enter a password.
Press [,]. This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu.
Press [#] plus the Subscriber number of your choice. You will be prompted to
enter you password.
At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions. You will
hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox.You will then
hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options:
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
,
Listen to New Messages - See Listening to your Message.
Record and Send Message - See Sending Messages.
Review Saved Messages - See Listening to your Message.
Access Manager - See Access Manager.
Personal Greetings - See Personal Greetings.
Mailbox Administration - See Mailbox Administration.
Personal Services - See Personal Services.
Return to Main Menu.
Voicemail and the Function Soft button: When accessing and retrieving voicemails from the mailbox, the service options such as (1) Listening to Messages, (2)
Record and Send Messages, and (3) Review Saved Messages are available and
can be accessed through the dial pad or through the Function soft key. When
pressing the function soft button the options will be displayed. Scroll to and press
the OK button to select an option from the Function Menu.
74
75
Home Page
Subscriber Services Menu
Group New
Messages
Group Saved
Messages
11
33
Listen to New Review Saved
Messages
Messages
Group Messages Menu
1
Group
Urgent Messages
2
Group
Callback Requests
3
Group
Reminders
4
Group
Private Messages
5
Group
Fax Only Messages
1
9
#
0
*
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Group
A Specific Sender
Play
Message Inventory
Play
Menu Options
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
Access
Manager
Personal
Greetings
Mailbox
Administration
Personal
Services
Pause, Resume
Play Menu
Options
Exit
2
4
5
6
#
8
0
*
3
Listen Menu
1
11
3
Discard
Message
4
Reply to Sender
5
Place
Call to Sender
Forward a
Copy of Message
7
Rewind
5 Seconds
9
99
#
##
##
To Create a
Reminder
1
Review
Recording
2
o
Stop, Append to
Recording
3
ding
Discard Recording
and Rerecord
4
Set
Delivery Options
ns
5
Specify
Future Delivery
6
SEND Message,,
Then Copy
7
Rewind
5 Seconds
Change
Playback Volume
Pause, Resume
Message Playback
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
Change
Playback Speed
Skip to
Next Message
Scan Messages
77
Change
Playback Volume
me
8
Pause, Resume
e
Record/Playback
ck
9
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
99
Change
Playback Speed
d
0
Play
Menu Options
#
SEND Message,,
Then Exit Record
rd
00
Play Message
Information
0
Play
Menu Options
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
*
1
Follow Me
For a Directory
of Subscribers
r"
"Enter the Recipient's Number"
Deliver Copy
of Fax Message
6
8
#
Play Previous
Message
Save
Message
77
Record Menu
Play
Message
2
55
8
Record & Send
Messages
1
Assign and/or Edit
Primary Greeting
1
Change
Message Alert
Aler
1
Review
Workload
2
Assign and/or Edit
Busy Greeting
2
Change
Pager Notification
Notific
2
Edit Stored
Telephone Numbers
3
Block All Calls
3
Assign and/or Edit
Blocking Greeting
3
Review Deleted
Delet
Me sages
Messages
3
Change
Weekly Schedule
1
Change
Password
4
Call forwarding
4
Assign and/or Edit
Night Greeting
4
Review Undelivered
Unde
Me sages
Messages
5
Place a
Direct Call
2
Record
Name
5
Call Screening
5
Assign and/or Edit
Screened Greeting
5
Auto Play
New Messages
Message
3
Enter Directory
Name
6
Find Me
6
Edit Only
Personal Greetings
6
Auto Play Me
Message
Information
7
Personal
Administration
4
Extended
Prompting
7
Auto Set
Night Intercept
7
Edit Only
Mailbox Greeting
8
Pause, Resume
Resum
Menu Prompting
Prompt
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
9
Record and Send
S
Broadcast Message
Me
0
Play
Menu Options
#
Play
Access Coverage
0
Play
Menu Options
0
Play
Menu Options
#
Record
a Reminder
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
0
Play
Menu Options
*
Cancel, Retur
Return
to Subscriber Services
0
Play
Menu Options
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
ervices
NOTE: All options shown MAY NOT be authorized. If an option is not available
please speak to your system administrator.
*Change Playback Speed and Volume not available on the OfficeServ 7030,
OfficeServ 7100, OfficeServ 7200-S or OfficeServ IP-UMS.
76
77
Home Page
GETTING STARTED
1 or 3
Using your new Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services is as simple as following a
few simple spoken instructions. First time users should read this section as a tutorial. You should start with the following steps:
LISTENING TO OLD OR NEW MESSAGES
•
1
Play / replay the message you just heard.
From the Subscriber Services Menu:
11
Play the previous message.
•
•
•
•
•
2
Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
3
Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
4
Reply to the message.
Access your Subscriber Services Menu - You already know how to do this.
Record a Primary/No-Answer Personal Greeting. Dial [5][1].
Record a Mailbox Greeting. Dial [5][7].
Change your access code (Password). Dial [#][7][1].
Record your name. Dial [#][7][2].
Enter your directory name. Dial [#][7][3].
After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and
ready to use.
LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES
This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender (if the
sender has a mailbox on this system).
5
This will work for internal and external callers, but Caller ID service is needed to use this feature on an outside call.
55
If there are new messages in your mailbox your [VMMSG] key will be lit. Call the
Samsung Voicemail by pressing this key, and when prompted enter your password. You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu. Select [1] to listen to new
messages or [3] to listen to saved messages.
Note: After you enter your password, if “Autoplay of New Messages” is enabled and
you have new messages the Samsung Voicemail will begin to play them automatically. A subscriber can control this feature. From the Subscriber Services Menu [6]
[5] toggles “Autoplay of New Messages” ON/OFF.
6
78
Forward the message and saves a copy.
The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailbox number (nnn), using
the directory service (#) or you may also add comments and leave it as a
memo to yourself (##).
The Send and Copy Service (option 6) allows a user to send copies of a message to multiple recipients easily. A different introduction message may be
left for each recipient.
The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu.
LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES
GROUP NEW MESSAGES
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES
GROUP OLD MESSAGES
ACCESS MANAGER
PERSONAL GREETINGS
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
PAUSE / RESUME
PLAY MENU OPTIONS
EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT
PERSONAL SERVICES
Deliver a fax copy.
This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document(s). Faxmail documents can be delivered to any fax machine of your choice as long as out
calling is authorized. You can also have faxmail messages automatically
delivered to the fax machine of your choice.
SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU
1
11
2
3
33
4
5
6
8
0
,
#
Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message.
7
Rewind the message 5 seconds.
77
Change playback volume of the recording. [Not available on the OS 7030,
OS 7100, OS 7200-S or OS IP-UMS]
There are two levels of volume during playback. Dialing this code will toggle between the two levels.
8
Pause or resume during message playback.
9
Fast forward the message 5 seconds.
99
Change playback speed of the recording. [Not available on OS 7030, OS
7100, OS 7200-S or OS IP-UMS]
There are two levels of speed during playback. Dialing this code will toggle
between the two speeds.
79
Home Page
Play options.
0
3
4
5
6
#
Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this
point.
Discard and Re-Record
Set Message Attributes (Delivery Options)
Schedule Future Delivery
Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else
Save and Send the Recording
00
Hear the time and date, and sender's information of the message you just
heard. Sender information is not available on outside calls.
#
Move to the next message. This does not Save or Discard the current message - it is retained as new.
Setting Message Attributes
##
Scan. Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message. This is
similar to the scan button on a radio. It will allow you to find a specific message quickly. To stop scanning press [1].
If after recording a message you select [4] you can set up any combination of the
following delivery options:
,
Cancel and return to previous menu.
11 or 33
GROUP NEW OR OLD MESSAGES
Messages can be grouped as either Reminders, press [3] or Messages from a specific sender, press [9].
Additionally you can press [#] and hear a summary of your mailbox contents:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Number of messages
Number of reminders
Number of urgent messages
Number of messages needing a callback
Number of private messages
Number of fax messages
1
2
3
4
5
,
Urgent Delivery
Return Receipt Requested
Request a Call Back
Private Delivery
Reply Required
Exit
Scheduling Future Delivery
If after recording a message you select [5] to schedule future delivery, you will be
able to set message attributes and set this message as:
#
1
2
3
4
5
,
Immediate Delivery
Next Few Hours
End of Current Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
Beginning of Next Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
A Coming Day of the Week
Specific Day / Time
Exit
2
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
This option is used to send a message to another subscriber. The steps are simple:
a)
Enter the recipient’s mailbox number, or if this is not known enter [#] to use
the system directory.
b) Record your message at the tone. After recording the message, you will hear
the Send Menu with the following functions:
1
2
80
Review
Continue Recording
81
Home Page
6
4
Find Me
Find Me, when enabled, will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list of
preprogrammed phone numbers. The stored phone numbers are entered in
'Personal Services' [#][2] (if allowed by the Administrator). The stored telephone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers.
The Find Me feature only use the first five.
ACCESS MANAGER
The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when,
where and how, and/or if the Samsung Voicemail contacts you when a caller dials
your extension number. All of the options are toggled on/off based on their current status when you access them.
7
Night Intercept
This feature is dependent on your weekly availability schedule, which is
entered in 'Personal Services' [#][3] (if allowed by the Administrator). When
Night Intercept is active the Samsung Voicemail will first ring your extension
then play your primary, No Answer greeting during the day (when you are
available) and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greeting during the night (when you are not available).
Note: ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed by the System
Administrator for each Subscriber. They are:
1
Follow Me
Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new
destination (Designated Location) will be active.This number may be an internal or external number. This is useful if you are frequently traveling or changing the number where you can be reached.
When Follow Me is activated, the transfer will be supervised and confirmed.
This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at
the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber’s mailbox.
3
Note: This does NOT use the Day and Night schedules of the phone system. It
is solely controlled by the Subscriber’s Availability Schedule.
8
Pause / Resume
,
Exit from Access Manager
0
Play All Options
#
Play Access Coverage
This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings are set. It
will also tell you what greetings will play under each of the call conditions you
have setup.
Call Blocking
When this feature is active, callers will not be transferred to your extension,
they will hear your 'blocked' greeting (if recorded) and will go directly to your
mailbox if they do not select any or are not offered any other options.
4
Call Forwarding
Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alternate
location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to another Subscriber. The “Forwarded To” Subscriber will now be in control of the
caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber’s Mailbox. If the
“Forwarded To” Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow what
ever the “Forwarded To” Subscriber has set up for their call conditions. The
Caller will hear “Forwarding to”“{Subscriber Name}” before actually being forwarded.
5
Call Screening
If this is turned on, the caller will be asked their name and the Samsung
Voicemail will play this name to you before the transfer, giving you an option
to accept or reject the call.
82
5
PERSONAL GREETINGS
The options available in this menu will be determined by your System
Administrator, and not all of them may be available to you. In the simplest systems,
only a mailbox greeting will be available, additional greetings may be accessible in
more complex systems.
Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension
and you do not answer.
You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings, and you may assign any one of them
to be active. There are several different 'Call Coverage' conditions to which you
may assign any of your 9 greetings. The Call Coverage Conditions are: No-Answer,
Busy, and Do Not Disturb (or Forwarded All). This will allow different greetings to
play depending on the type of call forward that you have set, or the condition of
your telephone.
83
Home Page
The Call Coverage conditions that you can assign specific greetings to are selected by the following digits:
1
5
Used while Call Screening is enabled, and you REJECT a caller after listening to
the caller's record name.
Primary/No Answer Greeting
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Screening' feature.
Used when in your office, away from your desk or during the time period you
are scheduled available. If this is the only Personal Greeting you record, it will
play for all call coverage conditions.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm sorry, but I am not available to speak with
you at this time. If someone else can help you, please enter the extension
number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Basic
Greeting' feature.
Example:“Hi this is John Smith. I'm sorry I am not available to answer your call.
If someone else can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to
leave me a message, press 1.”
2
6
Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your
greeting. When you are done recording your greeting, you will be able to listen to the greeting you recorded, save the greeting you recorded and return
to the previous menu, record the greeting again, or exit without saving the
greeting.
Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension
or the telephone at your Designated Location.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Busy
Greeting' feature.
3
Call Blocking Greeting
Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone
is forwarded ALL or DND.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Blocking' feature.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. Sorry I missed your call, but I'm going to be out
of the office for the next few hours. If someone else can help you, please enter
the extension number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
4
Night Greeting
Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE, usually after
business hours during the evening and at night.
Edit Personal Greetings
You may also edit/record each one of the greetings (1-9) at any time.
Busy Greeting
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm on another line right now. If someone else
can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave a message,
press 1.”
Call Screening Greeting
Note: If you record only the greeting assigned to the No-Answer Call Coverage
Condition, then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage
Conditions (No-Answer, Busy, Blocked, Night, and Rejected Caller). In this case,
the salutation part of the greeting should be very general.
7
Edit Mailbox Greeting
Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded any
of the Call Coverage greetings. The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox
greeting directly, is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mailbox using the VT (VoiceMail Transfer) key.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Mailbox
Greeting Option' feature.
Example: “Hi, this is John Smith. Please leave me a message, I will call you as
soon as I can.”
Note: This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has
played to the caller. A common usage for this Greeting is when another
Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to transfer the caller directly to your Mailbox.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the
'Scheduling' feature.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I've left the office for the evening. If you would
like to try someone else, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave
me a message, press 1.”
84
85
Home Page
3
6
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to
undelete any messages that you have recently deleted (up to the programmed Daily Maintenance Time, which is set to 3 a.m. by Default the following morning).
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notification, message alert options and other message control features.
1
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call any outside or
inside telephone number, after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
4
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [3] for Deleted Messages.
Undelivered Retrieval
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to recall
any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been picked up by the recipient.
Setting Up Message Alert:
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [4] for Undelivered Messages.
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
n
Press [1] for Message Alert.
n
There are 4 options available to you:
This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet
been picked up by the recipient.
Press [1] to toggle message alert on and off.
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be notified.
5
Press [4] to set the destination phone number.
Pager Notification
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call your beeper
service and notify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [2] for pager notification.
n
There are 4 options available to you:
Press [1] to toggle pager notification on and off.
Auto Play New Messages
If this option is enabled, after you enter your password correctly any new messages will immediately begin to play. To enable (or if already enabled toggle
and disable) this feature:
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
2
n
Deleted voice mail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a.m.
the following day. Select this option to recover ("undelete") previously deleted messages, during this period of time.
Message Alert
To hear your message at the remote location when the Samsung Voicemail
calls you, after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed
that there is a message and to enter your password. Simply enter your password and you will now be logged in.
Undelete
6
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [5] to Set Auto Play of New Messages.
Auto Play Message Information
If this option is enabled, the date, time and sender’s name will be played automatically before each message. If this is disabled, the information must be
requested manually by pressing ‘00’. To enable (or if already enabled toggle
and disable) this feature:
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be paged.
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
n
Press [6] to Set Auto Play of Message Information.
Press [4] to set the pager phone number.
86
87
Home Page
to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to
your callers. All other times you will be considered unavailable.
9
MESSAGE BROADCAST
5
Allows you to place a direct call out of the Samsung Voicemail from anywhere.
You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1-5 that corresponds to a
stored number (See Personal Services, 2 - Stored Numbers). This feature must
be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited or opened to
internal, local, and long distance calls.
This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System
Administrator.
Broadcast to All Mailboxes
If you have been designated as a Subscriber Administrator, you may send a
message to ALL mailboxes in the system.
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [9] for Broadcast Messages.
This option will only be available if your mailbox has been assigned
Subscriber Administration privileges.
7
PERSONAL SERVICES
This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings (see next
section).
PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS
1
The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your
name. Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator.
2
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][1].
n
The current password will be played and you will have the chance to
change it.
Recording your Name
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][2].
Stored Numbers
n
Allows you to enter up to 9 stored phone numbers. The first five of these are
used in the 'Find Me' feature, but any of them (1-9) can be easily dialed using
only one digit followed by the pound key, to be used by many other features
from within your subscriber space. (ie: “Follow Me, “Message Alert”, “Pager
Alert”, and “Direct Call”).
The current name will be played and you will have the chance to change
it.
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name and/or enter your
Directory Name (described below), you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
Schedule Availability
Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with Night Personal
Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature. Follow the spoken directions
88
n
Use this option to record your name. Your recorded name is played in several
different situations. It is important to record your name for proper operation
of the Samsung Voicemail system.
3
3
Setting your Password
Workload Management
Allows you to access to all reminders, both Active and Pending. If authorized
you can group your reminders as Commitments, Follow-Ups or Tasks for better organization. The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending
(pending means scheduled for future delivery).
2
Personal Administration
This menu allows you to make changes to basic setup settings, that are rarely
changed. Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings.
You probably will not need to change them after that.
#
1
Place a Direct Call
Entering your Directory Name
Use this option to enter your Directory Name. Your Directory Name is used by
callers to find you if they do not know your extension number.
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][3].
89
Home Page
n
The current Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are
equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad. Follow the
instructions to enter a new name.You will be prompted to enter your last
name and then your first name.
This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly.
4
To activate this feature press the AME button. The associated indicator will be lit
steady. Press again to turn off. If this key is pressed while a station is ringing (during forward no answer), the feature will be turned on for the current call only.
While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may:
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name (described above)
and/or enter your Directory Name, you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
n
Press [#] to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it.
n
Press [,] to immediately disconnect your station.The caller continues to leave
a message normally.
Extended Prompting
n
Pick up the handset and monitor privately.
Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the
subscriber interface (mailbox prompts). Change this setting only if you are
very familiar with the user operation of the SVMi E-Series.
n
Press ANS / RLS to answer the call (using the handset or speaker).
Note: Remember if you know what digits to press, you can enter them at any
time you do not have to wait to be prompted. This feature can be toggled
on/off at anytime. Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber
menu to press zero for more options. This enables you to still be able to find
out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled.
KEYSET USER FEATURES
AME Password
If your keyset has AME Password (MMC 110) set to Yes, you must enter your station password to listen to messages being left.This will prevent unauthorized people from listening to messages being left for you.
If the password option is turned on, while a message is being left, press the flashing AME indicator and enter your station password (not your SVMi E-Series password). You will then hear the message being left.
The following options are available if you have a display keyset.They require setup
by the System Administrator.
Call Record
Message Waiting Lights
If you have a call record button assigned to your phone, you may press it at any
time, to record the conversation in progress. If you have a display keyset, you will
also have the soft key options to pause and time the message.
When new messages are left in your mailbox, the voice mail message light on your
keyset will flash. Press this flashing key [VMMSG] and follow the prompts to
retrieve messages.This key may be pressed at any time to log into your Subscriber
Main Menu.
Answer Machine Emulation
If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset, you
can use it to monitor calls going to your voice mail, and optionally answer them.
The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering
machine.
Your keyset must be set to forward on no answer to voice mail. After ringing your
station the caller will be connected to your voice mail and hear your personal
greeting before leaving a message. During this time you will be monitoring the
connection between the caller and your voice mail box. At this time you will only
be monitoring the call, you can not talk to the other party until you answer. You
may pick up the call at any time or ignore it.
90
91
Home Page
SHORTCUTS
Calling
Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press [#] to immediately
send the call to the called parties mailbox.
1. E-MESSAGE DELIVERY: Voice mail messages (.wav) and/or fax mail messages
(.tiff ) are "delivered" to your Inbox with the appropriate attached file.
2. E-MESSAGE NOTIFICATION: You will receive an e-mail, with NO attachments,
notifying you that you have a voice and/or fax mail message in your Voice Mail
Box.
•
Call Divert to Voicemail
•
While receiving an incoming (ringing) call, dial [,] to immediately send the caller
to your personal voicemail box. This will override the call forward no answer setting.
Direct Messaging
[#] + DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without having to dial their extension number first, keyset users may simply dial [#] plus a
mailbox (extension) number and leave a message directly. If you dial a busy extension press [#] to connect directly with the mailbox.
•
Functionality
•
Self Memo (Reminder)
•
Pressing [##] will leave a message in your own mailbox. This is useful to remind
yourself of things to do now or in the future. Messages can be sent with future
delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due.
•
With either type of EMG, when Caller ID (CID) is provided, the callers telephone number will appear in the subject field of the email along with the date
and time stamp of when the voice message was originally recorded in your
Voice Mail Box.
If the caller is also a subscriber on the system and the E-Mail Gateway is set up
with a valid "Reply To" address, the Subscriber's name will also appear in the
"From" field. Otherwise, the "From" field will display the name of the Samsung
voice mail system (SVMi-8E, SVMi-16E, or SVMi-20E) sending the message.
Client will use their PC's Multi-Media kit (equipped with either speakers
and/or a headset) to listen to messages delivered to their e-mail Inbox.
INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS
IMPORTANT NOTE: If the PC/Laptop/PDA/Smart Phone/etc… is not
equipped with hardware and software capable of playing a '.WAV' file then
the E-Mail Gateway will not work for them until they add some method to
listen to '.WAV' files delivered to their Inbox.
Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays
to play, save, delete, reply, call, forward, rewind, pause, fast forward, change the volume, get message information, or help.
The same applies to Fax Mail messages, if the device the subscriber is using
does not support the viewing of '.TIFF' files, then the E-Mail Gateway for
Fax Mail will not work for them until they add some method to view .tiff
files delivered to their inbox.
Viewing Mailbox Contents
If you have new messages, in addition to the Terminal Status Indicator (TSI) you
will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the SVMi
E-Series.
•
No Synchronization of messages is performed between the Voice Mail Box
and the E-mail Inbox.
E-MAIL GATEWAY (EMG)
-
The E-Mail Gateway feature integrates your voice mail box with your email client.
No matter what email client software you are using or where you use it, you can
send voice mail messages and fax mail messages to your E-Mail inbox.
-
There are two parts to the E-Mail Gateway; E-Message Delivery and E-Message
Notification.
92
As a subscriber you can use either E-Message Delivery and/or E-Message
Notification.
As a subscriber you can have multiple e-mail addresses. (a maximum of 5
valid email addresses).
E-Message Notification can be set to one e-mail address while E-Message
Delivery is set to different e-mail address.
Messages listened to, forwarded, deleted, and/or saved within an e-mail
inbox will NOT effect the status of that same new message in the Voice
Mail or the MWI (Message Waiting Indicator) associated with that message on the phone.
Also messages listened to in the Voice Mail, from a phone, will not change
the Unread/Read status of the same message in an e-mail inbox.
93
Home Page
-
•
However, the Voice Mail Administrator can adjust parameters per subscriber or group of subscribers that decide how, when, or if to delete the
original voice message after it is sent to the E-Mail Server.
When full synchronization of messages between Voicemail Box and E-mail
Inbox is required, ask your Samsung representative about the OfficeServ IPUMS. This is an Internet Protocol based fully synchronized Unified Messaging
System.
Benefits
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Store and Archive Voice and Fax Mail Messages in visible folders.
Voice and Fax Mail Messages can now easily be dragged and dropped into
folders the same way e-mail messages are organized and saved.
Voice and Fax Mail Messages are now essentially the same as any other e-mail
message.
Backups and Message Archives can be made when they are made for all other
types of e-mail messages.
Add text notes and comments to use for reference later.
Some (if not all) e-mail clients will allow you to edit the body of the e-mail to
add comments.
Some will allow you to edit the subject field to help you find a particular message quickly in a large archive of messages.
Call Back Numbers and Date & Time Stamp are easily displayed in the Subject
field.
Easily forward Voice messages received, to others even if they are not a Voice
Mail Subscriber on your system.
No EMG System or Client Software to load on your Local PC or Network
Servers.
Therefore compatible with most:
-
E-Mail providers and E-Mail Clients
-
PCs, Laptops, PDA, and/or Smartphones
NOTE: If you are not sure you have this functionality on your system and
you would like to use it, please contact your on Site system administrator
to see if it is available.
94
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
00
_________________________
_________________________
01
_________________________
_________________________
02
_________________________
_________________________
03
_________________________
_________________________
04
_________________________
_________________________
05
_________________________
_________________________
06
_________________________
_________________________
07
_________________________
_________________________
08
_________________________
_________________________
09
_________________________
_________________________
10
_________________________
_________________________
11
_________________________
_________________________
12
_________________________
_________________________
13
_________________________
_________________________
14
_________________________
_________________________
15
_________________________
_________________________
16
_________________________
_________________________
17
_________________________
_________________________
18
_________________________
_________________________
19
_________________________
_________________________
20
_________________________
_________________________
21
_________________________
_________________________
22
_________________________
_________________________
23
_________________________
_________________________
24
_________________________
_________________________
95
Home Page
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
25
_________________________
_________________________
26
_________________________
_________________________
27
_________________________
_________________________
28
_________________________
_________________________
29
_________________________
_________________________
30
_________________________
_________________________
31
_________________________
_________________________
32
_________________________
_________________________
33
_________________________
_________________________
34
_________________________
_________________________
35
_________________________
_________________________
36
_________________________
_________________________
37
_________________________
_________________________
38
_________________________
_________________________
39
_________________________
_________________________
40
_________________________
_________________________
41
_________________________
_________________________
42
_________________________
_________________________
43
_________________________
_________________________
44
_________________________
_________________________
45
_________________________
_________________________
46
_________________________
_________________________
47
_________________________
_________________________
48
_________________________
_________________________
49
_________________________
_________________________
96
Home Page
SMT-i5210
Keyset User Guide
For OfficeServ™ 7000 Series Systems
05/2010
Home Page
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS BOOK ......................................................................................................1
SECTION 1. CAUTION AND PREPARATION ....................................2
CAUTION ..............................................................................................................................3
PREPARATION ..................................................................................................................4
Check the Contents of the Box ................................................................................4
Phone Installation ......................................................................................................4-5
Optional Equipment..................................................................................................5-6
SECTION 2. PHONE FUNCTIONS ..................................................................7
SMT-i5210 LAYOUT ....................................................................................................8
Names and Functions ..............................................................................................8-9
KEY FUNCTIONS ..........................................................................................................10
Telephone Status Indicator ......................................................................................10
Screen Structure ..........................................................................................................10
Text Input Method ......................................................................................................11
Description of Icons....................................................................................................12
Navigating the Menus................................................................................................13
Navigation Button and Select Switch for FWD/DND/ABSENT MSG..........13
SMT-i5210 SETUP ......................................................................................................14
Initializing the SMT-i5210 ........................................................................................14
Setup Mode ..................................................................................................................14
Easy Install Wizard ......................................................................................................15
Selecting the Static IP Option ................................................................................15
Setting Up Hot Desking (Idle Login) ....................................................................15
Configuration Menu Structure................................................................................16
Copyright 2010 Samsung Telecommunications America.
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic,
electronic or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying or information retrieval systems—
without express written permission of the publisher of this material.
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing
may warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from
the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.
SECTION 3. FREQUENTLY USED
FEATURE OPERATION ..........................................................17
EXTENSION LOG IN & OUT ................................................................................18
PLACING CALLS............................................................................................................18
ANSWERING CALLS ..................................................................................................19
PLACING A CALL ON HOLD ..............................................................................20
TRANSFERRING CALLS ..........................................................................................20
Home Page
TRANSFERRING WITH CAMP-ON..................................................................21
CALL WAITING ..............................................................................................................21
Group Call Pickup........................................................................................................48
My Group Pickup ........................................................................................................48
Privacy Release ............................................................................................................48
CONFERENCE CALLS ................................................................................................21
FORWARDING CALLS ..............................................................................................22
DIALING FEATURES ..................................................................................................49
OTHER FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS ..................................................22-25
SECTION 4. PHONE FEATURES ....................................................................26
BASIC MENUS ................................................................................................................27
Soft Button Structure ................................................................................................27
Menu Soft Button ........................................................................................27-36
Func. Soft Button ................................................................................................36
AOM Soft Button ................................................................................................37
SECTION 5. OFFICESERV 7000 SYSTEM FEATURES ..........38
OUTSIDE CALLS ..........................................................................................................39
Making Calls from AOM ............................................................................................39
Universal Answer ........................................................................................................39
Recall Dial Tone ............................................................................................................39
Sending a Flash ............................................................................................................39
Busy Line Queuing with Callback..........................................................................39
Busy Station Callback ................................................................................................40
Canceling Callback......................................................................................................40
Busy Station Camp-On ..............................................................................................40
INTERCOM CALLS ......................................................................................................42
Voice Announce Mode ..............................................................................................42
Auto Answer Mode ....................................................................................................42
Calling your System Operator ................................................................................42
CALL PROCESSING ....................................................................................................43
System Hold ..................................................................................................................43
Exclusive Hold ..............................................................................................................43
Remote Hold ................................................................................................................43
Hold Recall ....................................................................................................................44
Consultation Hold ......................................................................................................44
Retrieving Calls Held at Another Station............................................................44
Call Transfer ..................................................................................................................45
Transfer with Camp-On ............................................................................................45
Transfer to Voice Mail ................................................................................................46
Call Waiting....................................................................................................................46
Call Forward Options ................................................................................................46
Station Call Pickup ......................................................................................................47
Speed Dialing................................................................................................................49
Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers ..................................................49
Directory Dialing..........................................................................................................50
Last Number Redial ....................................................................................................51
Save Number with Redial ........................................................................................51
Automatic Redial/Retry ............................................................................................51
Pulse to Tone Changeover ......................................................................................51
PAGING AND MESSAGING ..................................................................................52
Making and Internal Page ........................................................................................52
Making an External Page..........................................................................................52
All Page ..........................................................................................................................52
Meet Me Page ..............................................................................................................53
Call Park and Page ......................................................................................................53
Messages—Set and Cancel ..............................................................................54-55
Returning Messages ..................................................................................................55
Programmed Messages ............................................................................................55
CONVENIENCE FEATURES ..................................................................................56
Logging In and Out ....................................................................................................56
Do Not Disturb ............................................................................................................56
One Time DND..............................................................................................................56
Mute ................................................................................................................................57
Background Music ......................................................................................................57
Established Call Pick-Up............................................................................................57
Door Phone Calls ..................................................................................................57-58
Executive/Secretary Hotline ....................................................................................58
Group Listening ..........................................................................................................59
Account Codes ............................................................................................................59
Locking Your Keyset ..................................................................................................60
Manual Signalling........................................................................................................60
Off-Hook Voice Announce ......................................................................................61
OHVA Block....................................................................................................................61
OHVA Reject ..................................................................................................................61
In Group/Out of Group..............................................................................................62
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET ..........................................................................63
AME Password ..............................................................................................................63
Auto Camp-On ............................................................................................................63
Select Ring Tone ..........................................................................................................63
Change Your Passcode ..............................................................................................63
Home Page
Set Answer Mode (Intercom) ..................................................................................64
Set Answer Mode (CO) ..............................................................................................64
Automatic Hold............................................................................................................64
Headset Operation......................................................................................................64
Hot Keypad ....................................................................................................................65
Key Confirmation Tone..............................................................................................65
Rejoining a Page ..........................................................................................................65
Ring Preference............................................................................................................65
Display Speed Dial Name ........................................................................................66
Caller ID Review All ....................................................................................................66
Secure OHVA ................................................................................................................66
Configure Mobile Extensions (MOBEX) ........................................................66-67
DISPLAY FEATURES ..................................................................................................68
Directory Information................................................................................................68
Display Number Dialed ............................................................................................68
Call Duration Timer ....................................................................................................68
Auto Timer ....................................................................................................................68
Timer Function ............................................................................................................69
Viewing Station Message Indications..................................................................69
Personal Speed Dial Names ....................................................................................69
Station Names ..............................................................................................................69
Managing Programmable Key Assignments ....................................................70
Backspace with LCR....................................................................................................70
CALLER ID..........................................................................................................................71
Selecting Your Caller ID Display ............................................................................71
Viewing the Next Caller ID Call ..............................................................................72
Inquire Caller ID Park/Hold Info ............................................................................72
FEATURE ACCESS CODES ....................................................................................73
SECTION 6. APPLICATIONS ..............................................................................74
SAMSUNG VOICEMAIL ..........................................................................................75
SVMi E-Series Subscriber Services Menu Diagram ..................................76–77
Accessing Your Mailbox ............................................................................................78
Getting Started ............................................................................................................79
Listen to your Messages ...........................................................................................79
Subscriber Services Menu .......................................................................................79
Listening to Old or New Messages ......................................................................80
Group New or Old Messages ..................................................................................81
Record and Send a Message ..................................................................................81
Access Manager ..........................................................................................................83
Personal Greetings......................................................................................................84
Mailbox Administration ............................................................................................87
Message Broadcast ....................................................................................................89
Personal Services ........................................................................................................89
Personal Administration Settings ........................................................................90
Keyset User Features ................................................................................................91
Shortcuts ......................................................................................................................93
Interactive Displays ....................................................................................................93
E-Mail Gateway (EMG) ........................................................................................93–95
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS......................................................96–97
Home Page
ABOUT THIS BOOK
The new Samsung Multimedia Telephone SMT-i5210 keyset is part of the
OfficeServ 7000 Series.
The SMT-i5210 keyset represents a new concept of Internet phone, in that it uses
an IP address to Send/Receive voice and data. For voice communications, the SMTi5210 uses the data network line already in place in most offices and increasing
number of homes.
This guide contains 6 sections: Section 1. Caution and Preparation, Section 2.
Phone Functions, Section 3. Frequently Used Feature Operation, Section 4. Phone
Settings, Section 5. OfficeServ 7000 System Features and Section 6. Applications.
Please take the time to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation
of your keyset. Keep this guide handy, as you may need to look up instructions for
infrequently used features.
This book is written based on factory default settings, for the feature access codes.
Sometimes, due to programming requirements, these codes may be changed. If
you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book, please contact your installation and service company to determine the correct code.
1
Home Page
CAUTION
SECTION 1.
CAUTION AND PREPARATION
2
•
Read the installation instructions before connecting the system to its power
source.
•
If there is dirt or moisture on the pin contact surface of a power plug, pull out
the plug and wipe it away with a cloth. If dirt or moisture remains on the product even after wiping, contact the service center.
•
For the power connection port of the phone, use the supplied power
adapter.(The power adapter is supplied separately.) Use of a power adapter
that does not meet the specifications may cause the product to become damaged, to overheat, or to explode.
•
Do not place the phone in a location with a lot of dust, in a location that is subject to severe changes in temperature, or near a heating device (cigarette
heat, heater, etc.)
•
Do not use or store flammable spray or materials near the phone.
•
Do not place vases, flowerpots, cups, or a container of cosmetics or drugs near
the phone.
•
Installation of equipment must not route interconnecting cables or external
power supply sources outdoors.
•
The LAN cable to the network should be connected to the LAN port of a
phone, NOT to the PC connection port.
•
Use a soft and dry cloth when cleaning the phone. Do not spray water directly onto the product; and do not use chemicals such as wax, benzene, alcohol,
thinner, mosquito killer, perfume spray, lubricant, detergent, etc.
3
Home Page
Connect the LAN cable (connected through the middle hole of the base to a
network) to the LAN port of the phone, as shown in the figure.
PREPARATION
CHECK THE CONTENTS OF THE BOX
Check if the product package box includes all the components as follows:
•
•
•
•
When power is supplied from the LAN port (PoE), the phone is booted upon
LAN connection.
If PoE is not supported, connect the power adapter to the power port of the
phone by running the cable through the middle hole of the base as shown
in the figure below. If the connected power adapter is plugged into an outlet, the phone is booted. (The power adapter is supplied separately.)
Phone body including a base
Handset
Handset cord
Patch cable
NOTE: Power transformer sold separately. If any of these items are missing or damaged, please contact your dealer.
PHONE INSTALLATION
4 Fix the base to the phone body by fitting the bottom groove and then
securing the top side.
Connecting the Phone Body
1 Remove the base of the phone by
pressing the [Push] mark on the top
of the base.
Note: The base can be used to adjust
the phone angle in the high or low
position.
5 Secure the cable along the cable
guideline as shown in the figure. For
the cable of power adaptor, give
some slack before securing the cable
to the guideline to prevent easy
disconnect.
2 Connect a handset to the handset port
of the phone.
3 OPTIONAL: Connect the cable
through the middle hole of the base
to the PC, as shown in the figure.
When connecting to PC, connect one
end of the cable to the PC port of the
phone, and the other end of the cable
to the LAN port of the PC.
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
SMT-i5264 [ADD-ON MODULE]
e
r
q
w
qAC Power wLAN to Phone System ePhone to PC rHeadset
4
The SMT-i5264 IP AOM can be registered and programmed
to function with any ITP 5100 keysets, SMT-i Series, and TDM
phones. This add-on module was cosmetically designed to
match the SMT-i5000 Series phones. In some applications
multiple IP AOMs can be supported per IP phone. For installation instructions, see your System Administrator.
5
Home Page
SMT-A52GE [GIGABIT ADAPTER]
The SMT-A52GE Gigabit Adapter processes the Gigabit
data for a Gigabit LAN connection on the PC connected to
the SMT-i5200 Series IP phones. The SMT-A52GE can be
installed to function with any of the SMT-i5200 Series IP
phones. For installation instructions, see your System
Administrator.
WALL MOUNT BRACKET
An optional bracket is available for wall mounting the SMT-i5200 Series phones to
the wall. For installation instructions, see your System Administrator.
SMT-A53PW [POWER ADAPTER]
SECTION 2.
PHONE FUNCTIONS
The power adapter is sold separately.
6
7
Home Page
Button
SMT-i5210 LAYOUT
q LED (TSI)
;
LCD Screen l
Handset
Phone
Book
Button
Message
Button
Service
Button
Selector
Switch for
FWD/DND/
Absent MSG
w
e SoftButtons
r Enter/OK
t Conference
y Transfer
u Hold
k
j
h
i Navigation
Button
Mute
Button
Volume
Button
Headset
Button
g
f
d
Speaker
Button s
o Programmable Buttons
14 Buttons used to set up function buttons through
interworking with a system.
a Dial Button
Used to dial the phone number.
s Speaker Button
Used to enable/disable the use of a speaker phone.
d Headset Button
Used to activate and deactivate the headset jack.
f Volume Button
Used to control the volume settings.
g Mute Button
Used to silence the transmit voice to the remote party.
h Service Button
j Message Button
k Phone Book Button
l LCD Screen
; Handset
a Dial Button
Function
For use with the Unified Communicator Server and to set
Scheduler (optional).
Used to access all the messaging options: Voicemail
Messages, Station Messages, SMS, and E-Mail Messages.
Used to search for a phone number saved in the phone, or
to register a new number. Pressing this button shows the
main screen of the phone book.
Used to move downward on various list screens.
A display showing the phone’s status (busy, ringing,
receiving an internal message, etc.)
Used for two-way voice conversation.
o Programmable Buttons
NOTE: The words “key” and “button” are interchangeable.
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Button
q LED (TSI)
Function
The blinking pattern differs depending on the phone
status (Telephone Status Indicator).
Used to select or deselect the Call Forwarding/DND/
w Selector Switch for FWD/DND Absent Message setting by using the Selector Switch
control.
8
e Soft Button
Used to select the desired function from the soft
menus displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen.
r Enter/OK
Used to make selection or to save an entry.
t Conference Button
Used for conference calls.
y Transfer Button
Used to enable the call transfer function.
u Hold Button
Used to place a call on hold.
i Navigation Button
Used to move the display cursor up and down, left
and right on certain menus.
9
Home Page
TEXT INPUT METHOD
KEY FUNCTIONS
Using the dial and direction buttons on the phone, you can enter and modify the
English characters, numeric and special characters.
NETWORK: The SMT-i5210 uses VoIP communication through an alreadyinstalled data network.
,] on a text input screen, the input mode is
Whenever you press the dial button [,
changed in sequence.
Text Input Example
LCD SCREEN: Various functions are displayed on the LCD screen, so you can use
A
Uppercase Input Mode
a
Lowercase Input Mode
SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE (SMS): You can exchange text messages using
1
Numeric Input Mode
this function. This function is available on internal IP stations.
$
Special Character Input Mode
them conveniently by using the Navigation button on the phone.
TELEPHONE STATUS INDICATOR
The indicators are turned on or off depending on the status of relevant functions.
Screen
Status
LED Indicator
Red colored indicator is
constant.
When station is busy
When station is receiving an
incoming call
Red indicator (slow flash).
When there is a message
During “Do Not Disturb”
Incoming Trunk Call
Hold Recalls
Red indicator (fast flash).
Green colored indicator
flashes.
Amber colored indicator
flashes.
SCREEN STRUCTURE
•
Use the dial buttons to type English text and numbers; and use the
Navigation Button to move the cursor left and right and OK buttons to complete input. When removing the typed characters, select the Del soft button.
Alpha Characters Input: Select this mode (uppercase/lowercase) by pressing
,] button on keypad, and type text by repeated pressing the dial buttons,
the [,
characters will auto advance after a time limit.
,] button on keypad, move
Number Input: Select this mode by pressing the [,
the cursor highlighted to 1, then use the keypad to enter digits.
,] button on keySpecial Character Input: Select this mode by pressing the [,
pad; select a desired character by using the Navigation Button; and press the
OK button to enter it.
Keypad Character Entry
Count
Dial ,
The screen consists of three areas.
Icon Area
Text Area
1
A
2
a
(Uppercase)
(Lowercase)
Area
Icon Area
Description
Displays various icons.
Text Area
Displays date, time, extension number, name, message,
phone number, etc.
Soft Menu Area
Displays the functions allocated to the 3 soft buttons.
Service menus are provided depending on the state of the
phone. A user can use the service or feature menus by
pressing the Menu or Func. soft button, or the AOM for
more soft keys (99).
10
4
$
(Numbers) (Special Characters)
Dial #
Not Used
Dial 0
Not Used
Not Used
Dial 1
Soft Menu Area
3
1
Dial 2
A
B
C
Dial 3
Dial 4
D
E
F
G
H
I
Dial 5
J
K
L
Dial 6
M
N
O
Dial 7
P
Q
R
Dial 8
T
U
V
Dial 9
W
X
Y
S
Z
11
Home Page
DESCRIPTION OF ICONS
NAVIGATING THE MENUS
The following icons are displayed on the screen.
When programming within various menu options, information can be entered via
Q] dial keys. The button used for editing and
the dial pad keys using [0]-[9] and [Q
their features are summarized below.
Icon
Description
Shows that ‘Call Forward’ is enabled.
Shows that ‘Do Not Disturb’ is enabled.
Shows that ‘Mute’ function is enabled. When the call ends to
become a standby status or this function is disabled, this icon
disappears.
Shows that the call is hold state. When call is reconnect or
disconnected, this icon disappears.
Appears when there are unread short messages in the
message inbox. Once they are read, it disappears.
Shows that a LAN cable is connected to the PC port.
Shows that a LAN cable is connected to the LAN port but that
the system is not connected.
Shows that a LAN cable is connected to the LAN port and
that the system is connected normally.
Outgoing Call icon.
BUTTONS
FEATURES
To move the cursor left and right, up and down.
Volume + and -
To clear/delete an entire field such as station name.
Hold
Transfer
To write the changes and exit programming.
Speaker
To write the changes and exit programming.
NAVIGATION BUTTON and SELECTOR
SWITCH FOR FWD/DND/ABSENT MSG
The SMT-i5210 phone has a navigation button and a Selector Switch for
FWD/DND/ABSENT MESSAGE to allow users to use its functions easily.
Selector Switch
Up Navigation Button
Left
Navigation
Button
Navigation Button
Incoming Call icon.
Missed Call icon.
Appears when the Speaker button is active.
Appears when the Headset button is active.
Shows when there is a Cell phone number for the entry in the
Phone Book.
Shows when there is a Home phone number for the entry in
the Phone Book.
Shows when there is a Office phone number for the entry in
the Phone Book.
OK/Enter Button
Down Navigation Button
The Selector Switch can be used to manually set and cancel station Call
Forwarding and Do Not Disturb. NOTE: Do not use the access codes or the function menu to cancel FWD/DND/ABSENT MESSAGE when the selector switch is set
in the left or right position because the switch takes precedence over the access
codes/function menu.
BUTTON
Selector Switch
Shows when there is an internal Extension number for the
entry in the Phone Book.
FUNCTION
Left
Users can set the phone to the call forward
state.
Center
The default standby status. (Normal Mode)
Right
This is set to “Do Not Disturb” and absent
message status.
Direction Key
Users can edit the contents on the screen or
move between menu items.
OK/Enter
Users can select or save the item where a
cursor is placed in a menu mode.
Users can check the caller information
received from a station line during receiving.
Navigation
12
Right
Navigation
Button
13
Home Page
SMT-i5210 SETUP
INITIALIZING THE SMT-i5210
Initially the SMT-i5210 IP keyset will need to be setup to operate within the users
network. The Setup Menu is also used to make changes to the keyset, in the event
that the system information should change. The option chosen will be highlighted.
EASY INSTALL WIZARD
By selecting this option, the System Easy Wizard can guide you through setting up
your network parameters. If you want to set up these parameters individually, follow the instructions below.
•
From the idle phone press Menu, scroll to Phone, and press OK button. Scroll
to Phone Information and press OK button. From the keypad, press [,153#].
Scroll to Easy Install and press OK button.
The station numbers will be automatically set by the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems once the necessary information has been entered into the IP keyset. Enter ID
and password of the server, as described below to register the phone.
SELECTING THE STATIC IP OPTION
See your system administrator for specific Network and Server addresses. The
addresses necessary to set up the SMT-i5210 are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
IP Address of Station
Network Gateway Address
IP Address of System’s main processor
User ID
Password
SETUP MODE
To get to the Setup Mode unplug the power cord from the SMT-i5210. Press and
hold the , button while you plug power back into the phone. Release the , button when you see Samsung in the display. If you have a PoE (Power over Ethernet)
connection, the same procedure can be done by unplugging and plugging the
Ethernet cable into the phone while pressing and holding the , button.
When the phone reboot is complete, the Language
Menu will display. Press the Yes soft button to advance to
the Configuration Menu.
Once the Configuration Menu is displayed, you can move to each menu in the
Setup by using the navigation button and [1]-[8] dial buttons of the SMT-i5210 IP
phone. To learn how to navigate the menus refer to the previous section.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wait a second for the phone to reboot. The phone should register and authenticate itself to the phone system. Test SMT-i5210 for proper operation.
SETTING UP HOT DESKING [IDLE LOGIN]
Hot Desking allows you to log in and out of your SMT-i5210 IP keyset without
rebooting.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
14
When the Static IP option is selected, enter the System Type OSSP (KP), and
press OK.
Enter the Static IP Address for the phone (eg. 192.168.9.193) then press the
OK button.
Enter the Subnet Mask (eg. 255.255.255.0); press OK button.
Enter Gateway Address (eg. 192.168.9.1), press OK button.
NOTE: Press the , key on the dial pad to enter the “.” in the IP address.
Skip [VLAN-PHONE], [VLAN-PC], [802.1x Setting] by pressing the OK button
three times.
Enter the System IP address (eg. 192.168.9.200), press OK button.
Enter System ID XXXX (eg. 3201), then press OK button.
Enter Password XXXX (eg. 1234) then press OK button.
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Phone then press OK button.
Scroll to Phone Information and press OK button.
Enter the administrator’s password (please contact your phone system administrator).
Scroll to Extension Login then press OK button.
Choose the ON option and press OK button. (Note: On to allow, Off to deny
hot desking).
Press the Save soft button to complete the setup.
When the phone restarts, enter the ID (eg; extension 2809) and password.
Press the Save soft button to complete the login.
15
Home Page
CONFIGURATION MENU STRUCTURE
The Configuration Menu options are as follows:
1. EASY INSTALL
This option will guide you through setting up all required parameters for connecting the SMT keyset to your system.
2. PHONE INFORMATION
1. Version Info: Provides boot rom, software, DSP, and hardware version
information.
2. Network Info: Displays network mode, IP address of phone, network, and
gateway information.
3. MAC Address
3. NETWORK
Displays Static IP, Dynamic IP, PPPoE, NAT, 802.1x, VLAN (LAN), and VLAN (PC).
SECTION 3.
FREQUENTLY USED FEATURE
OPERATION
4. SERVER
1. Primary System: The main processor’s IP address.
2. System 1~3: Up to 4 server IPs can be set.
5. EXT. LOGIN
Allows the user to choose the option of permitting the phone either
login/logout from idle mode or only register to the server on power up. Once
the phone is placed into Extension Login mode, a display will show up to allow
you to enter any valid User ID and password. This function is also referred to
as hot desking (idle login).
6. S/W UPGRADE
1. TFTP Server: The IP address of the TFTP server containing the IP software.
2. Upgrade: Starts the IP software upgrade process.
7. FACTORY RESET
This option resets the SMT-i5210 to factory default settings.
8. PHONE RESTART
This option reboots the SMT-i5210 phone.
16
17
Home Page
This section provides the basic operation of your Samsung Multimedia Telephone
SMT-i5210.
INTERNAL CALLS - To place a call to another extension at your location:
EXTENSION LOG IN & OUT [HOT DESKING]
•
•
•
If enabled, your SMT-i5210 telephone may require you to log in before making or
receiving calls. In these cases your telephone system administrator will provide
you with an extension number, password, and the feature code used to log out.
•
TO LOG IN
•
•
•
•
Dial your extension number in the ID field (example
3201).
Press the OK button.
Dial your password in the password field (example 1234).
Press Save soft button.
TO LOG OUT
•
Dial the feature code provided by your administrator (for example 77).
PLACING CALLS
IMPORTANT: Put your phone in Overlap Mode by pressing the Menu button,
select Settings and then select Application Set., press OK, select Call, press OK,
scroll to Dial Mode, change it to Overlap by using the Navigation Button. If your
phone is not in Overlap mode you must always press the Call soft button after
dialing the digits to send the call.
NOTE: All examples of making phone calls are based on the phone being set for
overlap dialing mode.
OUTSIDE CALLS - To place a call to an outside party:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press an idle outside line button, line group button, or dial a line access code
to receive dial tone.
Dial the telephone number.
Hang up the handset when the call is completed.
Lift the handset.
Dial the extension number or group number.
Wait for the party to answer. If you hear a brief tone burst instead of ringback
tone, the station called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer. Begin speaking after the tone.
Hang up the handset when the call is completed.
NOTES:
1.
2.
If you have a DSS button assigned to an extension or station group, you may
press this button instead of dialing the number.
If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
SPEAKERPHONE CALLS - Your Samsung SMT-i5210 has full-duplex speakerphone capability. This feature is used for both internal or external calls. To activate
this feature:
•
•
•
Press the Speaker button.
Place an internal or external call.
Press Speaker button to disconnect the call.
NOTE: The handset can be used at any time during the conversation. To resume
handsfree operation, press the Speaker button, and hang up the handset.
HEADSET CALLS - If a headset is connected to the phone, you need to press
the headset key to direct the call to the headset. The headset key will be lit. To use
the headset:
•
•
•
Press the Speaker button.
Place an internal or external call.
Press Speaker button to disconnect the call.
NOTES:
1.
2.
If you need to switch between the headset and the handset during the call,
you need to place the call on hold first.
Headset key can be enabled or disabled in the Menu, Settings, Application
Setting, Headset.
NOTE: Frequently called telephone numbers can be added to the PhoneBook.
When making internal and external calls from AOM (programmable buttons) list,
press the AOM soft button to access the programmable button screens. Then use
the Navigation button to scroll to and highlight the desired programmable button. Press OK to complete the call.
18
19
Home Page
ANSWERING CALLS
TRANSFERRING WITH CAMP-ON
OUTSIDE/INTERNAL/VOICE ANNOUNCE CALLS - To answer these
When you transfer a call to another station and receive a busy signal, you can
camp the call on to this station. Hang up when you hear the busy signal.The called
party is alerted that a call is waiting.
three types of calls:
•
•
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer on Speakerphone.
Hang up the handset when the call is completed.
NOTE: The volume can be adjusted at any time by pressing the up and down buttons on your navigation button.
PLACING A CALL ON HOLD
•
•
•
Call another internal station.
When receiving a busy tone, press the Func. soft button.
Scroll to Camp On and press OK button (here ringback tone).Wait for party to
answer the call.
NOTE: If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to
receive another call. Press Transfer to return to the caller.
Calls can be placed on System Hold or Exclusive Hold. A call placed on System
Hold can be picked up from any extension. Calls placed on Exclusive Hold can only
be picked up from the extension that placed them on hold.
CALL WAITING
SYSTEM HOLD - To place a call on hold:
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Hold button. The Call button will flash green at your telephone.
To take the caller off hold, press that button and the red flashing light will go
steady red again.
Resume conversation.
EXCLUSIVE HOLD - To place a call on hold at your telephone so that other
users cannot answer it:
•
•
Press the Hold button twice.The call button will flash green at your telephone.
To retrieve the call, press the flashing red line button or press the line button
a third time.
If an outside call is camped-on to your phone or another station is camped-on to
you:
•
Your keyset rings and the call that is waiting (camped-on) flashes red.
Press the flashing button to answer; the other call is put on hold automatically if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press
Hold and then the flashing button or finish the first call and hang up; the waiting call will ring.
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer.
NOTE: Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.
CONFERENCE CALLS
To make a conference call while engaged in a conversation:
NOTE: Internal calls are always placed on exclusive hold.
•
•
TRANSFERRING CALLS
•
You can transfer a call by notifying the party to which the call is being transferred
or without notification.
•
•
•
•
•
•
NOTE: When attempting to add another party to the conference and you
are not able to reach the desired person, hang up. Simply press the
Conference button again to return to the previous conversation.
While on a call, press the Transfer button then dial an extension number.
Confirm you hear a ringback tone.
Wait for the called party to answer and announce the call (optional).
Replace the handset.
Press the Conference button and receive conference tone.
Make another call, either intercom or outside, press the Conference
button and receive conference tone.
Make another call or press the Conference button to join all parties. You can
conference up to five parties (you and four others).
Repeat the last step until all parties are added.
Hang up to leave the conference call.
To drop a party from your conference call:
•
•
20
Press the Conference button and dial the extension or line number that is to
be dropped.
Press the Conference button again to reestablish the conference.
21
Home Page
FORWARDING CALLS
Icon
You can forward your calls to another station, group of stations, or an external telephone number. Program a destination for the type of forwarding you want by
moving the Selector Switch to the left and set the forwarding number for All,
Busy, No Answer, and Busy/No Answer.
LAST NUMBER REDIAL - To redial the last dialed telephone number, press
the Func. soft key scroll to Last Redial and press OK.
PHONE BOOK BUTTON - Provides direct access to the user’s phonebook of
stored contacts.
MESSAGE BUTTON - This function allows users to select which desired type
OTHER FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
VOLUME CONTROL - Vol button is used to adjust the volume of a handset,
speaker and ringing sound.
Volume Control of a Handset
•
•
•
Adjusts the handset volume while busy (handset offhook).
To increase the volume of a handset, press the top side [+] of the Vol button.
To decrease the volume of a handset, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button.
Volume Control of a Speaker
•
•
•
Adjusts the speaker volume while busy (handsfree).
To increase the volume of a speaker, press the top side [+] of the Vol button.
To decrease the volume of a handset, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button while ringing.
Volume Control of a Ringing Tone
•
•
To increase the volume of a speaker, press the top side [+] of the Vol button,
while ringing.
To decrease the volume of a handset, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button, while ringing.
Volume Control of Key Tone
•
•
To increase the volume of the key tones, press the top side [+] of the Vol
button.
To decrease the volume of the key tones, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button.
NOTE: By pressing the Vol button in idle mode, the user can also adjust the key
tone volume.
of messages is viewed. Users can select and view the following options: Voicemail
Messages, Station Messages, E-Mail (optional with IP-UMS only), and Short
Message Service (SMS). Short Message Service is similar to sending text messaging [Function only supported on Samsung IP phones].
SERVICE BUTTON [Scheduler] - Used to allow station users access to setting
and editing the scheduler (alarm clock) feature. Also used to connect the
OfficeServ Communicator when application is available (UC is optional).
MENU SOFT BUTTON- This menu displays the
following options:
NOTE: The Navigation button can be used to scroll
through these options.
1. PHONEBOOK: Maintains frequently dialed names and numbers in a
PhoneBook. Search and initiate calls by: Speed Dial, Associated Names,
Telephone Numbers, Assigned Groups, or Previous Calls registered to your
phone.
2. CALL LOG: Provides direct access to a list of most recent calls, outgoing calls,
incoming calls, missed calls, and an option to delete/delete all (or clear) calls
from the Call Log.
3. MESSAGES: This function allows users to select which desired type of messages is viewed. Users can select and view the following options: Voicemail
Messages, Station Messages, E-Mail (optional with IP-UMS only), and Short
Message Service (SMS). Short Message Service is similar to sending text messaging [Function only supported on Samsung IP phones].
4. CONFERENCE: Allows a user to setup a conference group to call multiple
parties simultaneously to join the conference call.
5. SERVICE: Allows a user to set the scheduler (alarm reminder) function.
6. PHONE: Allows the user to set many phone options for the phone such as ring
tones, background screens, languages, forward, DND, etc.
7. SETTINGS: This function allows the user to set the following option:
Application Set., Call Forward, Absent Message, AOM Setting, Network
Info., and Clear User Set.
22
23
Home Page
FUNC. SOFT BUTTON - This function allows a user
one touch easy access to many of the system features.
When pressed, the following options are displayed: Last
Number Redial, Save/Repeat, Speed Dial, Directory,
VM Message, Station Message, Page Pickup, Direct
Pickup, DND, In/Out Group, Status Message, Hold Pickup, Page, Meet Me
Page, OHVA Block, Group Pickup, and My Group Pickup. The Navigation button can be used to scroll up and down the list of features under the Func. button.
•
•
Move down, use the dial pad to enter name (for example: John Dow). Refer to
Text Input Method.
Press the Save soft button to exit and save the setting.
OK/ENTER BUTTON - This function is used to enter, save or complete the
selected option in the display.
SPEAKER BUTTON - This function is used to go on and off hook in the handsfree speakerphone mode.
NOTE: EXE/SECR MSG is displayed only when the phone is programmed for
Boss/Secretary feature.
Example of using the Last Number Redial feature:
•
Press the Func. Soft button, scroll to Last Redial, then press OK button. The
last number called from the phone is called.
NOTE: For detail operation of the list of features under the Func. soft button,
please refer to the System Features section of the user guide.
AOM SOFT BUTTON - This function is used to display all 99 programmable feature buttons of the phone.
The Navigation button can be used to scroll up and
down the list of 99 programmable feature buttons under
the soft AOM.
Example of dialing a Speed Dial Number using the AOM function:
•
Press the AOM soft button, scroll to Speed Dial, then press OK button. The
number is called from the phone.
NOTE: Some programmed features such as speed dialing and DSS buttons
can be used to process calls; other programmed buttons such as Call buttons
can only be viewed.
The soft AOM button can also display status indications
for station keys, trunks, voice mail messages, etc.
Example of programming a DSS button on the soft AOM:
•
•
•
•
•
•
24
Press the Menu soft button.
Using the Navigation button, scroll to Settings and press OK, then scroll to
and select AOM Setting.
Scroll to the soft AOM button to program (for example: 4).
Press the Edit soft button (the display will show AOM index 4).
Press Edit soft button again, scroll to the feature option (for example: DSS).
Move down and enter the extension number (for example: 2003).
25
Home Page
BASIC MENUS
The basic menus screen is displayed if you select the Menu from the soft menu at
the left bottom of a idle screen. Using the Navigation button, move to a desired
function, and press the OK button to execute the function.
SOFT BUTTON STRUCTURE
SECTION 4.
PHONE FEATURES
MENU SOFT BUTTON
Item
1. Phonebook
Sub-Item
All
Unassigned
Search
New
Edit [+]
2. Call Log
Call
Description
Shows the entire list of phone numbers
stored in the phone.
This is a list of number that are not assigned
any group.
Allows a user to search for a registered
phone number by name/number.
Saves a phone number or group name; and
allows a user to specify a speed dialing
number and ringtone.
Allows a user to delete all the phone
numbers saved in the phone.
Used to make a callback from the call log.
This is used to save entries from call log to
phonebook.
This is used to delete entries from the call
[+] Delete
log.
This is used to to move back one menu
Back
screen.
Allows a user to delete all the call history
Delete All
saved in the phone.
Allows a user to retrieve voice mail
1. Voice Mail [0]
messages from the mailbox.
Allows a user to retrieve station messages
2. Station Message [0]
(internal) from another user.
Allows a user to to view how many e-mail
3. Email [0]
messages have been received via IP-UMS
(optional).
Allows a user to retrieve and send internal
short messages (SMS) like text message to
4. Short Message
other internal phones. [Not Supported Over
Networking]
Save
3. Messages
26
27
Home Page
Item
4. Conference
5. Service
6. Phone
Sub-Item
Description
Allows a user to setup (show, add, and edit) a conference group
to call multiple parties simultaneously to join the conference call.
Allows a user to set the alarm clock function.
Allows the user to set a timed reminder
1. Scheduler
alarm to give an audible indication or
alarm clock function.
Allows the user to set many phone options for the phone such as
ring tones, background screens, languages, etc.
1. UC Dial: Right
Options are DND and Absent Message.
2. Screen
Options are Display Time, Time Format,
Font, and LCD Power.
3. Sound
Options are Volumes, Ring Tone, and Key
Tone.
4. Language
Options are English and Korean.
5. Security
Change Password, Dial and Phone Lock.
Easy Install: Used to register and authenticate the phone to the server.
6. Phone Information
Item
Sub-Item
Description
This function is used to allow station users to set application
settings, call forwarding, absent messaging, AOM setting, view
station network information, view phone firmware or initialize
Note: All options are not
the phone. Other settings include the following:
explained in this manual.
Options are Call (CID 1, CID 2, Dial Mode),
The options are initiative
Phone Name, Boss Answer, Short
and menu driven for an
1. Application Set.
easy, user friendly menus
Message, Station On/Off, and Extension
to guide you through
Login.
navigating the Setting
Options are Not Use, All, Busy, No
Menu Options.
2. Call Forward
Answer, Busy/No Answer, DND, and
Follow Me Status.
7. Settings
3. Absent Message
Used to leave station messages in
display informing other internal parties of
your status when your station is called.
4. AOM Setting
Used to set the name, number, and
function to the 99 AOM buttons.
5. Network Info.
Used to view the current network
settings.
6. Clear User Set.
Clear your local setting such as phonebook, call log, etc.
Phone Information: Includes Version
Info, Network Info, and MAC Address.
Network: Options are Static IP, Dynamic
IP, PPPoE, VLAN (LAN Port), VLAN (PC Port),
802.1x.
Server: Used to register the phone to one
or more Servers. Options are Primary,
System 1, System 2, and System 3.
Extension Login: Used to log phone on
and off (Hot Desking).
S/W Upgrade: Upgrade Server, Upgrade:
used to upgrade software on phones.
Factory Reset: Used to default the phone
settings.
Phone Restart: Used to reboot the
phones.
28
29
Home Page
1. PHONEBOOK
•
NOTE: Personal phonebook is stored locally in phone
memory.
All
Shows the entire list of phone numbers saved in the phone book.
•
•
Press the Phonebook button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK, scroll to All, and then press OK.
The entire list of phone numbers saved in the phone book is shown on the
screen. Using the Navigation button, move to a desired number, and select
the Call soft button to place a call.
Unassigned Group
Press the Search soft button from the dial pad enter the characters of the
name (case sensitive) or number to search and press the OK button, the
matching phone number is displayed. Move to a desired name/number using
the Navigation button, and select the Call soft button to place a call.
Add New Entry to Phonebook [+]
This is the function used to register a phone number.
•
•
•
Press the Phonebook button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK.
Press the [+] soft button, and then New.
Enter a name by using the dial pad, scroll down and enter a mobile number,
home number, office number, internal extension number, fax number,
and e-mail address.
Assign a Group (if needed).
Select a Ring Tone.
Add Memo information (up to 50 characters).
Press the Save soft button to save the new entry to the Phonebook.
The Unassigned option is a list of all the phonebook entries that have not been
assigned to a group. Once an entry is assigned to a group, the entry is removed
from the unassigned list.
•
•
•
•
TO CREATE A PHONEBOOK GROUP
DELETE/DELETE ALL
To create a group in the phonebook:
This is the function used to delete all the phone numbers saved in the phonebook.
•
•
•
•
Press the Phonebook button, then press the [+] soft button, then press the
New soft button.
Using the key pad, input the name of the group, then press the Save soft button. See Text Input Method.
Press Edit soft button or press Back soft button to exit.
•
•
•
Press the Phonebook button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK.
Scroll to All and press OK button. Scroll to entry to delete.
Press [+] soft button. Press Del. to delete the selected entry in the chosen
group.
Press the Yes to Delete All entries in the chosen group.
TO MOVE UNASSIGNED ENTRY TO PHONEBOOK GROUP
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Phonebook button, scroll to Unassigned option then press OK button.
Scroll to the entry that is to be moved to an assigned group and press OK button.
Press Edit soft button, scroll to and highlight the Group option.
Using the Navigation button, move Left or Right to the group name (eg;
Personal) which you want to move the entry into.
Once the correct entry is displayed, press the Save button. The entry is now
assigned to the group.
Search
Allows a user to search by name/number for a phone saved in the phone book.
•
30
Press the Phonebook button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK.
2. CALL LOG
Outgoing
Incoming
Missed Icons
This function lists all the recent numbers for outgoing,
incoming and missed calls.
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Call Log, press OK. A phone number list
of recent outgoing, incoming and missed calls is displayed.
Scroll to an entry and press the Call soft button to dial the number.
VIEWING DETAIL CALL LOG RECORD
To view the details of each of the call log entry, highlight
the entry and press the OK button to display the full
Caller ID record which includes the name, date and time.
31
Home Page
DELETE / DELETE ALL
4. Short Message (SMS)
This is the function used to delete an entry or all entries in the Call Log.
This function is used to send and create internal short messages or text
messaging.
•
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Call Log, press OK.
Scroll to entry to delete.
Press [+] soft button. Press Del. to delete the selected entry or Del All.
Press the Yes to Delete entry.
TO ADD A CALL LOG ENTRY TO PHONE BOOK
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Call Log, press OK. Scroll to desired Call
Log Entry and press the Edit soft button. Make changes to the name and
number if necessary. When finished, press the Save soft button. The Call Log
number is added as a new entry to the phonebook list.
INBOX
•
•
•
Press the Message button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to Short
Message, press OK.
Scroll to Inbox, then press OK to view a short text message in you Inbox.
Press the [+] soft button, press Del. soft button, and the Yes soft button to
delete the selected short text message or press the Back soft button to exit
Short Message.
NEW MESSAGE (SEND)
This function is used to create and send a new short text message.
3. MESSAGES
•
1. Voice Mail
•
This function allows users to retrieve voice mail message from the mailbox.
•
Press the Message button—OR—press Menu soft button, scroll to
Messages, press OK, scroll to Voice Mail [ ], and then press OK to access the
voicemail box and retrieve messages.
2. Station Message
This function allows users to retrieve station messages (internal) from another
user.
•
•
•
•
Press the Message button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Messages, press OK, scroll to Station MSG [ ], and then press OK.
To return a call to the station that left the message: press the Func. soft button, scroll to Reply, then press OK.
To delete the station message: press the Func. soft button, scroll to Clear, then
press OK.
To view the next station message: press the Func. soft button, scroll to Next,
then press OK.
•
•
NOTES:
1.
When the message is sent successfully, the message “Sent” is displayed. When
the message fails to send the “Failed to send” is displayed.
2.
SMS messages can only be sent to internally ITP, SMT-W, or SMT-i phones.TDM
and single line phones cannot send or receive SMS messages. SMS messaging
is not supported over networking.
OUTBOX
This function is used to create and send a new short text message.
•
3. E-Mail
This function allows users to view the amount of e-mails for a station user’s
account. This function is only available when the IP-UMS application is enabled.
Please refer to the IP-UMS manuals for detailed operation.
32
Press the Message button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to Short
Message, press OK.
Press New Msg soft button.Write or create a new short message and press the
Next soft button. See Text Input Method on how to enter characters in text
messages.
Enter the internal extension(s) to send the short message. Scroll to other
entries and enter the station number to send to more users. (Each short message can be sent to 1 through 10 users).
Press the Send soft button to deliver the short message to other user’s inbox.
•
•
Press the Message button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Message, press OK.
Scroll to Outbox, then press OK to view short text message sent from your
phone.
Press the [+] soft button, then Del/Del All soft button to delete the short text
message(s) or press the Back soft button to exit SMS.
33
Home Page
4. CONFERENCE [Group]
5. SERVICE
This function allows a user to setup a conference group
to call multiple parties simultaneously to join the conference call.
Allows a user to set the alarm clock function.
CREATING CONFERENCE GROUP
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Conference, and press OK.
Press New soft button, enter phone number (up to 4 numbers) of the parties
included in the Conference Group.
Press the Call soft button to initiate the Conference Group.
TO CREATE AN UNSUPERVISED CONFERENCE
•
•
During the conference, the host can press the Host soft button.
The host is dropped and the other parties remain in conference.
TO DISCONNECT A PARTY FROM CONFERENCE GROUP
•
•
•
Highlight the party to be disconnected from the conference group.
Press the Disc. soft button. The party is disconnected.
Press the Call soft button to call back and add the party back to the conference group.
SAVING A CONFERENCE GROUP
•
•
After completing the group conference, press the Save soft button.
Enter the Name of the Group, and press Save soft button.
•
Press the Service button—OR—press the Menu soft
button, scroll to Scheduler, then press OK.
Press the New soft button.
Enter the name of the scheduler using the dial pad and navigation buttons.
Press the Next soft button. Enter the Date, Time, Alarm Type, and Ring Tone.
Press Save soft button when finished.
TO DELETE A SCHEDULE
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press Menu soft button. Scroll to Service button, and press the OK button.
Select Scheduler and press the OK button.
To delete a current schedule, press the [+] soft button.
Select and highlight the entry to be deleted and press Delete soft button—
OR—press the Delete All soft button to clear all schedules.
Select Yes to confirm or No to deny the deletion of a schedule(s).
Press Back and End soft buttons to exit the scheduler.
6. PHONE
Allows the user to set many phone options for phone
such as ring tones, background screens, languages, etc.
1. UC Dial: Right
This option is used to select which function will be
enabled when the selector switch is moved to the right position.
TO EDIT A CONFERENCE GROUP
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Conference button, and press OK.
Scroll to the Name of the Group to be edited and press Edit soft button.
Edit the group name. When complete, press the Save soft button to save
changes.
TO EDIT CONFERENCE GROUP PHONE NUMBER LIST
•
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Conference button, and press OK.
Scroll to the Name of the Group to be edited and press Edit soft button.
Press the Edit soft button. Edit the phone number list—OR—
Press Search soft button to search for phone number to add to group from
the phonebook. Highlight the entry and press the OK button to add the number to the Conference Group list.
When complete with the editing, press the Save soft button to save changes.
•
•
•
2. Screen
•
•
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone and press OK. Select Screen and
press OK. Set the following Time Format, Font, and LCD Power Saving of the
SMT-i5210 phone, select the option and adjust the screen settings.
Press the Save soft button to save the screen settings.
3. Sound
•
•
34
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone and press OK.
Scroll to UC Dial: Right and press OK.
Select DND or Absent Message and press Save soft button.
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone and press OK. Select Sound and
press OK. Set the following Volumes, Ring Tone, and Key Tone of the SMTi5210 phone, select the option and adjust the sound settings.
Press the Save soft button to save the sound settings.
35
Home Page
4. Language
AOM SOFT BUTTON
•
This function is used to display all 99 programmable feature buttons of the phone. The Navigation button can be
used to scroll up and down the list of 99 programmable
feature buttons under the AOM module. The feature buttons can be programmed
by a technician.
•
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone and press OK. Select Language
and press OK. Select English (Default English).
Press the Save soft button.
5. Security
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button. Scroll to Phone and press OK. Scroll to Security
and press OK.
Enter the station password [default 1234].
Press OK to Change Password and press Back soft button.
Scroll to Dial to Unlock, Lock Out (Outgoing), or Lock All.
Scroll to Phone to Unlock or Lock the Menu.
Press the Save soft button.
6. Phone Information
Allows a user to set up the following options: Easy Install Wizard (registering the
phone), Phone Info (Version, Network, MAC Address), Network (Static, Dynamic,
etc.), Server (Phone can register to 1 to 4 servers), Extension Login (logging in
and out IP phones), Software Upgrade (Upgrading the phone or server software),
Factory Reset (defaulting the phone), and Phone Restart (rebooting the phone).
7. SETTINGS
This function is used to allow station users to set
Application Settings, Call Forward, Absent Message,
AOM Setting, Network Information, and to Clear User
Settings such as Call Log and Phonebook.
FUNC. SOFT BUTTON
This function allows a user one touch easy access to
many of the system features.When pressed, the following
options are displayed: Last Number Redial,
Save/Repeat, Speed Dial, Directory, VM Message, Station Message, Page
Pickup, Directory Pickup, DND, In/Out Group, Status Message, Hold Pickup,
Page, Meet Me Page, OHVA Block, Group Pickup, and My Group Pickup. The
Navigation button can be used to scroll up and down the list of features under the
Func. button.
NOTE: For detailed operation of the list of features under the Func. soft button,
please refer to the System Features section of this user guide.
36
37
Home Page
OUTSIDE CALLS
MAKING CALLS FROM AOM
Note: When making calls, internal or outside calls, in order to access the programmable button screens, press the AOM soft button. Then you can utilize the
Navigation button to scroll the list.
SECTION 5.
OFFICESERV™ 7000
SYSTEM FEATURES
•
•
When the desired number is highlighted, press the OK button.
The number will be automatically dialed.
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device. To answer
calls ringing this device, dial 67—OR—press the UA button. This device can operate in any one of the six different ring plans.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing.
RECALL DIAL TONE
•
Press the New button to disconnect your existing call, wait for dial tone and
then make a new call on the same line.
NOTE: If this button does not appear on your keyset, the Flash button may be programmed to recall dial tone.
SENDING A FLASH
While on an outside call, press the Flash button to send a flash to the telephone
company. This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use.
NOTE: Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit.
BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK
If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line, this means that
the line or group of lines is busy.
•
•
•
•
38
Press the Callback button, if programmed, or dial 44, you will hear confirmation tone.
Hang up or press Speaker button.
When the line becomes free, the system will call you back.
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer, wait for dial tone and
dial the telephone number or speed dial number again.
39
Home Page
NOTES:
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set
a callback, the cursor associated with the Callback button will be solid black.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing.
BUSY STATION CALLBACK
When you call another station and receive a busy signal:
•
•
•
Press the Callback button, if programmed, or dial 44.
When the busy station becomes free, your keyset will ring.
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to call the now idle station.
NOTES:
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set
a callback, the cursor associated with the Callback button, will be solid black.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing.
•
The called station must release its first call or place it on hold before answering your camp-on.
NOTES:
1. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no available button to
accept your call. Hang up or leave a message.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing.
AUTO CAMP-ON
When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the
camp on button every time you call a busy station, you can set your phone for auto
camp-on.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 081 to turn On auto camp-on, or dial 080 to turn it Off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
CANCELING CALLBACK
A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set a callback, the cursor associated with the Callback button, will be solid black.
To cancel a callback:
•
•
Press the Callback button, if programmed, or dial 44.The display will show the
callback details, press the Func. soft button and then Clear.
This will cancel the last set callback and display the next set callback, also with
the option to Clear.This process is repeated until all callbacks are cleared from
memory.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature is turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press the Speaker button before dialing.
BUSY STATION CAMP-ON
When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to
wait for a callback:
MANUAL CAMP-ON
•
•
•
40
Press the Camp button or dial 45.
The called station will receive off-hook ring tone repeated every few seconds
and the cursor associated with the first available Call button will flash black to
indicate your call is waiting.
Wait for the called party to answer.
41
Home Page
INTERCOM CALLS
CALL PROCESSING
VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE
SYSTEM HOLD
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
you will hear the caller’s announcement.
When you are connected to any call, press Hold. The call will flash at the keyset. If
this call appears on a line button at other keysets, it will flash at those keysets also.
•
•
•
Press the Speaker button to turn on the microphone and speak handsfree—
OR—lift the handset to reply.
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the Speaker button.
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
to ON.
To take the caller off hold, press that button and the flashing LED will go
steady again. Resume the conversation—OR—press the Hold button. The
flashing LED will go steady again and you will be connected to the call again.
Resume the conversation.
AUTO ANSWER MODE
NOTE: While on a call, pressing a line button, route button or flashing Call button
will automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call. See
Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset.
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
then automatically answer the call.
EXCLUSIVE HOLD
•
•
Your microphone and speaker are turned on and you can speak handsfree. For
privacy, use the handset.
To finish the call, replace the handset.
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
to ON.
To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it:
•
•
Press the Hold button twice.The call will flash on your keyset and this line will
show a steady indication on other keysets.
To retrieve the call, press the flashing line button or press the Hold button a
third time.
NOTE: Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold.
CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR
•
•
Dial 0 to call your system operator or group of operators.
If you want to call a specific operator, dial that person’s extension number.
NOTE: If the Hot keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button or dial 0 before you begin dialing.
REMOTE HOLD
When you wish to place a call on hold at another station.
•
•
Press Transfer and dial the station number (or press the appropriate DSS button)
Press the Hold button. This will place the call on system hold on an available
Call button or Line button at the remote station and return you to dial tone.
NOTES:
1. If the destination station does not have any free Call buttons or line buttons
you will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other party by pressing the Transfer button.
2. Intercom calls cannot be put on remote hold.
42
43
Home Page
HOLD RECALL
CALL TRANSFER
If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer, it will recall your station. The
button that the call appears on will have a slow flashing indicator.
Transfer is used to send any calls to another extension in one of two ways.You can
do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can
do a blind transfer without notification.
•
•
When your phone rings, lift the handset or press the Speaker button to
answer the recall.
If you do not answer this recall within a pre-programmed period of time, it will
go to the system operator.
NOTE: The Led will flash amber during hold recall.
•
•
CONSULTATION HOLD
When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with another extension:
•
•
•
•
Press the Transfer button; you will receive transfer dial tone.Your call is placed
on transfer hold.
Dial the extension number.
Consult with the internal party.
Press Transfer to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call.
•
•
While on a call, press the Transfer button and dial an extension number or
group number. Your call is automatically put on transfer hold—OR—press a
DSS button or station group button. Your call is automatically put on transfer
hold.
Hang up when you hear ringing (this is an unscreened or blind transfer)—
OR—wait for the called party to answer and advise him/her of the call and
hang up. If the transfer is refused, you will be reconnected to the outside line
when the called station hangs up or you can press Transfer to return to the
outside party.
If you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the first
station to hang up, simply press another DSS button—OR—press the CALL
button or C.O. line button to return to the outside party and begin the transfer process again.
When you are transferring a call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto
Answer, the transferred call will always ring.
RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT ANOTHER
STATION [HOLD PICKUP]
NOTES:
1. After the inside party answers, you may alternate back and forth between the
parties by pressing the Transfer button.
2. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to receive another call. Press Transfer to return to the other party.
3. You cannot transfer an Intercom call by pressing a DSS button.You must press
the Transfer button and dial the destination extension number.
When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset, press the Line button with
the flashing indicator.
TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON
NOTE: Repeatedly pressing the Transfer button will toggle between the outside
party and internal extension. If necessary you may disconnect either one of the
parties by pressing the Func. soft button, then press the Cancel soft button.
When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset, dial 12 plus the line
number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold.
When you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal,
you may camp the call on to this station. Simply hang up when you hear the busy
signal. The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
NOTE: If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to
receive another call. Press Transfer to return to the outside caller.
44
45
Home Page
TRANSFER TO VOICE MAIL
To Forward ALL Calls to Another Station
This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailbox.Your keyset must have
a correctly programmed VT button to accomplish this. To transfer a call directly to
a voice mailbox:
•
•
•
•
•
•
While on a call, press the VT button and dial the mailbox number.
Hang up when dialing is completed.
Dial 601 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To Forward Calls to Another Station when you are on the Phone (BUSY):
Dial 602 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
CALL WAITING
To Forward Calls to Another Station when you DO NOT ANSWER:
If an outside call has been camped-on to your phone or another station has
camped-on to you:
•
•
•
When you have both Forward ON BUSY and Forward NO ANSWER
Destination Programmed:
•
•
You will hear a tone in the earpiece and the call that is waiting for you
(camped-on) will flash. In addition the bottom line of the display will indicate
the number of the station or trunk party camped-on.
Press the flashing button to answer; your other call will go on hold automatically if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press
Hold and then the flashing button—OR—finish the first call and hang up; the
waiting call will ring.
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer.
•
•
Dial 603 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
You can activate them simultaneously.
Dial 604. Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To Forward Calls when DND is Activated:
•
•
Dial 605 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
NOTE: Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.When using the speakerphone
the camp-on tone will come through the speaker.
To Forward Calls to the Station Where You Currently Are
(FORWARD FOLLOW ME):
CALL FORWARD OPTIONS
•
•
A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations. Call
forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display features. To review or change call forward options:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
46
Press the Menu button, scroll to Settings, press the OK button.
Scroll to Call Forward and press the OK button.
Scroll to the desired Forwarding option, enter the destination extension, and
press the Save soft button.
—OR—
Press Transfer 102.
Dial 0-5 to select the forward type (e.g., 1)—OR—
Press Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] to select the forward type
Press the right soft key to move the cursor.
Dial the destination number (e.g., 202)—OR—
Press Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] to select the destination and press
the Right soft key to move the cursor.
Dial 1 to set—OR—press Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] to select Yes or
No and press Transfer to store and exit.
—OR—
Dial 606 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To clear all call forward conditions set at your station lift the handset and dial 600.
STATION CALL PICKUP
To pick up (answer) a call ringing at another station, lift the handset and dial 65 plus
the extension number of the ringing phone.If you have a DP key assigned with a station number, you only need to press this DP (Direct Pickup) key with the flashing
light to answer this ringing station. NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned
off, you must first lift the handset or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
47
Home Page
GROUP CALL PICKUP
To pick up (answer) a call ringing in any pickup group, lift the handset and dial 66
plus the desired group number (01-10 on the OfficeServ 7030, 01-20 on the
OfficeServ 7200-S, 01-99, and 01-99 on the OfficeServ 7000 Series) or press the
flashing Group Pickup button if available.
NOTES:
1. A group pickup button can have an extender for a specific pickup group.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing the access code.
MY GROUP PICKUP
If desired, a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same
pickup group as you are in. Like “66” above except you do not need to dial the
desired group number. See your installation company for the assigned access
code. MY GROUP PICKUP: __________________.
DIALING FEATURES
All “DIALING FEATURES” instructions are written to support Overlap Dialing mode.
This is the technical name for dialing from a telephone as it has been for many
years. In recent years the cell phone industry has changed the cell phones to use
Enblock Dialing. With this dialing mode all the digits are dialed and then sent to
the carrier after pressing the CALL button. Please check your telephone setup to
confirm what dialing mode is used.
SPEED DIALING
You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system-wide
speed dial list of numbers 500–999 or from your personal list of numbers 00–49.
Your system may be set for 950 system wide numbers. If so the system speed dial
access codes are 050~999 and the station speed dial codes are 000~049.
PRIVACY RELEASE
•
This feature will allow another station to join in our conversation by releasing privacy on the C.O. from your phone.
•
•
To Release Privacy: While you are talking on a C.O. line and you wish to have other
internal parties (or up to three) join the conversation.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
•
Press the PRB button (the PRB indicator will be steady). Inform the other party
that he/she may now join the conversation.
After the other party (or parties) has joined the conversation and you wish to
return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation, press the
PRB button a second time, the PRB button LED will be off.
To Join a Non-Private Conversation: When someone has informed you that you
can join a conversation:
•
•
Press the C.O. line button that he/she has indicated—OR—
Dial the C.O. line number that he/she has indicated.
From the idle screen with the handset on-hook, press the AOM soft button,
scroll to the Speed Dial button, press the OK button or dial 16.
Dial the desired speed dial number.
The telephone number is automatically dialed for you.
PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED
DIAL NUMBERS
You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial
list. A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers, 00–49. See your system administrator to determine the amount assigned to your station. The phone itself maintains 1000 station speed dial numbers.
•
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 105.
Dial a speed dial number (00–49).
Dial a line or line group access code.
Dial the telephone number to be stored (24 digits maximum). It can include #,
,, FLASH and PAUSE.
Press Transfer to store the number.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker key before you begin dialing.
48
49
Home Page
For the purposes of programming
speed dial numbers, the programmable buttons are know as A, B, C, D, E,
and F.
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
•
•
•
•
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
2. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
•
•
•
The A button is not used.
The B button inserts a flash.
The C button inserts a pause.
(Clear)
The D button is used for pulse to
A
tone conversion. If your system
(Flash) B
uses rotary (or pulse) dialing C.O.
(Pause) C
lines, pressing D while entering a
(Conversion) D
speed dial number causes all sub(Hide) E
(Name/Number) F
sequent digits to be sent as DTMF
tones.
The E button is used to hide digits. Display keyset users may want to hide
some speed dial numbers so that they will not show in the display. When you
are entering a telephone number, press D. All subsequent digits will be hidden. Press E again to begin displaying digits.
The F button is used to enter a speed dial name or number. See Personal Speed
Dial Names under Display Features.
Use the Hold button to clear a speed dial number.
DIRECTORY DIALING
•
•
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Directory, press OK.
Press Func. soft button, scroll to the desired directory, press OK.
STATION DIRECTORY - Accesses Station name directory.
PERSONAL DIRECTORY - Accesses your personal speed dial name list.
SYSTEM DIRECTORY - Accesses System speed dial name list.
•
•
•
•
Enter the first letter of the desired party.
Press the +/- buttons to scroll to the desired entry.
Press the Func. soft button.
Select the appropriate operation, press OK.
DIAL - Dials the displayed number.
EXIT - Exit programming and return to idle screen.
PREVIOUS - Moves you to the previous entry.
NEXT - Moves you to the next entry.
•
Press Back to return to idle screen.
To redial the last outgoing telephone number you dialed, press the Func. soft button, scroll to Last Redial, or dial 19.
SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL
To save the number you just dialed for later use, press the Save/Repeat button
before hanging up.
To redial this saved number at any time, press the Func. soft button, scroll to
Save/Repeat, press OK button or dial 17. The same line will be selected for you.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
2. The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another
number.
3. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
AUTOMATIC REDIAL/RETRY
When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal, the system can
automatically redial the number for you. It will automatically redial at a pre-programmed interval for up to 15 attempts.
•
•
•
When you hear a busy signal, press the Retry button.
The system will reserve the line and automatically redial the same number for
you. You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker. The microphone is muted.
When the called party answers, lift the handset or press the flashing Speaker
to begin speaking.
NOTES:
1. If you make another call, auto-redial is canceled.
2. To cancel an auto-retry, lift and replace the handset.
PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER
When making an outside call on a dial pulse line, press #. All digits dialed after the
# with be sent as tones.
50
51
Home Page
PAGING AND MESSAGING
MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE
To make an announcement through the keyset speakers in the idle condition:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Page button, press OK or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
NOTES:
1. If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press Page
and dial a zone number.
2. If allowed by your system administrator you may be able to initiate a page
from a speakerphone by pressing the Page key or dialing 55 without lifting
the handset.
MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE
NOTES:
1. The LED on the Page button will only light when an All Page is in progress.
2. If allowed by your system administrator you may be able to initiate a page
from a speakerphone by pressing the Page key or dialing 55 without lifting
the handset.
MEET ME PAGE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the Meet Me Page (MMPG) button or dial 54.
Dial the desired zone number (0~9).
After the attention tone, instruct the paged person to dial 56.
Press Func. soft button, then Answer Wait, then press OK.
Remain off-hook until the person dials 56 from any phone.
The paged person will be automatically connected with you.
CALL PARK AND PAGE
When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his/her desk, you can
park the call prior to paging. The OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ
7000 Series systems offer two different methods:
To make an announcement through the external paging speakers:
MANUAL PARK ORBITS
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Page button, press OK or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 5, 6, 7 or 8—OR—dial 9 to page all external
zones.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
NOTES:
1. If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press Page
and dial a zone number.
2. If allowed by your system administrator you may be able to initiate a page
from a speakerphone by pressing the Page key or dialing 55 without lifting
the handset.
ALL PAGE
To page all designated keysets in internal zone 0 and all external zones at the same
time:
•
•
•
•
52
Lift the handset.
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Page button, press OK or dial 55.
Dial , or press the All Page button.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
•
•
•
While in conversation, press the Park button.
Entered a desired orbit number (0-9), if the orbit number is busy dial another
orbit number. Display users can press , to automatically place the call in any
available orbit number and see the number in the display.
Remember the selected orbit number.
Replace the handset when finished.
Lift the handset and make a page announcement as previously described
(example:“John Smith park two”).
To retrieve a parked call from orbit:
•
•
Press the Park button and dial the announced orbit number (0-9).
You will be connected to the parked call.
NOTES:
1. You must have a Park button or park access code to retrieve and place calls in
park orbits.
2. If the parked call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it
will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park
and page intercom calls.
3. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
53
Home Page
AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE BUTTON
•
•
•
While in conversation, press the Page button. The call is automatically parked
at your station.
Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number.
Make announcement indicating your extension number or the line number.
Hang up.
•
•
RETURNING MESSAGES
•
To retrieve an automatically parked call:
•
Dial 10 plus the number that was announced. If you have a PAGPK button,
press it and dial the number that was announced. If you have a PARK button,
press it and dial the announced orbit number.
•
You will be connected to the parked call.
NOTES:
1. If the call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it will recall
your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park and page
intercom calls.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION
When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy
signal, you can leave a message indication:
•
•
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Message, press OK—OR—dial 43 and
receive confirmation tone. Hang up.
The message button on the Main Programmable Button screen and the TSI
will flash red at the called station.
NOTES:
1. A station can have up to five message indications.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
CANCELING MESSAGES
To cancel a message indication that you left at another station, dial 42 plus the
extension number of the station at which you left a message.
•
To cancel all message indications left at your keyset, dial 42 plus your extension. Your Message button indicator will stop flashing and the TSI will go out.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the
handset or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
54
—OR—
Press Message button, scroll to Station Messages, press OK.
Press Func. soft button, scroll to Clear, press OK.
•
•
Press Menu, scroll to Message, press OK, scroll to Station Message, press OK,
press Func. soft button, press Reply, and then press OK, or dial 43. The first
station that left a message will be called automatically. If that station does not
answer, the called station Message button indicator will continue to flash and
the TSI will stay on.
Repeat until all messages have been returned in the order received.
Your Message button indicator will stop flashing and the TSI will turn off
when all messages have been returned.
NOTES:
1. Display keyset users can view message indications and return them in any
order. See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
3. If a message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer, you must
manually cancel the message after it has been returned.
PROGRAMMED MESSAGES
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you can leave a
programmed station message. Display stations calling you will see this message
and be informed of your status or follow your instructions.
•
•
•
Dial 48 plus any of the message codes (01–20) listed on the back of this user
guide.
To cancel any of these messages you might have selected, dial 48 plus 00.
Press Transfer to exit and store your selection.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button.
You can have multiple programmed message buttons (PMSG) and each one can
have a different message code:
•
•
Press any programmed message (PMSG) button. The message is set and the
PGM MSG button indicator will be lit steady. Press the button again to turn off
the programmed message and the indicator will go blank.
Pressing another programmed message (PMSG) button will turn the previous
one off and set a different programmed message.
55
Home Page
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
LOGGING IN AND OUT
If enabled, your SMT-i5210 telephone may require you to log in before making or
receiving calls. In these cases your telephone system administrator will provide
you with an extension number, password, and the feature code used to log out.
To log in:
•
•
•
At Extension Login Screen enter your ID which is your extension number.
Scroll down to the password field and enter your station password
Press on Save soft button or OK button.
To log out:
•
Dial the feature code provided by your administrator (for example 77).
MUTE
You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversation:
•
•
Press the Mute button. The Mute button indicator will be lit steady.
To resume speaking, press the Mute button again. The Mute button indicator
goes blank.
BACKGROUND MUSIC
When a music source is supplied, you may listen to music through the speaker in
your keyset:
•
•
While on-hook, press the Hold button to hear music.
Press the Hold button again to turn music off.
You can set the level of background music by using the Volume buttons while listening to the music. This does not affect the speakerphone level.
DO NOT DISTURB
ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP
Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset.
To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to
a computer modem on your PC.
•
•
While on-hook, press the Func. soft button, scroll to DND, press OK, press 1 to
turn it On, or dial 401. The DND button indicator will be lit steady to remind
you of this mode.
To cancel DND, press the Func. soft button, scroll to DND, press OK, press 0 to
turn it Off, or dial 400. The DND button indicator goes blank. You can make
calls while in the DND mode.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button.
2. If you place your keyset in DND mode and you do not have a DND button,
your TSI button will fast flash red to indicate DND status.
3. The Selector Switch can also be used to set DND.
ONE TIME DND
•
•
Press the EP button for that station on your keyset and the call is automatically moved to your keyset.
The single line extension on your modem will be disconnected.
NOTE: You must have an assigned (EP button) button on your regular keyset, for
the single line station.
ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE
When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone:
•
•
•
You will receive three short rings repeated.
Lift the handset. You are connected to the door phone.
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call, you
can press the DND button and place your station in Do Not Disturb. When you
hang up at the end of the call, DND will be automatically canceled and your keyset will be able to receive new calls. This feature requires a DND button.
56
57
Home Page
CALLING THE DOOR PHONE/
ROOM MONITOR
You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in
another room.
•
•
•
Dial the extension number of the door phone.
You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have a conversation.
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button.
EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY [HOT LINE]
If programmed, an executive boss and a secretary can have a hot line between
them. When the executive station is in the DND mode, all of its calls will ring the
secretary station. If the secretary does not answer, the caller will go to the secretary’s voice mail box if setup.
When an Executive/Secretary hotline is programmed to this keyset, the keyset
offers an additional screen option. This screen has options for setting the status of
the keyset user. This status update is viewable to EasySet users only.
•
•
Either person can press the Boss button to make a voice call to the other station.
Using the hot line will override DND at the other station.This button will have
a flashing indication when the other station is in use.
To transfer a call to a Boss in DND:
•
•
Press the Boss button.
Wait for the Boss to answer, then announce the call and hang up to complete
the transfer—OR—hang up to complete a blind transfer.
GROUP LISTENING
When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset, you may want
other people to hear the distant party’s voice over the speaker:
•
•
•
•
NOTE: Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office, it may be
advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up. This will eliminate a momentary squeal.
ACCOUNT CODES
When enabled, your system allows calls to be charged to different accounts. You
can enter account codes either by dialing the full code, by entering an account
code “bin number”, or by pressing your ACC (Account) key if one is assigned. Bin
numbers are a 3 digit short code that will automatically insert the appropriate
account code. Account codes may be a maximum of 12 digits (# may be used); if
the account code is to be less than 12 characters you may end the code by pressing , or the right soft key.The type of code used is determined by your telephone
system administrator. Codes can be entered before or during a call as follows:
To enter an account code before placing the call:
•
•
•
•
•
When the Boss or Secretary is needing to inform the other party of their current
status, they can send a message to their display.
•
•
•
•
58
Press the Func. soft button. Scroll to EXE/SECR MSG and press OK.
Select and hightlight one of the Return On messages and press the Edit soft
button.
Press and hold the Delete soft button to erase the default message.
Using the dial pad, type in the new message (refer to Text Input Method).
When finished press the Save then the Send soft button to display the message on the other (Boss/Secretary) phone.
Press your ACC (Account) key or dial 47.
Dial the account code or bin number.
You will receive a confirmation tone and display.
When prompted dial a trunk or trunk group (i.e. 9) and the telephone number
to call.
To enter an account code by interrupting the conversation:
Executive/Secretary (Messaging):
•
•
Press the Listen button to turn on the speaker. The microphone is not in use,
so the distant party does not hear other parties present in your office.
Press Listen again to turn the speaker off and resume private conversation.
Repeat if necessary.
—OR—
During a conversation, press Func. scroll to Group Listen and press OK.
While on an outside call press the ACC (Account) key or press Transfer followed by 47.
Dial the account number or bin number (if you are entering an account code
you will need to press your ACC (Account) key or right soft key to finalize the
entry)
NOTE: If you make an error simply repeat the procedure with the correct code.
Only the most recent account code dialed will be recorded.
59
Home Page
LOCKING YOUR KEYSET
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
You can lock your keyset to control misuse of your phone while you are away. You
can unlock it when you return.
Keysets may receive a voice announcement while on another call. The calling station must have an OHVA button. When you are in DND, you cannot receive OHVA
calls. The OHVA feature will work with intercom and transferred calls.
•
•
•
•
Press Menu button, scroll to Phone, press OK.
Scroll to Security option. Press OK.
Enter the Password [Default Password is “1234”]. Press OK.
There are three options available:
CHANGE PASSWORD: This can be used to change the station password.
DIAL: Allows the station user the option to select Lock All, Lock Outgoing, or
Unlocked.
1. UNLOCKED - No restrictions. User may complete internal and outside
calls.
2. LOCK OUTGOING - Restricted to incoming calls only. No outside calls can
be made. When 911 is programmed, 911 emergency dialing is allowed.
3. LOCK ALL - No calls, incoming or outgoing allowed to or from the set.
PHONE MODE: Allows the user to lock or unlock the menu from being
changed at the station.
•
•
•
Use the navigation soft button to scroll Left/Right to choose the desired
mode.
Press the OK button.
Press the Back soft button to return to Menu, and press Back soft button
again to return to idle screen.
MANUAL SIGNALLING
Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another station, regardless of the status of your phone (on-hook, off-hook, handsfree, DND, or
ringing).
To send a signal to another station:
•
•
Press the Manual Signalling (MS) button.
You may press the MS button repeatedly to send multiple signals to the designated station.
When you receive an OHVA and secure OHVA is ON, you will hear the announcement in the handset receiver, if you are using the handset. If secure OHVA is OFF
then you will hear the announcement on the speaker, if you are talking on the
handset. If you are using the speakerphone the announcement will always be
heard through the speaker.
To make an off-hook voice announcement:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Dial the extension number or press the DSS button.
When you receive a busy signal, press the OHVA button.
After the attention tone, begin speaking.
Finish the call by replacing the handset.
Press the flashing Call button on your keyset. This will place the original party
on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party.
To return to your first party, press the button corresponding to your original
call. This will disconnect the OHVA call.
NOTES:
1. When you are voice announcing to a station close to you, use the handset to
avoid an echo effect.
2. You cannot off-hook voice announce to single line telephones.
OHVA BLOCK
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Block (Block) button. Pressing this
button will prevent anyone from making an OHVA to you until you press the button again and cancel the blocking.
OHVA REJECT
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject (Reject) button. Pressing
this button while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing
party and return you to your original call.
NOTE:Your phone must have a Manual Signalling (MS) button with a station number extender assigned to it. Manual Signalling will override DND.
60
61
Home Page
IN GROUP/OUT OF GROUP
If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group, you can remove your keyset from
the group and then put it back in. While you are out of the group, you can receive
calls to your extension number but not calls to the group number. If you have an
IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button with the group number assigned.
•
•
Press the IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button.The button indicator will be lit steady
when your keyset is in the group.
Press the IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button again to exit the group and the indicator will go blank. Repeat as necessary.
If you do not have an IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button:
•
Dial the IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) access code number ________________, then
the group number, then 0 to exit the group or 1 to enter the group.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press Speaker button.
The IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button can include an extender to indicate the specific group that this button will affect. This means that if you are in multiple groups,
you can decide for which groups you will receive calls.
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET
AME PASSWORD
This feature allows customers using the AME feature to enable password protection. This will prevent unauthorized users from listening to your messages being
left. The passcode is the same as your station passcode. This feature only applies if
there is a Samsung Voicemail card installed in the system and your keyset has a
programmed AME button.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSCODE or 100 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
AUTO CAMP-ON
This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on, if possible, when
a busy station is called.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 081 to turn Camp-On on or 080 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
SELECT RING TONE
Each SMT-i5210 user can select from a variety of ring tones.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
•
•
Press Menu button, scroll to Phone, press OK.
Scroll to Sound option and press OK.
Select Ring Tone and press OK—OR—you may dial 1 and immediately enter
the option.
Use Navigation button to scroll through the available ring tones and press
OK or Save soft button to store your selection.
Press End soft button to return to idle screen.
CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE
From the factory, your station passcode is 1234.You can change your station passcode whenever you desire.
•
•
•
62
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 101.
Dial your old passcode.
Dial a new passcode (must be four characters). You can use 0–9.
63
Home Page
•
•
Redial the new passcode. If successful, you will hear two beeps. Four beeps
indicate an incorrect code to confirm, reenter the code again.
Press Transfer to store the new passcode.
tor to be lit solid to indicate this. Pressing the button while the button indicator is
lit solid will cause the keyset to return to handset mode and the button indicator
will go off.
SET ANSWER MODE (INTERCOM)
NOTE: If you need to switch between headset mode and handset mode (or speaker phone) during the conversation, you will need to put the call on hold first.
You can receive internal calls in one of three modes (see Answering Intercom Calls
under Intercom Calls for descriptions).
HOT KEYPAD
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 103.
Dial 0 for Ringing, 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
NOTE: When your keyset is programmed for Voice Announce and you have Forward No Answer (FNA) turned on, you must answer screened transfers by pressing
the OK button before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward.
SET ANSWER MODE (CO)
Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom answer mode.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO.
Press the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] to change status (ON/OFF).
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
AUTOMATIC HOLD
While on an outside call, pressing a line button, route button or a flashing CALL
button will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call.
This feature can be turned on or off at your keyset.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
HEADSET OPERATION
Keyset users can switch between headset mode and handset mode. When using
headset mode, press the Speaker button to answer and Speaker button to
release calls.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 021 to use the headset or 020 to use the handset.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
Your keyset is equipped with a Headset button. Pressing this button while the
indicator is off will cause the keyset to enter headset mode and the button indica64
On your phone system your keyset’s keypad can be made “live” or “hot” so that it is
not necessary to lift the handset or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing. Calls can be made and features activated by simply dialing the C.O. line number, trunk group access code, intercom number or feature access code.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
KEY CONFIRMATION TONE
You can hear a short beep (confirmation tone) each time you press a button on the
dial pad. This tone can be turned on or off.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 040 to turn tones off or 041 to turn tones on.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
Additional ring tones can be selected from the Menu, Phone, Sound,
Keytone option.
REJOINING A PAGE
This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page
after you return your keyset to idle. To enable this feature:
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
RING PREFERENCE
This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset or press
the Speaker button.This method will always answer calls in the order they arrived
at your keyset.When you turn ring preference off, you must press the flashing button to answer a call, allowing you to answer calls in the order you choose.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 061 to turn ring preference on or 060 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
65
Home Page
DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME
•
This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as
it is dialed.
•
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
CALLER ID REVIEW ALL
This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls
sent to their stations.This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in, first out basis.
The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station but that
you did not answer. When reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the
person back. The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number.
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 121 to turn CID Review All on or 120 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
SECURE OHVA
This option allows you to receive OHVA (Over Head Voice Announce) calls via the
speaker while you are on the handset.
•
•
•
With your handset on hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 131 to turn SECURE OHVA ON or 130 to turn it OFF.
Press Transfer to save your selection.
•
Dial the number of a C.O. line or trunk group to use when making calls to this
MOBEX port.
Dial the phone number you can be reached at by users calling this MOBEX
port.
Press Transfer to store your selection and exit programming.
To set the caller ID of the location you will be calling in from:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press Transfer and then dial 126.
Dial your station pass code.
Dial the number of the port you wish to configure (1-5) (you may also use the
Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] keys to select a port and press the Right
soft key to confirm).
Press Right soft button twice.
Dial the contact number.
Press Transfer to store your selection and exit programming.
To turn a MOBEX port ON or OFF:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press Transfer and then dial 126.
Dial your station pass code.
Dial the number of the port you wish to configure (1-5) (you may also use the
Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] keys to select a port and press the Right
soft key to confirm).
Dial 2 to select the activation status option.
Dial 0 to turn the port on, dial 1 to turn the port off.
Press Transfer to store your selection and exit programming.
CONFIGURE MOBILE EXTENSIONS [MOBEX]
This feature allows you to configure options for any Mobile Extension (MOBEX)
ports that are assigned to you by your telephone system administrator. You can
turn a port on or off; set the telephone number for the port; or set the caller ID you
will be calling in from.The caller ID field has no effect unless you have been authorized as an Executive MOBEX user. Check with your telephone system administrator
for further details on your specific system configuration.
To set the phone number a MOBEX port can reach you on:
•
•
•
•
66
Press Transfer and then dial 126.
Dial your station pass code.
Dial the number of the port you wish to configure (1-5) (you may also use the
Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] keys to select a port and press the Right
soft key to confirm).
Press Right soft button to move to telephone number.
67
Home Page
DISPLAY FEATURES
DIRECTORY INFORMATION
An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number.
Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before answering.
Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name. Incoming calls can be
easily identified and answered with different greetings.
Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display [CALL FOR xxx]
where xxx is the station group number. This allows you to answer calls directed to
you differently than calls directed to your group.
TIMER FUNCTION
Display keyset users may use this feature as a simple stopwatch.
•
•
•
•
VIEWING STATION MESSAGE INDICATIONS
You can view all of your message indications before you return them:
•
•
•
DISPLAY NUMBER DIALED
Display keysets begin showing digits as they are dialed. They will stay in the display until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the Timer button is
pressed. If the call duration timer is not used, the number dialed will be displayed
until the call is released, transferred or put on hold.
CALL DURATION TIMER
When the keyset is idle, press the Timer button to start timing.
Press the Timer button again to stop timing.
Read the elapsed time in the display.
Lift the handset and replace it. The display will return to date and time.
•
With the handset on-hook, press the Message button with the flashing indicator.
The first station that left a message indication will be displayed.
Press the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] buttons to scroll through the
stations that left message indications. Use the soft keys to reply, clear or
advance to the next message.
Press the End button to return your keyset to the idle condition.
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES
Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it.
This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory.
The system can be set to automatically time outside calls. A few seconds after you
dial a telephone number, the timer appears in the display. It appears immediately
for incoming calls. The call timer continues for the duration of the call. Call duration times are displayed in minutes and seconds. If a call lasts longer than 60 minutes, the timer restarts.
•
•
•
•
•
You can press the Timer button to manually begin timing a call. Press it again to
stop timing. If you press it while the automatic timer is on, the call duration time is
restarted.
NOTE: Use the Navigation button to move the cursor left or right, and use the
Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] buttons to increment the speed dial bins.
AUTO TIMER
Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer
incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 119.
Dial 41 to turn the auto timer on or 40 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
See Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers Section.
STATION NAMES
•
•
•
•
•
•
68
Press Transfer and then dial 106.
Dial the speed dial bin number 00–49.
Using the dial pad, enter the station name (See Station Names).
Press the Transfer button to store the speed dial name.
Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary.
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 104.
Enter the Station Name. Use the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] buttons
to move cursor.
Press TRANSFER to store the name.
—OR—
Press Menu button, select Settings, press OK.
Select Application Set., press OK.
Select Phone Name, press OK.
69
Home Page
•
•
Enter Station Name. Use the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] buttons to
move cursor.
Press Save soft button and then End soft button to store the name.
MANAGING PROGRAMMABLE
KEY ASSIGNMENTS
You can manage your key assignments for easy one touch operation of frequently used features.
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 107.
Use the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] buttons to scroll through all of
your programmable buttons.
Press Transfer to exit programming.
To program the programmable keys, press Menu, Settings, AOM Setting.
CALLER ID
SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID DISPLAY
Simultaneous display of Caller ID name and number on incoming CO calls on both
lines of display keysets is supported on all OfficeServ systems. On Transferred CO
calls, you can decide if you want to see the Caller ID name or Caller ID number in
the display. Regardless of which data is selected, you can press the NND button to
view the other pieces of Caller ID information. To select the type of Caller ID information you wish to view:
•
•
•
For example:
If you want to press a key that will direct calls to Joel at extension 3201. Select
an empty key and set the following:
•
•
•
Feature:
Ext. Number:
Display Name:
DSS
3201
Joel
If you want to press a key that will direct calls to Sue’s external phone number at
972-444-3456. Select an empty key and set the following:
•
•
•
•
Feature:
Speed
Ext. Number:
01
Display Name:
Sue
Use Transfer 105 to set speed dial number:
•
[xxxx] SPEED DIAL
01: 9-9724443456
Please consult your installation company to requested a complete list of descriptions for any keys you may have programmed on your keyset.
NOTE: Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender.
•
BACKSPACE WITH LCR
If you misdial while using LCR, you can delete digits shown in the display by pressing the Backspace soft key as many times as necessary or by pressing Clear to
delete all.
70
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 119.
To set the first line of a ringing call display dial 0.
To set the second line of a ringing call display dial 1.
Set the data to display from the following:
- To show nothing dial 0.
- To show Caller ID Number dial 1.
- To show Caller ID Name dial 2.
- To show the DID Number the call came in on dial 3.
- To show the Name of the DID the call came in on dial 4.
- To show the Name of the Group the call came in for dial 5.
- To show the DID Number and then Name of the DID dial 6.
- To show the Name of the DID and then the DID Number dial 7.
To set the top line of the display shown after answering a call dial 2.
Set the data to display from the following:
- To show Caller ID Number dial 0.
- To show Caller ID Name dial 1.
- To show the DID Number the call came in on dial 2.
- To show the Name of the DID the call came in on dial 3.
- To show Caller ID Number and then the DID Number dial 4.
- To show Caller ID Name and then the DID Number dial 5.
- To show the DID Number and then the name of the DID dial 6.
- To show the Name of the DID and then the DID Number dial 7.
- To show the C.O. line information dial 8.
To set the format if the C.O. line information when the above is set to show C.O.
line information dial 3.
- To show the C.O. line number and the dialed or Caller ID Number dial 0.
- To show only the dialed or Caller ID Number dial 1.
Press Transfer to exit and store your selection.
71
Home Page
VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL
In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped-on call at your keyset, you
can press the Next button to display the Caller ID information associated with the
call in queue at your keyset. Either the CID name or CID number will show in the
display depending on you Name/Number selection.
To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped-on to your keyset,
press the Next button.
INQUIRE CALLER ID PARK/HOLD INFO
If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you, you
may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call. This may influence
how you choose to handle the call.
From an idle keyset:
•
•
•
Press the Inquire button—OR—press CID button, then Func. soft button, and
the Inquire soft key.
Dial the trunk number.
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button—OR—you may use
Func. soft button and NND to view more information about this call—OR—
you can return to the idle condition by pressing Ignore.
If you are on a call:
•
•
•
Press the Func. soft button and then Inquire button. Your existing call will go
on hold—OR—press the CID button and Func. soft button then Inquire soft
button to place the first call on hold.
Dial the trunk number.
You may now answer the call by pressing the Func. soft button then the ANS
button—OR—you may use NND to view more information about this call—
OR—you can return to the idle condition by pressing the Func. soft button
and then Ignore.
NOTES:
1. If you are on an intercom call or you have Automatic Hold turned off, you must
finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring.
2. If you inquire about an outgoing call, you will receive a [call no longer available] display.
72
FEATURE ACCESS CODES
Paging Zones - Dial 55 plus
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Q
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
All External Zones
All Page
Feature Access Codes
0
10 + xxx
12 + xxx
13
16 + xxx
17
18
19
400
401
42 + xxx
43
44
45
46
47
48 + xx
49
53 + xxx + 1
53 + xxx + 0
Operator
Pick Up A Parked Call
Pick Up a Held Call
Door Lock Release
Speed Dialing
Save And Redial Number
New Call (Recall)
Last Number Redial
Cancel Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
Cancel Sent Message
Return Message
Callback
Busy Station Camp-On
Conference
Account Code
Cancel Programmed MSG
Send Flash to C.O. or PBX
In Group
Out of Group
56
600
601 + xxx
602 + xxx
603 + xxx
604 + xxx
605 + xxx
606 + xxx
65 + xxx
66 + xx
67
Q
Meet Me Answer
Cancel All Call Forward
Set Forward All Calls
Set Forward Busy
Set Forward No Answer
Set Forward Busy/No Answer
Set Forward on DND
Set Forward Follow Me
Pick Up Ringing Extension
Pick Up Group
Universal Answer
Authorization Code
73
Home Page
Samsung Voicemail
This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a
Subscriber. A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the various
features and services available in the Samsung Voicemail. Please review this section carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Services, known as
Subscriber Services.
SECTION 6.
APPLICATIONS
Voice Mail is one of the Subscriber Services available. Your voice mail box has the
capability of storing private messages, and offers a number of options for sending
or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new messages.
Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager. This allows you control over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your
callers in the event you are unable to speak to them directly. The ‘events’ are
referred to as “Call Conditions”. No-Answer, Busy, and Blocked are the most commonly used Call Conditions.
This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones
outside the office. The basic operation is the same, but the access method will be
different. See the Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more details.
Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all
Subscribers. See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature
availability.
74
75
Home Page
Subscriber Services Menu
Group New
Messages
Group Saved
Messages
11
33
Listen to New Review Saved
Messages
Messages
Group Messages Menu
1
Group
Urgent Messages
2
Group
Callback Requests
3
Group
Reminders
4
5
Group
Private Messages
Group
Fax Only Messages
1
9
#
0
*
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Listen Menu
1
11
Mailbox
Administration
Personal
Services
Pause, Resume
Play Menu
Options
Exit
2
4
5
6
#
8
0
*
2
Save
Message
3
Discard
Message
4
Reply to Sender
5
Place
Call to Sender
Forward a
Copy of Message
7
Rewind
5 Seconds
8
Pause, Resume
Message Playback
9
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
##
Change
Playback Speed
Skip to
Next Message
Scan Messages
To Create a
Reminder
1
Review
Recording
2
o
Stop, Append to
Recording
3
ing
Discard Recording
and Rerecord
4
Set
Delivery Options
ns
5
Specify
Future Delivery
6
SEND Message,,
Then Copy
7
Rewind
5 Seconds
77
Change
Playback Volume
me
8
Pause, Resume
e
Record/Playback
ck
9
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
99
Change
Playback Speed
d
0
Play
Menu Options
#
SEND Message,,
Then Exit Record
rd
00
Play Message
Information
0
Play
Menu Options
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
*
1
Follow Me
For a Directory
of Subscribers
r"
"Enter the Recipient's Number"
Change
Playback Volume
Play
Message Inventory
#
##
Deliver Copy
of Fax Message
6
99
#
Play Previous
Message
77
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
Personal
Greetings
Record Menu
Play
Message
Group
A Specific Sender
Play
Menu Options
Access
Manager
3
55
8
Record & Send
Messages
1
Assign and/or Edit
Primary Greeting
1
Change
Message Alert
Aler
1
Review
Workload
2
Assign and/or Edit
Busy Greeting
2
Change
Pager Notification
Notific
2
Edit Stored
Telephone Numbers
3
Block All Calls
3
Assign and/or Edit
Blocking Greeting
3
Review Deleted
Delet
Messages
3
Change
Weekly Schedule
1
Change
Password
4
Call forwarding
4
Assign and/or Edit
Night Greeting
4
Review Undelivered
Unde
Messages
5
Place a
Direct Call
2
Record
Name
5
Call Screening
5
Assign and/or Edit
Screened Greeting
5
Auto Play
New Messages
Message
3
Enter Directory
Name
6
Find Me
6
Edit Only
Personal Greetings
6
Auto Play Me
Message
Information
7
Personal
Administration
4
Extended
Prompting
7
Auto Set
Night Intercept
7
Edit Only
Mailbox Greeting
8
Pause, Resume
Resum
Menu Prompting
Prompt
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
9
Record and Send
S
Broadcast Message
Me
0
Play
Menu Options
#
Play
Access Coverage
0
Play
Menu Options
0
Play
Menu Options
#
Record
a Reminder
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
0
Play
Menu Options
*
Cancel, Retur
Return
to Subscriber Services
0
Play
Menu Options
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
ervices
NOTE: All options shown MAY NOT be authorized. If an option is not available
please speak to your system administrator.
*Change Playback Speed and Volume not available on the OfficeServ 7030,
OfficeServ 7100, OfficeServ 7200-S or OfficeServ IP-UMS.
76
77
Home Page
ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX
GETTING STARTED
[Also known as Subscriber Services Menu]
Inside Callers [Subscriber logging in from their Desk]
Using your new Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services is as simple as following a
few simple spoken instructions. First time users should read this section as a tutorial. You should start with the following steps:
•
•
Dial the voicemail access number or press the key assigned to ring
voicemail [VMMSG].
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is 0000).
Outside Callers [Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the
office environment]
•
•
•
Dial the phone number that will be answered by the voicemail. The main
greeting will answer.
At the main greeting dial [#] plus your Subscriber (or mailbox) number
(Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number).
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is 0000).
Access your Subscriber Services (or Mailbox) from a Station
other than your Own (or checking a mailbox associated with a
different station)
•
•
•
Press the [VMMSG] key or dial the voicemail group number. You will be
prompted to enter a password.
Press [,]. This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu.
Press [#] plus the Subscriber number of your choice. You will be prompted to
enter you password.
At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions. You will
hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox.You will then
hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options:
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
,
Listen to New Messages - See Listening to your Message.
Record and Send Message - See Sending Messages.
Review Saved Messages - See Listening to your Message.
Access Manager - See Access Manager.
Personal Greetings - See Personal Greetings.
Mailbox Administration - See Mailbox Administration.
Personal Services - See Personal Services.
Return to Main Menu.
Voicemail and the Function Soft button: When accessing and retrieving voicemails from the mailbox, the service options such as (1) Listening to Messages, (2)
Record and Send Messages, and (3) Review Saved Messages are available and
can be accessed through the dial pad or through the Function soft key. When
pressing the function soft button the options will be displayed. Scroll to and press
the OK button to select an option from the Function Menu.
78
•
Access your Subscriber Services Menu - You already know how to do this.
From the Subscriber Services Menu:
•
•
•
•
•
Record a Primary/No-Answer Personal Greeting. Dial [5][1].
Record a Mailbox Greeting. Dial [5][7].
Change your access code (Password). Dial [#][7][1].
Record your name. Dial [#][7][2].
Enter your directory name. Dial [#][7][3].
After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and
ready to use.
LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES
If there are new messages in your mailbox your [VMMSG] key will be lit. Call the
Samsung Voicemail by pressing this key, and when prompted enter your password. You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu. Select [1] to listen to new
messages or [3] to listen to saved messages.
Note: After you enter your password, if “Autoplay of New Messages” is enabled and
you have new messages the Samsung Voicemail will begin to play them automatically. A subscriber can control this feature. From the Subscriber Services Menu [6]
[5] toggles “Autoplay of New Messages” ON/OFF.
SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU
The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu.
1
11
2
3
33
4
5
6
8
0
,
#
LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES
GROUP NEW MESSAGES
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES
GROUP OLD MESSAGES
ACCESS MANAGER
PERSONAL GREETINGS
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
PAUSE / RESUME
PLAY MENU OPTIONS
EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT
PERSONAL SERVICES
79
Home Page
1 or 3
LISTENING TO OLD OR NEW MESSAGES
1
Play / replay the message you just heard.
11
Play the previous message.
2
Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
3
Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
4
Reply to the message.
This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender (if the
sender has a mailbox on this system).
5
Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message.
This will work for internal and external callers, but Caller ID service is needed to use this feature on an outside call.
55
Deliver a fax copy.
This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document(s). Faxmail documents can be delivered to any fax machine of your choice as long as out
calling is authorized. You can also have faxmail messages automatically
delivered to the fax machine of your choice.
6
Forward the message and saves a copy.
The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailbox number (nnn), using
the directory service (#) or you may also add comments and leave it as a
memo to yourself (##).
The Send and Copy Service (option 6) allows a user to send copies of a message to multiple recipients easily. A different introduction message may be
left for each recipient.
Play options.
0
Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this
point.
00
Hear the time and date, and sender's information of the message you just
heard. Sender information is not available on outside calls.
#
Move to the next message. This does not Save or Discard the current message - it is retained as new.
##
Scan. Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message. This is
similar to the scan button on a radio. It will allow you to find a specific message quickly. To stop scanning press [1].
,
Cancel and return to previous menu.
11 or 33
GROUP NEW OR OLD MESSAGES
Messages can be grouped as either Reminders, press [3] or Messages from a specific sender, press [9].
Additionally you can press [#] and hear a summary of your mailbox contents:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Number of messages
Number of reminders
Number of urgent messages
Number of messages needing a callback
Number of private messages
Number of fax messages
2
7
Rewind the message 5 seconds.
77
Change playback volume of the recording. [Not available on the OS 7030,
OS 7100, OS 7200-S or OS IP-UMS]
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
There are two levels of volume during playback. Dialing this code will toggle between the two levels.
This option is used to send a message to another subscriber. The steps are simple:
8
Pause or resume during message playback.
a)
9
Fast forward the message 5 seconds.
99
Change playback speed of the recording. [Not available on OS 7030, OS
7100, OS 7200-S or OS IP-UMS]
There are two levels of speed during playback. Dialing this code will toggle
between the two speeds.
80
Enter the recipient’s mailbox number, or if this is not known enter [#] to use
the system directory.
b) Record your message at the tone. After recording the message, you will hear
the Send Menu with the following functions:
1
2
Review
Continue Recording
81
Home Page
3
4
5
6
#
Discard and Re-Record
Set Message Attributes (Delivery Options)
Schedule Future Delivery
Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else
Save and Send the Recording
Setting Message Attributes
If after recording a message you select [4] you can set up any combination of the
following delivery options:
1
2
3
4
5
,
Urgent Delivery
Return Receipt Requested
Request a Call Back
Private Delivery
Reply Required
Exit
4
ACCESS MANAGER
The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when,
where and how, and/or if the Samsung Voicemail contacts you when a caller dials
your extension number. All of the options are toggled on/off based on their current status when you access them.
Note: ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed by the System
Administrator for each Subscriber. They are:
1
Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new
destination (Designated Location) will be active.This number may be an internal or external number. This is useful if you are frequently traveling or changing the number where you can be reached.
Scheduling Future Delivery
When Follow Me is activated, the transfer will be supervised and confirmed.
This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at
the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber’s mailbox.
If after recording a message you select [5] to schedule future delivery, you will be
able to set message attributes and set this message as:
#
1
2
3
4
5
,
Immediate Delivery
Next Few Hours
End of Current Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
Beginning of Next Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
A Coming Day of the Week
Specific Day / Time
Exit
Follow Me
3
Call Blocking
When this feature is active, callers will not be transferred to your extension,
they will hear your 'blocked' greeting (if recorded) and will go directly to your
mailbox if they do not select any or are not offered any other options.
4
Call Forwarding
Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alternate
location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to another Subscriber. The “Forwarded To” Subscriber will now be in control of the
caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber’s Mailbox. If the
“Forwarded To” Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow what
ever the “Forwarded To” Subscriber has set up for their call conditions. The
Caller will hear “Forwarding to”“{Subscriber Name}” before actually being forwarded.
5
Call Screening
If this is turned on, the caller will be asked their name and the Samsung
Voicemail will play this name to you before the transfer, giving you an option
to accept or reject the call.
82
83
Home Page
6
Find Me
Find Me, when enabled, will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list of
preprogrammed phone numbers. The stored phone numbers are entered in
'Personal Services' [#][2] (if allowed by the Administrator). The stored telephone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers.
The Find Me feature only use the first five.
7
The Call Coverage conditions that you can assign specific greetings to are selected by the following digits:
1
Used when in your office, away from your desk or during the time period you
are scheduled available. If this is the only Personal Greeting you record, it will
play for all call coverage conditions.
Night Intercept
This feature is dependent on your weekly availability schedule, which is
entered in 'Personal Services' [#][3] (if allowed by the Administrator). When
Night Intercept is active the Samsung Voicemail will first ring your extension
then play your primary, No Answer greeting during the day (when you are
available) and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greeting during the night (when you are not available).
Primary/No Answer Greeting
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Basic
Greeting' feature.
Example:“Hi this is John Smith. I'm sorry I am not available to answer your call.
If someone else can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to
leave me a message, press 1.”
2
Busy Greeting
Note: This does NOT use the Day and Night schedules of the phone system. It
is solely controlled by the Subscriber’s Availability Schedule.
Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension
or the telephone at your Designated Location.
8
Pause / Resume
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Busy
Greeting' feature.
,
Exit from Access Manager
0
Play All Options
#
Play Access Coverage
This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings are set. It
will also tell you what greetings will play under each of the call conditions you
have setup.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm on another line right now. If someone else
can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave a message,
press 1.”
3
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Blocking' feature.
5
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. Sorry I missed your call, but I'm going to be out
of the office for the next few hours. If someone else can help you, please enter
the extension number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
PERSONAL GREETINGS
The options available in this menu will be determined by your System
Administrator, and not all of them may be available to you. In the simplest systems,
only a mailbox greeting will be available, additional greetings may be accessible in
more complex systems.
Call Blocking Greeting
Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone
is forwarded ALL or DND.
4
Night Greeting
Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE, usually after
business hours during the evening and at night.
Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension
and you do not answer.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the
'Scheduling' feature.
You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings, and you may assign any one of them
to be active. There are several different 'Call Coverage' conditions to which you
may assign any of your 9 greetings. The Call Coverage Conditions are: No-Answer,
Busy, and Do Not Disturb (or Forwarded All). This will allow different greetings to
play depending on the type of call forward that you have set, or the condition of
your telephone.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I've left the office for the evening. If you would
like to try someone else, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave
me a message, press 1.”
84
85
Home Page
5
Call Screening Greeting
6
Used while Call Screening is enabled, and you REJECT a caller after listening to
the caller's record name.
6
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Screening' feature.
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm sorry, but I am not available to speak with
you at this time. If someone else can help you, please enter the extension
number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notification, message alert options and other message control features.
Edit Personal Greetings
1
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call any outside or
inside telephone number, after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
You may also edit/record each one of the greetings (1-9) at any time.
Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your
greeting. When you are done recording your greeting, you will be able to listen to the greeting you recorded, save the greeting you recorded and return
to the previous menu, record the greeting again, or exit without saving the
greeting.
To hear your message at the remote location when the Samsung Voicemail
calls you, after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed
that there is a message and to enter your password. Simply enter your password and you will now be logged in.
Note: If you record only the greeting assigned to the No-Answer Call Coverage
Condition, then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage
Conditions (No-Answer, Busy, Blocked, Night, and Rejected Caller). In this case,
the salutation part of the greeting should be very general.
7
Message Alert
Setting Up Message Alert:
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [1] for Message Alert.
n
There are 4 options available to you:
Edit Mailbox Greeting
Press [1] to toggle message alert on and off.
Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded any
of the Call Coverage greetings. The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox
greeting directly, is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mailbox using the VT (VoiceMail Transfer) key.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Mailbox
Greeting Option' feature.
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be notified.
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
Press [4] to set the destination phone number.
2
Pager Notification
Example: “Hi, this is John Smith. Please leave me a message, I will call you as
soon as I can.”
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call your beeper
service and notify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
Note: This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has
played to the caller. A common usage for this Greeting is when another
Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to transfer the caller directly to your Mailbox.
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [2] for pager notification.
n
There are 4 options available to you:
Press [1] to toggle pager notification on and off.
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be paged.
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
Press [4] to set the pager phone number.
86
87
Home Page
3
Undelete
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to
undelete any messages that you have recently deleted (up to the programmed Daily Maintenance Time, which is set to 3 a.m. by Default the following morning).
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [3] for Deleted Messages.
Deleted voice mail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a.m.
the following day. Select this option to recover ("undelete") previously deleted messages, during this period of time.
4
9
MESSAGE BROADCAST
This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System
Administrator.
Broadcast to All Mailboxes
If you have been designated as a Subscriber Administrator, you may send a
message to ALL mailboxes in the system.
Undelivered Retrieval
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to recall
any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been picked up by the recipient.
n
Press [9] for Broadcast Messages.
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [4] for Undelivered Messages.
This option will only be available if your mailbox has been assigned
Subscriber Administration privileges.
#
This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet
been picked up by the recipient.
PERSONAL SERVICES
5
Auto Play New Messages
If this option is enabled, after you enter your password correctly any new messages will immediately begin to play. To enable (or if already enabled toggle
and disable) this feature:
6
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [5] to Set Auto Play of New Messages.
The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your
name. Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator.
1
Allows you to access to all reminders, both Active and Pending. If authorized
you can group your reminders as Commitments, Follow-Ups or Tasks for better organization. The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending
(pending means scheduled for future delivery).
Auto Play Message Information
If this option is enabled, the date, time and sender’s name will be played automatically before each message. If this is disabled, the information must be
requested manually by pressing ‘00’. To enable (or if already enabled toggle
and disable) this feature:
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [6] to Set Auto Play of Message Information.
Workload Management
2
Stored Numbers
Allows you to enter up to 9 stored phone numbers. The first five of these are
used in the 'Find Me' feature, but any of them (1-9) can be easily dialed using
only one digit followed by the pound key, to be used by many other features
from within your subscriber space. (ie: “Follow Me, “Message Alert”, “Pager
Alert”, and “Direct Call”).
3
Schedule Availability
Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with Night Personal
Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature. Follow the spoken directions
88
89
Home Page
to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to
your callers. All other times you will be considered unavailable.
5
n
Place a Direct Call
Allows you to place a direct call out of the Samsung Voicemail from anywhere.
You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1-5 that corresponds to a
stored number (See Personal Services, 2 - Stored Numbers). This feature must
be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited or opened to
internal, local, and long distance calls.
This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly.
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name (described above)
and/or enter your Directory Name, you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
4
7
Personal Administration
This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings (see next
section).
PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS
This menu allows you to make changes to basic setup settings, that are rarely
changed. Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings.
You probably will not need to change them after that.
1
2
Setting your Password
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][1].
n
The current password will be played and you will have the chance to
change it.
Recording your Name
Use this option to record your name. Your recorded name is played in several
different situations. It is important to record your name for proper operation
of the Samsung Voicemail system.
Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the
subscriber interface (mailbox prompts). Change this setting only if you are
very familiar with the user operation of the SVMi E-Series.
Note: Remember if you know what digits to press, you can enter them at any
time you do not have to wait to be prompted. This feature can be toggled
on/off at anytime. Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber
menu to press zero for more options. This enables you to still be able to find
out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled.
KEYSET USER FEATURES
The following options are available if you have a display keyset.They require setup
by the System Administrator.
Message Waiting Lights
When new messages are left in your mailbox, the voice mail message light on your
keyset will flash. Press this flashing key [VMMSG] and follow the prompts to
retrieve messages.This key may be pressed at any time to log into your Subscriber
Main Menu.
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][2].
Answer Machine Emulation
n
The current name will be played and you will have the chance to change
it.
If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset, you
can use it to monitor calls going to your voice mail, and optionally answer them.
The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering
machine.
Entering your Directory Name
Use this option to enter your Directory Name. Your Directory Name is used by
callers to find you if they do not know your extension number.
n
90
Extended Prompting
n
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name and/or enter your
Directory Name (described below), you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
3
The current Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are
equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad. Follow the
instructions to enter a new name.You will be prompted to enter your last
name and then your first name.
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][3].
Your keyset must be set to forward on no answer to voice mail. After ringing your
station the caller will be connected to your voice mail and hear your personal
greeting before leaving a message. During this time you will be monitoring the
connection between the caller and your voice mail box. At this time you will only
be monitoring the call, you can not talk to the other party until you answer. You
may pick up the call at any time or ignore it.
91
Home Page
To activate this feature press the AME button. The associated indicator will be lit
steady. Press again to turn off. If this key is pressed while a station is ringing (during forward no answer), the feature will be turned on for the current call only.
SHORTCUTS
While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may:
Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press [#] to immediately
send the call to the called parties mailbox.
n
Press [#] to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it.
n
Press [,] to immediately disconnect your station.The caller continues to leave
a message normally.
n
Pick up the handset and monitor privately.
n
Press ANS / RLS to answer the call (using the handset or speaker).
AME Password
If your keyset has AME Password (MMC 110) set to Yes, you must enter your station password to listen to messages being left.This will prevent unauthorized people from listening to messages being left for you.
If the password option is turned on, while a message is being left, press the flashing AME indicator and enter your station password (not your SVMi E-Series password). You will then hear the message being left.
Call Record
If you have a call record button assigned to your phone, you may press it at any
time, to record the conversation in progress. If you have a display keyset, you will
also have the soft key options to pause and time the message.
Calling
Call Divert to Voicemail
While receiving an incoming (ringing) call, dial [,] to immediately send the caller
to your personal voicemail box. This will override the call forward no answer setting.
Direct Messaging
[#] + DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without having to dial their extension number first, keyset users may simply dial [#] plus a
mailbox (extension) number and leave a message directly. If you dial a busy extension press [#] to connect directly with the mailbox.
Self Memo (Reminder)
Pressing [##] will leave a message in your own mailbox. This is useful to remind
yourself of things to do now or in the future. Messages can be sent with future
delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due.
INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS
Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays
to play, save, delete, reply, call, forward, rewind, pause, fast forward, change the volume, get message information, or help.
Viewing Mailbox Contents
If you have new messages, in addition to the Telephone Status Indicator (TSI) you
will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the SVMi
E-Series.
E-MAIL GATEWAY (EMG)
The E-Mail Gateway feature integrates your voice mail box with your email client.
No matter what email client software you are using or where you use it, you can
send voice mail messages and fax mail messages to your E-Mail inbox.
There are two parts to the E-Mail Gateway; E-Message Delivery and E-Message
Notification.
92
93
Home Page
1. E-MESSAGE DELIVERY: Voice mail messages (.wav) and/or fax mail messages
(.tiff ) are "delivered" to your Inbox with the appropriate attached file.
2. E-MESSAGE NOTIFICATION: You will receive an e-mail, with NO attachments,
notifying you that you have a voice and/or fax mail message in your Voice Mail
Box.
•
•
•
As a subscriber you can use either E-Message Delivery and/or E-Message
Notification.
As a subscriber you can have multiple e-mail addresses. (a maximum of 5
valid email addresses).
E-Message Notification can be set to one e-mail address while E-Message
Delivery is set to different e-mail address.
Functionality
•
•
•
With either type of EMG, when Caller ID (CID) is provided, the callers telephone number will appear in the subject field of the email along with the date
and time stamp of when the voice message was originally recorded in your
Voice Mail Box.
If the caller is also a subscriber on the system and the E-Mail Gateway is set up
with a valid "Reply To" address, the Subscriber's name will also appear in the
"From" field. Otherwise, the "From" field will display the name of the Samsung
voice mail system (SVMi-8E, SVMi-16E, or SVMi-20E) sending the message.
Client will use their PC's Multi-Media kit (equipped with either speakers
and/or a headset) to listen to messages delivered to their e-mail Inbox.
IMPORTANT NOTE: If the PC/Laptop/PDA/Smart Phone/etc… is not
equipped with hardware and software capable of playing a '.WAV' file then
the E-Mail Gateway will not work for them until they add some method to
listen to '.WAV' files delivered to their Inbox.
The same applies to Fax Mail messages, if the device the subscriber is using
does not support the viewing of '.TIFF' files, then the E-Mail Gateway for
Fax Mail will not work for them until they add some method to view .tiff
files delivered to their inbox.
•
No Synchronization of messages is performed between the Voice Mail Box
and the E-mail Inbox.
-
-
94
-
•
However, the Voice Mail Administrator can adjust parameters per subscriber or group of subscribers that decide how, when, or if to delete the
original voice message after it is sent to the E-Mail Server.
When full synchronization of messages between Voicemail Box and E-mail
Inbox is required, ask your Samsung representative about the OfficeServ IPUMS. This is an Internet Protocol based fully synchronized Unified Messaging
System.
Benefits
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Store and Archive Voice and Fax Mail Messages in visible folders.
Voice and Fax Mail Messages can now easily be dragged and dropped into
folders the same way e-mail messages are organized and saved.
Voice and Fax Mail Messages are now essentially the same as any other e-mail
message.
Backups and Message Archives can be made when they are made for all other
types of e-mail messages.
Add text notes and comments to use for reference later.
Some (if not all) e-mail clients will allow you to edit the body of the e-mail to
add comments.
Some will allow you to edit the subject field to help you find a particular message quickly in a large archive of messages.
Call Back Numbers and Date & Time Stamp are easily displayed in the Subject
field.
Easily forward Voice messages received, to others even if they are not a Voice
Mail Subscriber on your system.
No EMG System or Client Software to load on your Local PC or Network
Servers.
Therefore compatible with most:
-
E-Mail providers and E-Mail Clients
-
PCs, Laptops, PDA, and/or Smartphones
NOTE: If you are not sure you have this functionality on your system and
you would like to use it, please contact your on Site system administrator
to see if it is available.
Messages listened to, forwarded, deleted, and/or saved within an e-mail
inbox will NOT effect the status of that same new message in the Voice
Mail or the MWI (Message Waiting Indicator) associated with that message on the phone.
Also messages listened to in the Voice Mail, from a phone, will not change
the Unread/Read status of the same message in an e-mail inbox.
95
Home Page
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
00
_________________________
_________________________
25
_________________________
_________________________
01
_________________________
_________________________
26
_________________________
_________________________
02
_________________________
_________________________
27
_________________________
_________________________
03
_________________________
_________________________
28
_________________________
_________________________
04
_________________________
_________________________
29
_________________________
_________________________
05
_________________________
_________________________
30
_________________________
_________________________
06
_________________________
_________________________
31
_________________________
_________________________
07
_________________________
_________________________
32
_________________________
_________________________
08
_________________________
_________________________
33
_________________________
_________________________
09
_________________________
_________________________
34
_________________________
_________________________
10
_________________________
_________________________
35
_________________________
_________________________
11
_________________________
_________________________
36
_________________________
_________________________
12
_________________________
_________________________
37
_________________________
_________________________
13
_________________________
_________________________
38
_________________________
_________________________
14
_________________________
_________________________
39
_________________________
_________________________
15
_________________________
_________________________
40
_________________________
_________________________
16
_________________________
_________________________
41
_________________________
_________________________
17
_________________________
_________________________
42
_________________________
_________________________
18
_________________________
_________________________
43
_________________________
_________________________
19
_________________________
_________________________
44
_________________________
_________________________
20
_________________________
_________________________
45
_________________________
_________________________
21
_________________________
_________________________
46
_________________________
_________________________
22
_________________________
_________________________
47
_________________________
_________________________
23
_________________________
_________________________
48
_________________________
_________________________
24
_________________________
_________________________
49
_________________________
_________________________
96
97
Home Page
Home Page
SMT-i3105
Keyset User Guide
For OfficeServ™ 7000 Series Systems
05/2010
Home Page
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS BOOK ......................................................................................................1
SECTION 1. CAUTION AND PREPARATION ....................................2
CAUTION ..............................................................................................................................3
PREPARATION ..................................................................................................................4
Check the Contents of the Box ................................................................................4
Phone Installation ......................................................................................................4-5
SECTION 2. PHONE FUNCTIONS ..................................................................6
SMT-i3105 LAYOUT ....................................................................................................7
Names and Functions ..................................................................................................7
KEY FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................9
Telephone Status Indicator ........................................................................................9
Screen Structure ............................................................................................................9
Text Input Method ......................................................................................................10
Description of Icons....................................................................................................11
Navigating the Display ..............................................................................................11
SMT-i3105 SETUP ......................................................................................................12
Initializing the SMT-i3105 ........................................................................................12
Setup Mode ..................................................................................................................12
Easy Install Wizard ......................................................................................................13
Selecting the Static IP Option ................................................................................13
Setting Up Hot Desking (Idle Login) ....................................................................13
Configuration Menu Structure................................................................................14
SECTION 3. FREQUENTLY USED
FEATURE OPERATION ..........................................................15
Copyright 2010 Samsung Telecommunications America.
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic,
electronic or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying or information retrieval systems—
without express written permission of the publisher of this material.
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing
may warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from
the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.
LOGGING IN & OUT ..................................................................................................16
PLACING CALLS............................................................................................................16
ANSWERING CALLS ..................................................................................................17
PLACING A CALL ON HOLD ..............................................................................18
TRANSFERRING CALLS ..........................................................................................18
TRANSFERRING WITH CAMP-ON..................................................................18
CALL WAITING ..............................................................................................................19
Home Page
CONFERENCE CALLS ................................................................................................19
FORWARDING CALLS ..............................................................................................19
OTHER FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS ..................................................20-23
SECTION 4. PHONE FEATURES ....................................................................24
BASIC MENUS..........................................................................................................................25
Soft Button Structure ................................................................................................26
Menu Soft Button ........................................................................................26-32
Func. Soft Button ................................................................................................32
AOM Soft Button ................................................................................................32
SECTION 5. OFFICESERV 7000 SYSTEM FEATURES ..........33
OUTSIDE CALLS ..........................................................................................................34
Making Calls from AOM ............................................................................................34
Universal Answer ........................................................................................................34
Recall Dial Tone ............................................................................................................34
Sending a Flash ............................................................................................................34
Busy Line Queuing with Callback..........................................................................34
Busy Station Callback ................................................................................................35
Canceling Callback......................................................................................................35
Busy Station Camp-On........................................................................................35-36
INTERCOM CALLS ......................................................................................................37
Voice Announce Mode ..............................................................................................37
Auto Answer Mode ....................................................................................................37
Calling your System Operator ................................................................................37
CALL PROCESSING ....................................................................................................38
System Hold ..................................................................................................................38
Exclusive Hold ..............................................................................................................38
Remote Hold ................................................................................................................38
Hold Recall ....................................................................................................................39
Consultation Hold ......................................................................................................39
Retrieving Calls Held at Another Station............................................................39
Call Transfer ..................................................................................................................40
Transfer with Camp-On ............................................................................................40
Transfer to Voice Mail ................................................................................................41
Call Waiting....................................................................................................................41
Call Forward Options ................................................................................................41
Station Call Pickup ......................................................................................................42
Group Call Pickup........................................................................................................43
My Group Pickup ........................................................................................................43
Privacy Release ............................................................................................................43
DIALING FEATURES ..................................................................................................44
Speed Dialing................................................................................................................44
Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers ..................................................44
Directory Dialing..........................................................................................................45
Last Number Redial ....................................................................................................46
Save Number with Redial ........................................................................................46
Automatic Redial/Retry ............................................................................................46
Pulse to Tone Changeover ......................................................................................46
PAGING AND MESSAGING ..................................................................................47
Making and Internal Page ........................................................................................47
Making an External Page..........................................................................................47
All Page ..........................................................................................................................47
Meet Me Page ..............................................................................................................48
Call Park and Page ......................................................................................................48
Messages—Set and Cancel ..............................................................................49-50
Returning Messages ..................................................................................................50
Programmed Messages ............................................................................................50
CONVENIENCE FEATURES ..................................................................................51
Logging In and Out ....................................................................................................51
Do Not Disturb ............................................................................................................51
One Time DND..............................................................................................................51
Mute ................................................................................................................................52
Background Music ......................................................................................................52
Established Call Pick-Up............................................................................................52
Door Phone Calls ..................................................................................................52-53
Group Listening ..........................................................................................................53
Account Codes ............................................................................................................53
Manual Signalling........................................................................................................54
Off-Hook Voice Announce ......................................................................................54
OHVA Block....................................................................................................................55
OHVA Reject ..................................................................................................................55
In Group/Out of Group..............................................................................................55
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET ..........................................................................56
AME Password ..............................................................................................................56
Auto Camp-On ............................................................................................................56
Select Ring Tone ..........................................................................................................56
Change Your Passcode ..............................................................................................56
Set Answer Mode (Intercom) ..................................................................................57
Set Answer Mode (CO) ..............................................................................................57
Automatic Hold............................................................................................................57
Hot Keypad ....................................................................................................................57
Key Confirmation Tone..............................................................................................58
Rejoining a Page ..........................................................................................................58
Home Page
Ring Preference............................................................................................................58
Display Speed Dial Name ........................................................................................58
Caller ID Review All ....................................................................................................59
Secure OHVA ................................................................................................................59
Configure Mobile Extensions (MOBEX) ..............................................................59
DISPLAY FEATURES ..................................................................................................61
Directory Information................................................................................................61
Display Number Dialed ............................................................................................61
Call Duration Timer ....................................................................................................61
Auto Timer ....................................................................................................................61
Timer Function ............................................................................................................62
Viewing Station Message Indications..................................................................62
Personal Speed Dial Names ....................................................................................62
Station Names ..............................................................................................................62
Managing Programmable Key Assignments ....................................................63
Backspace with LCR ....................................................................................................63
CALLER ID..........................................................................................................................64
Selecting Your Caller ID Display ............................................................................64
Viewing the Next Caller ID Call ..............................................................................65
Inquire Caller ID Park/Hold Info ............................................................................65
FEATURE ACCESS CODES ....................................................................................66
SECTION 6. APPLICATIONS ..............................................................................67
SAMSUNG VOICEMAIL ..........................................................................................68
Accessing Your Mailbox ............................................................................................69
SVMi E-Series Subscriber Services Menu Diagram ..................................70–71
Getting Started ............................................................................................................72
Listen to your Messages ...........................................................................................72
Subscriber Services Menu .......................................................................................72
Listening to Old or New Messages ......................................................................73
Group New or Old Messages ..................................................................................74
Record and Send a Message ..................................................................................74
Access Manager ..........................................................................................................76
Personal Greetings......................................................................................................77
Mailbox Administration ............................................................................................80
Message Broadcast ....................................................................................................82
Personal Services ........................................................................................................82
Personal Administration Settings ........................................................................83
Keyset User Features ................................................................................................84
Shortcuts ......................................................................................................................86
Interactive Displays ....................................................................................................86
E-Mail Gateway (EMG) ........................................................................................86–88
ABOUT THIS BOOK
The new Samsung Multimedia Telephone SMT-i3105 keyset is part of the
OfficeServ 7000 Series.
The SMT-i3105 keyset represents a new concept of Internet phone, in that it uses
an IP address to Send/Receive voice and data. For voice communications, the SMTi3105 uses the data network line already in place in most offices and increasing
number of homes.
This guide contains 6 sections: Section 1. Caution and Preparation, Section 2.
Phone Functions, Section 3. Frequently Used Feature Operation, Section 4. Phone
Features, Section 5. OfficeServ 7000 System Features and Section 6. Applications.
Please take the time to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation
of your keyset. Keep this guide handy, as you may need to look up instructions for
infrequently used features.
This book is written based on factory default settings, for the feature access codes.
Sometimes, due to programming requirements, these codes may be changed. If
you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book, please contact your installation and service company to determine the correct code.
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS......................................................89–90
1
Home Page
CAUTION
SECTION 1.
CAUTION AND PREPARATION
2
•
Read the installation instructions before connecting the system to its power
source.
•
If there is dirt or moisture on the pin contact surface of a power plug, pull out
the plug and wipe it away with a cloth. If dirt or moisture remains on the product even after wiping, contact the service center.
•
For the power connection port of the phone, use the supplied power
adapter.(The power adapter is supplied separately.) Use of a power adapter
that does not meet the specifications may cause the product to become damaged, to overheat, or to explode.
•
Do not place the phone in a location with a lot of dust, in a location that is subject to severe changes in temperature, or near a heating device (cigarette
heat, heater, etc.)
•
Do not use or store flammable spray or materials near the phone.
•
Do not place vases, flowerpots, cups, or a container of cosmetics or drugs near
the phone.
•
Installation of equipment must not route interconnecting cables or external
power supply sources outdoors.
•
The LAN cable to the network should be connected to the LAN port of a
phone, NOT to the PC connection port.
•
Use a soft and dry cloth when cleaning the phone. Do not spray water directly onto the product; and do not use chemicals such as wax, benzene, alcohol,
thinner, mosquito killer, perfume spray, lubricant, detergent, etc.
3
Home Page
Connect the LAN cable (connected through the middle hole of the base to a
network) to the LAN port of the phone, as shown in the figure.
PREPARATION
CHECK THE CONTENTS OF THE BOX
Check if the product package box includes all the components as follows:
•
•
•
Phone body including a base
Handset and Handset Cord
Patch cable
NOTE: Power transformer sold separately. If any of these items are missing or damaged, please contact your dealer.
PHONE INSTALLATION
When power is supplied from the LAN port (PoE) (802.3af ), the phone is
powered via LAN connection.
If PoE is not supported, connect the power adapter to the power (-DV 5V)
port of the phone by running the cable through the middle hole of the base
as shown in the figure below. If the connected power adapter is plugged into
an outlet (120AC), the phone is booted. (The power adapter is supplied
separately.)
4 Fix the base to the phone body by fitting the bottom groove and then
securing the top side.
Connecting the Phone Body
1 Remove the base of the phone by
pressing the [Push] mark on the top
of the base.
2
5 Secure the cable along the cable
guideline as shown in the figure. For
the cable of power adaptor, give
some slack before securing the cable
to the guideline to prevent easy
disconnect.
Connect a handset to the handset port
of the phone.
Data Switch
5.0VDC
3 Amps
m
(
m
Connect RJ45 cable through middle
hole of stand to LAN and the other
end of cable to the phone system
(data network). If PoE data switch is
used, it will power up the phone.
3 OPTIONAL: Connect the cable
through the middle hole of the base
to the PC, as shown in the figure.
When connecting to PC, connect one
end of the cable to the PC port of the
phone, and the other end of the cable
to the LAN port of the PC.
qw
e
qAC Power wLAN to Phone System ePhone to PC-10/100 Base T Switch
4
5
Home Page
SMT-i3105 LAYOUT
LCD Screen
SECTION 2.
PHONE FUNCTIONS
Soft Key
Telephone Status
Indicator
Call Log (s Up)
OK Button
Phone Book (t Down)
Transfer Button
Programmable
Buttons
Hold Button
Conference Button
Handset
Volume Controls
Mute Button
Speaker Button
(Handsfree
Speakerphone)
Dial Pad
NOTE: The words “key” and “button” are interchangeable.
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Button
Function
q LCD Screen
A display showing the phone’s status (busy, ringing,
receiving an internal message, etc.), time and date, extension number, name.
w Soft Button
Used to select the desired function from the soft menus
displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen, such as Back,
End, and Save.
The blinking pattern differs depending on the phone
e Telephone StatusIndicator status. Red status for Station Message, Voicemail, and DND,
and green status for Incoming CO Call.
r Call Log Button
(s Up)
t OK Button
y Phone Book Button
(t Down)
6
Used to view the entire call history.
Used to move upward on various list screens.
Used to make a selection or to save an entry.
Used to search for a phone number saved in the phone, or
to register a new number. Pressing this button shows the
main screen of the phone book.
Used to move downward on various list screens.
7
Home Page
Button
u Transfer Button
i Programmable Button
o Hold Button
a Conference Button
s Volume Button [+] [--]
d Mute Button
d Hold Button
f Speaker Button
g Dial Pad
h Handset
Function
KEY FUNCTIONS
Used to enable the call transfer function.
Used to set up one touch feature button on the phone.
Used to place a call on hold.
Used for conference calls.
NETWORK: The SMT-i3105 uses VoIP communication through an alreadyinstalled public or private data network.
Used to control the volume settings.
Used to silence the transmit voice to the remote party.
Used to place a call on hold.
Used to enable/disable the use of a speaker phone.
Used to dial the phone number.
Used for two-way voice conversation.
LCD SCREEN: Various functions are displayed on the LCD screen, so you can use
them conveniently by using the scroll buttons Call Log (s Up) or Phone Book
(t Down) on the phone.
SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE (SMS): You can exchange text messages internally only using this function.This function is available only on internal IP stations.
TELEPHONE STATUS INDICATOR
The indicators are turned on or off depending on the status of relevant functions.
Screen
Status
LED Indicator
When station is busy
Red colored indicator is
constant.
When station is receiving
an incoming call
Green colored indicator
flashes.
When there is a message
Red indicator (slow flash).
During “Do Not Disturb”
Red indicator (fast flash).
Hold Recall
Amber colored indicator
flashes.
SCREEN STRUCTURE
The screen consists of three areas.
Icon Area
Text Area
Soft Menu Area
Area
Icon Area
Text Area
Soft Menu Area
8
Description
Displays various icons (see icon descriptions on page 11).
Displays date, time, extension number, name, message,
phone number, etc.
Displays the functions allocated to the 3 soft buttons.
Service menus are provided depending on the state of the
phone. A user can use the service or feature menus by
pressing the Menu or Func. soft button, or the AOM for
more soft keys (99).
9
Home Page
TEXT INPUT METHOD
DESCRIPTION OF ICONS
Using the dial and direction buttons on the phone, you can enter and modify the
English characters, numeric and special characters.
The following icons are displayed on the screen.
,] on a text input screen, the input mode is
Whenever you press the dial button [,
advanced in sequence (on keypad).
Text Input Example
•
A
Uppercase Input Mode
a
Lowercase Input Mode
1
Numeric Input Mode
$
Special Character Input Mode
Use the dial buttons to type English text and numbers; and use the Direction
Arrows
in the soft menu screen to move the cursor left and right
and OK buttons to complete input. When removing the typed characters,
select the Del soft button or hold down to delete the entire entry.
Alpha Characters Input: Select this mode (uppercase/lowercase) by pressing
,] button on keypad, and type text by repeated pressing the dial buttons,
the [,
characters will auto advance after a time limit.
,] button on keypad, move
Number Input: Select this mode by pressing the [,
the cursor highlighted to 1, then use the keypad to enter digits.
,] button on keySpecial Character Input: Select this mode by pressing the [,
pad (advance to $); select a desired character by using the Direction Arrows
soft button; and press the OK button to enter it.
Keypad Character Entry
Count
Dial ,
10
1
A
2
a
(Uppercase)
(Lowercase)
3
1
4
$
Icon
Description
Shows that ‘Call Forward’ is enabled.
Shows that ‘Do Not Disturb’ is enabled.
Shows that ‘Mute’ function is enabled. When the call ends to
become a standby status or this function is disabled, this icon
disappears.
Shows that the call is hold state. When call is reconnect or
disconnected, this icon disappears.
Appears when there are unread Short messages in the
message inbox. Once they are read, it disappears.
Shows that a LAN cable is connected to the PC port.
Shows that a LAN cable is to the LAN port but that the system
is not connected.
Shows that a LAN cable is connected to the LAN port and
that the system is connected normally.
Outgoing call icon.
Incoming call icon.
Missed call icon.
NAVIGATING THE DISPLAY
When programming within various menu options, information can be entered via
Q] dial keys. The button used for editing and
the dial pad keys using [0]-[9] and [Q
their features are summarized below.
(Numbers) (Special Characters)
Dial #
Dial 0
Dial 1
Dial 2
A
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
B
C
Dial 3
D
E
F
Dial 4
G
H
I
Dial 5
J
K
L
Dial 6
M
N
O
Dial 7
P
Q
R
Dial 8
T
U
V
Dial 9
W
X
Y
BUTTONS
FEATURES
Left and Right Soft Buttons
To move the cursor (underlined area) or to erase/write
what is entered.
Hold
Transfer
Volume Button
Up (+) Down(--)
OK
S
Call Log (s Up)
Phone Book (t Down)
To clear/delete an entire field such as station name.
To write the changes and exit programming.
To adjust settings (tones), sounds, contrast, etc.
To enter or save a selection.
To move cursor up.
To move cursor down.
Z
11
Home Page
SMT-i3105 SETUP
INITIALIZING THE SMT-i3105
Initially the SMT-i3105 IP keyset will need to be setup to operate within the users
network. The Setup Menu is also used to make changes to the keyset, in the event
that the system information should change. The option chosen will be highlighted.
The station numbers will be automatically created by the OfficeServ 7000 Series
systems once the necessary information has been entered into the IP keyset.
Enter ID and password of the server, as described below to register the phone. See
your system administrator for specific Network and Server addresses.The addresses necessary to set up the SMT-i3105 are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
IP Address of Station
Subnet Mask
Network Gateway Address
IP Address of System’s main processor
User ID
Password
SETUP MODE
To get to the SETUP MODE unplug the power cord from the SMT-i3105. Press and
hold the , button while you plug power back into the phone. Release the , button when you see Samsung in the display. If you have a PoE (Power over Ethernet)
connection, the same procedure can be done by unplugging and plugging the
Ethernet cable into the phone while pressing and holding the , button.
When the phone reboot is complete, the Language
Menu will display. Press the OK soft button to advance to
the Configuration Menu.
Once the Configuration Menu is displayed, you can move to each menu in the
Setup by using the Call Log (s Up) or Phone Book (t Down) buttons and [1]-[8]
dial buttons of the SMT-i3105 IP phone. To learn how to navigate the menus refer
to the previous section.
12
EASY INSTALL WIZARD
By selecting this option, the System Easy Wizard can guide you through setting up
your network parameters. If you want to set up these parameters individually, follow the instructions below.
•
From the idle phone press Menu, scroll to Settings, and press OK button.
Scroll to Phone Info and press OK button. From the keypad, enter the administrator’s password (please contact your phone system administrator). Press
the OK button. Scroll to Easy Install and press OK button.
SELECTING THE STATIC IP OPTION
•
•
•
•
•
•
When the Static IP option is selected, the user enters the Static IP Address for
the phone (eg. 192.168.9.193) then press the OK button or the Next soft button.
Enter the Subnet Mask (eg. 255.255.255.0); press OK button or the Next soft
button.
Enter Gateway Address (eg. 192.168.9.1), press OK button.
NOTE: Press the , key on the dial pad to enter the “.” in the IP address.
Enter the System IP address (eg. 192.168.9.200), press OK button.
Enter System ID XXXX (eg. 3201), then press OK button.
Enter Password XXXX (eg. 1234) then press OK button.
Wait a second for the phone to reboot. The phone should register and authenticate itself to the phone system. Test SMT-i3105 for proper operation.
SETTING UP HOT DESKING [IDLE LOGIN]
Hot Desking allows you to log in and out of your SMT-i3105 IP keyset without
rebooting. See Setup Mode on how to access the Configuration Menu.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Settings then press OK button.
Scroll to Phone Info and press OK button.
Enter the administrator’s password (please contact your phone system administrator).
Scroll to Ext. Login then press OK button.
Choose the ON option and press OK button. (Note: ON to allow, OFF to deny
hot desking).
Press the End soft button to complete the setup.
When the phone restarts, enter the ID (eg; extension 2809) and password.
Press the Save soft button to complete the login.
13
Home Page
CONFIGURATION MENU STRUCTURE
The Configuration Menu options are as follows:
1. EASY INSTALL
This option will guide you through setting up all required parameters for connecting the SMT keyset to your system.
2. PHONE INFO
1. Version Info: Provides boot rom, software, DSP, and hardware version
information and date.
2. Network Info: Displays network mode, IP address of phone, network
(DNS1, DNS2), Gateway Information, Subnet Mask, MAC Address, LAN
(HUB), LAN (PC), PC Client, and Registered State.
3. MAC Address
3. NETWORK
Displays Static IP, Dynamic IP, PPPoE, NAT, 802.1x, VLAN (LAN), and VLAN (PC).
Set to Use or Not Use.
SECTION 3.
FREQUENTLY USED FEATURE
OPERATION
4. EXT. LOGIN
Allows the user to choose the option of permitting the phone either
login/logout from idle mode or only register to the server on power up. Once
the phone is placed into Extension Login mode, a display will show up to allow
you to enter any valid User ID and password. This function is also referred to
as hot desking (idle login). Set to Use or Not Use. Default password is 1234.
5. SERVER
1. Primary System: The main processor’s IP address.
2. System 1~3: Up to 4 server IPs can be set.
6. S/W UPGRADE
1. TFTP Server: The IP address of the TFTP server containing the IP software.
2. Upgrade: Starts the IP software upgrade process.
7. FACTORY RESET
This option resets the SMT-i3105 to factory default settings.
8. PHONE RESTART
This option reboots the SMT-i3105 phone.
14
15
Home Page
This section provides the basic operation of your Samsung Multimedia Telephone
SMT-i3105.
LOGGING IN & OUT [If Hot Desking is Enabled]
If enabled, your SMT-i3105 telephone may require you to log in before making or
receiving calls. In these cases your telephone system administrator will provide
you with an extension number, password, and the feature code used to log out.
TO LOG IN
•
•
•
•
Dial your extension number in the ID field (example 3201).
Press the OK button.
Dial your password in the password field (default 1234).
Press Save soft button.
TO LOG OUT
•
Dial the feature code provided by your administrator (log out code 77).
PLACING CALLS
IMPORTANT: Put your phone in Overlap Mode by pressing the Menu button,
select Settings and then select Dial Mode, change it to Overlap. If your phone is
not in OVERLAP mode you must always press the Call soft button after dialing the
digits to send the call.
NOTE: All examples of making phone calls are based on the phone being set for
overlap dialing mode.
OUTSIDE CALLS - To place a call to an outside party:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button.
Press an idle outside line button, line group button, or dial a line access code
to receive dial tone.
Dial the telephone number.
Hang up the handset when the call is completed.
INTERNAL CALLS - To place a call to another extension at your location:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Dial the extension number or group number.
Wait for the party to answer. If you hear a brief tone burst instead of ringback
tone, the station called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer. Begin speaking after the tone.
Hang up the handset when the call is completed.
NOTES:
1.
2.
If you have a DSS button assigned to an extension or station group, you may
press this button instead of dialing the number.
If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
SPEAKERPHONE CALLS - Your Samsung SMT-i3105 has full-duplex speakerphone capability. This feature is used for both internal or external calls. To activate
this feature:
•
•
•
Press the Speaker button.
Place an internal or external call.
Press Speaker button to disconnect the call.
NOTE: The handset can be used at any time during the conversation. To resume
handsfree operation, press the Speaker button, and hang up the handset.
ANSWERING CALLS
OUTSIDE/INTERNAL/VOICE ANNOUNCE CALLS - To answer these
three types of calls:
•
•
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer on Speaker Phone.
Hang up the handset when the call is completed.
NOTE: The volume can be adjusted at any time by pressing the [+] and [--]
Volume button arrow keys on your navigation button.
NOTE: Frequently called telephone numbers can be added to the PhoneBook.
When making internal and external calls from AOM list, press the AOM soft button to access the programmable button screens. Then use the Call Log (s Up) or
Phone Book (t Down) button to scroll to and highlight the desired programmable button. Press OK to access trunk or trunk group, dial phone number.
16
17
Home Page
PLACING A CALL ON HOLD
CALL WAITING
Calls can be placed on System Hold or Exclusive Hold. A call placed on System
Hold can be picked up from any extension. Calls placed on Exclusive Hold can only
be picked up from the extension that placed them on hold.
If an outside call is camped-on to your phone or another station is camped-on to
you:
SYSTEM HOLD - To place a call on hold:
•
•
•
Press the Hold button. The Call button will flash red at your telephone.
To take the caller off hold, press that button and the red flashing light will go
steady red again.
Resume conversation.
EXCLUSIVE HOLD - To place a call on hold at your telephone so that other
users cannot answer it:
•
•
Press the Hold button twice. The call button will flash green at your telephone.
To retrieve the call, press the flashing red line button or press the line button
a third time.
•
•
•
NOTE: Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.
CONFERENCE CALLS
To make a conference call while engaged in a conversation:
•
•
•
NOTE: Internal calls are always placed on exclusive hold.
•
TRANSFERRING CALLS
You can transfer a call by notifying the party to which the call is being transferred
or without notification.
•
•
•
•
While on a call, press the Transfer button then dial an extension number.
Confirm you hear a ringback tone.
Wait for the called party to answer and announce the call (optional).
Replace the handset.
Your keyset rings and the call that is waiting (camped-on) flashes red.
Press the flashing button to answer; the other call is put on hold automatically if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press
Hold and then the flashing button or finish the first call and hang up; the waiting call will ring.
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer.
•
Press the Conference button and receive conference tone.
Make another call, either intercom or outside, press the Conference
button and receive conference tone.
Make another call or press the Conference button to join all parties. You can
conference up to five parties (you and four others).
Repeat the last step until all parties are added. Conf a second time to put all
calls bridged together.
Hang up to leave the conference call.
NOTE: When attempting to add another party to the conference and you
are not able to reach the desired person, hang up. Simply press the
Conference button again to return to the previous conversation.
To drop a party from your conference call:
•
Press the Conference button and dial the extension or line number that is to
be dropped.
Press the Conference button again to reestablish the conference.
TRANSFERRING WITH CAMP-ON
•
When you transfer a call to another station and receive a busy signal, you can
camp the call on to this station. Hang up when you hear the busy signal.The called
party is alerted that a call is waiting.
FORWARDING CALLS
•
•
•
Call another internal station.
When receiving a busy tone, press the Func. soft button.
Scroll to Camp On and press OK button (here ringback tone).Wait for party to
answer the call.
Icon
You can forward your calls to another station, group of stations, or an external telephone number. Program a destination for the type of forwarding you want by
pressing Menu, then Call Forward, to set the forwarding number to All, Busy, No
Answer, and Busy/No Answer.
NOTE: If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to
receive another call. Press Transfer to return to the caller.
18
19
Home Page
OTHER FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
SPEAKER BUTTON - This function is used to go on and off hook in the handsfree speakerphone mode.
VOLUME CONTROL - Vol button is used to adjust the volume of a handset,
MENU SOFT KEY - This menu displays the following
speaker and ringing sound.
Volume Control of a Handset
•
•
•
Adjusts the handset volume while busy (handset offhook).
To increase the volume of a handset, press the top side [+] of the Vol button.
To decrease the volume of a handset, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button.
options:
NOTE: The Call Log (s Up) and Phone Book (t Down)
buttons can be used to navigate through these options.
Volume Control of a Speaker
1. PHONEBOOK: Maintains frequently dialed names and numbers in a
PhoneBook. Search and initiate calls by: Speed Dial, Associated Names, or
Telephone Numbers.
•
•
•
2. CALL LOG: Provides direct access to a list of most recent calls, outgoing calls,
incoming calls, missed calls, and an option to delete all (or clear) all calls from
the Call Log.
Adjusts the speaker volume while busy in speaker mode.
To increase the volume of a speaker, press the top side [+] of the Vol button.
To decrease the volume of a handset, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button.
Volume Control of a Ringing Tone
•
•
During an incoming call, to increase the volume of a speaker, press the top
side [+] of the Vol button while ringing.
To decrease the volume of a handset, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button while ringing.
Volume Control of Key Tone
•
•
To increase the volume of the key tones, press the top side [+] of the Vol
button.
To decrease the volume of the key tones, press the bottom side [-] of the Vol
button.
NOTE: By pressing the Vol button in idle mode, the user can also adjust the key
tone volume.
CALL LOG BUTTON - Provides direct access to a list of the most recent calls,
outgoing calls, incoming calls, missed calls, and an option to delete all (or clear) all
calls from the call log. The Call Log button is also used to scroll (s Up) the soft
menus display.
PHONE BOOK BUTTON - Provides direct access to the user’s phonebook of
stored contacts. The Phone Book button is also used to scroll (t Down) the soft
menus display.
OK BUTTON - This function is used to enter, save or complete the selected
option in the display.
20
3. MESSAGE: This function allows users to select which desired type of messages is viewed. Users can select and view the following options: Voicemail
Messages, Station Messages, E-Mail (optional with IP-UMS only), and Short
Message Service (SMS). Short Message Service is similar to sending text messaging [Function only supported to other internal station users with ITP or SMT-i
phones].
4. SOUND: Sets Volume levels of various telephone functions. Scroll to select
desired option setting. When setting Ring Type and Ringer Volume, each key
tone level is heard while scrolling through them.
5. SECURITY: The function allows the user to lock or unlock an individual station
from dialing out, and to change the station password.There are three options:
Unlock (Station user is able to make any calls without restrictions), Locked
Out (The station cannot make calls outside the system. The station can, however, make and receive internal calls and incoming CO calls, and outbound 911
emergency calls), and Lock All Calls (The station cannot make or receive any
calls. Incoming, outgoing, internal calls and emergency calls are all blocked on
a locked all station).
6. CALL FORWARD: Sends phone calls to a different station. Program a destination for the preferred forwarding options: Disable, All, Busy, No Answer,
Busy/No Answer, Do Not Disturb, and Follow Me Status.
7. SETTINGS: This function allows the user to set the following option: Dial
Mode (Overlap or Enbloc), Language (default English), Network Information
(IP address, gateway, Server, etc), Phone Information (software version), AOM
Set, and Clear User Set.
21
Home Page
FUNC. SOFT BUTTON - This function allows a user
one touch easy access to many of the system features.
When pressed, the following options are displayed: Last
Number Redial, Save/Repeat, Speed Dial, Directory,
VM Message, Station Message, Page Pickup, Direct
Pickup, DND, In/Out Group, Status Message, Hold Pickup, Page, Meet Me
Page, OHVA Block, Group Pickup, and My Group Pickup. The Call Log (s Up)
and Phone Book (t Down) buttons can be used to scroll up and down the list of
features under the Func. button.
•
•
•
Move down and enter the extension number (for example: 2003).
Move down, use the dial pad to enter name (for example: John Dow). Refer to
Text Input Method.
Press the Save soft button to exit and save the setting.
Example of using the Last Number Redial feature:
•
Press the Func. Soft button, scroll to Last Redial, then press OK button. The
last number called from the phone is called.
NOTE: For detail operation of the list of features under the Func. soft button,
please refer to the System Features section of the user guide.
AOM SOFT BUTTON - This function is used to display all 99 programmable feature buttons of the phone.
The Call Log (s Up) or Phone Book (t Down) buttons can
be used to scroll up and down the list of 99 programmable feature buttons under the AOM module.
Example of dialing a speed dial number using the AOM function:
•
Press the AOM soft button, scroll to Speed Dial, then press OK button. Enter
the bin number (00~999).
NOTE: Some programmed features such as speed dialing and DSS buttons
can be used to process calls; other programmed buttons such as Call buttons
can only be viewed.
The soft AOM button can also display status indications
for station keys, trunks, voice mail messages, etc.
Example of programming a DSS button on the soft AOM:
•
•
•
•
•
22
Press the Menu soft button.
Using the Call Log (s Up) or Phone Book (t Down) buttons, scroll to Settings
and press OK, then scroll to and select AOM Setting.
Scroll to the soft AOM button to program (for example: 04).
Press the Edit soft button (the display will show AOM index 4).
Using the Left and Right soft buttons, scroll to the feature option (for example: DSS).
23
Home Page
BASIC MENUS
The basic menus screen is displayed if you select the Menu from the soft menu at
the left bottom of a idle screen. Using the Call Log (s Up) or Phone Book (t Down)
buttons, move to a desired function, and press the [OK] button to execute the
function.
SECTION 4.
PHONE FEATURES
SOFT BUTTON STRUCTURE
MENU SOFT BUTTON
Item
1. PhoneBook
Sub-Item
1. All List
2. Search Num
3. Add to PB
4. Delete All
2. Call Log
1. Recent
2. Outgoing
3. Incoming
4. Missed
5. Delete All
3. Message
1. Voice MSG [0]
2. Station MSG [0]
3. E Mail MSG [0]
4. Short MSG [0]
24
Description
Shows the entire list of phone numbers
stored in the phonebook (00-99).
Allows a user to search for a stored phone
number by name/number in your phonebook (case sensitive).
Saves a phone number; and allows a user to
specify a speed dialing name, number, and
ringtone for incoming calls.
Allows a user to delete all the phone
numbers saved in the phone.
Lists the recent numbers of outgoing,
incoming and missed calls.
Lists the phone numbers of recent
outgoing calls.
Lists the phone numbers of recent
incoming calls.
Lists the phone numbers of recent missed
calls.
Allows a user to delete all the call history
saved in the phone.
Allows a user to retrieve voice mail
messages from the mailbox.
Allows a user to retrieve station messages
(internal) from another user.
Allows a user to to view how many e-mail
messages have been received via IP-UMS
(optional).
Allows a user to retrieve and send internal
short messages (SMS) like text message to
other internal phones. [Not Supported Over
Networking]
25
Home Page
Item
4. Sound
5. Security
6. Call FWD
7. Settings
Sub-Item
Description
1. Volume
Allows a user to adjust the volume of the
ringtone, handset, speaker, key tone, page,
and BGM Off Hook (OHVA).
2. Ring Tone
Allows a user to select the ringtone.
3. Key Tone
Allows a user to select the key tone sound.
Allows a user to secure the access to some
menu items and change the station
password.
A user can enable call forwarding when they have moved to
another location or during a long absence. Options are Disable, All,
Busy, No Answer, Busy/No Answer, DND, Follow Me.
Allows a user to set the dial mode as
1. Dial Mode
immediate dial (overlap) or wait dial
(enbloc).
2. Search Number
Allows a user to search by name/number for a phone number saved in the phone
book.
•
•
•
Change Password
Phone Lock
Press the Phonebook button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK, scroll to Search Num, and then press OK.
Select from your saved numbers either By Name or By Number and press OK.
From the dial pad enter the first characters of the name (case sensitive) or
phone number to search and press the OK button, the matching phone number is displayed. Move to a desired name/number using the Call Log s /
Phonebook t button, and select the Call soft button to place a call.
3. Add to PB (Phonebook)
This is the function used to add a phone number to the phonebook.
•
Press the Phonebook button—OR—press the MENU soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK, scroll to Add to PB, and then press OK.
Enter a name and press Next.
Enter a phone number and press Next.
Select a ring tone by using the Call Log s / Phonebook t keys.
Press the Save soft button to save the phone number.
2. Language
Sets the language of the phone.
3. N/W Info
Shows the network setting information of
the phone.
•
•
•
•
4. AOM Set
Used to set buttons 00-99 on the soft AOM
from the phone.
NOTE: See Text Input Method on how to enter name in the Phone Book.
5. Phone Info
Shows the software version of the phone.
5. Clear User Set
Allows a user to delete their personalized
data and return to the initial status.
4. Delete All
This is the function used to delete all the phone numbers saved in the phone
book.
•
Press the Phonebook button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK, scroll to Delete All, and then press OK.
Press the Yes or No soft button to Delete All entries.
1. PHONEBOOK
•
NOTE: Personal phonebook is stored locally in phone
memory.
2. CALL LOG
1. All List
1. Recent
Shows the entire list of phone numbers saved in the phone book.
This function lists all the recent numbers for outgoing,
incoming and missed calls.
•
•
26
Press the Phonebook button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to
Phonebook, press OK, scroll to All List, and then press OK.
The entire list of phone numbers saved in the phone book is shown on the
screen. Using the Call Log s / Phonebook t button, move to a desired number, and select the Call soft button to place a call.
•
•
Outgoing
Incoming
Missed Icons
Press the Call Log button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to Call
Log, press OK, scroll to Recent, and then press OK. A phone number list and
icons of recent outgoing, incoming, and missed calls are displayed.
Using the Call Log s / Phonebook t button, move to a desired number, and
press the Call soft button to place a call.
27
Home Page
2. Outgoing
Outgoing Calls Icon
3. MESSAGE
This function lists the phone numbers of recent outgoing calls.
•
•
Press the Call Log button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to Call
Log, press OK, scroll to Outgoing, and press OK. A phone number list of recent
outgoing calls is displayed.
Using the Call Log s / Phonebook t button, move to a desired number, and
press the Call soft button to place a call.
3. Incoming
1. Voice Mail Messages
This function allows users to retrieve voice mail message from the mailbox.
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Message, press OK, scroll to Voice MSG
[ ], and then press OK to access the voice mailbox and retrieve messages. Enter
password for voice mail.
Incoming Calls Icon
This function lists phone numbers of recent incoming calls.
2. Station Messages
•
This function allows users to retrieve station messages (internal) from another
user.
•
Press the Call Log button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to Call
Log, press OK, scroll to Incoming, and press OK. A phone number list of recent
incoming calls is displayed.
Using the Call Log s / Phonebook t button, move to a desired number, and
press the Call soft button to place a call.
4. Missed
Missed Calls Icon
This function lists phone numbers of recently missed calls.
•
•
Press the Call Log button—OR—press the Menu soft button, scroll to Call
Log, press OK, scroll to Missed, and press OK. A phone number list of recent
missed calls is displayed.
Using the Call Log s / Phonebook t button, move to a desired number, and
press the Call soft button to place a call.
5. Delete All
•
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Message, press OK, scroll to Station
MSG [ ], and then press OK.
To return a call to the station that left the message: press the Func. soft button, scroll to Reply, then press OK.
To delete the station message: press the Func. soft button, scroll to Clear, then
press OK.
To view the next station message: press the Func. soft button, scroll to Next,
then press OK.
3. E-Mail Messages
This function allows users to view the amount of e-mails for a station user’s
account. This function is only available when the IP-UMS application is enabled.
Please refer to the IP-UMS manuals for detailed operation.
This function allows a user to delete the entire call history saved on the phone.
4. Short Message Service (SMS)
•
This function is used to send and create internal short messages or text messaging. Only operational within same node, not supported over networking.
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Call Log, press OK, scroll to Delete All,
and press OK.
Enter the phone password [Enter 1234].
Press Yes to delete all Call Log entries.
VIEWING DETAIL CALL LOG RECORD
To view the details of each of the call log entry, highlight
the entry and press the OK button to display the full
Caller ID record which includes the name, date and time.
28
INBOX
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Message, press OK, scroll to Short
Message [0], and press OK.
Scroll to Inbox, then press OK to view a short text message in you Inbox.
Press the Del soft button, the Yes soft button to delete the short text message
or press the End soft button to exit SMS.
29
Home Page
NEW MESSAGE (SEND)
4. SOUND
This function is used to create and send a new short text message.
This function is used to adjust the selected volume levels
on each phone. This is the same option as station lock in
MMC 114.
•
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Message, then press OK. Scroll to Short
Message [], then press OK. Scroll to New Msg, then press OK.
Write or create a new short message and press the Next soft button. See Text
Input Method on how to enter characters in text messages.
Enter the internal extension(s) to send the short message. Scroll to other
entries and enter the station number to send to more users. (Each short message can be sent to 1 to 10 users).
Press the Send soft button to deliver the short message to other user’s inbox.
NOTE: When the message is sent successfully, the message “Sent” is displayed.
When the message fails to send the “Failed to send” is displayed. SMS messages
can only be sent to internally ITP, SMT-W, or SMT-i phones within the same node.
TDM and single line phones cannot send or receive SMS messages. SMS messaging is not supported over networking.
OUTBOX
This function is used to edit and resend a new short text message.
•
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Message, then press OK. Scroll to Short
Message [], then press OK.
Scroll to Outbox, then press OK to view short text message sent from your
phone.
Scroll to the desired SMS MSG.
Press the Del soft button, then Yes soft button to delete the short text message or press the End soft button to exit SMS.
NOTE: SMS messages indicated by X icon cannot be deleted from the Outbox.
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Sound, then press OK. Scroll to Ring
Tone, or Key Tone or Volume, then press OK.
Using the Call Log s / Phonebook t buttons adjust the volume or sound,
then press OK and Save soft button.
5. SECURITY
This function is used to select the option for each user to
change station password, lock or unlock each phone.This
is the same option as station lock in MMC 100.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Security, then press OK.
Enter the station password [default 1234].
Press OK to Change Password and press Back soft button.
In the Dial mode, use the Left [<-] and Right [->] soft buttons to choose the
Unlock, Lock Out (Outgoing), or Lock All option from the menu.
In the Menu mode, use the Left [<-] and Right [->] soft buttons to choose the
Unlock or Lock M option (Station locked from changing the Dial Mode) from
the menu.
In the Password mode, enter the current password (eg; 1234)
Enter the New Password. Re-enter the new password to confirm. Password is
changed.
6. CALL FWD
This function is used to set/cancel call forwarding to each
phone.
DELETE ALL
This function is used to delete the short message(s) saved in both the Inbox and
the Outbox.
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Message, then press OK. Scroll to SMS,
then press OK.
Scroll to Delete All, then press OK to view short text message sent from your
phone.
Press the Del soft button to delete the short text message or press the End
soft button to exit SMS.
NOTE: SMS messages indicated by X icon cannot be deleted from the Outbox.
30
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Call Fwd, then
press OK, scroll to forward option [Disable, All, Busy,
No Answer, Busy/No Answer, DND or Follow Me
Status], then press Edit soft button.
Enter the Station or Group Number to forward calls, then press OK or Save.
7. SETTINGS
This function is used to allow station users to set the Dial
Mode to Enbloc or Overlap dial, set the Language, view
the station network Info settings, to view the phone
firmware and boot version, or to clear user settings, such
as the call log and phonebook.
31
Home Page
DIAL MODE
•
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Settings, then press OK.
Scroll to Dial Mode, then press OK.
Using the Call Log s / Phonebook t buttons select Enbloc or Overlap, then
press Save soft button or press OK button.
Choose Overlap to dial number and have it automatic dial out, use Enbloc to
press # sign to dial.
LANGUAGE
•
•
•
Press the Menu soft button, scroll to Language, then press OK.
Scroll to Language, then press OK.
Using the Call Log s / Phonebook t buttons select the language, then press
Save soft button or press OK button.
SECTION 5.
OFFICESERV™ 7000
SYSTEM FEATURES
FUNC. SOFT BUTTON
This function allows a user one touch easy access to
many of the system features.When pressed, the following
options are displayed: Last Number Redial,
Save/Repeat, Speed Dial, Directory, VM Message, Station Message, Page
Pickup, Directory Pickup, DND, In/Out Group, Status Message, Hold Pickup,
Page, Meet Me Page, OHVA Block, Group Pickup, and My Group Pickup. The
Call Log s / Phonebook t buttons can be used to scroll up and down the list of
features under the Func. button.
NOTE: For detailed operation of the list of features under the Func. soft button,
please refer to the System Features section of this user guide.
AOM SOFT BUTTON
This function is used to display all 99 programmable feature buttons of the phone.The Call Log s / Phonebook t
buttons can be used to scroll up and down the list of 99
programmable feature buttons under the AOM module.
This feature button can be programmed by a technician.
32
33
Home Page
OUTSIDE CALLS
MAKING CALLS FROM AOM
Note: When making calls, internal or outside calls, in order to access the programmable button screens, press the AOM soft button. Then you can utilize the Call
Log s / Phonebook t buttons on the display.
•
•
When the desired number is highlighted, press the OK button.
The number will be automatically dialed.
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device. To answer
calls ringing this device, dial 67—OR—press the UA button. This device can operate in any one of the six different ring plans.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing.
RECALL DIAL TONE
•
Press the New button to disconnect your existing call, wait for dial tone and
then make a new call on the same line.
NOTE: If this button does not appear on your keyset, the Flash button may be programmed to recall dial tone.
NOTES:
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set
a callback, the cursor associated with the Callback button will be solid black.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing.
BUSY STATION CALLBACK
When you call another station and receive a busy signal:
•
•
•
NOTES:
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set
a callback, the cursor associated with the Callback button, will be solid black.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing.
CANCELING CALLBACK
A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set a callback, the cursor associated with the Callback button, will be solid black.
To cancel a callback:
•
•
SENDING A FLASH
While on an outside call, press the Flash button to send a flash to the telephone
company. This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use.
NOTE: Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit.
BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK
If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line, this means that
the line or group of lines is busy.
•
•
•
•
34
Press the Callback button, if programmed, or dial 44, you will hear confirmation tone.
Hang up or press Speaker button.
When the line becomes free, the system will call you back.
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer, wait for dial tone and
dial the telephone number or speed dial number again.
Press the Callback button, if programmed, or dial 44.
When the busy station becomes free, your keyset will ring.
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to call the now idle station.
Press the Callback button, if programmed, or dial 44.The display will show the
callback details, press the Func. soft button and then Clear.
This will cancel the last set callback and display the next set callback, also with
the option to Clear.This process is repeated until all callbacks are cleared from
memory.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature is turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press the Speaker button before dialing.
BUSY STATION CAMP-ON
When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to
wait for a callback:
MANUAL CAMP-ON
•
•
•
Press the Camp button or dial 45.
The called station will receive off-hook ring tone repeated every few seconds
and the cursor associated with the first available Call button will flash black to
indicate your call is waiting.
Wait for the called party to answer.
35
Home Page
•
The called station must release its first call or place it on hold before answering your camp-on.
NOTES:
1. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no available button to
accept your call. Hang up or leave a message.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing.
AUTO CAMP-ON
When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the
camp on button every time you call a busy station, you can set your phone for auto
camp-on.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 081 to turn ON auto camp-on or dial 080 to turn it OFF.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
INTERCOM CALLS
VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
you will hear the caller’s announcement.
•
•
Press the Speaker button to turn on the microphone and speak handsfree—
OR—lift the handset to reply.
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the Speaker button.
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
to ON.
AUTO ANSWER MODE
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
then automatically answer the call.
•
•
Your microphone and speaker are turned on and you can speak handsfree. For
privacy, use the handset.
To finish the call, replace the handset.
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
to ON.
CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR
•
•
Dial 0 to call your system operator or group of operators.
If you want to call a specific operator, dial that person’s extension number.
NOTE: If the Hot keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button or dial 0 before you begin dialing.
36
37
Home Page
CALL PROCESSING
SYSTEM HOLD
When you are connected to any call, press Hold. The call will flash at the keyset. If
this call appears on a line button at other keysets, it will flash at those keysets also.
•
To take the caller off hold, press that button and the flashing LED will go
steady again. Resume the conversation—OR—press the Hold button. The
flashing LED will go steady again and you will be connected to the call again.
Resume the conversation.
NOTE: While on a call, pressing a line button, route button or flashing Call button
will automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call. See
Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset.
EXCLUSIVE HOLD
To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it:
•
•
Press the Hold button twice.The call will flash on your keyset and this line will
show a steady indication on other keysets.
To retrieve the call, press the flashing line button or press the Hold button a
third time.
NOTE: Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold.
REMOTE HOLD
When you wish to place a call on hold at another station.
•
•
Press Transfer and dial the station number (or press the appropriate DSS button)
Press the Hold button. This will place the call on system hold on an available
Call button or Line button at the remote station and return you to dial tone.
NOTES:
1. If the destination station does not have any free Call buttons or line buttons
you will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other party by pressing the Transfer button.
2. Intercom calls cannot be put on remote hold.
38
HOLD RECALL
If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer, it will recall your station. The
button that the call appears on will have a slow flashing indicator. (Telephone
Status Indicator will flash amber).
•
•
When your phone rings, lift the handset or press the Speaker button to
answer the recall.
If you do not answer this recall within a pre-programmed period of time, it will
go to the system operator.
CONSULTATION HOLD
When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with another extension:
•
•
•
•
Press the Transfer button; you will receive transfer dial tone.Your call is placed
on transfer hold.
Dial the extension number.
Consult with the internal party.
Press Transfer to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call.
NOTE: Repeatedly pressing the TRANSFER button will toggle between the outside
party and internal extension. If necessary you may disconnect either one of the
parties by pressing the Func. soft button, and then Cancel.
RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT ANOTHER
STATION [HOLD PICKUP]
When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset, press the Line button with
the flashing indicator.
When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset, dial 12 plus the line
number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
39
Home Page
CALL TRANSFER
TRANSFER TO VOICE MAIL
Transfer is used to send any calls to another extension in one of two ways.You can
do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can
do a blind transfer without notification.
This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailbox.Your keyset must have
a correctly programmed VT button to accomplish this. To transfer a call directly to
a voice mailbox:
•
•
•
•
•
•
While on a call, press the Transfer button and dial an extension number or
group number. Your call is automatically put on transfer hold—OR—press a
DSS button or station group button. Your call is automatically put on transfer
hold.
Hang up when you hear ringing (this is an unscreened or blind transfer)—
OR—wait for the called party to answer and advise him/her of the call and
hang up. If the transfer is refused, you will be reconnected to the outside line
when the called station hangs up or you can press Transfer to return to the
outside party.
If you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the first
station to hang up, simply press another DSS button—OR—press the Call
button or C.O. line button to return to the outside party and begin the transfer process again.
When you are transferring a call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto
Answer, the transferred call will always ring.
NOTES:
1. After the inside party answers, you may alternate back and forth between the
parties by pressing the Transfer button.
2. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to receive another call. Press Transfer to return to the other party.
3. You cannot transfer an Intercom call by pressing a DSS button.You must press
the Transfer button and dial the destination extension number.
TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON
When you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal,
you may camp the call on to this station. Simply hang up when you hear the busy
signal. The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them.
NOTE: If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to
receive another call. Press Transfer to return to the outside caller.
CALL WAITING
If an outside call has been camped-on to your phone or another station has
camped-on to you:
•
•
•
You will hear a tone in the earpiece and the call that is waiting for you
(camped-on) will flash. In addition the bottom line of the display will indicate
the number of the station or trunk party camped-on.
Press the flashing button to answer; your other call will go on hold automatically if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press
Hold and then the flashing button—OR—finish the first call and hang up; the
waiting call will ring.
Lift the handset or press the Speaker button to answer.
NOTE: Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.When using the speakerphone
the camp-on tone will come through the speaker.
CALL FORWARD OPTIONS
A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations. Call
forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display features. To review or change call forward options:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
40
While on a call, press the VT button and dial the mailbox number.
Hang up when dialing is completed.
Press the Menu button, scroll to Settings, press the OK button.
Scroll to Call Forward and press the OK button.
Scroll to the desired Forwarding option, enter the destination extension, and
press the Save soft button.
—OR—
Press Transfer 102.
Dial 0-5 to select the forward type (e.g., 1)—OR—
Press Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] to select the forward type
Press the right soft key to move the cursor.
Dial the destination number (e.g., 202)—OR—
Press Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] to select the destination and press
the Right soft key to move the cursor.
Dial 1 to set—OR—press Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] to select Yes or
No and press Transfer to store and exit.
—OR—
41
Home Page
To Forward ALL Calls to Another Station
GROUP CALL PICKUP
•
•
To pick up (answer) a call ringing in any pickup group, lift the handset and dial 66
plus the desired group number (01-10 on the OfficeServ 7030, 01-20 on the
OfficeServ 7200-S, 01-99, and 01-99 on the OfficeServ 7000 Series) or press the
flashing Group Pickup button if available or GRP PKUP on AOM.
Dial 601 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To Forward Calls to Another Station when you are on the Phone (BUSY):
•
•
Dial 602 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To Forward Calls to Another Station when you DO NOT ANSWER:
•
•
Dial 603 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
When you have both Forward ON BUSY and Forward NO ANSWER
Destination Programmed:
•
•
You can activate them simultaneously.
Dial 604. Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To Forward Calls when DND is Activated:
•
•
Dial 605 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
To Forward Calls to the Station Where You Currently Are
(FORWARD FOLLOW ME):
•
•
Dial 606 plus the extension or group number.
Receive a confirmation tone and hang up.
NOTES:
1. A group pickup button can have an extender for a specific pickup group.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before dialing the access code.
MY GROUP PICKUP
If desired, a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same
pickup group as you are in. Like “66” above except you do not need to dial the
desired group number. See your installation company for the assigned access
code. MY GROUP PICKUP: __________________.
PRIVACY RELEASE
This feature will allow another station to join in our conversation by releasing privacy on the C.O. from your phone.
To Release Privacy: While you are talking on a C.O. line and you wish to have other
internal parties (or up to three) join the conversation.
•
To clear all call forward conditions set at your station lift the handset and dial 600.
STATION CALL PICKUP
To pick up (answer) a call ringing at another station, lift the handset and dial 65 plus
the extension number of the ringing phone.If you have a DP key assigned with a station number, you only need to press this DP (Direct Pickup) key with the flashing
light to answer this ringing station. NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned
off, you must first lift the handset or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
42
Press the PRB button (the PRB indicator will be steady). Inform the other party
that he/she may now join the conversation.
After the other party (or parties) has joined the conversation and you wish to
return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation, press the
PRB button a second time, the PRB button LED will be off.
To Join a Non-Private Conversation: When someone has informed you that you
can join a conversation:
•
•
Press the C.O. line button that he/she has indicated OR
Dial the C.O. line number that he/she has indicated.
43
Home Page
DIALING FEATURES
All “DIALING FEATURES” instructions are written to support Overlap Dialing mode.
This is the technical name for dialing from a telephone as it has been for many
years. In recent years the cell phone industry has changed the cell phones to use
Enblock Dialing. With this dialing mode all the digits are dialed and then sent to
the carrier after pressing the OK key. Please check your telephone setup to confirm
what dialing mode is used.
SPEED DIALING
You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system-wide
speed dial list of numbers 500–999 or from your personal list of numbers 00–49.
For the purposes of programming speed dial
numbers, the programmable buttons are
know as A, B, C, D, and E.
•
•
•
•
Your system may be set for 950 system wide numbers. If so the system speed dial
access codes are 050~999 and the station speed dial codes are 000~049.
•
•
•
From the idle screen with the handset on-hook, press the AOM soft button, or
dial 16, scroll to the Speed button, press the OK button.
Dial the desired speed dial bin number.
The telephone number is automatically dialed for you.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED
DIAL NUMBERS
You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial
list. A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers, 00–49. See your system administrator to determine the amount assigned to your station. The phone itself maintains 1000 station speed dial numbers.
•
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 105.
Dial a speed dial number (00–49).
Dial a line or line group access code.
Dial the telephone number to be stored (24 digits maximum). It can include #,
,, FLASH and PAUSE.
Press Transfer to store the number.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker key before you begin dialing.
44
•
•
•
•
•
The A button inserts a flash.
The B button inserts a pause.
The C button is used for pulse to tone
A B C D E
conversion. If your system uses rotary (or
pulse) dialing C.O. lines, pressing C while
entering a speed dial number causes all
subsequent digits to be sent as DTMF
F
tones.
The D button is used to hide digits.
Display keyset users may want to hide
some speed dial numbers so that they
will not show in the display.When you are entering a telephone number, press
D. All subsequent digits will be hidden. Press D again to begin displaying digits.
The E button is used to enter a speed dial name. See Personal Speed Dial
Names under Display Features.
The F button toggles between speed dial name and number.
Use the Hold button to clear a speed dial number.
Use Volume Up [+] or Down [-] to advance cursor for Input of Bin Name.
Use Left or Right soft button to save name.
DIRECTORY DIALING
•
•
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Directory, press OK.
Press Func. soft button, scroll to the desired directory, press OK.
STATION DIRECTORY - Accesses Station name directory.
PERSONAL DIRECTORY - Accesses your personal speed dial name list.
SYSTEM DIRECTORY - Accesses System speed dial name list.
•
•
•
•
Enter the first letter of the desired party.
Press the Volume Up [+] or Down [--] buttons to scroll to the desired entry.
Press the Func. soft button.
Select the appropriate operation below.
DIAL - Dials the displayed number.
EXIT - Exit programming and return to idle screen.
PREVIOUS - Moves you to the previous entry.
NEXT - Moves you to the next entry.
•
•
Press OK.
Press End soft button to return to idle screen.
45
Home Page
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
PAGING AND MESSAGING
To redial the last outgoing telephone number you dialed, press the Func. soft button, scroll to Last Redial, or dial 19. Press OK.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
2. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL
While on a conversation, press the Func. soft button and select the Save/Repeat
option before hanging up to save the number you just dialed for later use.
To redial this saved number at any time, press the Func. soft button, scroll to
Save/Repeat, press OK button or dial 17. The same line will be selected for you.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
2. The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another
number.
3. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
AUTOMATIC REDIAL/RETRY
When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal, the system can
automatically redial the number for you. It will automatically redial at a pre-programmed interval for up to 15 attempts.
•
•
•
When you hear a busy signal, press the Retry (Auto Retry) button.
The system will reserve the line and automatically redial the same number for
you. You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker. The microphone is muted.
When the called party answers, lift the handset or press the flashing Speaker
to begin speaking.
NOTES:
1. If you make another call, auto-redial is canceled.
2. To cancel an auto-retry, lift and replace the handset.
PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER
When making an outside call on a dial pulse line, press #. All digits dialed after the
# with be sent as tones.
46
MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE
To make an announcement through the keyset speakers in the idle condition:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Page button, press OK or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
NOTES:
1. If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press Page
and dial a zone number.
2. If allowed by your system administrator you may be able to initiate a page
from a speakerphone by pressing the Page key or dialing 55 without lifting
the handset.
MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE
To make an announcement through the external paging speakers:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Page button, press OK or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 5, 6, 7 or 8—OR—dial 9 to page all external
zones.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
NOTES:
1. If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press Page
and dial a zone number.
2. If allowed by your system administrator you may be able to initiate a page
from a speakerphone by pressing the Page key or dialing 55 without lifting
the handset.
ALL PAGE
To page all designated keysets in internal zone 0 and all external zones at the same
time:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Page button, press OK or dial 55.
Dial , or press the All Page button.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
47
Home Page
NOTES:
1. The LED on the Page button will only light when an All Page is in progress.
2. If allowed by your system administrator you may be able to initiate a page
from a speakerphone by pressing the Page key or dialing 55 without lifting
the handset.
MEET ME PAGE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the Meet Me Page MMPG (MMPAGE) button or dial 54.
Dial the desired zone number (0~9).
After the attention tone, instruct the paged person to dial 56.
Press Func. soft button, then Answer Wait, then OK button.
Remain off-hook until the person dials 56 from any phone.
The paged person will be automatically connected with you.
CALL PARK AND PAGE
When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his/her desk, you can
park the call prior to paging. The OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ
7000 Series systems offer two different methods:
AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE BUTTON
•
•
•
While in conversation, press the Page button. The call is automatically parked
at your station.
Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number.
Make announcement indicating your extension number or the line number.
Hang up.
To retrieve an automatically parked call:
•
Dial 10 plus the number that was announced. If you have a PAGPK (Page
Pickup) button, press it and dial the number that was announced. If you have
a Park button, press it and dial the announced orbit number.
•
You will be connected to the parked call.
NOTES:
1. If the call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it will recall
your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park and page
intercom calls.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
MANUAL PARK ORBITS
SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION
•
•
When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy
signal, you can leave a message indication:
•
•
•
While in conversation, press the Park button.
Entered a desired orbit number (0-9), if the orbit number is busy dial another
orbit number. Display users can press , to automatically place the call in any
available orbit number and see the number in the display.
Remember the selected orbit number.
Replace the handset when finished.
Lift the handset and make a page announcement as previously described
(example:“John Smith park two”).
To retrieve a parked call from orbit:
•
•
Press the Park button and dial the announced orbit number (0-9).
You will be connected to the parked call.
NOTES:
1. You must have a Park button or park access code to retrieve and place calls in
park orbits.
2. If the parked call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it
will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park
and page intercom calls.
3. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
48
•
•
Press the Func. soft button, scroll to Message, press OK—OR—dial 43 and
receive confirmation tone. Hang up.
The message button on the Main Programmable Button screen and the TSI
will flash red at the called station.
NOTES:
1. A station can have up to five message indications.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
CANCELING MESSAGES
To cancel a message indication that you left at another station, dial 42 plus the
extension number of the station at which you left a message.
To cancel all message indications left at your keyset, dial 42 plus your extension.
Your Message button indicator will stop flashing and the TSI will go out.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
49
Home Page
RETURNING MESSAGES
•
•
Press Menu, scroll to Message, press OK, scroll to Station Message, press OK,
press Func. soft button, Reply, and then press OK, or dial 43. The first station
that left a message will be called automatically. If that station does not answer,
the called station Message button indicator will continue to flash and the TSI
will stay on.
Repeat until all messages have been returned in the order received.
NOTES:
1. Display keyset users can view message indications and return them in any
order. See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing.
3. If a message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer, you must
manually cancel the message after it has been returned.
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
LOGGING IN AND OUT
If enabled, your SMT-i3105 telephone may require you to log in before making or
receiving calls. In these cases your telephone system administrator will provide
you with an extension number, password, and the feature code used to log out.
To log in:
•
•
•
At Extension Login Screen enter your ID which is your extension number.
Scroll down to the password field and enter your station password
Press on Save soft button or OK button.
To log out:
PROGRAMMED MESSAGES
•
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you can leave a
programmed station message. Display stations calling you will see this message
and be informed of your status or follow your instructions.
DO NOT DISTURB
•
•
•
•
Dial 48 plus any of the message codes (01–20) listed on the back of this user
guide.
To cancel any of these messages you might have selected, dial 48 plus 00.
Press Transfer to exit and store your selection.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button.
You can have multiple programmed message buttons (PMSG) and each one can
have a different message code:
•
•
50
Press any programmed message (PMSG) button. The message is set and the
PGM MSG button indicator will be lit steady. Press the button again to turn off
the programmed message and the indicator will go blank.
Pressing another programmed message (PMSG) button will turn the previous
one off and set a different programmed message.
Dial the feature code provided by your administrator (for example 77).
Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset.
•
While on-hook, press the Func. soft button, scroll to DND, press OK, press 1 to
turn it ON, or dial 401. The Telephone Status Indicator will flash red intermittently to remind you of this mode.
To cancel DND, press the Func. soft button, scroll to DND, press OK, press 0 to
turn it OFF, or dial 400. The Telephone Status Indicator goes blank. You can
make calls while in the DND mode.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button.
2. If you place your keyset in DND mode and you do not have a DND button,
your TSI button will fast flash red to indicate DND status.
ONE TIME DND
If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call, you
can press the DND button and place your station in Do Not Disturb. When you
hang up at the end of the call, DND will be automatically canceled and your keyset will be able to receive new calls. This feature requires a DND button.
51
Home Page
MUTE
You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversation:
•
•
Press the Mute button. The Mute button indicator will be lit steady and the
mute icon will show in the display.
To resume speaking, press the Mute button again. The Mute button indicator
goes blank.
CALLING THE DOOR PHONE/
ROOM MONITOR
You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in
another room.
•
•
Dial the extension number of the door phone.
You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have a conversation.
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
BACKGROUND MUSIC
•
When a music source is supplied, you may listen to music through the speaker in
your keyset:
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the Speaker button.
•
•
GROUP LISTENING
While on-hook, press the Hold button to hear music.
Press the Hold button again to turn music off.
You can set the level of background music by using the Volume buttons while listening to the music. This does not affect the speakerphone level.
When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset, you may want
other people to hear the distant party’s voice over the speaker:
•
ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP
To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to
a computer modem on your PC.
•
•
Press the EP (EST PKU) button for that station on your keyset and the call is
automatically moved to your keyset.
The single line extension on your modem will be disconnected.
NOTE: You must have an assigned (EP button) button on your regular keyset, for
the single line station.
ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE
When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone:
•
•
•
You will receive three short rings repeated.
Lift the handset. You are connected to the door phone.
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
NOTE: This is called Door Unlock in the display.
•
•
Press the Listen (Group Listen) button to turn on the speaker. The microphone is not in use, so the distant party does not hear other parties present in
your office.
Press Listen (Group Listen) again to turn the speaker off and resume private
conversation.
Repeat if necessary.
NOTE: Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office, it may be
advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up. This will eliminate a momentary squeal.
ACCOUNT CODES
When enabled, your system allows calls to be charged to different accounts. You
can enter account codes either by dialing the full code, by entering an account
code “bin number”, or by pressing your ACC (Account) key if one is assigned. Bin
numbers are a 3 digit short code that will automatically insert the appropriate
account code. Account codes may be a maximum of 12 digits (# may be used); if
the account code is to be less than 12 characters you may end the code by pressing , or the right soft key.The type of code used is determined by your telephone
system administrator. Codes can be entered before or during a call as follows:
To enter an account code before placing the call:
•
•
•
52
Press your ACC (Account) key or dial 47.
Dial the account code or bin number.
You will receive a confirmation tone and display.
53
Home Page
•
When prompted dial a trunk or trunk group (i.e. 9) and the telephone number
to call.
To enter an account code by interrupting the conversation:
•
•
While on an outside call press the ACC (Account) key or press Transfer followed by 47.
Dial the account number or bin number (if you are entering an account code
you will need to press your ACC (Account) key or right soft key to finalize the
entry)
NOTE: If you make an error simply repeat the procedure with the correct code.
Only the most recent account code dialed will be recorded.
MANUAL SIGNALLING
Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another station, regardless of the status of your phone (on-hook, off-hook, handsfree, DND, or
ringing).
To send a signal to another station:
•
•
Press the Manual Signalling (MS) button with extender.
You may press the MS button repeatedly to send multiple signals to the designated station.
NOTE:Your phone must have a Manual Signalling (MS) button with a station number extender assigned to it. Manual Signalling will override DND.
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
Keysets may receive a voice announcement while on another call. The calling station must have an OHVA button. When you are in DND, you cannot receive OHVA
calls. The OHVA feature will work with intercom and transferred calls.
•
To return to your first party, press the button corresponding to your original
call. This will disconnect the OHVA call.
NOTES:
1. When you are voice announcing to a station close to you, use the handset to
avoid an echo effect.
2. You cannot off-hook voice announce to single line telephones.
OHVA BLOCK
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Block (Block) button. Pressing this
button will prevent anyone from making an OHVA to you until you press the button again and cancel the blocking.
OHVA REJECT
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject (Reject) button. Pressing
this button while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing
party and return you to your original call.
IN GROUP/OUT OF GROUP
If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group, you can remove your keyset from
the group and then put it back in. While you are out of the group, you can receive
calls to your extension number but not calls to the group number. If you have an
IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button with the group number assigned.
•
•
Press the IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button. The button indicator will be lit steady
when your keyset is in the group.
Press the IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button again to exit the group and the indicator will go blank. Repeat as necessary.
If you do not have an IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button:
When you receive an OHVA and secure OHVA is ON, you will hear the announcement in the handset receiver, if you are using the handset. If secure OHVA is OFF
then you will hear the announcement on the speaker, if you are talking on the
handset. If you are using the speakerphone the announcement will always be
heard through the speaker.
•
To make an off-hook voice announcement:
The IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) button can include an extender to indicate the specific group that this button will affect. This means that if you are in multiple groups,
you can decide for which groups you will receive calls.
•
•
•
•
•
54
Dial the extension number or press the DSS button.
When you receive a busy signal, press the OHVA button.
After the attention tone, begin speaking.
Finish the call by replacing the handset.
Press the flashing Call button on your keyset. This will place the original party
on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party.
Dial the IO GRP (IN/OUT GRP) access code number ________________, then
the group number, then 0, press Call soft button to exit the group or 1 then
press Call soft button to enter the group.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press SPEAKER button.
55
Home Page
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET
•
•
Redial the new passcode. If successful, you will hear two beeps. Four beeps
indicate an incorrect code to confirm, reenter the code again.
Press Transfer to store the new passcode.
AME PASSWORD
SET ANSWER MODE (INTERCOM)
This feature allows customers using the AME feature to enable password protection. This will prevent unauthorized users from listening to your messages being
left. The passcode is the same as your station passcode. This feature only applies if
there is a Samsung Voicemail card installed in the system and your keyset has a
programmed AME button.
You can receive internal calls in one of three modes (see Answering Intercom Calls
under Intercom Calls for descriptions).
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSCODE or 100 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
AUTO CAMP-ON
This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on, if possible, when
a busy station is called.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 081 to turn CAMP-ON on or 080 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
SELECT RING TONE
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 103.
Dial 0 for Ringing, 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
NOTE: When your keyset is programmed for Voice Announce and you have Forward No Answer (FNA) turned on, you must answer screened transfers by pressing
the OK button before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward.
SET ANSWER MODE (CO)
Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom answer mode.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO.
Press the Volume Up [+] or Down [-] key to change status (On/Off).
Press Transfer to store your selection.
Each SMT-i3105 user can select from a variety of ring tones.
AUTOMATIC HOLD
From the LCD:
While on an outside call, pressing a line button, route button or a flashing Call button will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call. This
feature can be turned on or off at your keyset.
•
•
•
•
•
Press Menu button.
Scroll to Sound option and press OK.
Select Ring Tone and press OK—OR—you may dial 1 and immediately enter
the option.
Use Volume Up [+] or Down [-] buttons to scroll through the available ring
tones and press OK or Save soft button to store your selection.
Press End soft button to return to idle screen.
CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE
From the factory, your station passcode is 1234.You can change your station passcode whenever you desire.
•
•
•
56
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 101.
Dial your old passcode.
Dial a new passcode (must be four characters). You can use 0–9.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
HOT KEYPAD
On your phone system your keyset’s keypad can be made “live” or “hot” so that it is
not necessary to lift the handset or press the Speaker button before you begin dialing. Calls can be made and features activated by simply dialing the C.O. line number, trunk group access code, intercom number or feature access code.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
57
Home Page
KEY CONFIRMATION TONE
CALLER ID REVIEW ALL
You can hear a short beep (confirmation tone) each time you press a button on the
dial pad. This tone can be turned on or off.
This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls
sent to their stations.This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in, first out basis.
The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station but that
you did not answer. When reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the
person back. The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 040 to turn tones off or 041 to turn tones on.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
Additional ring tones can be selected from the Menu, Sound, Keytone,
option.
REJOINING A PAGE
This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page
after you return your keyset to idle. To enable this feature:
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
RING PREFERENCE
This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset or press
the Speaker button.This method will always answer calls in the order they arrived
at your keyset.When you turn ring preference off, you must press the flashing button to answer a call, allowing you to answer calls in the order you choose.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Dial 061 to turn ring preference on or 060 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME
This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as
it is dialed.
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
•
•
•
SECURE OHVA
This option allows you to receive OHVA (Over Head Voice Announce) calls via the
speaker while you are on the handset.
•
•
•
With your handset on hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 131 to turn SECURE OHVA On or 130 to turn it Off.
Press Transfer to savve your selection.
CONFIGURE MOBILE EXTENSIONS (MOBEX)
This feature allows you to configure options for any Mobile Extension (MOBEX)
ports that are assigned to you by your telephone system administrator. You can
turn a port on or off; set the telephone number for the port; or set the caller ID you
will be calling in from.The caller ID field has no effect unless you have been authorized as an Executive MOBEX user. Check with your telephone system administrator
for further details on your specific system configuration.
To set the phone number a MOBEX port can reach you on:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
58
With you handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 110.
Press 121 to turn CID Review All on or 120 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
Press Transfer and then dial 126.
Dial your station passcode.
Dial the number of the port you wish to configure (1-5) (you may also use the
Volume Up [+] or Down [-] keys to select a port and press the right soft key
to confirm).
Press Right soft button to move to telephone number.
Dial the number of a C.O. line or Trunk Group to use when making calls to this
MOBEX port.
Dial the phone number you can be reached at by users calling this MOBEX
port.
Press Transfer to store your selection and exit programming.
59
Home Page
To set the caller ID of the location you will be calling in from:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press Transfer and then dial 126.
Dial your station passcode.
Dial the number of the port you wish to configure (1-5) (you may also use the
Volume Up [+] or Down [-] keys to select a port and press the right soft key
to confirm).
Press Right soft key, then Volume Up [+] key, then press Right soft button
again.
Dial the phone number you will be calling in from.
Press Transfer to store your selection and exit programming.
To turn a MOBEX port ON or OFF:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press Transfer and then dial 126.
Dial your station passcode.
Dial the number of the port you wish to configure (1-5) (you may also use the
Volume Up [+] or Down [-] keys to select a port and press the right soft key
to confirm).
Press Right soft button to move the cursor down.
At TEL, dial 2 on dial pad to advance to DEACT.
Dial 1 to set to Yes.
Press Transfer to store your selection and exit programming.
DISPLAY FEATURES
DIRECTORY INFORMATION
An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number.
Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before answering.
Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name. Incoming calls can be
easily identified and answered with different greetings.
Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display [CALL FOR xxx]
where xxx is the station group number. This allows you to answer calls directed to
you differently than calls directed to your group.
DISPLAY NUMBER DIALED
Display keysets begin showing digits as they are dialed. They will stay in the display until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the Timer button is
pressed. If the call duration timer is not used, the number dialed will be displayed
until the call is released, transferred or put on hold.
CALL DURATION TIMER
The system can be set to automatically time outside calls. A few seconds after you
dial a telephone number, the timer appears in the display. It appears immediately
for incoming calls. The call timer continues for the duration of the call. Call duration times are displayed in minutes and seconds. If a call lasts longer than 60 minutes, the timer restarts.
You can press the Timer button to manually begin timing a call. Press it again to
stop timing. If you press it while the automatic timer is on, the call duration time is
restarted.
AUTO TIMER
Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer
incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call.
•
•
•
60
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 119.
Dial 41 to turn the auto timer on or 40 to turn it off.
Press Transfer to store your selection.
61
Home Page
TIMER FUNCTION
Display keyset users may use this feature as a simple stopwatch.
•
•
•
•
When the keyset is idle, press the Timer button to start timing.
Press the Timer button again to stop timing.
Read the elapsed time in the display.
Lift the handset and replace it. The display will return to date and time.
VIEWING STATION MESSAGE INDICATIONS
You can view all of your message indications before you return them:
•
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press the Message button with the flashing indicator.
The first station that left a message indication will be displayed.
Press the Volume Up [+] or Down [-] buttons to scroll through the stations
that left message indications. Use the soft keys to reply, clear or advance to the
next message.
Press the End button to return your keyset to the idle condition.
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES
MANAGING PROGRAMMABLE
KEY ASSIGNMENTS
You can manage your key assignments for easy one touch operation of frequently used features.
•
•
•
While on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 107.
Use the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] buttons to scroll through all of
your programmable buttons.
Press Transfer to exit programming.
To program the programmable keys, press Menu, Settings, AOM Setting.
For example:
If you want to press a key that will direct calls to Joel at extension 3201. Select
an empty key and set the following:
•
•
•
Feature:
Ext. Number:
Display Name:
DSS
3201
Joel
Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it.
This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory.
If you want to press a key that will direct calls to Sue’s external phone number at
972-444-3456. Select an empty key and set the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press Transfer and then dial 106.
Dial the speed dial bin number 00–49.
Enter the station name using the keypad. See Station Names.
Press the Transfer key to store the speed dial name.
Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary.
NOTE: Use the Navigation button to move the cursor left or right, and use the
Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] buttons to increment the speed dial bins.
Feature:
Speed
Ext. Number:
01
Display Name:
Sue
Use Transfer 105 to set speed dial number:
[xxxx] SPEED DIAL
01: 9-9724443456
Please consult your installation company to requested a complete list of descriptions for any keys you may have programmed on your keyset.
NOTE: Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender.
See Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers Section.
STATION NAMES
•
•
•
62
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 104.
Enter the Station Name. Use the Volume Up [+] or Volume Down [-] buttons
to move the cursor.
Press Transfer to store the name.
BACKSPACE WITH LCR
If you misdial while using LCR, you can delete digits shown in the display by pressing the Backspace soft key as many times as necessary or by pressing Clear to
delete all.
63
Home Page
CALLER ID
SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID DISPLAY
Simultaneous display of Caller ID name and number on incoming CO calls on both
lines of display keysets is supported on all OfficeServ systems. On Transferred CO
calls, you can decide if you want to see the Caller ID name or Caller ID number in
the display. Regardless of which data is selected, you can press the NND button to
view the other pieces of Caller ID information. To select the type of Caller ID information you wish to view:
•
•
•
•
•
•
64
With the handset on-hook, press Transfer and then dial 119.
To set the first line of a ringing call display dial 0.
To set the second line of a ringing call display dial 1.
Set the data to display from the following:
- To set for Conversation Incoming dial 2.
- To set for Trunk Display dial 3.
- To set for Time/Cost dial 4.
- To show nothing dial 0.
- To show Caller ID Number dial 1.
- To show Caller ID Name dial 2.
- To show the DID Number the call came in on dial 3.
- To show the Name of the DID the call came in on dial 4.
- To show the Name of the Group the call came in for dial 5.
- To show the DID Number and then Name of the DID dial 6.
- To show the Name of the DID and then the DID Number dial 7.
To set the top line of the display shown after answering a call dial 2.
Set the data to display from the following:
- To show Caller ID Number dial 0.
- To show Caller ID Name dial 1.
- To show the DID Number the call came in on dial 2.
- To show the Name of the DID the call came in on dial 3.
- To show Caller ID Number and then the DID Number dial 4.
- To show Caller ID Name and then the DID Number dial 5.
- To show the DID Number and then the name of the DID dial 6.
- To show the Name of the DID and then the DID Number dial 7.
- To show the C.O. line information dial 8.
To set the format if the C.O. line information when the above is set to show C.O.
line information dial 3.
- To show the C.O. line number and the dialed or Caller ID Number dial 0.
- To show only the dialed or Caller ID Number dial 1.
Press Transfer to exit and store your selection.
VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL
In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped-on call at your keyset, you
can press the Next button to display the Caller ID information associated with the
call in queue at your keyset. Either the CID name or CID number will show in the
display depending on you Name/Number selection.
To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped-on to your keyset,
press the Next button.
INQUIRE CALLER ID PARK/HOLD INFO
If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you, you
may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call. This may influence
how you choose to handle the call.
From an idle keyset:
•
•
•
Press the Inquire button—OR—press CID button, then Func. soft button, and
the Inquire soft key.
Dial the trunk number.
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button—OR—you may use
Func. soft button and NND to view more information about this call—OR—
you can return to the idle condition by pressing Ignore.
If you are on a call:
•
•
•
Press the Func. soft button and then Inquire button. Your existing call will go
on hold—OR—press the CID button and Func. soft button then Inquire soft
button to place the first call on hold.
Dial the trunk number.
You may now answer the call by pressing the Func. soft button then the ANS
button—OR—you may use NND to view more information about this call—
OR—you can return to the idle condition by pressing the Func. soft button
and then Ignore.
NOTES:
1. If you are on an intercom call or you have Automatic Hold turned off, you must
finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring.
2. If you inquire about an outgoing call, you will receive a [call no longer available] display.
65
Home Page
FEATURE ACESS CODES
Paging Zones - Dial 55 plus
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Q
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
All External Zones
All Page
SECTION 6.
APPLICATIONS
Feature Access Codes
0
10 + xxx
12 + xxx
13
16 + xxx
17
18
19
400
401
42 + xxx
43
44
45
46
47
48 + xx
49
53 + xxx + 1
53 + xxx + 0
Operator
Pick Up A Parked Call
Pick Up a Held Call
Door Lock Release
Speed Dialing
Save And Redial Number
New Call (Recall)
Last Number Redial
Cancel Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
Cancel Sent Message
Return Message
Callback
Busy Station Camp-On
Conference
Account Code
Cancel Programmed MSG
Send Flash to C.O. or PBX
In Group
Out of Group
56
600
601 + xxx
602 + xxx
603 + xxx
604 + xxx
605 + xxx
606 + xxx
65 + xxx
66 + xx
67
Q
Meet Me Answer
Cancel All Call Forward
Set Forward All Calls
Set Forward Busy
Set Forward No Answer
Set Forward Busy/No Answer
Set Forward on DND
Set Forward Follow Me
Pick Up Ringing Extension
Pick Up Group
Universal Answer
Authorization Code
NOTE: For additional access codes contact your system administrator.
66
67
Home Page
Samsung Voicemail
This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a
Subscriber. A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the various
features and services available in the Samsung Voicemail. Please review this section carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Services, known as
Subscriber Services.
Voice Mail is one of the Subscriber Services available. Your voice mail box has the
capability of storing private messages, and offers a number of options for sending
or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new messages.
Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager. This allows you control over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your
callers in the event you are unable to speak to them directly. The ‘events’ are
referred to as “Call Conditions”. No-Answer, Busy, and Blocked are the most commonly used Call Conditions.
This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones
outside the office. The basic operation is the same, but the access method will be
different. See the Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more details.
Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all
Subscribers. See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature
availability.
ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX
[Also known as Subscriber Services Menu]
Inside Callers [Subscriber logging in from their Desk]
•
•
Dial the voicemail access number or press the key assigned to ring
voicemail [VMMSG].
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is 0000).
Outside Callers [Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the
office environment]
•
•
•
Dial the phone number that will be answered by the voicemail. The main
greeting will answer.
At the main greeting dial [#] plus your Subscriber (or mailbox) number
(Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number).
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is 0000).
Access your Subscriber Services (or Mailbox) from a Station
other than your Own (or checking a mailbox associated with a
different station)
•
•
•
Press the [VMMSG] key or dial the voicemail group number. You will be
prompted to enter a password.
Press [,]. This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu.
Press [#] plus the Subscriber number of your choice. You will be prompted to
enter you password.
At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions. You will
hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox.You will then
hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options:
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
,
Listen to New Messages - See Listening to your Message.
Record and Send Message - See Sending Messages.
Review Saved Messages - See Listening to your Message.
Access Manager - See Access Manager.
Personal Greetings - See Personal Greetings.
Mailbox Administration - See Mailbox Administration.
Personal Services - See Personal Services.
Return to Main Menu.
When accessing and retrieving voicemails from the mailbox, the service options
such as (1) Listening to Messages, (2) Record and Send Messages, and (3)
Review Saved Messages are available and can be accessed through the dial pad
or through the Function soft key. When pressing the function soft button the
options will be displayed. Scroll to and press the OK button to select an option
from the Function Menu.
68
69
Home Page
Subscriber Services Menu
Group New
Messages
Group Saved
Messages
11
33
Listen to New Review Saved
Messages
Messages
Group Messages Menu
1
Group
Urgent Messages
2
Group
Callback Requests
3
Group
Reminders
4
5
Group
Private Messages
Group
Fax Only Messages
1
9
#
0
*
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Listen Menu
1
11
Mailbox
Administration
Personal
Services
Pause, Resume
Play Menu
Options
Exit
2
4
5
6
#
8
0
*
2
Save
Message
3
Discard
Message
4
Reply to Sender
5
Place
Call to Sender
Forward a
Copy of Message
7
Rewind
5 Seconds
8
Pause, Resume
Message Playback
9
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
##
Change
Playback Speed
Skip to
Next Message
Scan Messages
To Create a
Reminder
1
Review
Recording
2
o
Stop, Append to
Recording
3
ing
Discard Recording
and Rerecord
4
Set
Delivery Options
ns
5
Specify
Future Delivery
6
SEND Message,,
Then Copy
7
Rewind
5 Seconds
77
Change
Playback Volume
me
8
Pause, Resume
e
Record/Playback
ck
9
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
99
Change
Playback Speed
d
0
Play
Menu Options
#
SEND Message,,
Then Exit Record
rd
00
Play Message
Information
0
Play
Menu Options
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
*
1
Follow Me
For a Directory
of Subscribers
r"
"Enter the Recipient's Number"
Change
Playback Volume
Play
Message Inventory
#
##
Deliver Copy
of Fax Message
6
99
#
Play Previous
Message
77
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
Personal
Greetings
Record Menu
Play
Message
Group
A Specific Sender
Play
Menu Options
Access
Manager
3
55
8
Record & Send
Messages
1
Assign and/or Edit
Primary Greeting
1
Change
Message Alert
Aler
1
Review
Workload
2
Assign and/or Edit
Busy Greeting
2
Change
Pager Notification
Notific
2
Edit Stored
Telephone Numbers
3
Block All Calls
3
Assign and/or Edit
Blocking Greeting
3
Review Deleted
Delet
Messages
3
Change
Weekly Schedule
1
Change
Password
4
Call forwarding
4
Assign and/or Edit
Night Greeting
4
Review Undelivered
Unde
Messages
5
Place a
Direct Call
2
Record
Name
5
Call Screening
5
Assign and/or Edit
Screened Greeting
5
Auto Play
New Messages
Message
3
Enter Directory
Name
6
Find Me
6
Edit Only
Personal Greetings
6
Auto Play Me
Message
Information
7
Personal
Administration
4
Extended
Prompting
7
Auto Set
Night Intercept
7
Edit Only
Mailbox Greeting
8
Pause, Resume
Resum
Menu Prompting
Prompt
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
9
Record and Send
S
Broadcast Message
Me
0
Play
Menu Options
#
Play
Access Coverage
0
Play
Menu Options
0
Play
Menu Options
#
Record
a Reminder
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
0
Play
Menu Options
*
Cancel, Retur
Return
to Subscriber Services
0
Play
Menu Options
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
ervices
NOTE: All options shown MAY NOT be authorized. If an option is not available
please speak to your system administrator.
*Change Playback Speed and Volume not available on the OfficeServ 7030,
OfficeServ 7100, OfficeServ 7200-S or OfficeServ IP-UMS.
70
71
Home Page
GETTING STARTED
1 or 3
Using your new Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services is as simple as following a
few simple spoken instructions. First time users should read this section as a tutorial. You should start with the following steps:
LISTENING TO OLD OR NEW MESSAGES
•
1
Play / replay the message you just heard.
From the Subscriber Services Menu:
11
Play the previous message.
•
•
•
•
•
2
Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
3
Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
4
Reply to the message.
Access your Subscriber Services Menu - You already know how to do this.
Record a Primary/No-Answer Personal Greeting. Dial [5][1].
Record a Mailbox Greeting. Dial [5][7].
Change your access code (Password). Dial [#][7][1].
Record your name. Dial [#][7][2].
Enter your directory name. Dial [#][7][3].
After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and
ready to use.
LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES
This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender (if the
sender has a mailbox on this system).
5
This will work for internal and external callers, but Caller ID service is needed to use this feature on an outside call.
55
If there are new messages in your mailbox your [VMMSG] key will be lit. Call the
Samsung Voicemail by pressing this key, and when prompted enter your password. You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu. Select [1] to listen to new
messages or [3] to listen to saved messages.
Note: After you enter your password, if “Autoplay of New Messages” is enabled and
you have new messages the Samsung Voicemail will begin to play them automatically. A subscriber can control this feature. From the Subscriber Services Menu [6]
[5] toggles “Autoplay of New Messages” ON/OFF.
6
72
Forward the message and saves a copy.
The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailbox number (nnn), using
the directory service (#) or you may also add comments and leave it as a
memo to yourself (##).
The Send and Copy Service (option 6) allows a user to send copies of a message to multiple recipients easily. A different introduction message may be
left for each recipient.
The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu.
LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES
GROUP NEW MESSAGES
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES
GROUP OLD MESSAGES
ACCESS MANAGER
PERSONAL GREETINGS
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
PAUSE / RESUME
PLAY MENU OPTIONS
EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT
PERSONAL SERVICES
Deliver a fax copy.
This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document(s). Faxmail documents can be delivered to any fax machine of your choice as long as out
calling is authorized. You can also have faxmail messages automatically
delivered to the fax machine of your choice.
SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU
1
11
2
3
33
4
5
6
8
0
,
#
Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message.
7
Rewind the message 5 seconds.
77
Change playback volume of the recording. [Not available on the OS 7030,
OS 7100, OS 7200-S or OS IP-UMS]
There are two levels of volume during playback. Dialing this code will toggle between the two levels.
8
Pause or resume during message playback.
9
Fast forward the message 5 seconds.
99
Change playback speed of the recording. [Not available on OS 7030, OS
7100, OS 7200-S or OS IP-UMS]
There are two levels of speed during playback. Dialing this code will toggle
between the two speeds.
73
Home Page
Play options.
0
3
4
5
6
#
Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this
point.
Discard and Re-Record
Set Message Attributes (Delivery Options)
Schedule Future Delivery
Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else
Save and Send the Recording
00
Hear the time and date, and sender's information of the message you just
heard. Sender information is not available on outside calls.
#
Move to the next message. This does not Save or Discard the current message - it is retained as new.
Setting Message Attributes
##
Scan. Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message. This is
similar to the scan button on a radio. It will allow you to find a specific message quickly. To stop scanning press [1].
If after recording a message you select [4] you can set up any combination of the
following delivery options:
,
Cancel and return to previous menu.
11 or 33
GROUP NEW OR OLD MESSAGES
Messages can be grouped as either Reminders, press [3] or Messages from a specific sender, press [9].
Additionally you can press [#] and hear a summary of your mailbox contents:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Number of messages
Number of reminders
Number of urgent messages
Number of messages needing a callback
Number of private messages
Number of fax messages
1
2
3
4
5
,
Urgent Delivery
Return Receipt Requested
Request a Call Back
Private Delivery
Reply Required
Exit
Scheduling Future Delivery
If after recording a message you select [5] to schedule future delivery, you will be
able to set message attributes and set this message as:
#
1
2
3
4
5
,
Immediate Delivery
Next Few Hours
End of Current Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
Beginning of Next Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
A Coming Day of the Week
Specific Day / Time
Exit
2
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
This option is used to send a message to another subscriber. The steps are simple:
a)
Enter the recipient’s mailbox number, or if this is not known enter [#] to use
the system directory.
b) Record your message at the tone. After recording the message, you will hear
the Send Menu with the following functions:
1
2
74
Review
Continue Recording
75
Home Page
6
4
Find Me
Find Me, when enabled, will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list of
preprogrammed phone numbers. The stored phone numbers are entered in
'Personal Services' [#][2] (if allowed by the Administrator). The stored telephone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers.
The Find Me feature only use the first five.
ACCESS MANAGER
The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when,
where and how, and/or if the Samsung Voicemail contacts you when a caller dials
your extension number. All of the options are toggled on/off based on their current status when you access them.
7
Night Intercept
This feature is dependent on your weekly availability schedule, which is
entered in 'Personal Services' [#][3] (if allowed by the Administrator). When
Night Intercept is active the Samsung Voicemail will first ring your extension
then play your primary, No Answer greeting during the day (when you are
available) and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greeting during the night (when you are not available).
Note: ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed by the System
Administrator for each Subscriber. They are:
1
Follow Me
Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new
destination (Designated Location) will be active.This number may be an internal or external number. This is useful if you are frequently traveling or changing the number where you can be reached.
When Follow Me is activated, the transfer will be supervised and confirmed.
This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at
the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber’s mailbox.
3
Note: This does NOT use the Day and Night schedules of the phone system. It
is solely controlled by the Subscriber’s Availability Schedule.
8
Pause / Resume
,
Exit from Access Manager
0
Play All Options
#
Play Access Coverage
This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings are set. It
will also tell you what greetings will play under each of the call conditions you
have setup.
Call Blocking
When this feature is active, callers will not be transferred to your extension,
they will hear your 'blocked' greeting (if recorded) and will go directly to your
mailbox if they do not select any or are not offered any other options.
4
Call Forwarding
Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alternate
location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to another Subscriber. The “Forwarded To” Subscriber will now be in control of the
caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber’s Mailbox. If the
“Forwarded To” Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow what
ever the “Forwarded To” Subscriber has set up for their call conditions. The
Caller will hear “Forwarding to”“{Subscriber Name}” before actually being forwarded.
5
Call Screening
If this is turned on, the caller will be asked their name and the Samsung
Voicemail will play this name to you before the transfer, giving you an option
to accept or reject the call.
76
5
PERSONAL GREETINGS
The options available in this menu will be determined by your System
Administrator, and not all of them may be available to you. In the simplest systems,
only a mailbox greeting will be available, additional greetings may be accessible in
more complex systems.
Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension
and you do not answer.
You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings, and you may assign any one of them
to be active. There are several different 'Call Coverage' conditions to which you
may assign any of your 9 greetings. The Call Coverage Conditions are: No-Answer,
Busy, and Do Not Disturb (or Forwarded All). This will allow different greetings to
play depending on the type of call forward that you have set, or the condition of
your telephone.
77
Home Page
The Call Coverage conditions that you can assign specific greetings to are selected by the following digits:
1
5
Used while Call Screening is enabled, and you REJECT a caller after listening to
the caller's record name.
Primary/No Answer Greeting
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Screening' feature.
Used when in your office, away from your desk or during the time period you
are scheduled available. If this is the only Personal Greeting you record, it will
play for all call coverage conditions.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm sorry, but I am not available to speak with
you at this time. If someone else can help you, please enter the extension
number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Basic
Greeting' feature.
Example:“Hi this is John Smith. I'm sorry I am not available to answer your call.
If someone else can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to
leave me a message, press 1.”
2
6
Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your
greeting. When you are done recording your greeting, you will be able to listen to the greeting you recorded, save the greeting you recorded and return
to the previous menu, record the greeting again, or exit without saving the
greeting.
Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension
or the telephone at your Designated Location.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Busy
Greeting' feature.
3
Call Blocking Greeting
Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone
is forwarded ALL or DND.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Blocking' feature.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. Sorry I missed your call, but I'm going to be out
of the office for the next few hours. If someone else can help you, please enter
the extension number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
4
Night Greeting
Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE, usually after
business hours during the evening and at night.
Edit Personal Greetings
You may also edit/record each one of the greetings (1-9) at any time.
Busy Greeting
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm on another line right now. If someone else
can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave a message,
press 1.”
Call Screening Greeting
Note: If you record only the greeting assigned to the No-Answer Call Coverage
Condition, then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage
Conditions (No-Answer, Busy, Blocked, Night, and Rejected Caller). In this case,
the salutation part of the greeting should be very general.
7
Edit Mailbox Greeting
Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded any
of the Call Coverage greetings. The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox
greeting directly, is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mailbox using the VT (VoiceMail Transfer) key.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Mailbox
Greeting Option' feature.
Example: “Hi, this is John Smith. Please leave me a message, I will call you as
soon as I can.”
Note: This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has
played to the caller. A common usage for this Greeting is when another
Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to transfer the caller directly to your Mailbox.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the
'Scheduling' feature.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I've left the office for the evening. If you would
like to try someone else, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave
me a message, press 1.”
78
79
Home Page
3
6
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to
undelete any messages that you have recently deleted (up to the programmed Daily Maintenance Time, which is set to 3 a.m. by Default the following morning).
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notification, message alert options and other message control features.
1
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call any outside or
inside telephone number, after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
4
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [3] for Deleted Messages.
Undelivered Retrieval
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to recall
any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been picked up by the recipient.
Setting Up Message Alert:
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [4] for Undelivered Messages.
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
n
Press [1] for Message Alert.
n
There are 4 options available to you:
This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet
been picked up by the recipient.
Press [1] to toggle message alert on and off.
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be notified.
5
Press [4] to set the destination phone number.
Pager Notification
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call your beeper
service and notify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [2] for pager notification.
n
There are 4 options available to you:
Press [1] to toggle pager notification on and off.
Auto Play New Messages
If this option is enabled, after you enter your password correctly any new messages will immediately begin to play. To enable (or if already enabled toggle
and disable) this feature:
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
2
n
Deleted voice mail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a.m.
the following day. Select this option to recover ("undelete") previously deleted messages, during this period of time.
Message Alert
To hear your message at the remote location when the Samsung Voicemail
calls you, after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed
that there is a message and to enter your password. Simply enter your password and you will now be logged in.
Undelete
6
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [5] to Set Auto Play of New Messages.
Auto Play Message Information
If this option is enabled, the date, time and sender’s name will be played automatically before each message. If this is disabled, the information must be
requested manually by pressing ‘00’. To enable (or if already enabled toggle
and disable) this feature:
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be paged.
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
n
Press [6] to Set Auto Play of Message Information.
Press [4] to set the pager phone number.
80
81
Home Page
to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to
your callers. All other times you will be considered unavailable.
9
MESSAGE BROADCAST
5
Allows you to place a direct call out of the Samsung Voicemail from anywhere.
You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1-5 that corresponds to a
stored number (See Personal Services, 2 - Stored Numbers). This feature must
be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited or opened to
internal, local, and long distance calls.
This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System
Administrator.
Broadcast to All Mailboxes
If you have been designated as a Subscriber Administrator, you may send a
message to ALL mailboxes in the system.
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
n
Press [9] for Broadcast Messages.
This option will only be available if your mailbox has been assigned
Subscriber Administration privileges.
7
PERSONAL SERVICES
This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings (see next
section).
PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS
1
The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your
name. Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator.
2
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][1].
n
The current password will be played and you will have the chance to
change it.
Recording your Name
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][2].
Stored Numbers
n
Allows you to enter up to 9 stored phone numbers. The first five of these are
used in the 'Find Me' feature, but any of them (1-9) can be easily dialed using
only one digit followed by the pound key, to be used by many other features
from within your subscriber space. (ie: “Follow Me, “Message Alert”, “Pager
Alert”, and “Direct Call”).
The current name will be played and you will have the chance to change
it.
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name and/or enter your
Directory Name (described below), you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
Schedule Availability
Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with Night Personal
Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature. Follow the spoken directions
82
n
Use this option to record your name. Your recorded name is played in several
different situations. It is important to record your name for proper operation
of the Samsung Voicemail system.
3
3
Setting your Password
Workload Management
Allows you to access to all reminders, both Active and Pending. If authorized
you can group your reminders as Commitments, Follow-Ups or Tasks for better organization. The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending
(pending means scheduled for future delivery).
2
Personal Administration
This menu allows you to make changes to basic setup settings, that are rarely
changed. Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings.
You probably will not need to change them after that.
#
1
Place a Direct Call
Entering your Directory Name
Use this option to enter your Directory Name. Your Directory Name is used by
callers to find you if they do not know your extension number.
n
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][3].
83
Home Page
n
The current Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are
equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad. Follow the
instructions to enter a new name.You will be prompted to enter your last
name and then your first name.
This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly.
4
To activate this feature press the AME button. The associated indicator will be lit
steady. Press again to turn off. If this key is pressed while a station is ringing (during forward no answer), the feature will be turned on for the current call only.
While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may:
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name (described above)
and/or enter your Directory Name, you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
n
Press [#] to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it.
n
Press [,] to immediately disconnect your station.The caller continues to leave
a message normally.
Extended Prompting
n
Pick up the handset and monitor privately.
Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the
subscriber interface (mailbox prompts). Change this setting only if you are
very familiar with the user operation of the SVMi E-Series.
n
Press ANS / RLS to answer the call (using the handset or speaker).
Note: Remember if you know what digits to press, you can enter them at any
time you do not have to wait to be prompted. This feature can be toggled
on/off at anytime. Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber
menu to press zero for more options. This enables you to still be able to find
out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled.
KEYSET USER FEATURES
AME Password
If your keyset has AME Password (MMC 110) set to Yes, you must enter your station password to listen to messages being left.This will prevent unauthorized people from listening to messages being left for you.
If the password option is turned on, while a message is being left, press the flashing AME indicator and enter your station password (not your SVMi E-Series password). You will then hear the message being left.
The following options are available if you have a display keyset.They require setup
by the System Administrator.
Call Record
Message Waiting Lights
If you have a call record button assigned to your phone, you may press it at any
time, to record the conversation in progress. If you have a display keyset, you will
also have the soft key options to pause and time the message.
When new messages are left in your mailbox, the voice mail message light on your
keyset will flash. Press this flashing key [VMMSG] and follow the prompts to
retrieve messages.This key may be pressed at any time to log into your Subscriber
Main Menu.
Answer Machine Emulation
If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset, you
can use it to monitor calls going to your voice mail, and optionally answer them.
The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering
machine.
Your keyset must be set to forward on no answer to voice mail. After ringing your
station the caller will be connected to your voice mail and hear your personal
greeting before leaving a message. During this time you will be monitoring the
connection between the caller and your voice mail box. At this time you will only
be monitoring the call, you can not talk to the other party until you answer. You
may pick up the call at any time or ignore it.
84
85
Home Page
SHORTCUTS
Calling
Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press [#] to immediately
send the call to the called parties mailbox.
1. E-MESSAGE DELIVERY: Voice mail messages (.wav) and/or fax mail messages
(.tiff ) are "delivered" to your Inbox with the appropriate attached file.
2. E-MESSAGE NOTIFICATION: You will receive an e-mail, with NO attachments,
notifying you that you have a voice and/or fax mail message in your Voice Mail
Box.
•
Call Divert to Voicemail
•
While receiving an incoming (ringing) call, dial [,] to immediately send the caller
to your personal voicemail box. This will override the call forward no answer setting.
Direct Messaging
[#] + DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without having to dial their extension number first, keyset users may simply dial [#] plus a
mailbox (extension) number and leave a message directly. If you dial a busy extension press [#] to connect directly with the mailbox.
•
Functionality
•
Self Memo (Reminder)
•
Pressing [##] will leave a message in your own mailbox. This is useful to remind
yourself of things to do now or in the future. Messages can be sent with future
delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due.
•
With either type of EMG, when Caller ID (CID) is provided, the callers telephone number will appear in the subject field of the email along with the date
and time stamp of when the voice message was originally recorded in your
Voice Mail Box.
If the caller is also a subscriber on the system and the E-Mail Gateway is set up
with a valid "Reply To" address, the Subscriber's name will also appear in the
"From" field. Otherwise, the "From" field will display the name of the Samsung
voice mail system (SVMi-8E, SVMi-16E, or SVMi-20E) sending the message.
Client will use their PC's Multi-Media kit (equipped with either speakers
and/or a headset) to listen to messages delivered to their e-mail Inbox.
INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS
IMPORTANT NOTE: If the PC/Laptop/PDA/Smart Phone/etc… is not
equipped with hardware and software capable of playing a '.WAV' file then
the E-Mail Gateway will not work for them until they add some method to
listen to '.WAV' files delivered to their Inbox.
Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays
to play, save, delete, reply, call, forward, rewind, pause, fast forward, change the volume, get message information, or help.
The same applies to Fax Mail messages, if the device the subscriber is using
does not support the viewing of '.TIFF' files, then the E-Mail Gateway for
Fax Mail will not work for them until they add some method to view .tiff
files delivered to their inbox.
Viewing Mailbox Contents
If you have new messages, in addition to the Telephone Status Indicator (TSI) you
will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the SVMi
E-Series.
•
No Synchronization of messages is performed between the Voice Mail Box
and the E-mail Inbox.
E-MAIL GATEWAY (EMG)
-
The E-Mail Gateway feature integrates your voice mail box with your email client.
No matter what email client software you are using or where you use it, you can
send voice mail messages and fax mail messages to your E-Mail inbox.
-
There are two parts to the E-Mail Gateway; E-Message Delivery and E-Message
Notification.
86
As a subscriber you can use either E-Message Delivery and/or E-Message
Notification.
As a subscriber you can have multiple e-mail addresses. (a maximum of 5
valid email addresses).
E-Message Notification can be set to one e-mail address while E-Message
Delivery is set to different e-mail address.
Messages listened to, forwarded, deleted, and/or saved within an e-mail
inbox will NOT effect the status of that same new message in the Voice
Mail or the MWI (Message Waiting Indicator) associated with that message on the phone.
Also messages listened to in the Voice Mail, from a phone, will not change
the Unread/Read status of the same message in an e-mail inbox.
87
Home Page
-
•
However, the Voice Mail Administrator can adjust parameters per subscriber or group of subscribers that decide how, when, or if to delete the
original voice message after it is sent to the E-Mail Server.
When full synchronization of messages between Voicemail Box and E-mail
Inbox is required, ask your Samsung representative about the OfficeServ IPUMS. This is an Internet Protocol based fully synchronized Unified Messaging
System.
Benefits
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Store and Archive Voice and Fax Mail Messages in visible folders.
Voice and Fax Mail Messages can now easily be dragged and dropped into
folders the same way e-mail messages are organized and saved.
Voice and Fax Mail Messages are now essentially the same as any other e-mail
message.
Backups and Message Archives can be made when they are made for all other
types of e-mail messages.
Add text notes and comments to use for reference later.
Some (if not all) e-mail clients will allow you to edit the body of the e-mail to
add comments.
Some will allow you to edit the subject field to help you find a particular message quickly in a large archive of messages.
Call Back Numbers and Date & Time Stamp are easily displayed in the Subject
field.
Easily forward Voice messages received, to others even if they are not a Voice
Mail Subscriber on your system.
No EMG System or Client Software to load on your Local PC or Network
Servers.
Therefore compatible with most:
-
E-Mail providers and E-Mail Clients
-
PCs, Laptops, PDA, and/or Smartphones
NOTE: If you are not sure you have this functionality on your system and
you would like to use it, please contact your on Site system administrator
to see if it is available.
88
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
00
_________________________
_________________________
01
_________________________
_________________________
02
_________________________
_________________________
03
_________________________
_________________________
04
_________________________
_________________________
05
_________________________
_________________________
06
_________________________
_________________________
07
_________________________
_________________________
08
_________________________
_________________________
09
_________________________
_________________________
10
_________________________
_________________________
11
_________________________
_________________________
12
_________________________
_________________________
13
_________________________
_________________________
14
_________________________
_________________________
15
_________________________
_________________________
16
_________________________
_________________________
17
_________________________
_________________________
18
_________________________
_________________________
19
_________________________
_________________________
20
_________________________
_________________________
21
_________________________
_________________________
22
_________________________
_________________________
23
_________________________
_________________________
24
_________________________
_________________________
89
Home Page
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
25
_________________________
_________________________
26
_________________________
_________________________
27
_________________________
_________________________
28
_________________________
_________________________
29
_________________________
_________________________
30
_________________________
_________________________
31
_________________________
_________________________
32
_________________________
_________________________
33
_________________________
_________________________
34
_________________________
_________________________
35
_________________________
_________________________
36
_________________________
_________________________
37
_________________________
_________________________
38
_________________________
_________________________
39
_________________________
_________________________
40
_________________________
_________________________
41
_________________________
_________________________
42
_________________________
_________________________
43
_________________________
_________________________
44
_________________________
_________________________
45
_________________________
_________________________
46
_________________________
_________________________
47
_________________________
_________________________
48
_________________________
_________________________
49
_________________________
_________________________
90
Home Page
ITP-5112L User Guide
For OfficeServ™ 100, OfficeServ™ 500,
OfficeServ™ 7000 Series
12/2009
Home Page
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS BOOK
....................................................................................1
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW
ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET
................................................2–8
........................................................9
ITP-5112L SETUP ........................................................................................10
Initializing the ITP-5112L............................................................................................................10
IP Setup Menu ................................................................................................................................10
Menu Structure ..............................................................................................................................11
Navigating the Menus ................................................................................................................12
Setting Up Hot Desking (Idle Login) ......................................................................................12
Setting the Network Parameters......................................................................................13–15
OUTSIDE CALLS
Making an Outside Call ..............................................................................................................16
Dialing from the Outgoing / Incoming Menu ....................................................................17
Dialing the Most Recent Outgoing / Incoming Number ..............................................17
Making Calls from the Call Log ................................................................................................17
Answering a Call ..........................................................................................................................17
Universal Answer ..........................................................................................................................18
Recall Dial Tone ............................................................................................................................18
Sending a Flash..............................................................................................................................18
Busy Line Queuing with Callback ..........................................................................................18
Canceling Callback........................................................................................................................19
INTERCOM CALLS
Copyright 2007-2009 Samsung Telecommunications America.
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic,
electronic or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying or information retrieval systems—
without express written permission of the publisher of this material.
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing
may warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from
the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.
Calling Other Stations ................................................................................................................20
Dialing the Most Recent Outgoing / Incoming Number................................................20
Answering Intercom Calls ..........................................................................................................20
Voice Announce Mode................................................................................................................20
Auto Answer Mode ......................................................................................................................21
Busy Station Callback ..................................................................................................................21
Busy Station Camp-On ................................................................................................................21
Calling your System Operator ..................................................................................................22
CALL PROCESSING
System Hold ....................................................................................................................................23
Exclusive Hold ................................................................................................................................23
Home Page
Remote Hold ..................................................................................................................................23
Hold Recall ......................................................................................................................................24
Consultation Hold ........................................................................................................................24
Retrieving Calls Held at Another Station..............................................................................24
Transferring Calls ..........................................................................................................................25
Transfer with Camp-On ..............................................................................................................25
Transfer to Voice Mail ..................................................................................................................26
Call Waiting......................................................................................................................................26
Conference Calls ............................................................................................................................26
Conference Splitting ....................................................................................................................27
Conference Groups ..............................................................................................................27–28
Forwarding Calls ....................................................................................................................28–29
Call Forward Options ..................................................................................................................29
Station Call Pickup ........................................................................................................................30
Group Call Pickup..........................................................................................................................30
My Group Pickup ..........................................................................................................................30
Privacy Release ..............................................................................................................................30
DIALING FEATURES
Speed Dialing ................................................................................................................................31
Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers..............................................................32–33
One Touch Speed Dialing ..........................................................................................................33
Directory Dialing ..........................................................................................................................33
Last Number Redial ......................................................................................................................34
Manual Retry with Redial ..........................................................................................................34
Save Number with Redial ..........................................................................................................34
Automatic Redial/Retry ..............................................................................................................35
Pulse to Tone Changeover ........................................................................................................35
Memo Redialing ............................................................................................................................35
PAGING AND MESSAGING
Making an Internal Page ............................................................................................................36
Making an External Page............................................................................................................36
All Page ............................................................................................................................................36
Meet Me Page ................................................................................................................................37
Call Park and Page ........................................................................................................................37
Messages—Set and Cancel ......................................................................................................38
Returning Messages ....................................................................................................................39
Programmed Messages ..............................................................................................................39
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
Logging In and Out ......................................................................................................................40
Do Not Disturb ..............................................................................................................................40
One Time DND ..............................................................................................................................40
Mute ..................................................................................................................................................41
Background Music ........................................................................................................................41
Established Call Pick-Up ............................................................................................................41
Appointment Reminder/Alarm Clock ............................................................................41–44
Door Phone Calls ..........................................................................................................................44
Executive/Secretary Hotline ..............................................................................................44–45
Group Listening ............................................................................................................................46
Account Codes ..............................................................................................................................46
Locking Your Keyset ....................................................................................................................47
Manual Signalling ........................................................................................................................47
Off-Hook Voice Announce ........................................................................................................48
OHVA Block......................................................................................................................................48
OHVA Reject ....................................................................................................................................48
In Group/Out of Group ..............................................................................................................49
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET
AME Password ................................................................................................................................50
Auto Camp-On ..............................................................................................................................50
Select Ring Tone ............................................................................................................................51
Change Your Passcode ................................................................................................................51
Set Answer Mode (Intercom)....................................................................................................52
Set Answer Mode (CO) ................................................................................................................52
Automatic Hold..............................................................................................................................52
Headset Operation ......................................................................................................................53
Hot Keypad......................................................................................................................................53
Key Confirmation Tone................................................................................................................54
Rejoining a Page............................................................................................................................54
Ring Preference..............................................................................................................................54
Auto Answer CO Calls..................................................................................................................55
Display Speed Dial Name ..........................................................................................................55
Caller ID Review All ......................................................................................................................56
Secure OHVA ..................................................................................................................................56
Configure Mobile Extensions (MOBEX) ................................................................................57
DISPLAY FEATURES
Directory Information ................................................................................................................ 58
Call Log ............................................................................................................................................58
Dial by Name ..................................................................................................................................59
Call Progress Displays ..................................................................................................................59
Display Number Dialed ..............................................................................................................60
Call Duration Timer ......................................................................................................................60
Auto Timer ......................................................................................................................................60
Timer Function ..............................................................................................................................60
Viewing Message Indications ..................................................................................................61
Personal Speed Dial Names ......................................................................................................61
Home Page
Station Names................................................................................................................................61
Managing Key Assignments ....................................................................................................61
LCR with Clear ................................................................................................................................62
Backspace with LCR......................................................................................................................62
Text Messaging ......................................................................................................................62–63
CALLER ID
............................................................................................................64
Selecting your Caller ID Display ..............................................................................................64
Viewing the Next Caller ID Call................................................................................................64
Saving the Caller ID Number ....................................................................................................64
Redialing a Saved Caller ID Number......................................................................................64
Storing a Caller ID Number ......................................................................................................65
Inquire Caller ID Park/Hold Info ..............................................................................................65
Reviewing Past Caller ID Calls ..................................................................................................66
APPLICATION PROGRAM MENUS ........................................67
PhoneBook ......................................................................................................................................67
E-Diary ..............................................................................................................................................67
Message............................................................................................................................................68
Sound/Screen ................................................................................................................................69
Call Forward ....................................................................................................................................69
Setup ................................................................................................................................................69
My Phone ........................................................................................................................................71
Samsung Voicemail..................................................................................72
Accessing your Mailbox ..............................................................................................................73
SVMi E-Series Subscriber Services Menu Diagram ....................................................74–75
Getting Started .............................................................................................................................76
Listen to your Messages.............................................................................................................76
Subscriber Services Menu .........................................................................................................76
Listening to Old or New Messages ........................................................................................77
Group New or Old Messages....................................................................................................78
Record and Send a Message ....................................................................................................78
Access Manager ............................................................................................................................79
Personal Greetings ......................................................................................................................81
Mailbox Administration..............................................................................................................83
Message Broadcast ....................................................................................................................85
Personal Services ........................................................................................................................86
Personal Administration Settings ..........................................................................................87
Keyset User Features ..................................................................................................................88
Shortcuts ........................................................................................................................................90
Interactive Displays ......................................................................................................................90
E-Mail Gateway (EMG) ........................................................................................................90–92
ABOUT THIS BOOK
Samsung’s new OfficeServ technology keyset model ITP-5112L is part of the
OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ 7000 Series.
The ITP-5112L IP keyset represents a new concept of Internet phone, in that it uses
an IP address to Send/Receive voice and data. For voice communications, the ITP5112L uses the data network line already in place in most offices and increasing
number of homes.
The ITP-5112L IP keysets also incorporate a large LCD color screen, which provides
important information for the user, to make using the keyset easier and more convenient.
Please take the time to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation
of your keyset. Keep this guide handy, as you may need to look up instructions for
infrequently used features.
This book is written based on factory default settings, for the feature access codes.
Sometimes, due to programming requirements, these codes may be changed. If
you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book, please contact your installation and service company to determine the correct code.
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS ............................93–94
1
Home Page
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW
USER ORIENTATION
The ITP model telephones are called “IP keysets”. The IP keyset incorporates buttons or “keys” that are used to access or activate the many features of your office
phone system. The lower five buttons (ten total) that reside on either side of the
Large Display screen are programmable buttons. This means they can be programmed for a specific function on your keyset and that same button can be
something different on another keyset. See the system manager to get your most
frequently used features assigned to your programmable buttons.
The top button on either side of the Large Display Screen scrolls through the various levels of the programmable button display screens.
Lines from the telephone company are “C.O. lines”. Calls on these lines are referred
to as “outside calls”. Your system can have individual C.O. line buttons or lines may
be assigned to groups. When they are in a group, you access a line by dialing an
access code or pressing a route button. For example, dial 9 or press a “LOCAL” button to get a local outside line. If Least Cost Routing is used, pressing the “LCR” button will automatically select a preprogrammed C.O. line according to what digits
are dialed. Each line in the system is numbered, beginning with 701, then 702, 703,
etc.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons are programmed to ring specific stations.
You can press a DSS button instead of dialing the extension number.
TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR
The terminal status indicator light is positioned on the top right corner of the keyset above the display. The terminal status indicator is a tri-colored (red, green, and
amber) light that provides greater visibility of your keysets status than the individual button LEDs. The terminal status indicator provides the following indications:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Busy/Off Hook
Intercom Ring
Outside Call Ring
Recall Ring
Message Waiting
Do Not Disturb
Steady Red
Flashing Red
Flashing Blue
Flashing Amber
Flashing Red
Fast Flash Red at 1 Second Intervals
SELECT BUTTONS
The 5112L keysets incorporate twelve select buttons. These buttons are positioned six on either side of the LCD screen.
The top left and right buttons are used to page up and page down screens.
The remaining five buttons on either side of the display are programmable. There
are ten programmable buttons per programmable feature screen, with the exception of the last screen, which has nine programmable buttons. The total programmable buttons per 5112L station is ninety-nine. Any system feature or function can
be assigned to these buttons.
The 5112L keyset provides distinctive ring patterns:
VOLUME CONTROLS
•
•
•
The 5112L keysets use the UP and DOWN buttons to adjust the ringer volume
while the keyset is ringing, the speaker volume while the speakerphone is in use
and the handset volume while you are listening. These three levels will be stored
in memory until changed. If background music is turned on at your keyset, the volume buttons will also control the level of music. The volume of pages heard
through the speaker of a keyset can be adjusted during a page announcement by
using the volume buttons.There are 16 levels for each volume setting.The volume
of off-hook ring is controlled by a user-programmable setting.
Outside calls have a single ring tone repeated.
Internal calls have a double ring tone repeated.
Door phone calls and alarm/appointment reminders have a triple ring tone
repeated.
FULL DUPLEX SPEAKERPHONE
All ITP keysets are speakerphones. Pressing the SEND button will answer an
incoming call on the speakerphone. Pressing the END button will release the call
on the speakerphone.
Switching from the handset to the speakerphone is easy. Press the SPEAKER button and hang up the handset.
2
3
Home Page
SCREEN BUTTON
SCROLL BUTTON ASSEMBLY
The 5112L incorporates a SCREEN button. This button allows you to choose your
keyset’s idle screen display. The default is CALENDAR. The options are STATION
FIXED FEATURE buttons (two levels), or STATION PROGRAMMABLE buttons
(ten levels).
The scroll button is actually a type of thumbwheel assembly. You may use it to
scroll through the station screens. Rolling the SCROLL BUTTON DOWN (towards
the navigation button) will advance you through the multiple SOFT MENU and
STATION PROGRAMMABLE button screens. Rolling the SCROLL BUTTON UP
(towards the station display) will bring the cursor back towards the Main Screen.
By scrolling up or down, you cause the cursor to move back and forth through the
screens in the same manner as the UP/DOWN arrows on the top SELECT BUTTONS work.
NOTE:
From the default CALENDAR screen:
•
•
Press the SCREEN button once to access the STATION PROGRAMMABLE
BUTTON SCREEN #1. Press the DOWN arrow associated with the top left soft
key and you will advance to STATION PROGRAMMABLE SCREEN #2. Each
additional press of the DOWN arrow will advance you through the screens,
until you reach SCREEN #10. Press the UP arrow associated with the top left
soft key to return to the previous screen. Each additional press of the UP button will move you back towards the main screen.
Press the SCREEN button twice to access the SOFT MENU SCREEN #1. Press
the DOWN arrow associated with the top left soft key and you will advance
to SCREEN #2.
NAVIGATION BUTTON
The 5112L keysets incorporate a Navigation Button. This button is designed to
assist the user in activating and using various station features, more easily. These
features include Outgoing Call Log, Incoming Call Log, Speed Number Search, Call
Forward Assign and Alarm Assign.
With the NAVIGATION BUTTON, the station user is no longer required to enter
station level programming to activate these frequently used features. A few button presses and these features are activated.
CONFERENCE BUTTON
The NAVIGATION BUTTON is divided into separate feature buttons. These buttons are described below.
The CONFERENCE button allows the user to set up a call with up to five parties
(station or trunk).
•
MENU BUTTON: This button displays the station feature main menu, which is
configured in icons, so that the users can easily utilize various settings and
helpful functions.
•
SEND BUTTON: If the station is programmed for Enblock Dial Mode, when
dialing an outside telephone number or internal station number, you must
press the SEND button to initiate the call. This button is also used when
reviewing recently received or called numbers and answering incoming calls.
TRANSFER BUTTON
TRANSFER is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways. You
can do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you
can do a blind transfer without notification.
HOLD BUTTON
The SEND button operates as the ANS portion of the ANS/RLS button. An
ANS/RLS button may be assigned to the station as a programmable button.
The HOLD button maintains the call at your keyset, while enabling you to call
other stations or consult coworkers in confidence.
•
ENTER BUTTON: This button is used to select a menu option, or to save
changes made to a menu or submenu option.
SPEAKER BUTTON
•
DIRECTION BUTTON: The DIRECTION BUTTON is the donut shaped ring,
which surrounds the ENTER button.This button is used to navigate within the
menus. There are directional arrows stenciled into this button, which indicate
which direction the cursor will be moved.
The SPEAKER button allows you to have a conversation from the keyset without
lifting the handset.
4
5
Home Page
Note that the DIRECTION BUTTON has four icons, at the top, bottom, left and
right of the ENTER button. These icons are used to navigate directly to
particular programming options from the CALENDAR screen.
Pressing the top (INFO) icon will take you directly to the STATUS INFO
SCREEN. The bottom (TONE) icon will take you to the Sound/Screen Menu.
The left side (MESSAGE) icon will take you to the Text Message Menu. The
right side (PHONE) icon will take you to the PhoneBook Menu.
•
SYSTEM TONES
The system provides several tones to assist you. Some of these tones are already
familiar to you.
END BUTTON: This button is used to disconnect a call after a conversation or
to move to the initial screen.
The END button operates as the RLS portion of the ANS/RLS button. An
ANS/RLS button may be assigned to the station as a programmable button.
•
CANCEL BUTTON: This button is used to erase any characters or numbers
entered by the dial button or to move to the previous screen.
After pressing the MENU button, use the direction button to highlight the desired
menu icon. For multiple screen options, the UP/DOWN arrows at the either side of
the top of the LCD may be used to scroll on a per page basis. Press ENTER to
access that menu. To navigate within the menu, you may scroll to the desired
option/function, dial the associated option function number or press the associated select button on either side of the display.
Press the END button to exit programming.
FEATURE ACCESS CODES
This user guide is written based on the default access code for using system features. If the system numbering plan has been changed some of the access codes
may not be correct. Your installing company can inform you the correct codes.
6
7
Home Page
ITP-5112L KEYSET
Color LCD Panel
Displays a large quantity
of information so that
the users can easily
search.
Volume Button
Used to adjust
the volume of
the handset,
speakerphone,
ringer, background music
and page.
Select Button (6)
ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET
•
Place the keyset face down on a flat surface.
Select Buttons (6)
To select a specific item
the user can simply
press the Select button
next to the item.
•
Insert notched ends of the support bracket into the channels located in the
upper section of the bottom panel. Push towards the top of the keyset to lock
in.
Status Indicator
Used to provide
your keyset status.
•
Plug the handset cord into the jack marked with the
•
Route the handset cord out the RIGHT side of the keyset as you look at it face
down.
•
Plug an eight-conductor ethernet cable, from the wall, into the jack marked
LAN on the back of the keyset. (Connect the ITP keyset to any port on the local
network).
•
If your ITP will share LAN connection with a PC, plug an eight-conductor ethernet cable, from the PC, into the jack marked PC on the back of the keyset.
•
Plug the power connector, from the power adapter provided, into the power
jack on the back of the keyset. The power adapter is not required if the ITP is
connected to a LAN connection that provides power over the ethernet. The
ITP-5112L supports the power over ethernet feature when it is connected to
a IEEE 802.3af compliant LAN switch or power injector port.
Screen
Button
Scroll
Button
Navigation Button
Dial Button
Speaker Button
For handsfree operation and ringing.
Hold Button
Used to save a call
without hangingup on the current
call.
Microphone Button
Conference Button
Used to make a calls of
up to 5 parties.
Transfer Button
symbol.
IMPORTANT NOTES:
8
•
Be careful not to connect the Network LAN cable into the PC connector of the
phone.
•
To prevent damaging the keyset, only use the Power Adapter that came with
the 5112LD keyset.
•
This manual assumes that the ITP keysets are connected to a functioning local
IP network. The local IP network must be able to communicate with the main
processor and MGI channels in the OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, or in the
OfficeServ 7000 Series systems over IP. This is assumed regardless of whether
the IP keyset is on a local or remote network.
•
Before using your ITP-5112L phone, press the MENU button, select
Sound/Screen, then select option 8,“Screen Saver”. If you choose “User Define”,
you can set the time period for the Power Save Mode to occur or you can
select the interval the Power Save Mode occurs. During Power Save Mode the
screen will turn off.
9
Home Page
ITP-5112L SETUP
INITIALIZING THE ITP-5112L
Initially the ITP-5112L IP keyset will need to be setup to operate within the users
network.The Setup Menu is also used to make changes to the keyset, in the event
that the system information should change. The option chosen via scroll button
will be highlighted.
The station numbers will be automatically set by the OfficeServ 100, the
OfficeServ 500, or the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems once the necessary information has been entered into the IP keyset. Enter ID and password of the server,
as described below to register the phone.
See your system administrator for specific Network and Server addresses. The
addresses necessary to set up the ITP-5112L are:
•
•
•
•
•
IP Address of Station
Network Gateway Address
IP Address of System’s main processor
User ID
Password
To get to the SETUP MODE unplug the power cord from the ITP. Press and hold
the MENU button while you plug power back
into the phone. Release the MENU button
Configuration
when you see the SETUP SCREEN. If you have
*1.System Easy Wizard
a PoE (Power over Ethernet) connection, the
2.System Information
same procedure can be done by unplugging
3.Network Setup
4.Load & Upgrade Setup
and plugging the Ethernet cable into the
5.System Server Setup
phone while pressing and holding the MENU
6.Factory Reset
button.
7.Reboot
Once the CONFIGURATION MENU is displayed, you can move to each menu in the Set
Up by using the navigation buttons and [1]-[9] dial buttons of the ITP-5112L IP
phone.
•
10
•
•
•
•
The [0]-[9] dial buttons are used to directly choose a menu, or sub menu
options.
The [ENTER] button in the navigation button assembly is used when saving a
modification.
The [MENU] button in the navigation button assembly is used to to display
the IP Setup Main Menu.
The [END] button in the navigation button assembly is used when canceling
or editing the modification, or existing programming.
The [CANCEL] button in the navigation button assembly is used to go back to
the previous screen or to delete the last digit of a displayed option value.
MENU STRUCTURE
The IP SETUP MENU is configured as follows:
1. SYSTEM EASY WIZARD
This option will guide you through setting up all required parameters for connecting the ITP keyset to your system.
2. SYSTEM INFORMATION
1. Version Info: Provides boot rom, software, DSP, and hardware version
information.
2. Network Info: Displays network mode, IP address of phone, network, and
gateway information.
3. Netmask
4. Gateway
IP SETUP MENU
•
•
The UP and DOWN directions buttons in the navigation button assembly are
used to move the highlighted bar up or down to the desired option.
The LEFT and RIGHT buttons in the navigation button assembly are used to
move the highlighted bar left or right, to the desired option, move to a sub
menu and if a menu is at the last line, that menu option will be executed.
Note that items 2 to 4 are only displayed when setting Manual IP.
3. NETWORK SETUP
This menu allows you to individually setup the same parameters found in the
Easy Wizard.
4. LOAD & UPGRADE SETUP
1. Upgrade TFTP Server:The IP address of the TFTP server containing the ITP
software.
2. Upgrade Start: Starts the ITP software upgrade process.
5. SYSTEM SERVER SETUP
1. Server IP Address: The main processor’s IP address.
2. Server ID: The ID assigned to your ITP (see your phone administrator for
this information).
3. Server Pass: The password assigned to your ITP (see your phone administrator for this information).
11
Home Page
SETTING THE NETWORK PARAMETERS
6. FACTORY RESET
This option resets ITP to factory default settings.
Utilize the following programming steps to program the ITP-5112L IP keyset to
operate within the users network.
7. REBOOT
This option reboots the ITP.
System Easy Wizard
NAVIGATING THE MENUS
When programming within various menu options, information can be entered via
✱] dial keys, as well as utilizing the navigation
the dial pad keys using [0]-[9] and [✱
button assembly.
The button used for editing and their features are summarized below.
BUTTON
FEATURES
Left and Right ......................To move a cursor (highlighted area) or to erase what is
entered.
By selecting this option, the System Easy Wizard can guide you through setting up
your network parameters. If you want to set up these parameters individually, follow the instructions below.
Network Parameter Setup
From the Configuration Main Menu, select [3.
Network Setup] to set or modify the network
parameters. The LCD will display the Network
Setup screen.
Cancel......................................To move back to the previous screen or delete the last
digit of the displayed option value.
✱] ............................................To enter [.] between IP address fields.
[✱
If [1. Manual IP] is selected, the user must enter the IP address, subnet mask,
and gateway value for the customer network that the 5112L resides on.
•
If [2. DHCP] is selected, the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway value will be
set to the default values automatically. (Choose this option only if a DHCP
server is available on the local network).
•
[3.PPPoE] (Point to Point Power over Ethernet):This option is selected in some
cases when connecting directly to ISP (Internet Service Provider) equipment
without going through a local LAN. If so, you must enter the username/password assigned to you by the ISP to authenticate your internet connection.
[0]-[9] ......................................To enter numerical values.
SETTING UP HOT DESKING (IDLE LOGIN)
Hot Desking allows you to log in and out of your ITP-5112L IP keyset without
rebooting.
•
From the System Easy Wizard choose option
[5. Idle Mode].
Easy Setup
1.Manual IP
2.DHCP
3.PPPoE
4.Plug and Play (DHCP)
5.Idle Mode
•
Choose option
[1. Idle Mode Enable/Disable].
Idle Mode
•
Enter 1 to allow Hot Desking,
Enter 0 to deny Hot Desking.
Idle Mode Setup
1.Idle Mode Enable/Disable
Idle Mode:En(1)/Dis(0)
•
•
12
Press ENTER.
Press END twice.
1.Manual IP
2.DHCP
3.PPPoE
•
Enter ........................................To save the current setting and end programming.
End............................................To cancel the current programming and return to the
Main Menu.
Network Setup
Setting IP Manually
Network Setup
If [1. Manual IP] is selected the Network Setup
sub menu will be displayed.
1.IP
2.Subnet
3.Gateway
The user directly enters the IP address, subnet
mask, and gateway, address as follows:
•
If the [1. IP] menu is selected, the LCD will display
the following message and the user can enter
the ITP’s address.
IP Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Check if there is any currently saved IP address of the phone on the LCD. If the IP
address has not been set, the LCD displays nothing. The user can enter the IP
✱] button can save that IP address by pressaddress using [0]-[9] dial buttons and [✱
ing the [Enter] button of navigation button assembly.
13
Home Page
•
If the [2. Subnet] menu is selected, the user can
enter a new Netmask IP address.
Subnet
Server IP Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Check if there is any currently saved subnet mask address of the phone on the
LCD. If the subnet mask address has not been set, the display will show nothing.
✱] button to enter the subnet mask IP
Press any dial buttons from [0]-[9] and [✱
address and then save that subnet mask IP address by pressing the [Enter] button
of navigation button assembly.
•
If the [3. Gateway] menu is selected the user can
enter a new gateway address.
Gateway
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
The user can check if there is any gateway IP address of the phone that is currently
saved on the LCD. If the gateway IP address has not been set, the LCD will show
✱] button to enter the gateway IP
nothing. Use any dial buttons from [0]-[9] and [✱
address and save it by pressing the [Enter] button of navigation buttons.
NOTE: If DHCP mode is selected, the IP address, Netmask, and Gateway will not be
displayed on the LCD.
Load and Upgrade Set/Modify
You can confirm the current IP address of the authentication server at the LCD
panel.The address is left blank if it is not set. Use the dial buttons from [0]-[9], and
[] to set the IP address and press the [ENTER] button among the navigation buttons to save and exit.
Next select the [2. System ID] item and the screen below will be displayed.
Phone ID
xxxx
You must input the ID assigned to your ITP phone. See your phone system administrator to get this value. Press the [ENTER] button to save and exit.
Finally, select the [3. System Password] item and the screen below will be displayed.
The fourth item [4. Load & Upgrade Setup] sets or modifies the IP phone’s software version. Use extreme caution when upgrading the keyset.
Phone Password
Select the [4. Load & Upgrade] item. The screen below is displayed.
You must input the password associated with your ID. See your phone system
administrator to get this value. Press the [ENTER] button to save and exit.
xxxx
1.TFTP Server Setup
2.Upgrade Start
•
[1.TFTP Server Setup]: This option is used to enter the IP address of the TFTP
Server which hosts the ITP software.
•
[2.Upgrade Start]: When you select this option, the software from the TFTP
server will be pushed to the ITP phone.
Completion of Settings
From the Main Menu verify settings at the second item [2. System Information]
after setting all of the above items. Select the seventh item [7.Reboot] to save all
modified settings and reboot the ITP-5112L phone.
Registering and Authenticating the ITP to your System
The fifth item [5. System Server Setup] sets or modifies settings related to the
registering the ITP to the main processor. Select the [5.System Server Setup].The
screen below will be displayed.
1.System Server
2.System ID
3.System Password
You can set/modify the IP address of the main processor at the [1. System Server]
item. The screen below is displayed when you enter the item. The server IP is the
IP address of the main processor.
14
15
Home Page
OUTSIDE CALLS
DIALING FROM THE OUTGOING /
INCOMING MENU
Note: When making calls, internal or outside calls, in order to access the programmable button screens, press the SCREEN button. Then you can utilize either the
SCROLL button or the UP/DOWN arrow (select) buttons on the display.
•
MAKING AN OUTSIDE CALL
•
•
IMPORTANT: Put phone in OVERLAP MODE:
•
•
•
Press the MENU button.
Select SETUP and then select DIAL MODE.
Change it to OVERLAP. If your phone is not in OVERLAP mode you must
always press the SEND button after dialing the digits to send the call.
•
Lift the handset and press an idle outside line button, line group button or dial
a line access code to receive dial tone—OR—press an idle outside line button,
line group button or dial a line access code to receive dial tone through the
speaker—OR—lift the handset and dial the Trunk Group access code or simply start dialing.
Dial the telephone number or the Intercom number.
Finish the call by replacing the handset. To disconnect a speakerphone call,
press the END button.
•
•
NOTES:
1. You will receive No More Calls tone when you attempt to make a call and
there is no button available for that line.
2. If Least Cost Routing is enabled on your phone system, this button may
be labeled LCR or accessed by dialing an access code (usually 9).
3. If your system is programmed to require an authorization code before
making a call, dial plus a valid code before selecting a C.O. line.
4. If your system is programmed to require an account code before making
a call, press the ACCT button or dial 47 plus a valid bin number, press the
ACCT button again, or , and then select a C.O. line.
For more information on authorization and account codes, see your system
administrator.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.
•
From the station idle screen, press the MENU button and select PHONEBOOK.
Select OUTGOING CALLS or INCOMING CALLS from the submenu. These
menus will store the last thirty calls made to and from the station.
Press the select button on the display, associated with the number to redial or
use the DIRECTION or SCROLL button to move the cursor to the desired
number. Press the ENTER button to display the detailed information of the
number.
Press the SEND button to dial the number or press ENTER again.
DIALING THE MOST RECENT OUTGOING /
INCOMING NUMBER
•
•
Press the SEND button. The most recent call (Internal or External) to or from
the station will be displayed.
Continue to press the SEND button and the system will automatically dial the
number for you.
MAKING CALLS FROM THE CALL LOG
The Station Call Log displays the last outgoing station, and incoming trunk calls.
The total number of calls that can be displayed is 60. You may redial any of these
calls from the Call Log.
•
•
•
•
Press the SEND button to display the first page of the CALL LOG.
Use the SCROLL button or the DIRECTION button to navigate to the desired
number. Use the UP and DOWN arrows, associated with the top left and right
soft keys to advance and return through the CALL LOG Screens.
When the desired number is highlighted, press the SEND button.
The number will be automatically dialed.
ANSWERING A CALL
•
•
Lift the handset and you are automatically connected to the ringing call. See
Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset—OR—press the SEND button
to automatically answer on the speakerphone.
While a call is ringing in, the display will indicate the type of call coming in
(station number and name, trunk number and name, etc.)
NOTES:
1. If a call is flashing at your keyset but not ringing, you must press the flashing
button to answer.
16
17
Home Page
2.
While a call is ringing in, press the SCREEN button to display the programmable button screen. This will enable you to view and invoke any of the station
features that you may wish.
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device. To answer
calls ringing this device, dial 67—OR—press the UA button. This device can operate in any one of the six different ring plans.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.
RECALL DIAL TONE
•
CANCELING CALLBACK
A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set a
callback, the cursor associated with the CALLBACK button, will be solid black.
To cancel a callback:
•
•
Press the CALLBACK button, if programmed, or dial 44. The display will show
the callback details and an option to CLEAR the callback.
Press the CLEAR button, or press the HOLD button.This will cancel the last set
callback and display the next set callback, also with the option to CLEAR.This
process is repeated until all callbacks are cleared from memory.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature is turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press the SPEAKER button before dialing.
Press the NEW button to disconnect your existing call, wait for dial tone and
then make a new call on the same line.
NOTE: If this button does not appear on your keyset, the FLASH button may be
programmed to recall dial tone.
SENDING A FLASH
While on an outside call, press the FLASH button to send a flash to the telephone
company. This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use.
NOTE: Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit.
BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK
If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line, this means that
the line or group of lines is busy.
•
•
•
•
Press the CALLBACK button, if programmed, or dial 44, you will hear confirmation tone.
Press the END button.
When the line becomes free, the system will call you back.
Lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer, wait for dial tone and dial
the telephone number or speed dial number again.
NOTES:
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set
a callback, the cursor associated with the CALLBACK button will be solid
black.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.
18
19
Home Page
INTERCOM CALLS
CALLING OTHER STATIONS
•
•
•
Dial the extension number or group number.
Wait for the party to answer. If you hear a brief tone burst instead of ringback
tone, the station you called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer. Begin
speaking immediately after the tone.
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the END button.
NOTES:
1. If you have a DSS button assigned to an extension or station group, you may
press this button instead of dialing the number.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
DIALING THE MOST RECENT OUTGOING /
INCOMING NUMBER
•
•
Press the SEND button.The most recent call (Internal or External to system) to
or from the station will be displayed.
Continue to press the SEND button and the system will automatically dial the
number for you.
AUTO ANSWER MODE
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
then automatically answer the call.
•
•
Your microphone and speaker are turned on and you can speak handsfree.
For privacy, use the handset.
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the END button.
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
to ON.
BUSY STATION CALLBACK
When you call another station and receive a busy signal:
•
•
•
Press the CALLBACK button, if programmed, or dial 44.
When the busy station becomes free, your keyset will ring.
Lift the handset or press the SEND button to call the now idle station.
NOTES:
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set
a callback, the cursor associated with the CALLBACK button, will be solid
black.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER or SEND button before dialing.
ANSWERING INTERCOM CALLS
BUSY STATION CAMP-ON
•
When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to
wait for a callback:
•
When your keyset rings, simply lift the handset—OR—press the SEND button
to be connected to the calling station.
Finished the call by replacing the handset or pressing the END button.
See Ringing Preference under Customizing Your Keyset.
VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
you will hear the caller’s announcement.
•
•
Press the SEND button to turn on the microphone and speak handsfree—
OR—lift the handset to reply.
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the END button.
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
to ON.
20
MANUAL CAMP-ON
•
•
•
•
Press the CAMP button or dial 45.
The called station will receive off-hook ring tone repeated every few seconds
and the cursor associated with the first available CALL button will flash black
to indicate your call is waiting.
Wait for the called party to answer.
The called station must release its first call or place it on hold before answering your camp-on.
NOTES:
1. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no available button to
accept your call. Hang up or leave a message.
21
Home Page
2.
If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.
CALL PROCESSING
AUTO CAMP-ON
When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the
camp on button every time you call a busy station, you can set your phone for auto
camp-on.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 081 to turn ON auto camp-on or 080 to turn it OFF.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
SYSTEM HOLD
When you are connected to any call, press HOLD.The call will flash at the keyset. If
this call appears on a line button at other keysets, it will flash at those keysets also.
•
To take the caller off hold, press that button and the flashing LED will go
steady again. Resume the conversation—OR—press the HOLD button. The
flashing LED will go steady again and you will be connected to the call again.
Resume the conversation.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
•
•
Press the MENU button.
Scroll to CONFIG option and press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 0 and
immediately enter the option.
Scroll to AUTO CAMPON option. Press ENTER to change status.
Press CANCEL to return to main configuration screen—OR—press END to
return to idle screen.
CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR
•
•
Dial 0 and press SEND button to call your system operator or group of operators.
If you want to call a specific operator, dial that person’s extension number.
NOTE: If the Hot keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
NOTE: While on a call, pressing a line button, route button or flashing CALL button
will automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call. See
Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset.
EXCLUSIVE HOLD
To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it:
•
•
Press the HOLD button twice. The call will flash on your keyset and this line
will show a steady indication on other keysets.
To retrieve the call, press the flashing line button or press the HOLD button a
third time.
NOTE: Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold.
REMOTE HOLD
When you wish to place a call on hold at another station.
•
•
Press TRANSFER and dial the station number (or press the appropriate DSS
button)
Press the HOLD button. This will place the call on system hold on an available
CALL button or Line button at the remote station and return you to dial tone.
NOTES:
1. If the destination station does not have any free CALL buttons or line buttons
you will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other party by pressing the TRANSFER button (or the RETURN soft key in the display).
2. Intercom calls cannot be put on remote hold.
22
23
Home Page
HOLD RECALL
TRANSFERRING CALLS
If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer, it will recall your station. The
button that the call appears on will have a slow flashing indicator.
•
•
When your phone rings, lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer
the recall.
If you do not answer this recall within a pre-programmed period of time, it will
go to the system operator.
Transfer is used to send any calls to another extension in one of two ways.You can
do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can
do a blind transfer without notification.
•
CONSULTATION HOLD
When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with another extension:
•
•
•
•
Press the TRANSFER button; you will receive transfer dial tone. Your call is
placed on transfer hold.
Dial the extension number.
Consult with the internal party.
Press TRANSFER to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call.
NOTE: Repeatedly pressing the TRANSFER button will toggle between the outside
party and internal extension. If necessary you may disconnect either one of the
parties by pressing the DROP button.
RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT ANOTHER
STATION
When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset, press the LINE button with
the flashing indicator.
When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset, dial 12 plus the line
number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
•
•
•
While on a call, press the TRANSFER button and dial an extension number or
group number. Your call is automatically put on transfer hold—OR—press a
DSS button or station group button. Your call is automatically put on transfer
hold.
Hang up when you hear ringing (this is an unscreened or blind transfer)—
OR—wait for the called party to answer and advise him/her of the call and
hang up. If the transfer is refused, you will be reconnected to the outside line
when the called station hangs up or you can press TRANSFER to return to the
outside party.
If you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the first
station to hang up, simply press another DSS button—OR—press the CALL
button or C.O. line button to return to the outside party and begin the transfer process again.
When you are transferring a call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto
Answer, the transferred call will always ring.
NOTES:
1. After the inside party answers, you may alternate back and forth between the
parties by pressing the TRANSFER button.
2. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to receive another call. Press TRANSFER to return to the other party.
3. You cannot transfer an Intercom call by pressing a DSS button.You must press
the TRANSFER button and dial the destination extension number.
TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON
When you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal,
you may camp the call on to this station. Simply hang up when you hear the busy
signal. The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them.
NOTE: If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to
receive another call. Press TRANSFER to return to the outside caller.
24
25
Home Page
TRANSFER TO VOICE MAIL
This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailbox.Your keyset must have
a correctly programmed VT button to accomplish this. To transfer a call directly to
a voice mailbox:
•
•
While on a call, press the VT button and dial the mailbox number.
Hang up when dialing is completed.
CALL WAITING
If an outside call has been camped-on to your phone or another station has
camped-on to you:
•
•
•
You will hear a tone in the earpiece and the call that is waiting for you
(camped-on) will flash. In addition the bottom line of the display will indicate
the number of the station or trunk party camped-on.
Press the flashing button to answer; your other call will go on hold automatically if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press
HOLD and then the flashing button—OR—finish the first call and hang up;
the waiting call will ring.
Lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer.
NOTE: Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.When using the speakerphone
the camp-on tone will come through the speaker.
CONFERENCE CALLS
You may conference up to five parties (you and four others) in any combination of
outside lines and internal stations in any order.
•
•
•
•
While engaged in a conversation, press the CONFERENCE button and receive
conference tone.
Make another call, either intercom or outside, press the CONFERENCE button
and receive conference tone.
Make another call or press the CONFERENCE button to join all parties.
Repeat the last step until all parties are added.
NOTE: When attempting to add another party to the conference and you are not
able to reach the desired person, hang up. Simply press the CONFERENCE button
again to return to your previous conversation.
NOTE: To leave the conference, hang up. Control is passed to the next internal station. If there are no internal stations and you wish to leave outside lines connected together in a trunk to trunk conference, press the CONFERENCE button plus
the CALL button that the call appears on or follow the instructions to drop a party
and use your extension number. When they hang up, the lines will release automatically. Press CONFERENCE to rejoin a trunk to trunk conference.
CONFERENCE SPLITTING
If you are the controlling party of a conference and your keyset has the Auto Hold
feature turned on (See Customizing Your Keyset) and all of the outside lines involved
in the conference appear as buttons on your keyset, you can split the conference
into separate calls as follows:
•
CONFERENCE GROUPS
Users can create up to six Conference Groups with five members each (including
yourself ). They can then call all members or only selected members of this group
at the same time. As each member answers, their status is indicated in the display.
Depending whether the member is either IN the conference or OUT of the conference they can be dropped or called with a single button press. Each Conference
Group can be programmed with a name for easy identification.
Creating a Conference Group
•
•
•
•
•
To drop a party from your conference call:
•
•
26
Press CONFERENCE and dial the extension or line number that is to be
dropped.
Press CONFERENCE again to reestablish the conference.
Press any one of the outside line buttons. That outside line indicator will
remain steady to indicate you are still connected to it. All other outside lines
in the conference will be placed on system hold at your keyset. All intercom
callers in the conference will be disconnected. You may now speak with each
caller privately and transfer them as usual, or reestablish another conference.
•
•
From the idle condition press the CONFERENCE button.
Press the MENU button, then select ADD option.
The Group Name Window appears. Enter up to a 20 character name using the
dial pad keys. Use the navigation key to move the cursor left or right while
entering characters.
Press the DOWN button on the NAVIGATION DISC to move the cursor to the
first entry “NUM01” and begin entering the phone number of the first member.
Enter 9 plus the outside telephone number or enter an internal extension
number. Repeat the process until all members are entered in the Conference
Group. Use CANCEL to erase digits as needed.
Press ENTER to SAVE this conference group.
Press END to return phone to idle condition.
27
Home Page
Using Conference Groups
2.
From the LCD:
•
•
From the idle condition press the CONFERENCE button.
Select the Conference Group by pressing the corresponding soft key on the
left.
Press SEND to call all members of the group – OR – press the ENTER key to
deselect one or more members, then press SEND. As each member answers,
their status indicator on the left will change from an X to a circle.
Once you press the SEND button to initiate the conference call you can hang
up any member by selecting the member by pressing the MENU button and
selecting “SENDING CANCEL”. This action will drop the selected member.
When the conference call is finished, place the handset in the cradle or press
the SPEAKER key to hang up.
•
•
•
Press the MENU button, scroll to the CALL FORWARD icon, press ENTER.
Scroll to the desired Forward Option. Press ENTER button.
You will be prompted to enter the Forward Destination. Enter it and press
ENTER.
3.
From the Station Feature Button:
Note: The originating station is the Supervisor of the conference. When this
station hangs up, all the conference group members are disconnected. When
you want to hang up but keep the other members in the conference, press the
MENU button, the select SUPERVISOR, then cursor to another internal station, then press ENTER and hang up. Control of the conference is passed to
this station. You are free to go about your business.
•
Each of the forward types may be assigned its own feature button. Pressing
the desired feature button will set forwarding to the last destination.
•
•
•
FORWARDING CALLS
This option allows for one button Call Forward setting.You may forward your calls
to another station, station group or external destination.
Call forwarding may be set in several different manners:
1.
NOTE: Once call forwarding has been initially set, for subsequent settings, you may
scroll to the desired forward type and press ENTER to forward to that same destination.You may also press the SELECT button associated with the desired forward
type, as opposed to scrolling to it.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
2. The station that receives a Forward All call can transfer the call to the forwarded station. This is useful when you are expecting an important call but
you do not wish to be disturbed by other calls.
3. When a station user places his/her keyset in Forward All mode and he/she
does not have a FORWARD ALL button, the TRANSFER button will light to
indicate Forward All has been set and calls to this station have been transferred elsewhere.
From the dial pad, dial 60 plus the extender (see below) that corresponds with
the type of forwarding desired, followed by the station number to forward to.
CALL FORWARD OPTIONS
60 + 0 Call Forward Cancel. Cancels all call forwarding from the station.
60 + 1 Call Forward All Calls. Forwards all calls under any condition.
A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations. Call
forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display features. To review or change call forward options:
60 + 2 Call Forward Busy. Forward calls to another station when you are on
the phone.
•
•
60 + 3 Call Forward No Answer. Forward calls to another station when you
don’t answer.
60 + 4 Call Forward Busy/No Answer. Sets both Forward Busy and Forward
No Answer.
60 + 5 Call Forward DND. Forwards calls when you activate DND.
60 + 6 Call Forward Follow Me. Forward calls to the station where you currently are.
28
•
•
Press TRANSFER 102.
Dial 0-6 to select the forward type (e.g., 1) OR
Press UP or DOWN to select the forward type
Press the right soft key to move the cursor
Dial the destination number (e.g., 202) OR
Press UP or DOWN to select the destination and press the right soft key to
move the cursor
Dial 1 to set OR press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO and press TRANSFER
to store and exit.
29
Home Page
STATION CALL PICKUP
To pick up (answer) a call ringing at another station, lift the handset and dial 65 plus
the extension number of the ringing phone. If you have a DP key assigned with a
station number, you only need to press this DP key with the flashing light to answer
this ringing station. NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must
first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
GROUP CALL PICKUP
To pick up (answer) a call ringing in any pickup group, lift the handset and dial 66
plus the desired group number (01-10 on the OfficeServ 7030, 01-20 on the
OfficeServ 100 and OfficeServ 7200-S, 01-99 on the OfficeServ 500 M, and 0199 on the OfficeServ 500 L and OfficeServ 7000 Series) or press the flashing
GROUP PICKUP button if available.
DIALING FEATURES
All “DIALING FEATURES” instructions are written to support Overlap Dialing mode.
This is the technical name for dialing from a telephone as it has been for many
years. In recent years the cell phone industry has changed the cell phones to use
Enblock Dialing. With this dialing mode all the digits are dialed and then sent to
the carrier after pressing the SEND key. Please check your telephone setup to confirm what dialing mode is used.
SPEED DIALING
You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system-wide
speed dial list of numbers 500–999 or from your personal list of numbers 00–49.
NOTES:
1. A group pickup button can have an extender for a specific pickup group.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing the access code.
Your system may be set for 950 system wide numbers. If so the system speed dial
access codes are 050~999 and the station speed dial codes are 000~049.
MY GROUP PICKUP
•
•
If desired, a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same
pickup group as you are in. Like “66” above except you do not need to dial the
desired group number. See your installation company for the assigned access
code. MY GROUP PICKUP: __________________.
•
From the Main Fixed Feature screen with the handset on-hook, press the
SPEED DIAL button or dial 16.
Dial the desired speed dial number.
The telephone number is automatically dialed for you.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
From the LCD:
PRIVACY RELEASE
This feature will allow another station to join in our conversation by releasing privacy on the C.O. from your phone.
To Release Privacy: While you are talking on a C.O. line and you wish to have
other internal parties (or up to three) join the conversation.
•
Press the PRB button (the PRB indicator will be steady). Inform the other
party that he/she may now join the conversation.
After the other party (or parties) has joined the conversation and you wish to
return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation, press the
PRB button a second time, the PRB button LED will be off.
To Join a Non-Private Conversation: When someone has informed you that you
can join a conversation:
•
•
30
•
•
•
•
Press the MENU button.
Scroll to the PHONEBOOK option, press ENTER.
Scroll to SEARCH, press ENTER.
Choose the method to be used to initiate a speed call, as described below.
SEARCH—Search and initiate speed dial calls by: Speed Dial Number, Associated
Names, Telephone Numbers, Assigned Groups or Previous Calls, registered to the
phone.
•
Scroll to, or dial the associated number of the desired function. (Search,
Outgoing Call, Incoming Call, Missed Call, New Number, Edit Group, Delete All,
My Own Number) and press ENTER.
•
Once in the menu, you may dial the selected number, change, delete or register the number. When the information is displayed, press ENTER to dial the
number, press MENU to display further options.
Press the C.O. line button that he/she has indicated OR
Dial the C.O. line number that he/she has indicated.
31
Home Page
1. BY SPEED DIAL #: Searches all speed dial numbers assigned to the phone.
Enter the speed dial number of the party you wish to call. When the number
is displayed, press ENTER and the number will be automatically dialed for
you.
•
•
•
•
If you press ENTER without entering a speed dial number, all registered numbers will be displayed.
•
2. BY NAME: Searches for a telephone number by names associated with them.
Enter the name in the “By Name” box and press ENTER.When the name is displayed, press ENTER again and all of the numbers associated with that name
are displayed. Using the direction button, highlight the desired number. Press
ENTER and the system will automatically dial it for you.
If you press ENTER without entering a name, all registered names will be displayed.
3. BY PHONE NUMBER: Searches for an entry by the phone number registered.
Enter the phone number of the party you wish to call. Press ENTER and the
number will be displayed from the PHONEBOOK. When the number is displayed, press ENTER and all information associated with that number is displayed.
If you press ENTER without entering a number, all registered numbers will be
displayed.
Notes:
—Entering (*123*) searches all numbers that include the 123 in them.
—Entering 305* searches all numbers that begin with 305.
—Entering *3000 searches all numbers that end with 3000.
4. BY GROUP: Searches for an entries by group information registered. Scroll to
group or enter associated number, press ENTER. The numbers registered to
that group are displayed. Scroll to the desired number and press SEND. The
number is automatically dialed for you.
5. BY TIME: Searches for entries based on incoming calls that have registered
numbers on the set. Scroll to the desired entry and press ENTER. The information associated with that call will be displayed. Scroll to the desired number entry and press SEND to have the number dialed automatically for you.
PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED
DIAL NUMBERS
You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial
list. A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers, 00–49. See your system administrator to determine the amount assigned to your station. The phone itself maintains 1000 station speed dial numbers.
32
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 105.
Dial a speed dial number (00–49).
Dial a line or line group access code.
Dial the telephone number to be stored (24 digits maximum). It can include
#, , FLASH and PAUSE.
Press TRANSFER to store the number.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to PHONEBOOK option, press ENTER.
Scroll to New Number and press ENTER. Or you may dial [5] and immediately enter the option.
Enter the name and all desired phone numbers for that particular speed dial
entry and press ENTER.
ONE TOUCH SPEED DIALING
You may assign any speed dial number to an already existing One Touch Speed
Dial button for quick and easy dialing of frequently used numbers.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 107.
Press a One Touch Speed Dial button.
Dial the speed dial number (00–49 or 500–999) that you want assigned to
this button.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
To call this telephone number, just press the One Touch Speed Dial button.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
DIRECTORY DIALING
•
•
•
Press the SCREEN button twice. Scroll to the first Fixed Feature screen.
Press the DIRECTORY button.
Press the soft button associated with the desired option.
STN - Accesses Station name directory,
SYSTEM - Accesses System speed dial name list.
PERS - Accesses your personal speed dial name list.
•
•
•
Enter the first digit of the desired party.
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to scroll to the desired entry.
Press the appropriate operation soft button:
33
Home Page
DIAL - Dials the displayed number.
PREVIOUS - Moves you to the previous entry.
EXIT - Exit programming and return to idle screen.
NEXT - Moves you to the next entry.
•
Press END to return to idle screen.
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
To redial the last telephone number you dialed, press the REDIAL button or dial
19.
To redial the last telephone number you dialed, from the Main Fixed screen, press
the LAST REDIAL button.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
2. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
AUTOMATIC REDIAL/RETRY
When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal, the system can
automatically redial the number for you. It will automatically redial at a pre-programmed interval for up to 15 attempts.
•
•
•
When you hear a busy signal, press the AUTO-RETRY button.
The system will reserve the line and automatically redial the same number for
you. You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker. The microphone is muted.
When the called party answers, lift the handset or press the flashing SPEAKER to begin speaking.
NOTES:
1. If you make another call, auto-redial is canceled.
2. To cancel an auto-retry, lift and replace the handset.
PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER
MANUAL RETRY WITH REDIAL
When making an outside call on a dial pulse line, press #. All digits dialed after the
# with be sent as tones.
While you are on an outside call listening to a busy signal and you want to redial
the same number dialed.
MEMO REDIALING
•
Press the REDIAL button.
This will hang up your existing call and manually redial the same number dialed.
You can repeat this operation for a limited number of attempts.
SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL
To save the number you just dialed for later use, press the SAVE/REPEAT button
before hanging up.
To redial this saved number at any time, press the SAVE/REPEAT button or dial 17.
The same line will be selected for you.
When you are calling directory information, you can store the number you are
given using the SAVE feature. There is no need for pencil and paper.
•
•
•
While you are talking on an outside call, press SAVE.
Dial the telephone number as it is dictated to you on the key pad.
Press SAVE to store the number.
To dial the number, press the SAVE/REPEAT button. It will select the same line and
dial the stored number. If necessary, you can select a different line and then press
the SAVE/REPEAT button.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
2. The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another
number.
3. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
34
35
Home Page
PAGING AND MESSAGING
MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE
NOTES:
1. The LED on the PAGE button will only light when an All Page is in progress.
2. If allowed by your system administrator you may be able to initiate a page
from a speakerphone by pressing the PAGE key or dialing 55 without lifting
the handset.
To make an announcement through the keyset speakers in the idle condition:
MEET ME PAGE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
NOTES:
1. If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press PAGE
and dial a zone number.
2. If allowed by your system administrator you may be able to initiate a page
from a speakerphone by pressing the PAGE key or dialing 55 without lifting
the handset.
MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE
Lift the handset.
Press the Meet Me Page (MMPG) button or dial 54.
Dial the desired zone number.
After the attention tone, instruct the paged person to dial 56.
Press WAIT or TRANSFER.
Remain off-hook until the person dials 56 from any phone.
The paged person will be automatically connected with you.
CALL PARK AND PAGE
When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his/her desk, you can
park the call prior to paging. The OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ
7000 Series systems offer two different methods:
To make an announcement through the external paging speakers:
MANUAL PARK ORBITS
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 5, 6, 7 or 8—OR—dial 9 to page all external
zones.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
NOTES:
1. If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press PAGE
and dial a zone number.
2. If allowed by your system administrator you may be able to initiate a page
from a speakerphone by pressing the PAGE key or dialing 55 without lifting
the handset.
ALL PAGE
To page all designated keysets in internal zone 0 and all external zones at the same
time:
•
•
•
•
36
Lift the handset.
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.
Dial or press the ALL PAGE button.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
•
•
•
While in conversation, press the PARK button.
Entered a desired orbit number (0-9), if the orbit number is busy dial another
orbit number. Display users can press to automatically place the call in any
available orbit number and see the number in the display.
Remember the selected orbit number.
Replace the handset when finished.
Lift the handset and make a page announcement as previously described
(example:“John Smith park two”).
To retrieve a parked call from orbit:
•
•
Press the PARK button and dial the announced orbit number (0-9).
You will be connected to the parked call.
NOTES:
1. You must have a PARK button or park access code to retrieve and place calls
in park orbits.
2. If the parked call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it
will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park
and page intercom calls.
3. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
37
Home Page
AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE BUTTON
•
•
•
While in conversation, press the PAGE button.The call is automatically parked
at your station.
Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number.
Make announcement indicating your extension number or the line number.
Hang up.
RETURNING MESSAGES
•
•
•
To retrieve an automatically parked call:
•
Dial 10 plus the number that was announced. If you have a PAGPK button,
press it and dial the number that was announced. If you have a PARK button,
press it and dial the announced orbit number.
•
You will be connected to the parked call.
NOTES:
1. If the call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it will recall
your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park and page
intercom calls.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION
When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy
signal, you can leave a message indication:
•
•
Press the MESSAGE button—OR—dial 43 and receive confirmation tone.
Hang up.
The message button on the Main Programmable Button screen and the TSI
will flash at the called station.
NOTES:
1. A station can have up to five message indications.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
CANCELING MESSAGES
To cancel a message indication that you left at another station, dial 42 plus the
extension number of the station at which you left a message.
Press the MESSAGE button or dial 43. The first station that left a message will
be called automatically. If that station does not answer, your MESSAGE button
indicator will continue to flash and the TSI will stay on.
Repeat until all messages have been returned in the order received.
Your MESSAGE button indicator will stop flashing and the TSI will turn off
when all messages have been returned.
NOTES:
1. Display keyset users can view message indications and return them in any
order. See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
3. If a message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer, you must
manually cancel the message after it has been returned.
PROGRAMMED MESSAGES
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you can leave a
programmed station message. Display stations calling you will see this message
and be informed of your status or follow your instructions.
•
•
•
Dial 48 plus any of the message codes (01–20) listed on the back of this user
guide.
To cancel any of these messages you might have selected, dial 48 plus 00.
Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button.
You can have multiple programmed message buttons (PMSG) and each one can
have a different message code:
•
•
Press any programmed message (PMSG) button. The message is set and the
PGM MSG button indicator will be lit steady. Press the button again to turn off
the programmed message and the indicator will go blank.
Pressing another programmed message (PMSG) button will turn the previous
one off and set a different programmed message.
To cancel all message indications left at your keyset, dial 42 plus your extension.
Your MESSAGE button indicator will stop flashing and the TSI will go out.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
38
39
Home Page
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
LOGGING IN AND OUT
If enabled, your ITP-5112L telephone may require you to log in before making or
receiving calls. In these cases your telephone system administrator will provide
you with an extension number, password, and the feature code used to log out.
To log in:
•
•
•
•
•
Press ENTER to begin login.
Dial your extension number.
Press ENTER.
Dial your password.
Press ENTER twice.
MUTE
You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversation:
•
•
Press the MUTE button. The MUTE button indicator will be lit steady.
To resume speaking, press the MUTE button again. The MUTE button indicator goes blank.
BACKGROUND MUSIC
When a music source is supplied, you may listen to music through the speaker in
your keyset:
•
•
While on-hook, press the HOLD button to hear music.
Press the HOLD button again to turn music off.
To log out:
You can set the level of background music by using the VOLUME buttons while listening to the music. This does not affect the speakerphone level.
•
ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP
Dial the feature code provided by your administrator (for example 77).
DO NOT DISTURB
To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to
a computer modem on your PC.
Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press the DND button or dial 401. The DND button indicator
will be lit steady to remind you of this mode.
To cancel DND, press the DND button again or dial 400.The DND button indicator goes blank. You can make calls while in the DND mode.
Press the EP button for that station on your keyset and the call is automatically moved to your keyset.
The single line extension on your modem will be disconnected.
NOTE: You must have an assigned (EP button) button on your regular keyset, for
the single line station.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button.
2. If you place your keyset in DND mode and you do not have a DND button,
your TSI button will flash to indicate DND status.
APPOINTMENT REMINDER / ALARM
REMINDER
ONE TIME DND
This feature works like an alarm clock. Use it to remind yourself of an appointment
later in the day (TODAY ONLY) or as a daily reminder every day (DAILY).You can set
up to three alarms. Each one can be either a TODAY ONLY or a DAILY alarm.
If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call, you
can press the DND button and place your station in Do Not Disturb. When you
hang up at the end of the call, DND will be automatically canceled and your keyset will be able to receive new calls. This feature requires a DND button.
ALARM CLOCK
When the alarm rings, you will hear three short rings repeated three times. Lift the
handset to answer the alarm. If you do not, the alarm will alert you two more times
at five minute intervals.
Set alarm for desired duration (Everyday, Once). These alarms can be used to
remind you of an appointment later in the day (Once) or as a daily reminder
40
41
Home Page
(Everyday). There are two possible alarms. Each can be either a today (Once) or a
daily (Everyday) alarm.
•
To set alarms:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.
Dial the time at which you want the alarm to sound. Enter the time as HHMM
(hours and minutes) using the 24 hour clock.
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY ONLY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.
Press TRANSFER to save.
Repeat for each alarm if needed.
To cancel individual alarms:
•
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.
Dial alarm number 1, 2 or 3.
Press the HOLD key.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to E-DIARY option, press ENTER.
Scroll to ALARM option and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 2 and immediately enter the option.
Choose the desired ALARM NUMBER (1/2).
Enter TIME via the dial pad in 24-hour format.
Set RING TONE via the direction button (left/right). Each tone is heard.
Set REPEAT DURATION via the direction button.
Press ENTER when finished.
•
•
Write your message using the dial pad keys. Each press of a key selects a character. Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if your message is “TAKE MEDICATION,” press 8 once to get the letter “T.”
Press 2 once to get “A.” Press 5 twice to get “K.” Continue selecting characters
from the following table to complete your message.
Press the TRANSFER key to store the alarm and reminder message.
Repeat for each alarm if needed.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Select E-DIARY.
Select DAILY PLANNER.
Press direction button UP/DOWN to set the month. Press direction button
LEFT/RIGHT to set the date. Press ENTER on the desired date.
Press MENU then ADD.
Enter the TIME desired for the alarm (in 24 hour format).
Enter the message in the CONTENTS field.
Write your message using the dial pad buttons. Each press of a key selects a
character. Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position. For
example, if your message is “TAKE MEDICATION”, press 8 once to get the letter
“T”. Press 2 once to get “A.” Press 5 twice to get “K.” Continue selecting characters from the following table to complete the message.
Enter ALARM ALERT period.
Set RING TONE.
When all information is set, press ENTER.
COUNT
1
2
3
4
5
DIAL 0
<
>
.
)
0
DIAL 1
space
?
,
!
1
DIAL 2
A
B
C
@
2
DIAL 3
D
E
F
#
3
DIAL 4
G
H
I
$
4
DIAL 5
J
K
L
%
5
DIAL 6
M
N
O
^
6
DIAL 7
P
Q
R
S
7
DIAL 8
T
U
V
Q
8
To clear alarm:
•
Scroll to CLEAR option in Alarm Clock setting screen and press ENTER.
DAILY PLANNER
Scheduling feature with message. Allows the scheduling of up to 30 alarm
reminders. Each of these reminders can have an associated message of up to 32
characters. These reminders can be scheduled to ring one hour before, one half
hour before or right at the exact time set.
•
•
•
•
42
Press TRANSFER and then dial 116.
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.
Dial the time you want the alarm to go off. Enter the time as HHMM (hours and
minutes) using the 24 hour clock.
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.
43
Home Page
DIAL 9
W
X
Y
Z
9
To transfer a call to a Boss in DND:
DIAL :
=
[
]
•
•
NOTES:
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE
To send a text message to the Boss display:
•
•
When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone:
•
•
•
•
•
•
You will receive three short rings repeated.
Lift the handset. You are connected to the door phone.
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
CALLING THE DOOR PHONE/
ROOM MONITOR
You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in
another room.
•
•
•
Dial the extension number of the door phone.
You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have a conversation.
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button.
•
•
•
•
•
•
From the BOSS station in DND:
•
•
•
•
•
44
Press BOSS/SECR button and establish a connection.
Press the EXE/SECR MSG button. The first message screen is displayed.
Pressing the DOWN arrow in the upper left corner of the LCD will scroll you to
the second screen. Pressing the UP arrow in the upper right corner of the LCD
will return you to the first screen.
This method gives you the option to transfer the call to another station if so
desired.
Scroll to the desired message.
Press MENU button for options (Send, Edit, and Remove)
SEND - Sends the message to the other end.
EDIT - Enter message from the dial pad.
REMOVE - Deletes message. Use remove option to delete the “Blank Message”
default message.
When an Executive/Secretary hotline is programmed to this keyset, the keyset
offers an additional screen option.This screen has options for setting the status of
the keyset user. This status update is viewable to EasySet users only.
Either person can press the BOSS button to make a voice call to the other station.
Using the hot line will override DND at the other station.This button will have
a flashing indication when the other station is in use.
Press the TRANSFER button followed by the EXE/SECR MSG soft button.
Scroll to the desired message and press ENTER (the BOSS station gets three
short ring bursts, followed by the message).
This method gives you the option to transfer the call to another station if so
desired.
Press the TRANSFER button again to be reconnected to the caller.
Take the necessary action (the BOSS cancels DND and transfer the call or take
a message)—OR—press the EXE/SECR MSG soft button, scroll to the desired
message and press ENTER (while maintaining contact with t he caller). This
method does not give you the option to transfer the call to another station.
Take necessary action (take message, etc.)
To set up the Executive/Secretary messages (10 each):
EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY HOT LINE
If programmed, an executive and a secretary can have a hot line between them.
When the executive station is in the DND mode, all of its calls will ring the secretary station. If the secretary does not answer, the caller will go to the secretary’s
voice mail box if setup.
Press the TRANSFER button followed by the BOSS button.
Wait for the BOSS to answer, then announce the call and hang up to complete
the transfer—OR—hang up to complete a blind transfer after pressing the
BOSS button.
•
Receive three short, double ring bursts, followed by the text message from the
Secretary.
Press ENTER to invoke REPLY option—OR—scroll to OK option and press
ENTER.
If REPLY option is activated, the Select Message screen is displayed.
Scroll to the desired message and press ENTER. The message is sent to the
Secretary keyset display and the Secretary station has the option to reply, if so
desired.
45
Home Page
Sending a text message from the BOSS keyset to the Secretary keyset, from
the idle condition:
•
•
•
•
To enter an account code by interrupting the conversation:
•
•
Press the EXE/SECR MSG button.
Press the NEXT button (if there are more than two Secretary stations assigned
to that BOSS station, all Secretary keysets will be displayed), in the case of multiple Secretary stations, scroll to the desired Secretary, press the soft key associated with that Secretary and press NEXT button.
Scroll to the desired message and press the associated soft key or ENTER.
The message is sent.
Executive Divert:
•
•
From the BOSS keyset when the keyset rings, press the EXEC DIVERT button.
The call is forwarded to the Secretary station.
Pressing the EXEC DIVERT button, when the keyset is in idle status, will divert
all calls after, to the Secretary station. Pressing the EXEC DIVERT button again,
will cancel the divert function.
GROUP LISTENING
When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset, you may want
other people to hear the distant party’s voice over the speaker:
•
•
•
Press the LISTEN button to turn on the speaker.The microphone is not in use,
so the distant party does not hear other parties present in your office.
Press LISTEN again to turn the speaker off and resume private conversation.
Repeat if necessary.
NOTE: Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office, it may be
advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up. This will eliminate a momentary squeal.
ACCOUNT CODES
When enabled, your system allows calls to be charged to different accounts. You
can enter account codes either by dialing the full code, by entering an account
code “bin number”, or by pressing your ACC key if one is assigned. Bin numbers are
a 3 digit short code that will automatically insert the appropriate account code.
Account codes may be a maximum of 12 digits (# may be used); if the account
code is to be less than 12 characters you may end the code by pressing or the
right soft key. The type of code used is determined by your telephone system
administrator. Codes can be entered before or during a call as follows:
To enter an account code before placing the call:
•
•
46
Press your ACC key or dial 47.
Dial the account code or bin number.
•
•
You will receive a confirmation tone and display.
When prompted dial a trunk or trunk group (i.e. 9) and the telephone number
to call.
While on an outside call press the ACC key or press TRANSFER followed by
47.
Dial the account number or bin number (if you are entering an account code
you will need to press your ACC key or right soft key to finalize the entry)
NOTE: If you make an error simply repeat the procedure with the correct code.
Only the most recent account code dialed will be recorded.
LOCKING YOUR KEYSET
You can lock your keyset to control misuse of your phone while you are away. You
can unlock it when you return.
•
•
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to MY PHONE option. Press ENTER.
Scroll to LOCKED option and press ENTER—OR—you may press 4 and immediately access option.
Enter the PASSWORD. Press ENTER. (Default Password is “1234”).
Use Direction button to scroll LEFT/RIGHT to choose desired mode.
1. UNLOCKED - No restrictions. User may complete internal and outside calls.
2. LOCKED OUTGOING - Restricted to incoming calls only. No outside calls
can be made. When 911 is programmed, 911 emergency dialing is allowed.
3. LOCKED ALL - No calls, incoming or outgoing allowed to or from the set.
•
•
Press ENTER.
Press CANCEL to return to Main Config Menu—OR—press END to return to
idle screen.
MANUAL SIGNALLING
Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another station, regardless of the status of your phone (on-hook, off-hook, handsfree, DND, or
ringing).
To send a signal to another station:
•
•
Press the Manual Signalling (MS) button.
You may press the MS button repeatedly to send multiple signals to the designated station.
NOTE: Your phone must have a Manual Signalling (MS) button with a station
number extender assigned to it.
47
Home Page
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
IN GROUP/OUT OF GROUP
Keysets may receive a voice announcement while on another call. The calling station must have an OHVA button. When you are in DND, you cannot receive OHVA
calls. The OHVA feature will work with intercom and transferred calls.
If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group, you can remove your keyset from
the group and then put it back in. While you are out of the group, you can receive
calls to your extension number but not calls to the group number. If you have an
IN/OUT button with the group number assigned.
When you receive an OHVA and secure OHVA is ON, you will hear the announcement in the handset receiver, if you are using the handset. If secure OHVA is OFF
then you will hear the announcement on the speaker, if you are talking on the
handset. If you are using the speakerphone the announcement will always be
heard through the speaker.
•
•
Press the IN/OUT button. The button indicator will be lit steady when your
keyset is in the group.
Press the IN/OUT button again to exit the group and the indicator will go
blank. Repeat as necessary.
To make an off-hook voice announcement:
If you do not have an IN/OUT button:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Dial the extension number or press the DSS button.
When you receive a busy signal, press the OHVA button.
After the attention tone, begin speaking.
Finish the call by replacing the handset.
Press the flashing CALL button on your keyset. This will place the original
party on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party.
To return to your first party, press the button corresponding to your original
call. This will disconnect the OHVA call.
Dial the IN/OUT access code number ________________, then the group
number, then 0 to exit the group or 1 to enter the group.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset or press SPEAKER button.
The IN/OUT button can include an extender to indicate the specific group that
this button will affect. This means that if you are in multiple groups, you can decide for which groups you will receive calls.
NOTES:
1. When you are voice announcing to a station close to you, use the handset to
avoid an echo effect.
2. You cannot off-hook voice announce to single line telephones.
OHVA BLOCK
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Block (BLOCK) button. Pressing
this button will prevent anyone from making an OHVA to you until you press the
button again and cancel the blocking.
OHVA REJECT
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject (REJECT) button. Pressing
this button while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing
party and return you to your original call.
48
49
Home Page
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET
SELECT RING TONE
Each ITP-5112L user can select from a variety of ring tones.
AME PASSWORD
From the LCD:
This feature allows customers using the AME feature to enable password protection. This will prevent unauthorized users from listening to your messages being
left.The passcode is the same as your station passcode.This feature only applies if
there is a Samsung Voicemail card installed in the system and your keyset has a
programmed AME button.
•
•
•
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSCODE or 100 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to SOUND/SCREEN option and press ENTER.
Scroll to RING TONE SELECT and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 1 and
immediately enter the option.
Select from one of the three categories:
1. Standard Ring Tones
2. Melody or
3. My Ring Tones
Press ENTER to select. Use LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons to scroll through the
available ring tones and press ENTER to SAVE.
Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option Page—OR—press END to return
to idle screen.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
•
CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to SETUP option and press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 6 and
immediately enter the option.
Scroll to AME password and press ENTER to change status.
Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option Page—OR—press END to return
to the idle screen.
AUTO CAMP-ON
This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on, if possible, when
a busy station is called.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Press 081 to turn CAMP-ON on or 080 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
•
•
50
Press MENU button.
Scroll to SETUP option and press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 6 and
immediately enter the option.
Scroll to AUTO CAMP-ON and press ENTER to change status.
Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option Page—OR—press END to return
to the idle screen.
From the factory, your station passcode is 1234.You can change your station passcode whenever you desire.
•
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 101.
Dial your old passcode.
Dial a new passcode (must be four characters). You can use 0–9.
Redial the new passcode to verify. If successful, you will hear two beeps. Four
beeps indicate an incorrect code. Reenter the code again.
Press TRANSFER to store the new passcode.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to MY PHONE option and press ENTER.
Scroll to CHANGE PASSWORD and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 3 and
immediately enter the option.
Enter CURRENT PASSWORD, press ENTER.
Enter NEW PASSWORD and press ENTER.
Enter NEW PASSWORD again, for confirmation and press ENTER.
Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option Page—OR—press END to return
to idle screen.
51
Home Page
SET ANSWER MODE (INTERCOM)
From the LCD:
You can receive internal calls in one of three modes (see Answering Intercom Calls
under Intercom Calls for descriptions).
•
•
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 103.
Dial 0 for Ringing, 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
•
•
From the LCD:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to SETUP option and press ENTER.
Scroll to ANSWERING MODE and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 1 and
immediately enter the option.
Select desired station ring type setting. (Ring, Auto Answer, or Voice
Announce).
Press ENTER to select and SAVE.
Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option Page—OR—press END to return
to idle screen.
NOTE: When your keyset is programmed for Auto Answer and you have Forward
No Answer (FNA) turned on, you must answer screened transfers by pressing the
SEND button before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward.
SET ANSWER MODE (CO)
Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom answer mode.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO.
Press the VOLUME UP or DOWN key to change status.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
AUTOMATIC HOLD
While on an outside call, pressing a line button, route button or a flashing CALL
button will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call.
This feature can be turned on or off at your keyset.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
NOTE: Intercom calls can be automatically put on hold by pressing TRANSFER.
HEADSET OPERATION
Keyset users can switch between headset mode and handset mode. When using
headset mode, press the SEND and END buttons to answer and release calls.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 021 to use the headset or 020 to use the handset.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to SETUP option and press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 6 and
immediately enter the option.
Scroll to HEADSET USE and press ENTER to change option status.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
Your keyset may be equipped with a Headset mode button. If it is so equipped
pressing this button while the button indicator is blank will cause the keyset to
enter headset mode and the button indicator to be lit solid to indicate this.
Pressing the button while the button indicator is lit solid will cause the keyset to
return to handset mode and the button indicator will go blank.
HOT KEYPAD
On your phone system your keyset’s keypad can be made “live” or “hot” so that it is
not necessary to lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin
dialing. Calls can be made and features activated by simply dialing the C.O. line
number, trunk group access code, intercom number or feature access code.
•
•
•
52
Press MENU button
Scroll to SETUP option and press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 6 and
immediately enter the option.
Scroll to AUTO HOLD, press ENTER to change option status.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to the Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
53
Home Page
From the LCD:
•
•
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to SETUP option, press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 6 and
immediately enter the option.
Scroll to HOT KEYPAD, press ENTER to change option status.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
KEY CONFIRMATION TONE
You can hear a short beep (confirmation tone) each time you press a button on the
dial pad. This tone can be turned on or off.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 040 to turn tones off or 041 to turn tones on.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
Additional ring tones can be selected from the SOUND/SCREEN, “Keytone
Select” option.
REJOINING A PAGE
•
•
•
From the LCD:
•
•
•
•
•
This option will allow CO calls that directly ring your phone to auto answer. When
a CO call arrives at your station and this option set for ON your phone will sound
two beeps, the same as when a screened transfer is completed, and you will be
connected to the CO call. In order for this option to work the station must also be
programmed for auto answer (see Set Answer Mode).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
From the LCD:
•
•
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to SETUP and press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 6 and
immediately enter the option.
Scroll to PAGE REJOIN, press ENTER to change option status.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to the Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
RING PREFERENCE
This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset or press
the SEND button.This method will always answer calls in the order they arrived at
your keyset.When you turn ring preference off, you must press the flashing button
to answer a call, allowing you to answer calls in the order you choose.
54
Press MENU button.
Scroll to SETUP option, press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 6 and immediately enter the option.
Scroll to RING PREF, press ENTER to change option status.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
AUTO ANSWER CO CALLS
This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page
after you return your keyset to idle. To enable this feature:
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 061 to turn ring preference on or 060 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
Press MENU button.
Scroll to SETUP option, press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 6 and immediately enter the option.
Scroll to AUTO ANS CO CALL, press ENTER to change option status.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
NOTE: Outside lines must ring your station directly for the Auto Answer CO to
work. Lines ringing a station group will not cause your phone to Auto Answer the
call.
DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME
This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as
it is dialed.
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
From the LCD:
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to SETUP option, press ENTER.
55
Home Page
•
•
•
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 6 and immediately enter the option.
Scroll to DISP SPDNAME, press ENTER to change option status.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
CALLER ID REVIEW ALL
This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls
sent to their stations.This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in, first out basis.
The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station but that
you did not answer. When reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the
person back. The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number.
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Press 121 to turn CID REVIEW ALL on or 120 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to SETUP option, press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 6 and immediately enter the option.
Scroll to CID REVIEW ALL, press ENTER to change option status.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
CONFIGURE MOBILE EXTENSIONS (MOBEX)
This feature allows you to configure options for any Mobile Extension (MOBEX)
ports that are assigned to you by your telephone system administrator. You can
turn a port on or off; set the telephone number for the port; or set the caller ID you
will be calling in from. The caller ID field has no effect unless you have been
authorized as an Executive MOBEX user. Check with your telephone system
administrator for further details on your specific system configuration.
To set the phone number a MOBEX port can reach you on:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 126.
Dial your station pass code.
Dial the number of the port you wish to configure (1-5) (you may also use the
Volume Up and Volume Down keys to select a port and press the right soft
key to confirm).
Dial 0 to select the telephone option.
Dial the number of a C.O. line to use when making calls to this MOBEX port.
Dial the phone number you can be reached at by users calling this MOBEX
port.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection and exit programming.
To set the caller ID of the location you will be calling in from:
•
•
•
SECURE OHVA
Press TRANSFER and then dial 126.
Dial your station pass code.
Dial the number of the port you wish to configure (1-5) (you may also use the
Volume Up and Volume Down keys to select a port and press the right soft
key to confirm).
Dial 1 to select the caller ID option.
Dial the phone number you will be calling in from.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection and exit programming.
This option allows you to receive OHVA (Over Head Voice Announce) calls via the
speaker while you are on the handset.
•
•
•
•
•
•
To turn a MOBEX port ON or OFF:
With your handset on hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Press 131 to turn SECURE OHVA ON or 130 to turn it OFF.
Press TRANSFER to savve your selection.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
•
•
•
56
Press the MENU button from the idle screen.
Select SETUP.
Select STATION ON/OFF.
Scroll to SECURE OHVA and press ENTER to change status.
Press CANCEL to return to option Main Screen.
Press the END to return to idle screen.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 126.
Dial your station pass code.
Dial the number of the port you wish to configure (1-5) (you may also use the
Volume Up and Volume Down keys to select a port and press the right soft
key to confirm).
Dial 2 to select the activation status option.
Dial 0 to turn the port on, dial 1 to turn the port off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection and exit programming.
57
Home Page
DISPLAY FEATURES
DIRECTORY INFORMATION
An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number.
Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before answering.
Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name. Incoming calls can be
easily identified and answered with different greetings.
Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display [CALL FOR xxx]
where xxx is the station group number. This allows you to answer calls directed to
you differently than calls directed to your group.
CALL LOG
The system can log both incoming and outgoing calls placed from or to your telephone. You must have a LOG button programmed on your keyset and assigned a
review list.
Each IN and OUT list can be up to 50 numbers maximum. They are assigned in
blocks of 10 each.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press the LOG key.
Press either the IN or OUT key.
View the first IN/OUT telephone number. At this point you may select one of
the three options related to this number or use the UP/DOWN keys to scroll
through your list of calls.
Press the CLEAR button to erase this number from the list.
Press the NND key repeatedly to view the Name, Number, or Date associated
with this call.
Press the DIAL key to call this number.
These options are the same for the incoming or outgoing call logs.
You can also review your Call Log by following the steps below:
•
•
•
58
DIAL BY NAME
Each station or speed dial number can have an associated directory name. A station or speed dial number can be selected by scrolling alphabetically through a
directory name list. This on-line “phone book” allows the user to look up and dial
any station or speed dial number in seconds.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press MENU button
Scroll to PHONEBOOK option, press ENTER.
Scroll to SEARCH and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 1 and immediately
enter the option.
Scroll to BY NAME, press ENTER.
Enter NAME to search for and press ENTER.
Name is displayed, press ENTER, number is displayed.
Press SEND button to automatically call by number.
Press MENU button for more options.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
You can also use the Dial by Name feature by following these steps:
•
•
•
•
•
Press the DIR button (DIRECTORY).
Select the directory you wish to use: PERS (personal speed dial numbers), SYS
(system speed dial numbers) or STN (station names).
Dial the button on the keypad that corresponds to the first letter of the name
you wish to search for.
Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the names.
Press the DIAL soft key to dial the number.
NOTE: A DIR button can have an extender to take you directly to one of the above
lists (PERS, SYS, or STN).
CALL PROGRESS DISPLAYS
During everyday call handling, your keyset display will provide information that is
helpful and in some cases invaluable. Displays like [CALL FROM 203], [TRANSFER
TO 202], [701: RINGING], [TRANSFER FM 203], [708 busy], [Camp on to 204], [Recall
from 204], [Call for 501], [message frm 204] and [FWD ALL to 204] keep you informed of what is happening and where you are. In some conditions you are
prompted to take an action and in other cases you receive directory information.
From the idle screen, you can press the MENU button.
Select PHONEBOOK.
Select Outgoing, Incoming or Missed Call Logs.
59
Home Page
DISPLAY NUMBER DIALED
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES
Display keysets begin showing digits as they are dialed. They will stay in the display until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the TIMER button is
pressed. If the call duration timer is not used, the number dialed will be displayed
until the call is released, transferred or put on hold.
Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it.
This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory.
CALL DURATION TIMER
The system can be set to automatically time outside calls. A few seconds after you
dial a telephone number, the timer appears in the display. It appears immediately
for incoming calls. The call timer continues for the duration of the call. Call duration times are displayed in minutes and seconds. If a call lasts longer than 60 minutes, the timer restarts.
•
•
•
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 106.
Dial the speed dial bin number 00–49.
Write your message using the procedure described in Alarm Reminder.
Press the TRANSFER key to store the speed dial name.
Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary.
See Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers Section.
STATION NAMES
You can press the TIMER button to manually begin timing a call. Press it again to
stop timing. If you press it while the automatic timer is on, the call duration time
is restarted.
See Application Program Menus—My Phone.
AUTO TIMER
You can view your key assignments and add extenders to some of your programmable keys for easy one touch operation of frequently used features.
Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer
incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 119.
Dial 41 to turn the auto timer on or 40 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
TIMER FUNCTION
Display keyset users may use this feature as a simple stopwatch.
•
•
•
•
When the keyset is idle, press the TIMER button to start timing.
Press the TIMER button again to stop timing.
Read the elapsed time in the display.
Lift the handset and replace it. The display will return to date and time.
VIEWING MESSAGE INDICATIONS
You can view all of your message indications before you return them:
•
•
•
•
60
With the handset on-hook, press the MESSAGE button with the flashing indicator.
The first station that left a message indication will be displayed.
Press the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the stations that left message indications. Use the soft keys to reply, clear or advance to the next message.
Press the END button to return your keyset to the idle condition.
MANAGING KEY ASSIGNMENTS
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 107.
Use the VOLUME buttons to scroll through all of your programmable buttons
OR press the programmable button to which you want to add the extender.
When you reach a key listed below, dial the corresponding extender.
Press TRANSFER to store and exit programming.
Please refer to the Enhanced Display Programming Section provided by your installation company when requested for a complete list of descriptions and extenders
for any keys you may have programmed on your keyset.
NOTE: Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender.
LCR WITH CLEAR
When you are making outside call using LCR and dial an incorrect digit, you can
press the CLEAR soft key to reenter the telephone number. You do not need to
redial 9 to reaccess LCR.
BACKSPACE WITH LCR
If you misdial while using LCR, you can delete digits shown in the display by pressing the BACKSPACE soft key as many times as necessary.
61
Home Page
TEXT MESSAGING
STATION 201: LINDA
received a call on line 702
STATION 205: JOHN
is talking on line 701
See also MESSAGE option in the Application Program Menus section.
Talking on line 702
This feature allows two digital keyset users to respond to each other with preprogrammed messages. After receiving an Off Hook Voice Announcement or Station
Camp-On, you may respond with a text message while continuing to talk and listen to your outside party. The other station can view this message and take the
appropriate action or respond back with another text message.
There are 1000 messages assignable to stations in blocks of 10, stored in system
memory that can be sent to another display keyset. Only the display keysets that
are allowed in system programming (MMC 611) will receive the TEXT MESSAGE
soft key in the display and use this feature.
Familiarization with the two digit message numbers you will use the most will
make this procedure quick and easy. However if you do not know them, use the
UP/DOWN button to scroll to the desired message, then press SEND.
The basics steps in text messaging are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press TEXT MESSAGE soft key to begin text messaging.
Dial the 2 digit number for the desired message.
Confirm this is the intended message then press SEND.
Wait for a reply from the other station (steps 1, 2 & 3)
When any station presses EXIT the displays at both stations return to their
previous call progress condition.
702:
CONF
01:15
MUTE
PAGE
62
05:25
Press TRANSFER
Transfer:
RETURN
Dial 205
205:busy
OHVA
CAMP ON
OHVA to 205
OHVA from 201
TMSG
REJECT
Wait for reply
GIVE THE CALL
TMSG:01
SEND
Dial 03 or press twice
At all times after step 1 you can talk and listen to your caller while repeating steps
2.
The example on the following page will better demonstrate how to use Text
Messaging. In this example station 201 is making an off hook voice announcement to station 205 who after hearing the announcement will respond with a text
message.
701:
ASK THEM TO HOLD
TMSG:03
SEND
ASK THEM TO HOLD
TMSG
EXIT
Wait for reply
702:
CONF
701:
CONF
PAGE
01:45
MUTE
PAGE
05:55
MUTE
63
Home Page
CALLER ID
SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID DISPLAY
Simultaneous display of Caller ID name and number on incoming CO calls on both
lines of display keysets is supported on all OfficeServ systems. On Transferred CO
calls, you can decide if you want to see the Caller ID name or Caller ID number in
the display. Regardless of which data is selected, you can press the NND button to
view the other pieces of Caller ID information. To select the type of Caller ID information you wish to view:
•
•
•
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 119.
To set the first line of a ringing call display dial 0.
To set the second line of a ringing call display dial 1.
Set the data to display from the following:
- To show nothing dial 0.
- To show Caller ID Number dial 1.
- To show Caller ID Name dial 2.
- To show the DID Number the call came in on dial 3.
- To show the Name of the DID the call came in on dial 4.
- To show the Name of the Group the call came in for dial 5.
- To show the DID Number and then Name of the DID dial 6.
- To show the Name of the DID and then the DID Number dial 7.
To set the top line of the display shown after answering a call dial 2.
Set the data to display from the following:
- To show Caller ID Number dial 0.
- To show Caller ID Name dial 1.
- To show the DID Number the call came in on dial 2.
- To show the Name of the DID the call came in on dial 3.
- To show Caller ID Number and then the DID Number dial 4.
- To show Caller ID Name and then the DID Number dial 5.
- To show the DID Number and then the name of the DID dial 6.
- To show the Name of the DID and then the DID Number dial 7.
- To show the C.O. line information dial 8.
To set the format if the C.O. line information when the above is set to show C.O.
line information dial 3.
- To show the C.O. line number and the dialed or Caller ID Number dial 0.
- To show only the dialed or Caller ID Number dial 1.
Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection.
VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL
In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped-on call at your keyset, you
can press the NEXT button to display the Caller ID information associated with
the call in queue at you keyset. Either the CID name or CID number will show in
the display depending on you Name/Number selection.
To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped-on to your keyset,
press the NEXT button.
SAVING THE CALLER ID NUMBER
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may press
the SAVE button to save the CID number. The system must be using LCR to dial
the saved number.
REDIALING A SAVED CALLER ID NUMBER
To redial a number that has been saved, press the SNR button or dial 17.
NOTES:
1. Your telephone system must be LCR correctly programmed to redial the
saved number.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin.
STORING A CALLER ID NUMBER
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may save
the CID number as a speed dial number in your personal speed dial list. To store a
Caller ID number in a personal speed dial bin:
•
•
•
Press the STORE button. The system displays the speed dial bin in which the
number was stored—OR—press the CID button and then press the SCROLL
button.
Press the STORE soft key.
The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored.
NOTE: Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the
saved number. If LCR is not being used on your system, you will not be allowed to
STORE CID numbers.
INQUIRE CALLER ID PARK/HOLD INFO
If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you,
you may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call.This may influence how you choose to handle the call.
64
65
Home Page
From an idle keyset:
•
•
•
Press the INQUIRE button—OR—press the CID button and then the
INQUIRE soft key.
Dial the trunk number.
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button—OR—you may
use NND to view more information about this call—OR—you can return to
the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.
If you are on a call:
•
•
•
Press the INQUIRE button. Your existing call will go on hold—OR—press the
CID button and then the INQUIRE soft key to place the first call on hold.
Dial the trunk number.
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button—OR—you may
use NND to view more information about this call—OR—you can return to
the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.
NOTES:
1. If you are on an intercom call or you have Automatic Hold turned off, you
must finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring.
2. If you inquire about an outgoing call, you will receive a [call no longer available] display.
REVIEWING PAST CALLER ID CALLS
This feature allows you to review CID information for calls sent to your keyset.This
list can contain 10–50 calls in a last-in, first-out basis.The list includes calls that you
answered and calls that rang your keyset but that you did not answer (missed
calls). When reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the person back.
The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number. To access the CID information stored in your REVIEW list:
•
•
•
Press the REVIEW button—OR—press the CID button and then press the
REVIEW soft key.
If you have entries in your review list, the most recent call will be shown first.
You can now CLEAR this entry—OR—use NND to view more information
about this call, OR
Press DIAL to call this person back—OR—press SCROLL and then press
STORE to save this number in a personal speed dial bin.
NOTES:
1. Each keyset defaults with ten review bins. Please see your system administrator to determine the number of bins assigned to your keyset.
2. Your system must have LCR correctly programmed to allow you to DIAL numbers from the review list or to STORE entries from the review list.
APPLICATION PROGRAM MENUS
Much of the call processing of the ITP 5112L can be accomplished by using the
various feature/function screens on the LCD. Below are instructions for additional
call processing and special applications that can be accomplished via the LCD
programming. These screens, features and functions can be accessed by pressing
the MENU button. Follow the below user information to utilize these features and
functions.
After pressing the MENU button,
use the direction button to highlight desired menu icon. For multiple screen options, the UP/DOWN
arrows at the top left and right
sides of the LCD may be used to
scroll on a per page basis. Press
ENTER to access that menu.To navigate within the menu, you may
scroll to the desired option/function, dial the associated option
function number or press the associated select button on either side of
the display.
Application Program Main Menu Screen
Press END button to exit programming.
PHONEBOOK
This menu allows you to maintain a contact list of addresses, phone numbers,
names, speed numbers and call logs. Refer to Speed Dialing and Programming
Section.
E-DIARY
1. WAKE UP CALL: Set Wake Up call for desired duration (Everyday, MondaySaturday, Monday-Friday). Using the direction button scroll UP/DOWN to the
desired option and LEFT/RIGHT to scroll to desired option setting.
•
•
•
•
Enter TIME via dial pad in 24-hour format.
Set RING TONE via direction button (LEFT/RIGHT) Each tone is heard.
Set REPEAT DURATION via direction button.
Press ENTER when finished.
2. ALARM: See Alarm Reminder Programming Section.
66
67
Home Page
3. DAILY PLANNER: See Alarm Reminder Programming Section.
b. RETRIEVE MESSAGE: Select this option to RETRIEVE a saved message
fro the Message Box. When selected a list of saved messages will be
shown. You can select one of these messages and open it or you can
press the MENU buttons for deleting, editing or sending.
4. MEMO PAD: Self memo feature. Allows you to set text message notes. Up to
5 memos may be stored.
•
•
Add NEW MEMO: Type in memo on keypad. Press MENU button to
change fonts or add characters. To save press ENTER.
When you select an existing MEMO, press MENU to edit it or delete it.
5. CALCULATOR
•
•
Enter FIRST NUMBER, press NAVIGATION KEY associated with the proper operation.
Enter SECOND NUMBER and press ENTER to display answer.
6. WORLD TIME: Displays times throughout the world.
•
•
Use direction button, LEFT/RIGHT to view desired time zone.
Press MENU to set your current time zone.
7. D-DAY PLUS: Scheduling feature that allows the user to view the time left
until an event, or time since event occurred. Use to monitor deadlines, schedules, etc.
8. UNIT CONVERT: Weights and Measures conversion application. Allows you
to convert units of weights and measures into other units.
•
•
•
•
•
Choose desired function (LENGTH, WEIGHT, AREA, VOLUME,
TEMPERATURE), press ENTER.
Scroll LEFT/RIGHT to select base unit.
Scroll DOWN and ENTER VALUE to be converted.
Scroll DOWN, select CONVERSION UNIT.
Press ENTER to display answer.
2. RECEIVE BOX: When this item is selected, all incoming text messages will be
shown. If you select a received message, then press MENU, you can REPLY,
RESEND or DELETE the message.
3. SENT BOX: This shows a list of sent messages. You can press MENU and
RESEND and DELETE messages.
4. MESSAGE BOX: This item allows you to save up to 10 messages on your
phone. You can send any of these messages at any time. Select “1) Edit
Message” to CREATE a new message. Select “2) Message List” to VIEW and
EDITall saved messages. Press MENU to ADD, EDIT ot DELETE messages.
SOUND/SCREEN
This option allows the user to set ring tones, volume, and screen settings. Use the
directional ARROW KEYS to browse and ENTER to save.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Ring Tone Select: Select from 3 categories of ring tones from your phone.
Keytone Select: Selects the tone heard when pressing any button on your
phone.
Volume: Sets various volume levels on your phone.
Select Background: Select the background for your idle screen.
Menu Style: Select from 2 menu formats.
Background Style: Select from 2 color schemes for your phone menus.
Select Brightness: Select screen brightness level.
Screen Saver: Determines what time/interval the screen saver or power save
wil kick in.
MESSAGE
CALL FORWARD
This menu allows the user to send and receive text messages to/from other ITP5112L phones and Softphones. The user can also store up to 10 messages on the
phone.
See Transferring Calls Section, Forwarding Calls.
1. SEND MESSAGE
1. ANSWERING MODE: See Customizing Your Keyset Section, Station Answering
Mode Programming.
a.
SEND MESSAGE: Select this option to enter and send a new text message. In the “Recv#” field enter the EXTENSION of the RECIPIENT phone.
In the MSG box enter your MESSAGE and press ENTER to send.
SETUP
2. ABSENT MESSAGE: See Paging and Messaging Section.
3. INTERNAL CALL: Select incoming information display from internal caller.
(Number or Name)
68
69
Home Page
4. AOM PAGE SETUP
7. OUT CODE SETUP
5. DIAL MODE: Select dial type options. (enblock-requires SEND button to complete the call, or overlap - direct out dial)
8. NETWORK INFO: Provides all IP network related information.
•
•
•
Scroll to or dial 9, press ENTER.
Scroll LEFT/RIGHT to select desired display option.
Press ENTER, display confirms save.
6. STATION ON/OFF: Turn the features below on/off in the keyset.
AUTO HOLD: Automatically hold the current caller before accessing another
trunk or CALL key.
HEADSET USE: Enable headset mode operation.
HOT KEYPAD: Allow dialing from an idle state.
KEY TONE: Generate a tone each time a key is pressed on the keyset.
PAGE REJOIN: Connect to an in-process page after disconnecting a caller.
RING PREF: Allow the user to answer calls by lifting the handset or pressing
the speaker button.
AUTO CAMP-ON: Automatically camp-on when calling to a busy station.
AME PASSWORD: Require a user to enter their AME password to listen to
messages as they are being recorded.
DIS SPDNAME: Display the Speed Dial bin name instead of the dialed number when calling to a Speed Dial number.
CID REVIEW ALL: Store all calls in the CID Review block.
SECURE OHVA: Receive Off-Hook Voice Announce (OHVA) audio through the
handset.
AUTO ANS CO: Automatically answer CO calls when the keyset is set for
AUTO ANSWER mode in MMC 103.
ENBLOCK 2LCD: Require the user to press SEND to dial the call when 2 LINE
ENBLOCK is set to ENABLE in MMC 861.
STN NO RING: Do not ring on incoming calls, only flash the CALL/DT/DSS key.
FEATURE TONE: Change dial tone to a higher pitch to indicate that a phone
status feature is active (DND, Forward All, Station Lock, etc).
RCV GPU INFO: Generate a short burst of ring tone when a call rings at
another member of the pickup group when PINGRING SERVICE is set to
ENABLE in MMC 861.
MISSED CALLS: Display a notification of missed calls including number of
missed calls and the CID of the most recent call missed.
USE STN RING: Allow the user to select a ringtone stored in the keyset
instead of a system-generated ringtone.
70
MY PHONE
Used to personalize your keyset.
1. MY NAME: Enters the user’s name on the phone.The name registered here is
displayed on the LCD screen od the opponent’s phone when making an internal call.
2. LANGUAGE: Sets a language between Korean and English
3. CHANGE PASSWORD: Changes the four-digit password that can lock the
phone from use.
4. LOCKED: Sets the lock status of the phone. This will restrict access to the
phone.
•
•
•
UNLOCKED: Full Access.
LOCKED OUT: Restricts outgoing calls.
LOCK ALL: Restricts complete access to phone.
5. PRIVATE LIFE PROTECTION: Retricts access to the MENU button using a
password.
6. PHONE VERSION: Displays the software version of the telephone.
7. RESET TO DEFAULT: Removes the data (phone number, messages) set by the
user and defaults the phone.
71
Home Page
Samsung Voicemail
This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a
Subscriber. A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the various features and services available in the Samsung Voicemail. Please review this
section carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Services, known as
Subscriber Services.
Voice Mail is one of the Subscriber Services available. Your voice mail box has the
capability of storing private messages, and offers a number of options for sending
or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new messages.
Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager.This allows you control over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your
callers in the event you are unable to speak to them directly. The ‘events’ are
referred to as “Call Conditions”. No-Answer, Busy, and Blocked are the most commonly used Call Conditions.
This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones
outside the office. The basic operation is the same, but the access method will be
different. See the Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more details.
Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all
Subscribers. See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature
availability.
ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX
[Also known as Subscriber Services Menu]
Inside Callers [Subscriber logging in from their Desk]
•
•
Dial the voicemail access number or press the key assigned to ring
voicemail [VMMSG].
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is
0000).
Outside Callers [Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the
office environment]
•
•
•
Dial the phone number that will be answered by the voicemail. The main
greeting will answer.
At the main greeting dial [#] plus your Subscriber (or mailbox) number
(Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number).
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is
0000).
Access your Subscriber Services (or Mailbox) from a Station
other than your Own (or checking a mailbox associated with a
different station)
•
•
•
Press the [VMMSG] key or dial the voicemail group number. You will be
prompted to enter a password.
Press []. This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu.
Press [#] plus the Subscriber number of your choice. You will be prompted to
enter you password.
At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions. You will
hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox.You will then
hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options:
72
1
Listen to New Messages - See Listening to your Message.
2
Record and Send Message - See Sending Messages.
3
Review Saved Messages - See Listening to your Message.
4
Access Manager - See Access Manager.
5
Personal Greetings - See Personal Greetings.
6
Mailbox Administration - See Mailbox Administration.
#
Personal Services - See Personal Services.
Return to Main Menu.
73
Home Page
Subscriber Services Menu
Group New
Messages
Group Saved
Messages
11
33
Listen to New Review Saved
Messages
Messages
Group Messages Menu
1
Group
Urgent Messages
2
Group
Callback Requests
3
Group
Reminders
4
5
Group
Private Messages
Group
Fax Only Messages
1
9
#
0
*
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Listen Menu
1
11
Mailbox
Administration
Personal
Services
Pause, Resume
Play Menu
Options
Exit
2
4
5
6
#
8
0
*
2
Save
Message
3
Discard
Message
4
Reply to Sender
5
Place
Call to Sender
Forward a
Copy of Message
7
Rewind
5 Seconds
8
Pause, Resume
Message Playback
9
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
##
Change*
Playback Speed
Skip to
Next Message
Scan Messages
To Create a
Reminder
1
Review
Recording
2
Stop, Append to
Recording
3
Discard Recording
and Rerecord
4
Set
Delivery Options
5
Specify
Future Delivery
6
SEND Message,
Then Copy
7
Rewind
5 Seconds
77
Change*
Playback Volume
8
Pause, Resume
Record/Playback
9
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
99
Change*
Playback Speed
0
Play
Menu Options
#
SEND Message,
Then Exit Record
00
Play Message
Information
0
Play
Menu Options
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
*
1
Follow Me
For a Directory
of Subscribers
"Enter the Recipient's Number"
Change*
Playback Volume
Play
Message Inventory
#
##
Deliver Copy
of Fax Message
6
99
#
Play Previous
Message
77
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
Personal
Greetings
Record Menu
Play
Message
Group
A Specific Sender
Play
Menu Options
Access
Manager
3
55
8
Record & Send
Messages
1
Assign and/or Edit
Primary Greeting
1
Change
Message Alert
1
Review
Workload
2
Assign and/or Edit
Busy Greeting
2
Change
Pager Notification
2
Edit Stored
Telephone Numbers
3
Block All Calls
3
Assign and/or Edit
Blocking Greeting
3
Review Deleted
Messages
3
Change
Weekly Schedule
1
Change
Password
4
Call forwarding
4
Assign and/or Edit
Night Greeting
4
Review Undelivered
Messages
5
Place a
Direct Call
2
Record
Name
5
Call Screening
5
Assign and/or Edit
Screened Greeting
5
Auto Play
New Messages
3
Enter Directory
Name
6
Find Me
6
Edit Only
Personal Greetings
6
Auto Play Message
Information
7
Personal
Administration
4
Extended
Prompting
7
Auto Set
Night Intercept
7
Edit Only
Mailbox Greeting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
8
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
9
Record and Send
Broadcast Message
0
Play
Menu Options
#
Play
Access Coverage
0
Play
Menu Options
0
Play
Menu Options
#
Record
a Reminder
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
0
Play
Menu Options
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
0
Play
Menu Options
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
*
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
NOTE: All options shown MAY NOT be authorized. If an option is not available
please speak to your system administrator.
*Change Playback Speed and Volume not available on the OfficeServ 7030,
OfficeServ 7100, OfficeServ 7200-S or OfficeServ IP-UMS.
74
75
Home Page
GETTING STARTED
0
PLAY MENU OPTIONS
Using your new Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services is as simple as following
a few simple spoken instructions. First time users should read this section as a
tutorial. You should start with the following steps:
EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT
#
PERSONAL SERVICES
•
Access your Subscriber Services Menu - You already know how to do this.
From the Subscriber Services Menu:
•
•
•
•
•
Record a Primary/No-Answer Personal Greeting. Dial [5][1].
Record a Mailbox Greeting. Dial [5][7].
Change your access code (Password). Dial [#][7][1].
Record your name. Dial [#][7][2].
Enter your directory name. Dial [#][7][3].
After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and
ready to use.
1 or 3
LISTENING TO OLD OR NEW MESSAGES
1
Play / replay the message you just heard.
11
Play the previous message.
2
Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
3
Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
4
Reply to the message.
This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender (if the
sender has a mailbox on this system).
LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES
If there are new messages in your mailbox your [VMMSG] key will be lit. Call the
Samsung Voicemail by pressing this key, and when prompted enter your password. You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu. Select [1] to listen to new
messages or [3] to listen to saved messages.
5
This will work for internal and external callers, but Caller ID service is needed to use this feature on an outside call.
55
Deliver a fax copy.
This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document(s). Faxmail documents can be delivered to any fax machine of your choice as long as out
calling is authorized. You can also have faxmail messages automatically
delivered to the fax machine of your choice.
Note: After you enter your password, if “Autoplay of New Messages”is enabled and
you have new messages the Samsung Voicemail will begin to play them automatically. A subscriber can control this feature. From the Subscriber Services Menu
[6] [5] toggles “Autoplay of New Messages” ON/OFF.
SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU
Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message.
6
Forward the message and saves a copy.
The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailbox number (nnn),
using the directory service (#) or you may also add comments and leave it
as a memo to yourself (##).
The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu.
1
LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES
11
GROUP NEW MESSAGES
2
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
3
LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES
7
Rewind the message 5 seconds.
33
GROUP OLD MESSAGES
77
4
ACCESS MANAGER
Change playback volume of the recording. [Not available on the OS 7030,
OS 7100, OS 7200-S or OS IP-UMS]
5
PERSONAL GREETINGS
6
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
8
PAUSE / RESUME
76
The Send and Copy Service (option 6) allows a user to send copies of a message to multiple recipients easily. A different introduction message may be
left for each recipient.
There are two levels of volume during playback. Dialing this code will toggle between the two levels.
8
Pause or resume during message playback.
9
Fast forward the message 5 seconds.
77
Home Page
99
Change playback speed of the recording. [Not available on OS 7030, OS
7100, OS 7200-S or OS IP-UMS]
b) Record your message at the tone. After recording the message, you will hear
the Send Menu with the following functions:
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
There are two levels of speed during playback. Dialing this code will toggle
between the two speeds.
0
Play options.
Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this
point.
00
Hear the time and date, and sender's information of the message you just
heard. Sender information is not available on outside calls.
#
Move to the next message. This does not Save or Discard the current message - it is retained as new.
##
Scan. Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message. This is
similar to the scan button on a radio. It will allow you to find a specific message quickly. To stop scanning press [1].
Cancel and return to previous menu.
11 or 33
Review
Continue Recording
Discard and Re-Record
Set Message Attributes (Delivery Options)
Schedule Future Delivery
Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else
Save and Send the Recording
Setting Message Attributes
If after recording a message you select [4] you can set up any combination of the
following delivery options:
1
2
3
4
5
Urgent Delivery
Return Receipt Requested
Request a Call Back
Private Delivery
Reply Required
Exit
GROUP NEW OR OLD MESSAGES
Scheduling Future Delivery
Messages can be grouped as either Reminders, press [3] or Messages from a specific sender, press [9].
If after recording a message you select [5] to schedule future delivery, you will be
able to set message attributes and set this message as:
Additionally you can press [#] and hear a summary of your mailbox contents:
#
1
2
3
4
5
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Number of messages
Number of reminders
Number of urgent messages
Number of messages needing a callback
Number of private messages
Number of fax messages
Immediate Delivery
Next Few Hours
End of Current Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
Beginning of Next Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
A Coming Day of the Week
Specific Day / Time
Exit
2
4
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
ACCESS MANAGER
This option is used to send a message to another subscriber.The steps are simple:
a)
78
Enter the recipient’s mailbox number, or if this is not known enter [#] to use
the system directory.
The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when,
where and how, and/or if the Samsung Voicemail contacts you when a caller dials
your extension number. All of the options are toggled on/off based on their current status when you access them.
79
Home Page
Note: ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed by the System
Administrator for each Subscriber. They are:
1
Follow Me
Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new
destination (Designated Location) will be active. This number may be an
internal or external number. This is useful if you are frequently traveling or
changing the number where you can be reached.
When Follow Me is activated, the transfer will be supervised and confirmed.
This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at
the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber’s mailbox.
3
Call Forwarding
Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alternate location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to
another Subscriber. The “Forwarded To” Subscriber will now be in control of
the caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber’s Mailbox. If
the “Forwarded To” Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow
what ever the “Forwarded To” Subscriber has set up for their call conditions.
The Caller will hear “Forwarding to”“{Subscriber Name}” before actually being
forwarded.
5
Call Screening
If this is turned on, the caller will be asked their name and the Samsung
Voicemail will play this name to you before the transfer, giving you an option
to accept or reject the call.
6
Find Me
Find Me, when enabled, will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list
of preprogrammed phone numbers. The stored phone numbers are entered
in 'Personal Services' [#][2] (if allowed by the Administrator). The stored telephone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers.
The Find Me feature only use the first five.
7
Night Intercept
This feature is dependent on your weekly availability schedule, which is
entered in 'Personal Services' [#][3] (if allowed by the Administrator). When
Night Intercept is active the Samsung Voicemail will first ring your extension
80
Note: This does NOT use the Day and Night schedules of the phone system. It
is solely controlled by the Subscriber’s Availability Schedule.
8
Pause / Resume
Exit from Access Manager
0
Play All Options
#
Play Access Coverage
This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings are set.
It will also tell you what greetings will play under each of the call conditions
you have setup.
Call Blocking
When this feature is active, callers will not be transferred to your extension,
they will hear your 'blocked' greeting (if recorded) and will go directly to your
mailbox if they do not select any or are not offered any other options.
4
then play your primary, No Answer greeting during the day (when you are
available) and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greeting during the night (when you are not available).
5
PERSONAL GREETINGS
The options available in this menu will be determined by your System
Administrator, and not all of them may be available to you. In the simplest systems, only a mailbox greeting will be available, additional greetings may be accessible in more complex systems.
Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension
and you do not answer.
You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings, and you may assign any one of them
to be active. There are several different 'Call Coverage' conditions to which you
may assign any of your 9 greetings. The Call Coverage Conditions are: No-Answer,
Busy, and Do Not Disturb (or Forwarded All). This will allow different greetings to
play depending on the type of call forward that you have set, or the condition of
your telephone.
The Call Coverage conditions that you can assign specific greetings to are selected by the following digits:
1
Primary/No Answer Greeting
Used when in your office, away from your desk or during the time period you
are scheduled available. If this is the only Personal Greeting you record, it will
play for all call coverage conditions.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Basic
Greeting' feature.
81
Home Page
Example:“Hi this is John Smith. I'm sorry I am not available to answer your call.
If someone else can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to
leave me a message, press 1.”
2
6
Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your
greeting. When you are done recording your greeting, you will be able to listen to the greeting you recorded, save the greeting you recorded and return
to the previous menu, record the greeting again, or exit without saving the
greeting.
Busy Greeting
Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension
or the telephone at your Designated Location.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Busy
Greeting' feature.
Note: If you record only the greeting assigned to the No-Answer Call
Coverage Condition, then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage
Conditions (No-Answer, Busy, Blocked, Night, and Rejected Caller). In this case,
the salutation part of the greeting should be very general.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm on another line right now. If someone else
can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave a message,
press 1.”
3
Call Blocking Greeting
7
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Blocking' feature.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the
'Mailbox Greeting Option' feature.
Example: “Hi, this is John Smith. Sorry I missed your call, but I'm going to be
out of the office for the next few hours. If someone else can help you, please
enter the extension number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
Example: “Hi, this is John Smith. Please leave me a message, I will call you as
soon as I can.”
Night Greeting
Note: This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has
played to the caller. A common usage for this Greeting is when another
Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to transfer the caller directly to your Mailbox.
Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE, usually after
business hours during the evening and at night.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the
'Scheduling' feature.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I've left the office for the evening. If you would
like to try someone else, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave
me a message, press 1.”
5
6
Call Screening Greeting
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
Used while Call Screening is enabled, and you REJECT a caller after listening
to the caller's record name.
The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notification, message alert options and other message control features.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Screening' feature.
1
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm sorry, but I am not available to speak with
you at this time. If someone else can help you, please enter the extension
number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
82
Edit Mailbox Greeting
Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded any
of the Call Coverage greetings. The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox
greeting directly, is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mailbox using the VT (VoiceMail Transfer) key.
Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone
is forwarded ALL or DND.
4
Edit Personal Greetings
You may also edit/record each one of the greetings (1-9) at any time.
Message Alert
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call any outside
or inside telephone number, after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
To hear your message at the remote location when the Samsung Voicemail
calls you, after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed
that there is a message and to enter your password. Simply enter your password and you will now be logged in.
83
Home Page
Setting Up Message Alert:
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
■
Press [1] for Message Alert.
■
There are 4 options available to you:
This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet
been picked up by the recipient.
5
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be notified.
If this option is enabled, after you enter your password correctly any new
messages will immediately begin to play.To enable (or if already enabled toggle and disable) this feature:
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [4] to set the destination phone number.
■
Press [5] to Set Auto Play of New Messages.
Press [1] to toggle message alert on and off.
2
Auto Play New Messages
Pager Notification
6
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call your beeper
service and notify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
Auto Play Message Information
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
■
Press [2] for pager notification.
If this option is enabled, the date, time and sender’s name will be played automatically before each message. If this is disabled, the information must be
requested manually by pressing ‘00’. To enable (or if already enabled toggle
and disable) this feature:
■
There are 4 options available to you:
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [1] to toggle pager notification on and off.
■
Press [6] to Set Auto Play of Message Information.
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be paged.
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
9
Press [4] to set the pager phone number.
3
Undelete
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to
undelete any messages that you have recently deleted (up to the programmed Daily Maintenance Time, which is set to 3 a.m. by Default the following morning).
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
■
Press [3] for Deleted Messages.
Deleted voice mail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a.m.
the following day. Select this option to recover ("undelete") previously deleted messages, during this period of time.
4
Undelivered Retrieval
MESSAGE BROADCAST
This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System
Administrator.
Broadcast to All Mailboxes
If you have been designated as a Subscriber Administrator, you may send a
message to ALL mailboxes in the system.
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
■
Press [9] for Broadcast Messages.
This option will only be available if your mailbox has been assigned
Subscriber Administration privileges.
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to recall
any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been picked up by the recipient.
84
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
■
Press [4] for Undelivered Messages.
85
Home Page
PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS
#
PERSONAL SERVICES
This menu allows you to make changes to basic setup settings, that are rarely
changed. Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings.
You probably will not need to change them after that.
The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your
name. Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator.
1
1
Workload Management
Allows you to access to all reminders, both Active and Pending. If authorized
you can group your reminders as Commitments, Follow-Ups or Tasks for better organization. The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending
(pending means scheduled for future delivery).
2
2
Stored Numbers
5
3
Place a Direct Call
The current password will be played and you will have the chance to
change it.
Recording your Name
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][2].
■
The current name will be played and you will have the chance to change
it.
Entering your Directory Name
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][3].
■
The current Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are
equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad. Follow the
instructions to enter a new name.You will be prompted to enter your last
name and then your first name.
This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly.
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name (described above)
and/or enter your Directory Name, you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
Personal Administration
This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings (see next
section).
■
Use this option to enter your Directory Name.Your Directory Name is used by
callers to find you if they do not know your extension number.
Allows you to place a direct call out of the Samsung Voicemail from anywhere. You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1-5 that corresponds to a stored number (See Personal Services, 2 - Stored Numbers). This
feature must be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited
or opened to internal, local, and long distance calls.
7
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][1].
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name and/or enter your
Directory Name (described below), you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
Schedule Availability
Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with Night Personal
Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature. Follow the spoken directions
to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to
your callers. All other times you will be considered unavailable.
■
Use this option to record your name. Your recorded name is played in several
different situations. It is important to record your name for proper operation
of the Samsung Voicemail system.
Allows you to enter up to 9 stored phone numbers. The first five of these are
used in the 'Find Me' feature, but any of them (1-9) can be easily dialed using
only one digit followed by the pound key, to be used by many other features
from within your subscriber space. (ie: “Follow Me, “Message Alert”, “Pager
Alert”, and “Direct Call”).
3
Setting your Password
4
Extended Prompting
Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the
subscriber interface (mailbox prompts). Change this setting only if you are
very familiar with the user operation of the SVMi E-Series.
86
87
Home Page
Note: Remember if you know what digits to press, you can enter them at any
time you do not have to wait to be prompted. This feature can be toggled
on/off at anytime. Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber
menu to press zero for more options. This enables you to still be able to find
out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled.
KEYSET USER FEATURES
The following options are available if you have a display keyset.They require setup
by the System Administrator.
Message Waiting Lights
When new messages are left in your mailbox, the voice mail message light on your
keyset will flash. Press this flashing key [VMMSG] and follow the prompts to
retrieve messages.This key may be pressed at any time to log into your Subscriber
Main Menu.
AME Password
If your keyset has AME PASSWORD (MMC 110) set to YES, you must enter your
station password to listen to messages being left. This will prevent unauthorized
people from listening to messages being left for you.
If the password option is turned on, while a message is being left, press the flashing AME indicator and enter your station password (not your SVMi E-Series password). You will then hear the message being left.
Call Record
If you have a call record button assigned to your phone, you may press it at any
time, to record the conversation in progress. If you have a display keyset, you will
also have the soft key options to pause and time the message.
Answer Machine Emulation
If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset, you
can use it to monitor calls going to your voice mail, and optionally answer them.
The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering
machine.
Your keyset must be set to forward on no answer to voice mail. After ringing your
station the caller will be connected to your voice mail and hear your personal
greeting before leaving a message. During this time you will be monitoring the
connection between the caller and your voice mail box. At this time you will only
be monitoring the call, you can not talk to the other party until you answer. You
may pick up the call at any time or ignore it.
To activate this feature press the AME button. The associated indicator will be lit
steady. Press again to turn off. If this key is pressed while a station is ringing (during forward no answer), the feature will be turned on for the current call only.
While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may:
■
Press [#] to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it.
■
Press [] to immediately disconnect your station. The caller continues to
leave a message normally.
■
Pick up the handset and monitor privately.
■
Press ANS / RLS to answer the call (using the handset or speaker).
88
89
Home Page
SHORTCUTS
Calling
Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press [#] to immediately
send the call to the called parties mailbox.
1. E-MESSAGE DELIVERY: Voice mail messages (.wav) and/or fax mail messages
(.tiff ) are "delivered" to your Inbox with the appropriate attached file.
2. E-MESSAGE NOTIFICATION: You will receive an e-mail, with NO attachments,
notifying you that you have a voice and/or fax mail message in your Voice
Mail Box.
Call Divert to Voicemail
•
While receiving an incoming (ringing) call, dial [] to immediately send the caller
to your personal voicemail box. This will override the call forward no answer setting.
•
Direct Messaging
[#] + DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without having to dial their extension number first, keyset users may simply dial [#] plus a
mailbox (extension) number and leave a message directly. If you dial a busy extension press [#] to connect directly with the mailbox.
•
Functionality
•
Self Memo (Reminder)
•
Pressing [##] will leave a message in your own mailbox. This is useful to remind
yourself of things to do now or in the future. Messages can be sent with future
delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due.
•
With either type of EMG, when Caller ID (CID) is provided, the callers telephone number will appear in the subject field of the email along with the
date and time stamp of when the voice message was originally recorded in
your Voice Mail Box.
If the caller is also a subscriber on the system and the E-Mail Gateway is set up
with a valid "Reply To" address, the Subscriber's name will also appear in the
"From" field. Otherwise, the "From" field will display the name of the Samsung
voice mail system (SVMi-8E, SVMi-16E, or SVMi-20E) sending the message.
Client will use their PC's Multi-Media kit (equipped with either speakers
and/or a headset) to listen to messages delivered to their e-mail Inbox.
INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS
IMPORTANT NOTE: If the PC/Laptop/PDA/Smart Phone/etc… is not
equipped with hardware and software capable of playing a '.WAV' file then
the E-Mail Gateway will not work for them until they add some method to
listen to '.WAV' files delivered to their Inbox.
Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays
to play, save, delete, reply, call, forward, rewind, pause, fast forward, change the volume, get message information, or help.
The same applies to Fax Mail messages, if the device the subscriber is using
does not support the viewing of '.TIFF' files, then the E-Mail Gateway for
Fax Mail will not work for them until they add some method to view .tiff
files delivered to their inbox.
Viewing Mailbox Contents
If you have new messages, in addition to the Terminal Status Indicator (TSI) you
will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the
SVMi E-Series.
•
No Synchronization of messages is performed between the Voice Mail Box
and the E-mail Inbox.
E-MAIL GATEWAY (EMG)
-
The E-Mail Gateway feature integrates your voice mail box with your email client.
No matter what email client software you are using or where you use it, you can
send voice mail messages and fax mail messages to your E-Mail inbox.
-
There are two parts to the E-Mail Gateway; E-Message Delivery and E-Message
Notification.
90
As a subscriber you can use either E-Message Delivery and/or E-Message
Notification.
As a subscriber you can have multiple e-mail addresses. (a maximum of
5 valid email addresses).
E-Message Notification can be set to one e-mail address while E-Message
Delivery is set to different e-mail address.
Messages listened to, forwarded, deleted, and/or saved within an e-mail
inbox will NOT effect the status of that same new message in the Voice
Mail or the MWI (Message Waiting Indicator) associated with that message on the phone.
Also messages listened to in the Voice Mail, from a phone, will not change
the Unread/Read status of the same message in an e-mail inbox.
91
Home Page
-
•
However, the Voice Mail Administrator can adjust parameters per subscriber or group of subscribers that decide how, when, or if to delete the
original voice message after it is sent to the E-Mail Server.
When full synchronization of messages between Voicemail Box and E-mail
Inbox is required, ask your Samsung representative about the OfficeServ IPUMS. This is an Internet Protocol based fully synchronized Unified Messaging
System.
Benefits
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Store and Archive Voice and Fax Mail Messages in visible folders.
Voice and Fax Mail Messages can now easily be dragged and dropped into
folders the same way e-mail messages are organized and saved.
Voice and Fax Mail Messages are now essentially the same as any other e-mail
message.
Backups and Message Archives can be made when they are made for all other
types of e-mail messages.
Add text notes and comments to use for reference later.
Some (if not all) e-mail clients will allow you to edit the body of the e-mail to
add comments.
Some will allow you to edit the subject field to help you find a particular message quickly in a large archive of messages.
Call Back Numbers and Date & Time Stamp are easily displayed in the Subject
field.
Easily forward Voice messages received, to others even if they are not a Voice
Mail Subscriber on your system.
No EMG System or Client Software to load on your Local PC or Network
Servers.
Therefore compatible with most:
-
E-Mail providers and E-Mail Clients
-
PCs, Laptops, PDA, and/or Smartphones
NOTE: If you are not sure you have this functionality on your system and
you would like to use it, please contact your on Site system administrator
to see if it is available.
92
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
00
_________________________
_________________________
01
_________________________
_________________________
02
_________________________
_________________________
03
_________________________
_________________________
04
_________________________
_________________________
05
_________________________
_________________________
06
_________________________
_________________________
07
_________________________
_________________________
08
_________________________
_________________________
09
_________________________
_________________________
10
_________________________
_________________________
11
_________________________
_________________________
12
_________________________
_________________________
13
_________________________
_________________________
14
_________________________
_________________________
15
_________________________
_________________________
16
_________________________
_________________________
17
_________________________
_________________________
18
_________________________
_________________________
19
_________________________
_________________________
20
_________________________
_________________________
21
_________________________
_________________________
22
_________________________
_________________________
23
_________________________
_________________________
24
_________________________
_________________________
93
Home Page
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
25
_________________________
_________________________
26
_________________________
_________________________
27
_________________________
_________________________
28
_________________________
_________________________
29
_________________________
_________________________
30
_________________________
_________________________
31
_________________________
_________________________
32
_________________________
_________________________
33
_________________________
_________________________
34
_________________________
_________________________
35
_________________________
_________________________
36
_________________________
_________________________
37
_________________________
_________________________
38
_________________________
_________________________
39
_________________________
_________________________
40
_________________________
_________________________
41
_________________________
_________________________
42
_________________________
_________________________
43
_________________________
_________________________
44
_________________________
_________________________
45
_________________________
_________________________
46
_________________________
_________________________
47
_________________________
_________________________
48
_________________________
_________________________
49
_________________________
_________________________
94
Home Page
ITP-5121D User Guide
For OfficeServ™ 100, OfficeServ™ 500,
OfficeServ™ 7000 Series
12/2009
Home Page
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS BOOK
....................................................................................1
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW
ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET
................................................2–7
........................................................8
ITP-5121D SETUP ..................................................................................9–15
OUTSIDE CALLS
Making an Outside Call ................................................................................................16
Answering an Outside Call..........................................................................................16
Universal Answer ..........................................................................................................16
Recall/Flash ......................................................................................................................17
Busy Line Queuing with Callback ............................................................................17
Canceling Callback ........................................................................................................17
INTERCOM CALLS
Calling Other Stations ..................................................................................................18
Answering Intercom Calls ..........................................................................................18
Answer Modes ................................................................................................................18
Busy Station Callback....................................................................................................19
Busy Station Camp-on..................................................................................................19
Calling Your System Operator....................................................................................20
CALL PROCESSING
Copyright 2006-2009 Samsung Telecommunications America.
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic,
electronic or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying or information retrieval systems—
without express written permission of the publisher of this material.
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing
may warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from
the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.
Holding Calls ............................................................................................................21–22
Transferring Calls ....................................................................................................22–23
Transfer with Camp-On ................................................................................................23
Transfer to Voicemail ....................................................................................................23
Call Waiting ......................................................................................................................23
Conference Calls ............................................................................................................24
Forwarding Calls......................................................................................................25–26
Call Pickup ........................................................................................................................27
My Group Pickup............................................................................................................27
Privacy Release................................................................................................................28
Home Page
DIALING FEATURES
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET
Speed Dialing ..................................................................................................................29
Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers ..............................................29–30
One Touch Speed Dialing............................................................................................30
Last Number Redial ......................................................................................................30
Manual Retry with Redial ............................................................................................31
Save Number with Redial............................................................................................31
Chain Dialing....................................................................................................................31
Automatic Redial/Retry................................................................................................31
Pulse to Tone Changeover ..........................................................................................32
Memo Redialing..............................................................................................................32
AME Password ................................................................................................................44
Auto Camp-On ................................................................................................................44
Select Ring Tone ............................................................................................................44
Change Your Passcode ................................................................................................44
Set Answer Mode (Intercom) ....................................................................................45
Set Answer Mode (CO) ................................................................................................45
Automatic Hold ..............................................................................................................45
Headset Operation ........................................................................................................45
Hot Keypad ......................................................................................................................46
Key Confirmation Tone ................................................................................................46
Rejoining a Page ............................................................................................................46
Ring Preference ..............................................................................................................46
Auto Answer CO Calls ..................................................................................................47
Display Speed Dial Name ............................................................................................47
Caller ID Review All........................................................................................................47
Secure OHVA ....................................................................................................................47
Enblock Dialing ..............................................................................................................48
Config